4017 Volume II

NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
(An Undertaking of Government of Nepal)

PROJECT MANAGEMENT DIRECTORATE
SASEC Power System Expansion Project

Distribution System Augmentation and Expansion Project
BIDDING DOCUMENT
FOR
Lot 3: Distribution Network Improvement
(Design, Supply and Install)
Single-Stage, Two-Envelope
Bidding Procedure
Issued on:
Invitation for Bids No.: ICB-PMD-DSAEP- 071/72 02, Lot 3
ICB No.: ICB-PMD-DSAEP- 071/72 02, Lot 3
Employer: Nepal Electricity Authority
Country: Nepal
( Scope of Works, Specifications, Standards and Drawing)

VOLUME II OF III
Distribution System Augmentation and Expansion Project

Project Management Directorate
Nepal Electricity Authority
Shankhamul, Kathmandu
Phone No: +977 1 4785217
Sec.VI :- Standard Specification
SECTION VI
STANDARDS SPECIFICATIONS
Table of contents ( Line & Distribution Transformer Construction Materials)
Sec.VI A :- Standard Specification

Sec.VI B :- Construction Unit
Sec.VI C :- Specification of Construction Materials
Sec.VI D :- Construction Standard
Sec.VI E :- Special Requirement for Execution of Works
Sec.VI F :- Scope of Work and Contract Execution Schedule
Sec.VI G :- Construction Standard Drawings and Mat
Table of contents ( 33/11 kV Sub-Station Construction Materials)
1Sec.VIa:-.Scope of Works and General Technical Specifications

2Sec.VI b:- Specification of Electrical Equipment, Technical Data Sheet
3Sec.VI c:- Technical Data Sheet
4Sec.VI d :-Specifications of Civil and Building Works
5Sec.VI e. :-Inspection, Testing and Commissioning
6Sec.VI f:-.Drawings
2 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3

Sec. VI A : STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

( Line & Distribution Transformer Construction Materials)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Clause Number Subject
1. General
2. Routes of Circuits
3. Survey and Staking
4. Technical Documentation
5. Material Storage
6. Excavation
7. Pole Setting
8. Safety
9. Tests
10. Demolition
11. Cleanup
12. Tree Cutting and Trimming
13. Interruptions to Existing Service

Sec. VI A
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
1. General
1.1 These Standard Specifications, together with the Construction Standards, shall govern the
performance of the Works and shall be the basis for inspection and acceptance of the Work
by the Project.
1.2 The Standard Specifications and the Construction Standards shall be considered as mutually
inclusive, and the conditions stated in each shall supplement the other as appropriate.
1.3 All Standard Specifications shall be followed at all times by the Contractor unless
specifically accepted in writing by the Project, or unless some aspects of the work covered
by these General Specifications are not required by the Scope of Work.
2. Route of Circuits
2.1 To the greatest extent practicable, all overhead circuits should be located along streets or
travelled ways ordained by the Village Development Committee or required authority as
public property, except as required for Service drops and circuits to individual consumers.
2.2 To the greatest extent practicable, all facilities should be located on public property, and in
no case shall private property be occupied unless specifically authorized by the Project. The
Project shall obtain any required permits for occupancy of public or private Right-of-Way.
3. Survey and Staking
3.1 All structures should be located at the outer limits of public property along streets or
travelled ways. Structures should also be located along streets at property lines of adjacent
private property. Structures and stays running parallel or perpendicular to the line route shall
not block portions of streets, travelled ways, drives, passages, or gates.
3.2 All structures shall be so located as to reduce, to the greatest extent practicable, obstacles to
pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Barriers shall be provided in accordance with instructions
by the employer. As far as practicable, transformer structures shall be located to reduce
visual and noise impact on adjacent residences or businesses.
3.3 Where underground facilities are indicated by surface conditions, or where such facilities
can be located, structures and stays shall be so located as to avoid conflict with such
facilities during construction.
3.4 All structure and stay lead locations shall be staked. At points of Intersection (P.I.) of
tangent line sections, steel rebar stakes shall be used to locate the P.I. A minimum of two
(2) side sightings will be made at each P.I to permit re-location of P.I. in the event of stake
removal. All structure locations in tangent line sections shall be staked.
3.5 All distances between structures, and other necessary measurements of length, shall be
measured to accuracy, of 0.1 metre and all angles shall be determined by transit to an
accuracy of 0.1 decimal degree. All elevations shall be measured to an accuracy of 0.1
metre by means acceptable to the Project.
3.6 All measuring and staking activity shall be accomplished by personnel with experience in
survey procedures, and standard survey equipment acceptable to the employer, shall be used
to perform the survey work. Field survey notes covering all survey work shall be produced
and maintained and shall be turned over to the Project at the time of completion of the
Works. The format of proposed survey notes shall be submitted to the Project for approval.
3.7 Survey work shall include centre line and structure location and staking; determination of
overhead and side clearings of other structures, wires, and obstacles; area surveys and
plotting; and centre-line profiles of terrain; as directed by the Project.
4. Technical Documentation
4.1 All technical documentation as specified herein, shall be prepared by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall employ skilled drafting personnel to produce all documentation specified.
All technical documentation prepared by the Contractor shall be subject to the approval of
the Project prior to acceptance by the Project of such documentation. All technical
documentation shall be prepared in the English language.
4.2 Documentation shall be prepared using the following mediums:
a) Mylar material, with a minimum thickness of 0.127 millimetres, shall be

used to produce the base Structure Data Sheet, As-Built Drawings and other
drawings specified by the Project.
b) Standard drafting vellum shall be used to produce small area plottings,

profiles of line-sections and centre-line plotting necessary for the development of
Structure Data Sheets and As-built Drawings.
4.3 Structure Data Sheets (SDS) shall be prepared in accordance with the F1 format contained
in Volume 2, Section X. Structure Data Sheets shall be prepared by the Contractor showing
his proposed construction details for erection of facilities in accordance with the
Construction Standards. The SDS shall be prepared after the centre-line survey and staking
is completed, for any line section designated by Project, and shall be submitted to Project
for approval prior to any construction of the facilities shown in SDS. Submission of SDS for
approval shall be in the form of A3 photocopy in clearly legible copy. Any unclear or
illegible form entry or reproduction shall be rejected. Project may require any revisions to
be made, at their sole discretion, prior to approval of the SDS for construction. An approved
and field checked SDS is required for all Construction Units invoiced by the Contractor.
Field checking of the SDS shall be performed jointly by the Contractor and Project
representative. The SDS and As Built Plan are intended as permanent records for Project.
Any construction performed prior to the Contractors receipt of approved SDS from Project
shall be completely at the Contractor's risk, and Project shall have the right to require any
correction due to the un-approved construction activities.
4.4 As-Built Drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor in the general format provided by the
Project. Drawing size shall be approximately 841 x 597 mm overall and the scale shall be
1:10,000, 1:2,000. The Project shall provide any available environmental background data
for inclusion on the various drawings and the Contractor shall record (in ink) all facilities
as-built.
4.5 The Contractor shall prepare other technical drawings, in the same medium and format as
the As-Built Drawings, for As-Built Drawings index sheets, pole maps, and One-Line
Diagrams as specified and required by the Project.
4.6 The Contractor shall and prepare and furnish Transformer Record documents, in the format
specified by the Project, for each transformer installed.
5. Material Storage
5.1 The Contractor shall procure all materials and equipment stated in the Bill of quantities. The
Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment, and vehicles to load and transport materials
and equipment to the Contractor storage facilities and worksites as required. All materials
and equipment turned in to the Project reclaimed after demolition of existing facilities if any
shall be transported to the Project warehouse and unloaded in the same manner.
5.2 Worksite
a)Extended storage of materials along the routes of lines will not be permitted. All
small items of material shall be provided to the work crews on a daily basis and no
small items of materials may be stored on the worksite overnight.
b) Transformers, ABC cable and conductor reels may be spotted at the worksites for
a short period prior to installation provided that crating and reel lagging are intact to
protect the items. Poles may be spotted at structure locations for short periods prior
to setting.
c)All poles, transformers, ABC cable and conductor placed at the worksites shall be
located so that the items are not subject to damage and do not impede pedestrian or
vehicular traffic.
d)Any damage caused by imprudent placement of equipment and materials by the

Contractor at the worksites shall be corrected by the Contractor, in a manner
acceptable to the Project, at the Contractor's cost.
5.3 Contractor Storage Facility
a) The Contractor shall be financially responsible for the secure and proper storage
of materials, which are to be provided by the Project prior to installation of the
materials and equipment, to prevent loss or damage to any materials.

b) Any items of material and equipment contained in degradable packaging shall be

stored under roof and protected from moisture. Other materials, except as specified
in subparagraph (c) below shall be stored and covered in a well-drained level area,
free from accumulation of surface water.
c) Transformers, disconnecting switches, reels of ABC Cable, reels of Cover

Conductor, reels of XLPE Cable may be stored outdoors in a well-drained, level area
free from accumulation of surface water. Reels of cable may be stacked on reel sides
not more than three (3) reels high. C cable reels shall be placed on Wood pallets,
wood lagging, or well-gravelled level surface.
d) Packaged items of material and equipment shall not be uncrated, or have

packaging removed, prior to installation. The Contractor shall exercise due caution
and care in the transportation, storage, and handling of all materials which are to be
provided by the Project. Equipment consisting of, or containing, porcelain insulation
should be transported and handled to avoid cracks or chipping. Lagging or other
protection shall not be removed from ABC cable reels until the cable is to be
installed.
e) The ends of installed cables shall be sealed immediately after being cut with a
non-absorbent covering fastened around the outer jacket.
6. Excavations
6.1 All excavations made for the installation, or demolition, of facilities shall be accomplished
in a timely manner according to the scheduled installation. Required excavations shall be
opened, material installed, and backfill placed, as specified, in a continuing operation to the
greatest extent practicable.
6.2 Any excavation left open during discontinuous construction which is accessible to the
public or along public thoroughfare, shall be covered or barricaded, and marked by suitable
visual means, to prevent a public hazard.
6.3 Excavations shall be properly located and sized for the intended use. Pole and stay plate/
anchor excavations shall be correctly sized to retain undisturbed soil to the greatest extent
consistent with the means of excavation. Pole holes shall be made by power-driven auger or
by manual methods; power-driven shovel equipment shall not be used. Pole holes shall be
excavated to the specified depth with no tolerance shallow and tolerance of ten (10)
centimetres deep. The bottom of pole holes shall be undisturbed soil, gravel or rock. Stay
plate holes shall be excavated by manual methods to specified depth with no disturbed soil
in the direction of the anchor rod.
6.4 All excavations shall be backfilled with excavated material, or as specified for the
installation. Backfill shall be free of foreign materials and shall be well tamped with excess
backfill graded over the excavated area to prevent depressions resulting from eventual
natural compaction. Large amounts of excess backfill shall be removed from the site by the
Contractor if so directed by employer. If so directed by Project, The Contractor shall
provide suitable backfill materials for excavations where existing removed materials is
insufficient, or inappropriate, to provide suitable grading of the excavated area.

7. Pole Setting
7.1 Poles shall be set in accordance with the appropriate Sections of the Construction Standards
and subparagraph 6 above.
7.2 Each pole shall be assigned a unique construction number at the time of structure staking for
preliminary identification and preparation of structure Data Sheets (SDS).
7.3 Subsequent to the preparation and approval of SDS, and prior to provisional acceptance of a
given line section, the Project shall provide the Contractor with unique permanent pole
numbers. The Contractor shall then apply the specified permanent pole numbers to each
pole with black oil-based paint in neat clear English letters and/or Arabic numerals.
Permanent pole numbers shall be applied in letters/numerals five (5) centimetres in height at
a point on the pole 1.6 meters above ground level. Numbers shall be applied on the side of
the pole facing the adjacent street or travelled way.
8. Safety
8.1 The Contractor shall take all measures required to safeguard the public, public and private
property from any hazard to life, limb, or property which may arise during the performance
of the construction of the works. Such measures shall include, but not be limited to:
barricades, signs, newspaper announcements, traffic control by police, or other advisory and
control methods deemed appropriate.
8.2 The Contractor shall provide his work force with all tools and equipment in sufficient
numbers and quality to perform all aspects of the works in a safe manner. The Contractor
shall provide protective headgear for all members of his workforce, and shall provide
protective clothing as required for specific tasks. The Contractor shall instruct his work
force in proper and safe construction techniques and shall continuously monitor compliance
with safety instructions throughout the period of the Contract.
8.3 The Contractor shall provide, and require use of, protective grounding equipment when:
a) Work is being performed on lines adjacent, either in extension of, or parallel to,
energized circuits.
b) Work is being performed on isolated circuits after conductors have been installed.
8.4 The Contractor shall maintain all tools and equipment in good working order. All
mechanized equipment shall have adequate safety mechanisms and guards in place and be
fully operational. Operators of such equipment shall be skilled and fully trained in the
operation of such equipment.
8.5 The Contractor shall provide and maintain emergency medical supplies to cover with
accidents and snakebites for his work force on a readily available basis. The Contractor
shall also instruct all supervisory personnel in the action to be taken in the event of serious
injury, and the sources and locations of professional medical assistance which shall be
employed in such cases.

8.6 The Contractor shall apply all accidental insurance policies to his work force for an accident
occurring during the working period of the construction.
9. Tests
9.1 The Contractor shall furnish the electrical test equipment and personnel to perform electrical
tests of equipment and circuits, as specified by, and under the supervision of the Project.
9.2 The Contractor shall megger all circuits installed with a motor-driven megger or equivalent
instrument. All circuits installed with a motor-driven megger to demonstrate the acceptable
insulation characteristics of the line prior to energization and Provisional Acceptance.
Overhead circuits shall be tested at 2500/1000 volts AC and 33 kv overhead circuits shall
be tested at 5000 volts AC.
9.3 The Contractor shall megger all transformers with a motor-driven megger prior to
installation
9.4 All tests specified shall be conducted during suitable atmospheric conditions under the
supervision and witness of the Project. All test results shall be documented and signed by
both parties.
10. Demolition
10.1 The Contractor shall perform the removal of all existing facilities, if any, in accordance with
the specific directions of the Employer. All materials removed shall remain the property of
Project and the Contractor shall deliver all salvaged materials to the Project warehouse, or
as specifically directed by the Employer.
10.2 All poles shall be removed by pulling the complete pole from the ground; poles shall not be
cut off at the ground line. Holes shall be backfilled and compacted completely with
sufficient added backfill piled above grade to prevent depressions being created by natural
compaction. Backfill material shall be provided by the Contractor.
10.3 All conductor materials removed shall be returned to the Project. Methods of conductor
removal shall be specified by the Project. If conductor is removed in the longest length
practicable for future re-use, the said conductor shall be wound on empty conductor reels,
with the reels marked with the conductor size and approximate length. Different conductor
sizes shall not be mixed on any reel. If conductor is removed from structures and specified
as scrap, conductors may be cut down in lengths and made up in rolls. Conductor sizes for
scrapping may be mixed; different conductor metals shall be separated.
10.4 Care shall be taken in removing, handling, and transporting cutouts, and surge arresters to
minimize porcelain damage.
10.5 Transformers removed from service shall be delivered to the Project warehouse or as
specifically directed by the Employer. Care shall be taken in removing, lifting, and
transporting transformers.
10.6 Other structures shall be removed, such as concrete transformer pedestals in the most
appropriate manner, as specified by the Project. Existing stay rods may be cut 20
centimetres below finished ground level.
11. Cleanup
11.1 The Contractor shall ensure that all worksites shall be free of all manner of debris resulting
from the construction activity.
11.2 All crating, cable and conductor reels, packaging materials, conductor scraps, and other
miscellaneous items are removed from the workplace. All holes resulting from removal of
facilities shall be filled. If trees or bush have been cut or trimmed, all cuttings shall be
removed. The worksites shall be left in clean natural conditions.
11.3 Site cleanup shall be an integral part of the Provisional Acceptance process, and no line
section shall be provisionally accepted unless all cleanup work has been accomplished.
12. Tree Cutting and Trimming
12.1 Any tree cutting or tree trimming authorized and directed shall be accomplished by the
Contractor under the direct supervision of Project.
12.2 All cutting shall be removed by the Contractor with disposition of cutting as specified by
Project.
13. Interruptions to Existing Service
13.1 The Contractor shall arrange for interruptions of service to existing lines with Project. Every
effort shall be made to limit such interruptions to the minimum.
13.2 If it is possible to maintain service to a section of line by constructing temporary facilities

approved by Project, the Contractor shall detail man hours and classification of personnel
required to construct such facilities and submit to Project for approval prior to any work
being performed. Payment for approved work shall be based on the rates covered in
Construction Unit LR of Section VIII, Volume 2

SECTION VI -B: CONSTRUCTION UNI
( Line & Distribution Transformer Construction Materials)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SL.No. Subject
1. Structure Data Sheet (SDS)

2. General Information
3. Definitions of Construction Units
11-1 33kV/11kV Supports, Insulators and Hardware
11-2 33kV /11 kV Conductor & Accessories
11-3 Switches and Cut-outs
0.4-1 0.4 kV Supports, Fittings
0.4-2 0.4 kV ABC Cable & Hardware
11/0.4 Transformer Installation
LR Labour Rates

STRUCTURE DATA SHEET (SDS)
Structure Data Sheets (SDS) shall be prepared to provide details of specific construction
information necessary for erection of pole structures with hardware and accessories and conductor
installation. The SDS shall be used in conjunction with the area plan drawing to document the
works to be performed.
Abbreviations used in the preparation of SDS shall be defined as follows,
Sl. No. Nomenclatures Meaning

a. Pole Construction No. Number assigned by the Contractor to identify pole on
Plan drawing.
b. Span Length of conductor span between poles
c. BK Angle of line deflection in degrees
d. Pole Pole quantity
e. Frame The construction Standard Drawing No. for 33kV/11 kV
system for which the pole is to be framed
f. Stay The Construction Standard Drawing No. of stay to be
installed in different voltage system,
g. Transformer The Construction Standard Drawing No. for which the
transformer installation is to be framed
h. Conductor The number and size of conductors in sq. mm in
33kV/11 kV system,
i. Conductor (km.) Running km. length of conductor.
Note :
a. Information for a single pole location need not be confined to a single row.
b. All works, whether new or on existing systems, shall be documented on the SDS.
c. Each SDS shall include the applicable "As Built Plan Drawing number(s). Similarly each "As
Built" Plan Drawing shall include the applicable SDS number(s).

DEFINITION
GENERAL INFORMATION:
This describes requirements of those items which have not been included in specific Construction
Unit and which are of general nature.
1. All Construction Units shall include the cost of preparation, revision and reproduction of
supporting Structure Data Sheets (SDS) .
2. All Construction Units shall include the cost of cutting and painting bolt ends extending more
than 30 mm beyond nut if necessary. Paint shall be Local Material supplied by the Contractor
3. Construction Units 11-1 shall include the cost of preparing As Built drawing.
4. All construction Units shall include necessary cost for trimming and cutting of tree to clear
route for new or existing works. Cutting of trees, at the earth line, shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor but NEA shall assist to obtain necessary permit for the same. But it does not
mean the cutting trees of dense forest

DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNIT 11-1
11 kV SUPPORTS, INSULATORS AND HARDWARE

REFERENCE STANDARD/SPECIFICATIONS
1. Construction Standards : Section VI-D Clause 2
2. Purpose: Construction unit is for the installation of an 11 metre Pre-stressed Concrete pole for
33kV/11 kV overhead line structure with cross-arms, insulators and hardware fitting complete.
Unit does not include installation of stay.
3. Activities : Procurement and transportation of materials to the site, excavate pole hole, set pole,
if necessary, back fill and tamp poles, compact the back filling adequately, re-align, if
necessary, install framing including insulators and hardware, provide and install local materials,
if necessary, as designated by the material list.
4 Type of Frames:
Construction Standard
Frame
S.N. Description PSC Pole Steel Tubular Steel Telescopic Tubular
Type
Structure Pole Structure Pole Structure
1. 11-1.1 Single Arm CS11-PSCP-04 CS11-STP-04 CS11-STTP-04
Structure (SA)
2. 11-1.2 Double Arm CS11-PSCP-05 CS11-STP-05 CS11- STTP -05
Structure (DA)
3. 11-1.3 Tap Off CS11-PSCP-06 CS11-STP-06 CS11- STTP -06
Structure (TA)
4. 11-1.4 Dead End CS11-PSCP-07 CS11-STP-07 CS11- STTP -07
Structure (DE)
5. 11-1.5 Double Dead CS11-PSCP-08 CS11-STP-08 CS11- STTP -08
End Structure
(DDE)
6. 11-1.6 Offset CS11-PSCP-09 CS11-STP-09 CS11-S STTP -09
Structure (OS)
7. 11-1.7 H-Structure CS11-PSCP-10 CS11-STP-10 CS11- STTP -10
(HS)
8. 11-1.8 Transformer CS11-TRN-01 CS11-TRN-03 CS11-TRN-03
Structure (TR) CS11-TRN-02 CS11-TRN-04 CS11-TRN-04

DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNIT 11-2
11 kV CONDUCTOR & ACCESSORIES
A.RFERENCE STANDARD/SPECIFICATIONS :
1. Construction Standards : Section VI-D Clause 3, 4 & 5
2. Purpose :
Construction unit is for the installation and stringing of XLPE Covered Conductor for 11 kV
overhead lines. Unit is per single conductor running km.
3. Activities :
Transportation of materials to the site, set up wire stringing reels, pulling lines, stringing blocks
on poles/cross-arms, install and remove temporary guard structures, if necessary, install and
remove temporary structures to keep conductor from dragging on earth, if necessary, pull
conductors, sag and dead end, remove conductor from stringing blocks, tie to insulators, make
necessary compression joints, connect jumpers and complete installation.
4. Size of Conductor
120 sq. mm XLPE Covered Conductor
B.RFERENCE STANDARD/SPECIFICATIONS :
1. Construction Standards : Section VI-D Clause 3, 4 & 5
2. Purpose :
Construction unit is for the installation and stringing of bare ACSR conductor for 11 kV
overhead lines. Unit is per single conductor running km.
3. Activities :
Transportation of materials to the site, set up wire stringing reels, pulling lines, stringing blocks
on poles/cross-arms, install and remove temporary guard structures, if necessary, install and
remove temporary structures to keep conductor from dragging on earth, if necessary, pull
conductors, sag and dead end, remove conductor from stringing blocks, tie to insulators, make
necessary compression joints, connect jumpers and complete installation.
4. Size of A.C.S.R Conductor
11-2.1 100 sq. mm ACSR "Dog" conductor

DEFINITION OF 11 kV LOAD BREAK SWITCH
REFERENCE STANDARD/SPECIFICATIONS :
1. Construction Standard:
2. Purpose :
Construction unit is for the installation of Air Load Break Switches according to the
manufacturer's instructions. Unit does not include installation of pole.
3. Activities : Transport material to site from respective warehouse, make dead end, install Load
Break Switches according to the manufacturer's instructions, install earth (earth) conductor with
1-rod, adjust Load Break Switches as per manufacturers instructions, connect jumpers and
complete installation.

DEFINITION OF 11 kV XLPE CABLE LAYING
REFERENCE STANDARD/SPECIFICATIONS
2. Purpose :
Construction unit is for the installation of 33 kV& 11 kV armoured XLPE cable for 33 kV& 11
kV underground lines. Unit is per three core cable running km.
3. Activities :
Transport materials to site from projects respective warehouse, excavate cable trench ( 90
140 cm height), lay cable inside the HDPE pipe along the trench and PPR pipe for rising cable
at pole, provide and install local materials such as sand if necessary, back fill and tamp trench
till adequate compaction is reached as per construction standard and as directed by the project
engineer.

DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNIT 0.4-2
0.4 kV ABC CABLE & HARDWARE
REFERENCE STANDARD/SPECIFICATIONS:
1. Construction Standards: Section VI-D Clause 9
2. Purpose:
Construction unit is for the installation of LV ABC Cable for 400 volt overhead lines with ABC
cable hardware fitting complete. Unit is per five core cable running km.
3. Activities:
Transport materials to site from projects respective warehouse, set up cable stringing reels,
pulling lines, stringing blocks, install and remove temporary guard structures, if necessary,
install and remove temporary structures to keep cable from dragging on earth, if necessary. Pull
cable, sag and make dead end, remove cable from stringing blocks, tie to hardware, make
necessary joints, mount connectors, make jumpers etc.
Work includes disconnection and reconnection of consumer service cables, including new
replacement if necessary.
Sl.No. CU No. Cable Size in sq. mm Purpose No. of Cable

3 Phases, 1
1. 0.4-2.1/3.1 3*95+1*70 sq mm 4
Neutral and 1
3 Phases, 1
2 0.4-2.2/3.2 4*70 sq mm 4
Neutral and 1

DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNIT 0.4-1
0.4 kV SUPPORTS
REFERENCE STANDARD/SPECIFICATIONS:
2. Purpose :
Construction unit is for the installation of 9 metre Steel Tubular Pole and Pre Stressed Concrete
pole for overhead line structure. Unit does not include installation of stays.
3. Activities :
Procurement and Transportation of materials to site from respective warehouse, excavate hole,
set pole, plant pole, provide and install local materials if necessary, back fill and tamp pole till
adequate compaction is reached, realign the pole if necessary. Unit includes drilling of required
holes of suitable size on pole if necessary.
Construction
Frame Standards
Sl. No Description Type
Type
9m Pole
1. 0.4-1.1 Suspension type A1 Annex L
2. 0.4-1.2 Suspension with angle A2 Annex L
3. 0.4-1.2 Suspension type with an B Annex L
anchor for dead
4. 0.4-1.3 Four anchor dead end C Annex L
5. 0.4-1.4 One suspension with two D Annex L
anchor dead end
6. 0.4-1.5 Single anchor dead end E Annex L

DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNIT 11/0.4
TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION
REFERENCE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS :
1. Construction Standards Section VI-D Clause 7
2. Purpose :
Construction unit is for the supply, delivery, installation of *distribution transformer, platform
cross-arms, insulators, dropout fuse cut-outs, lightning arresters, low voltage *panel board, 11
kV jumpers, 400 V ABC Cable Hardware and earthing set complete including excavation and
backfilling for earthing including installation of H-poles for support, LV panel and stays.
3. Activities :
Test the transformer with the right size of megger with respect to the primary and secondary
voltage system, transport the transformer, lightning arresters, drop-out sets and distribution
panel board, mount transformer on elevated platform, install LV cable between transformer LV
terminals and protection panels, install all LV cables between protection panels and out going
LV overhead lines, including cable and jumper connections, connect LV neutral earth terminal
with earth lead. The Contractor shall procure all items specified in construction unit except
Distribution Transformers.

DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION LABOUR RATES
REFERENCE STANDARD/SPECIFICTION
Purpose :
Construction unit is intended to use for such work which has not been defined by a Construction
Unit. Contractor shall submit to the project, along with the bid, a written description of work which
may have to be performed under certain situation and which were not foreseen during the design
and study. This shall include location, number and classification of personnel to perform the work
and estimated number of hours per man. This unit is to be charged only upon the approval of the
project. Unit includes necessary transport of equipment to perform the assigned work.
Sl. No. Construction Unit Designation Rate per Day

1. LR-1.1 Engineer
2. LR-1.2 Supervisor or Foreman
3. LR-1.3 Lineman
4. LR-1.4 Helper
5. LR-1.5 Coolie

Sec. VI C
SPECIFICATION OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

GENERAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
1. Ambient temperature -5o C to 55o C
2. Altitude up to 2000 m above MSL
3. Humidity 99% (max.)
4. Mains voltage 400/230 V
5. System frequency 50 Hz
Note:Thevariationoffrequencyandvoltagefordesignandoperationisasperactualsystem
operationi.e.5%.

I. LINE MATERIAL
A.POLE
A1.TELESCOPIC TUBULAR STEEL POLE
1. Scope
1.1 This Specification covers the design, fabrication, testing and supply of telescopic tubular
steel poles to be used to support overhead electric lines and equipment.
2. Description
2.1 The poles shall be telescopic, uniformly tapered circular in cross-section. The poles shall be
fabricated in sections as specified in Table 2 out of welded tubes of suitable lengths. The
diameters of the top and the bottom end of the completely assembled pole shall be as
specified therein.
2.2 The sections of the steel poles shall be designed such that the butt end of the top section fits
on the top end of the second section, the butt end of the second section fits on the top end of
the third section and so on. The various sections shall be fitted together by pressed friction
joints. The completely assembled telescopic pole shall have the design loads as specified in
Table 1. The separate pole cap shall be provided with top section of the pole. The bottom
section of the pole shall be provided with a base plate.
3. Material
3.1 The telescopic pole sections and fittings shall be manufactured from standard steel as per BS
4360 Grades 43 C,D,E or 50 C, D, E or equivalent national/ international standards.
3.2 The steel tubes shall confirm to the requirements of BS 6323 Parts 1 to 8 Steel Tubes.
4. Manufacture
4.1 The pole shall be erected by friction joint without involvement of through bolt, site welding
or any type of additional device of joint at the time of erection.
4.2 It shall be the responsibility of the Bidder to determine the thickness of the tubing adequate
to sustain the load and test requirements. The Bidder shall determine the thickness of the
tubing to develop the required pole strength in accordance with the Bidder's method of
fabrication. However, the thickness of the tubing shall not be less than 2.5 mm, and the
following tolerances shall be maintained:
a) Tolerance on diameter: +/- 1% from Bidder's data sheet.
b) Tolerance on weight: +/- 10% on each pole.

+/- 7.5% on a bulk load of up to 20 tons.
c) Tolerance on thickness: +/- 10% on each sheet.
d) Tolerance on telescopic poles: After assembly the telescopic poles shall not exceed
+/-75 mm of their stated length in the Technical data
sheet.
e) The out-of-straightness of the assembled pole shall not exceed 1/600 of the height.
4.3 All welding of the poles shall be carried out at the manufacturers' plant.
4.4 Welds parallel to the longitudinal axis of the poles shall be fillet welds. No circumferential
joints/welds of the tubes are permitted. All welds shall be capable of withstanding, without
failure or cracking, the stresses in a pole when subjected to its ultimate design loads.
4.5 All seam welds on joint mating surfaces shall be ground flush. All high spots in the
galvanizing on the mating surface shall be ground and if the galvanizing is damaged in the
process, it shall be repaired.
4.6 The pole shall have hole configurations and sizes as shown in the drawings attached to the
Specifications: DP-02: Telescopic Tubular Steel Pole. The hole sizes and the locations of the
hole must however be confirmed with the Project prior to manufacture.
5. Corrosion Protection
All sections of the pole shall be hot dip galvanized both internally and externally in
accordance with IS: 2629-1985 or equivalent national or international standard. After
galvanizing, the external surface of poles below ground level and 500mm above ground level
shall be painted as follows:
a) Thorough clean brush and solvent degrease, then one coat of phosphoric acid based
etch primer both inside and outside followed by,
b) One coat airless spray of epoxy based bituminous black paint of 1x100 microns dry
film thickness inside of the pole base
a. Two successive coat airless spray of epoxy based bituminous black paint of 2x100
microns dry film thickness outside of the pole base.

6. Marking of Pole
The pole shall have an identification marked with indelible paint on the pole at a position
approximately 3.5 m. from the butt end, which is clearly and indelibly marked with:
a) Date of manufacture and identification mark of manufacture.
b) Length of pole in meters and its design working loads as defined in this
specification.
The pole shall be marked with a permanent horizontal line at a point 1/6th of the pole height
from the butt end of the assembled pole. The mating depth of the relevant sections of pole
shall also be indelibly marked.
7. Earthing Lug, Base Plate and Pole Cap
Each pole shall be provided with earthing lug at 300 mm below the ground level. Separate
pole cap shall be provided for each pole. The plate for pole cap shall be of 3 mm. minimum
thickness. The dimension of the base plate for 8m, 9m, 10m and 11m poles shall be as per
drawing DWG.1, DWG.3, DWG. 5 and DWG.8 respectively.
8. Design
8.1 The standard overall length of pole manufactured under this contract shall be as per table 1
below. The plantation depth of the pole shall be 1/6th of the overall length of that pole. The
Bidder shall submit a detailed description of the methods of pole manufacture and
detailed calculations for all aspects of design of the pole for NEA approval prior to
manufacture.
8.2 The design working loads in transverse direction shall be as follow:
Table 1: Design Working Load

_________________________________________________________
Pole Length Design Working Load

_______________________________________
Transverse Vertical
_________________________________________________________
8m 150 kgf 150 kgf
9m 200 kgf 200 kgf
10m 350 kgf 350 kgf
11m 350 kgf 350 kgf
The design working load shall be the yield strength reduced by factor of safety of 2.0.
9. Tests

9.1 The following test(s) shall be performed for the pole furnished. All testing shall be fully
documented and certified test reports shall be provided to the Project.
- Permanent set test

9.2 Poles selected for testing shall be a representative sample from each lot.
Lot Size No. of poles
Up to 500 5
501 to 1000 8
1001 to 2000 13
2001 to 3000 18
3001 and above 20
9.3 Testing Arrangement: The pole shall be rigidly supported in vertical position for a distance
from the butt end equal to the specified depth of planting of that pole. It shall then be loaded
horizontally with a load applied at the distance from the pole top as specified in Table 2, and the
deflection recorded. Alternatively, for convenience the pole may be fixed horizontally in a
testing arrangement. The testing arrangement shall be provided with sufficient supports to
ensure that bending moments developed by the self-weight of the pole are minimal. These
supports shall be detailed to give no horizontal resistance to the applied loads. The accuracy of
load and deflection measuring equipment shall not be less than +/-2 percent.
9.4 The load shall be gradually and uniformly applied in increments of 10 percent of the design-
working load up to 120 percent of the design-working load. At each increment of load
deflection of the pole tip shall be measured. The 120% loading shall be maintained for 5
minutes. The load shall then be gradually reduced to zero and the amount of permanent
deflection of the pole tip recorded.
The test load shall be gradually reapplied up to the design working load and the deflection
recorded. The load shall then be increased in 10 percent increments until failure occurs. At
each load increment, the load and deflection shall be recorded.
The following particulars shall be recorded:
a. Manufacturer's name and plant location;

b. Batch No. of steel plate or tubing;
c. Test date;
d. Pole type;
e. Dimensions of pole;
f. Increments of load and the deflections at each increment of load;
g. Permanent deflection;
h. Load of failure;
9.5 The pole shall be considered acceptable if:
a) The permanent deflection of the tip of the pole does not exceed 2 mm, 3 mm, 3.5. and 4
mm. per meter of pole length for 8m,9m,10m and 11 m pole respectively. (The
permanent deflection is the deflection of tip of the pole on removal of load equal to

120% of design working load of pole after 5 minutes of the application of that load.
Clause 9.4)
b) The failure load of the pole tested equals or exceeds 200% of design working load.
9.6 Should any of the poles first selected fail to pass any of the tests specified above two further
poles shall be selected for testing from the same batch i.e. same pole length manufactured
on the same day from the same steel plate or tubing in respect of each failure. Should one or
both these additional poles fail, the test material represented by the test samples shall be
deemed as not complying with this specification.
10. Bid Documentation
10.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governing standards for
selection of tubings, fabrication and testing of Telescopic Tubular Steel Poles and two (2)
clear copies of all other relevant standards referenced therein..
10.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete design, description and certified dimensional drawings of
each type of pole.
10.3 Two (2) clear certified copies of all type tests performed on similar type of poles and similar
working loads.
10.4 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance and deviations, if

any.
TABLE 2
Pole Attributes
Overall Length 11m 10 m 9m 8m
Total Number of Sections 5 5 5 4

Diameter of the assembled pole in meter:
Top in mm 170 170 170 150
Bottom in mm 402 380 360 350
Application of
Load from top of pole in meter 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.075
Depth of Planting in meter 1.8 1.8 1.5 1.5

TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS
(To be completed by Bidder)
Item Telescopic Tubular Steel Poles
Description Unit 11m. 10m 9m 8m

1. Manufacturer
2. Governing Standards for tubing

manufacturing and testing
3. Governing Standard for Galvaniation
4. Copies of Standards Attached? Yes/No
4. Overall Length meters
5. No. of sections No.
6. Sections starting from the top:

Section: 1
-Length m
-Thickness mm
-Top dia. (outer) mm
-Butt dia. (outer) mm
-Weight kg
Section: 2
-Length m
-Thickness mm
-Weight kg
Section: 3
-Length m
-Thickness mm
-Weight kg

Description Unit 11m. 10m 9m 8m
Section: 4
-Length m
-Thickness mm
-Weight kg
Section: 5
-Length m
-Thickness mm
-Weight kg
7. Weight of the pole kg
8. Guaranteed minimum kgf

Transverse Failure Load
9. Guaranteed maximum mm
Permanent deflection

A2.PRESTRESSED CONCRETE POLE
1. Scope
These specifications apply to design, manufacture, and testing of rectangular pre-stressed

concrete poles for use in electrical distribution.
2. Description
2.1 The pre-stressed concrete pole shall be designed and fabricated in full compliance with IS:
1678-1978, or latest revision thereof or any other national or international standards that
ensures at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above, will also be
acceptable.
3. Load
3.1 The working loads of various pole categories are given in Table 1. The design ultimate
strength shall be calculated using a safety factor of 2.5. Pole Attributes are listed in Table 2.
4. Design
4.1 The poles shall be as per following design parameters and the dimensions shall be as shown in
Drawing. 1-4.
Design Parameters:
Concrete mix: M400

Minimum diameter of pre-stressing wire: 7.9 mm (7/2.6mm) for 11m
8 nos for 11m and 4 nos for 9m
Working Load: Refer Table 1
Depth of Plantation: Refer Table 2
Point of Application of Load: Refer Table 2
Further design details are given in Drawings.
4.2 The minimum strength of concrete in the pole shall meet the requirements laid down in
IS:1343-1960 and IS:456-1964 or in any other equivalent national or international standards.
4.3 The strands shall be made from cold-drawn non-alloy steel (high carbon content) wires. The
seven-wire strand consists of a group of wires arranged in stranded formation and shall have

the following properties. The seven-wire strands shall confirm to IS:6006-1983, or latest
revision thereof or any other equivalent national or international standards.
Geometrical Properties:
11m 9m
Type of material: Seven-wire strand Single strand

Minimum diameter of strand: 7.9 mm (7/2.6mm) 4 mm
Minimum cross-sectional area 37.4 mm2 12.56 mm2
of strands:
Mechanical Properties:
Nominal mass of strand: 294 g/m 89.9 g/m

Minimum breaking load: 64.50 kN 21.54 kN
0.2% proof load 54.70 kN
Long Term Behaviour:
Maximum relaxation after 1000 h of operation at initial load equivalent to 60%, 70% and 80% of
breaking load shall not be higher than 1.0%, 2.5% and 4.5% respectively.
4.4 The pre-stressing strands shall be accurately positioned and satisfactorily protected against the
formation of rust or other corrosion prior to the placement of the concrete. All pre-stressing
strands shall be free from loose rust, dirt, grease, oil and other lubricants or substance that
might impair their bond with the concrete.
4.5 The cement employed shall be the Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC), which shall conform to
the chemical and physical requirements as set forth in BS: 12, or any other equivalent national
or international standards.
4.6 The amount of concrete cover on the outside of the pre-stressed reinforcement shall be not
less than 20mm.
4.7 The pole shall include cast-in holes. Typical hole patterns are shown in the drawings. Hole
patterns must be confirmed with the NEA prior to manufacture.
4.8 All poles shall be unpolished but free of roughness, chips, excess cements, and other surface
irregularities. All poles shall present a straight and symmetrical appearance after erection. The
corners of all the poles shall be rounded so that they do not present a dangerously sharp edge,
which could cause tearing or excessive wearing of safety belts.
4.9 All poles shall be provided with lifting hooks at two points for loading and unloading of poles.

Table 1: Working Load
S.No. Pole Length (m) Design Load (kgf)
1 9 200
2 11 350
5) Tests
Definition of various types of loads:
Working load = Expected Load

Design Working Load = Expected Load x Factor of Safety (FOS)
Ultimate Transverse Load (UTL) = Load when applied at specified point of the pole, the
failure occurs.
Minimum Ultimate Transverse Load (MUTL) = Load when applied at specified point of
the pole, the first crack appears.
Design Transverse Load (DTL) = Design Working Load
Design Ultimate Transverse Load (DUTL) = Design load at the transverse direction at
which the first crack expected to appear (given by the Designer after calculation)
The Design Ultimate Transverse Load (DUTL) is less or equal to Ultimate Transverse Load
5.1 Transverse Strength Test
The pole shall be rigidly supported at the butt end for a distance equal to the specified planting depth.
The load shall be applied at a point specified in Table 2 from the top of the pole and shall be
steadily and gradually increased to the design transverse load until the occurrence of the first
crack. The deflection is then measured. Prior to the application of the design transverse load
there shall be no crack.
The load shall then be reduced to zero and increased gradually to a load equal to the first crack load
plus 10% of the minimum ultimate transverse load, and held for 2 minutes. This procedure
shall be repeated until the load reaches the value of 80% of the minimum ultimate transverse
load and thereafter increased by 5% of the minimum ultimate transverse load until failure.
Each time the load is applied, it shall be held for 2 minutes. The ultimate transverse load shall
not be less than the design ultimate transverse load.
5.2 Measurement of Cover
The cover shall be measured at 3 points, one within 1.8m from the butt end of the pole, second within
0.6m from the top and the third at the intermediate point. The mean value of the measured
cover should not differ by more than +/-1mm from the specified value, and the individual
value should not differ by more than+/-3mm from the specified value.
5.3 The number of poles selected for testing and their conformity criteria shall be as follows:
___________________________________________________________________
Lot Sample Permissible No. of Poles

Size Size No. of Defective for Transverse
Samples Strength Test
Up to 100 10 1 2
101 to 200 15 1 3
201 to 300 20 2 4
301 to 500 30 3 5
___________________________________________________________________
5.4 All the poles selected in 5.3 shall be tested for overall length, cross-section and up-rightness.
The tolerance shall be +/-15mm on overall length, +/-3mm on cross-sectional dimensions, and
0.5% on uprightness.
5.5 The number of poles which do not satisfy the requirements of overall strength, cross-section
and uprightness shall not exceed the number given in 5.3. If the number of such poles exceeds
the corresponding number, all poles in the lot shall be tested for requirements, and those not
satisfying the requirements shall be rejected.
5.6 All the poles tested for transverse strength test shall satisfy the requirements of the test. If one
or more poles fail, twice the number of poles originally tested shall be selected from those
already selected and subjected to test. If there is no failure among these poles, the lot shall be
considered to have satisfied the requirements of the test.
6. Marking
The poles shall be cleanly and indelibly marked with the following:
a) Month and year of manufacture, at approximately 3m from the butt end;

b) Specified working load in kg, at approximately 3m from the butt end; and
c) The design lifting point.
8.1 The Bidder shall furnish following documents together with Bid;
a. Two (2) clear copies of the standards, governing fabrication and testing of pre-stressed
concrete poles and two (2) clear copies of other standards indicated in the
specifications.
b. Two (2) clear copies of detailed design and drawings of each type of pole.
c. Two (2) clear certified copies of all tests performed on similar poles of same sizes and
similar working loads.
d. A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance and

deviations, if any.

8.2 The Bidder shall provide the following details:
a) Pole dimensions in cross-section and pole taper;

b) Location and size of pre-stressing strands;
c) Hole locations;
d) Design ground line;
e) Marking of the lifting point;
g) Minimum ultimate transverse load;
h) Transverse load at first crack
i) Concrete design mix and cement specification
j) Specifications of the pre-stressing strands, their tensile strength and sizes
Table: 2
Pole Attributes
OverallLength 11m 9m
Point of Application of Load

from Pole Top 0.6m 0.125m
Minimum Depth of Planting 1.8m 1.5m

( shall be based on site condition)

Item: Pre-stressed Concrete Pole
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Reference Standard
3. Overall Length meters
4. Dimensions: 11m 9m
- Top Width mm
- Bottom Width mm
- Pole thickness mm
5. Weight of the pole kg
6. Guaranteed minimum Transverse

Failure Load kgf
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

A3.TUBULAR STEEL POLE

1. Scope
1.1 This Specification covers the design, fabrication, testing and supply of swaged type
galvanized tubular steel poles to be used to support overhead electric lines and equipment.
2. Description
2.1 The poles shall be fabricated of seamless tubes of suitable lengths swaged together as
specified in Table 1 made out of welded tubes. The diameters of various sections of the
fabricated pole shall be as specified therein. A bid not conforming to the requirements of
Table 1 shall be rejected as being non responsive.
2.2 The separate galvanized steel pole cap shall be provided with top section of the pole. The
bottom section of the pole shall be provided with a base plate. The base plate shall be square
of size 300x300 mm and 10 mm thick shall be welded at the bottom of the pole. The base
plate shall have a hole of dia. approx. 50 mm in the center, for draining out of water.
2.3 The supply quantity of tubular steel poles are given in the Price Schedule
3. Material
3.1 The poles shall be fabricated from steel having tensile strength not less than 540 N/mm2.
The pole shall be composed of three sections in diminishing diameters and minimum
diameter and thickness and lengths of poles shall be as shown in Table 1.
3.2 The steel tubes shall confirm to the requirements of BS 6323 Parts 1 to 8 Steel Tubes, or
IS:2713, or latest revision thereof or other recognized international standards that ensures at
least a substantially equal quality to the standard mentioned above.
4. Manufacture
4.1 All tubes forming the part of the pole shall be made from hot finished seamless or
continuously welded steel in accordance with BS 6323 or IS 2713, or equivalent
international standards.
a) Tolerance on outside diameter: +/- 1%

b) Tolerance on length: +/- 40mm on any section
+/-25mm on overall length
c) Tolerance on weight: +/- 7.5% on each pole.

+/- 7.5% on a bulk load
d) Tolerance on thickness: +/- 10% .
e) The out-of-straightness of the finished pole shall not exceed 1/600 of its
length.
4.2 All welding of the poles shall be carried out at the manufacturers' plant.

4.3 Each section of the pole shall have only one longitudinal weld. No circumferential
joints/welds of the tubes are permitted. All welds shall be capable of withstanding, without
failure or cracking the stresses in a pole when subjected to its ultimate design loads.
4.4 The pole shall have hole configurations and sizes as shown in the drawings attached to this
specification. The hole sizes and the locations of the hole must however be confirmed with the
Project prior to manufacture.
5. Corrosion Protection
5.1 Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot dip process, and shall be done in single bath (single
dip) to result in a uniform thickness both internally and externally. Galvanizing of the poles
shall be done after completion of fabrication process. Drilling, punching, cutting, bending
and removal of burrs shall be completed before galvanizing. The preparation for galvanizing
and the galvanizing process shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the
material being coated. All galvanizing shall be in accordance with EN ISO 1461:1999 or
IS:4736 or an equivalent international standards, and shall result in uniform thickness
galvanization and be free from defects. The pole cap and the base plate shall also be
galvanized.
5.2 The average thickness of the zinc coating shall not be less than 500 g/m2 (equivalent to 70
microns) of zinc for all surfaces of steel including the base plate and the pole cover.
6. Marking of Pole
6.1 The pole shall have an identification marked with indelible paint on the pole at a position
approximately 3.5 m. from the butt end, which is clearly and indelibly marked with:
a) Date of manufacture and identification mark of manufacture.
b) Length of pole in meters and its design working loads as defined in this specification.
6.2 The pole shall be marked with a permanent horizontal line at a point 1/6th of the pole height
from the butt end of the assembled pole.
7. Earthing Lug, Base Plate and Pole Cap
Each pole shall be provided with earthling lug at 300 mm above the ground level. Separate
pole cap shall be provided for each pole. The plate for pole cap shall be of 3 mm. minimum
thickness.
8. Tests

8.1 The following test(s) shall be performed on finished poles all testing shall be fully
documented and certified test reports shall be provided to the Project.
- Test for dimensional and structural properties, and for the physical requirements of the
finished poles
- Test for galvanization
- Tensile test and chemical analysis test
- Deflection test
- Permanent set test, and
- Drop test.
8.2 Poles selected for tests shall be a representative sample from each lot. The number of poles
selected for conducting deflection, permanent set and drop tests shall be as follows:.
Up to 500 5
501 to 1000 8
1001 to 2000 13
2001 to 3000 18
3001 and above 20
8.3 The number of poles selected for conducting tensile test and chemical analysis tests shall be
as follows:
Up to 500 1
501 to 1000 2
1001 to 2000 3
2001 to 3000 4
3001 and above 5
8.4 The above test shall be performed as per IS 2713 or other recognized international
standards. The following particulars shall be recorded:
a) Manufacturer's name and plant location;

b) Batch No. of steel plate or tubing;
c) Test date;
d) Pole type;
e) Dimensions of pole;
f) Increments of load and the deflections at each increment of load;
g) Permanent deflection;
h) Load of failure;
8.5 For deflection test, each pole shall be rigidly supported for a distance from the butt end equal
to the length the depth to which it to be planted in the ground. It shall then be loaded as
cantilever and the appropriate deflection load applied at right angle of the axis of pole 300
mm from the top of the poles for poles up to 9m length and 600 mm for poles over 9m length.
The temporary deflection at the point of application of the applied load shall not exceed 157.5
mm
8.6 The permanent set test shall be carried out immediately after the deflection test, on the same
test sample. After application of the proper load, the permanent set measured from the zero
position at the point of application of load after the release of the applied load shall not exceed
13 mm.
8.7 To perform the drop test, the pole shall be dropped vertically with the bud end downward,
three times in succession from a height of 2 m onto a hardwood block 150 mm thick laid on a
concrete foundation. The pole shall not show any signs of telescoping or loosening of joints.
8.8 Should any of the poles first selected fail to pass any of the tests specified above, two further
poles shall be selected for testing from the same batch i.e. same pole length manufactured
on the same day from the same steel plate or tubing in respect of each failure. Should one or
both these additional poles fail, the test material represented by the test samples shall be
deemed as not complying with this specification.
9. Quality Assurance Program
9.1 Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of the manufacturer
which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shall include, among others,
information to meet the following requirement, failing which the Bid shall be liable for
rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;

ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;
iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;
iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;
v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of ISO9000;
vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the raw
materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested, list of test
normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;
viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally carried out
for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;
ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of equipment
specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis--vis the type, special, acceptance and
routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
9.2 The manufacturer shall perform, among others, the following inspections/test on each
consignment of raw steel, prior to fabrication. A certificate shall be provided to the
Employer showing the test results:
i. Visual, dimensional and mechanical tests, to identify the steel meets the required
strength/grade ensure compliance with the relevant Standards, and to ensure the

absence of rust and surface imperfections. If the steel does meet the strength or grade
required, the batch shall be rejected.
ii. Dimensional tests to ensure that the material is within the production tolerances of IS
2713 or BS 4360 and BS 6323 or equivalent Standards. One sample shall be taken
from each batch for which a certificate is provided. If the first sample fails the test, a
second sample shall be taken. If the second sample fails the test, the batch shall be
rejected.
10. Packing
Poles shall be stacked together and banded securely to ensure that each individual bundle
does not break or the shifting of individual poles does not take place during transportation
and handling. Any loose items shall be suitably banded together or packed to avoid loss
during transportation and storage.
selection of tubing, fabrication and testing of Tubular Steel Poles and two (2) clear copies of
all other relevant standards referenced therein.
11.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete design, description and certified dimensional drawings of
each type of pole.
any.
11.4 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be bound separately
from the Bid documents.

TABLE 1
Pole Attributes
Overall Length 11m 9m
Pole Designation: SP57 SP30
Section Length:
Top (h1) 2.7 m 2.0 m

Middle (h2) 2.7 m 2.0 m
Bottom (h3) 5.6 m 5.0 m
Outside Diameter:
Top (h1) 139.7 mm 88.9 mm

Middle (h2) 165.1 mm 114.3 mm
Bottom (h3) 193.7 mm 139.7 mm
Thickness:
Top (h1) 4.5 mm 3.25 mm

Middle (h2) 4.85 mm 4.5 mm
Bottom (h3) 5.9 mm 5.4 mm
Crippling load 722 kgf 400 kgf
Approximate weight 256 kg 133 kg
Application of
Load from top of pole 0.6 m 0.3 m
Depth of Planting 1.8 m 1.5 m


Item: Galvanized Tubular Steel Poles
1. Manufacturer
2. Governing Standards for tubing
Manufacturing and testing
3. Are the poles fully galvanized? Yes/No
4. Governing Standard for Galvanization
5. Copies of Standards Attached? Yes/No
6. No. of sections No.
7. Sections starting from the top:
Description Unit 11m 9m
Top Section:
-Length m
-Thickness mm
-Dia. (outer) mm
Top Section:
-Length m
-Thickness mm
-Dia. (outer) mm
Top Section:
-Length m
-Thickness mm
-Dia. (outer) mm
8. Weight of pole kg
9. Crippling load kgf
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

B. CONDUCTOR ,CABLE
B1. ACSR DOG CONDUCTOR
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of aluminum conductors, steel
reinforced (ACSR) commonly used on overhead power line construction.
2. Description
2.1 The manufacturer of the ACSR conductor must have been accredited with ISO 9001 or
ISO 9002 quality certification.
2.2 The ACSR conductor shall be a concentrically stranded right-hand lay conductor.
2.3 The ACSR conductor shall be fabricated in accordance with BS: 215 (Part 2)-1970, or latest
revision thereof, or any other national or international standards that ensures a substantially
equal quality to the standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
2.4 The following types of conductors shall be supplied:
Code Name Nominal Stranding Breaking Mass Resistance

Area Strength At 20o C
(Sq. mm) (Al/Steel) (kN) (kg/km) (Ohm/km)
Dog 100 6/7 32.7 394 0.273
3. Packaging
3.1 The packaging of goods shall be in accordance with B.S. 1559:1949 Reels and wooden
drums for bare wire, stranded conductors and trolley wire. All conductors shall be
furnished on non-returnable treated seasoned wooden reels. All timber shall be treated to provide
protection against rot and insects. Protective external lagging of sufficient thickness shall be
provided and fitted closely on the reels. Binder consisting of steel straps shall be provided over the
external laggings. The reel shall be new and sufficiently sturdy in construction to withstand ocean
shipping, road transport, several loading and unloading, storage in tropics, hauling and field
erection of conductor without distortion or disintegration.
3.2 Each reel of the conductors furnished shall contain only one (1) length of conductor.
3.3 All reels shall be legibly marked in paint with the following information:
a) Size of conductor
b) Type of conductor
c) Length in meters
d) Net weight of conductor
e) Direction of rolling
3.4 The standard length of the completed conductor in each reel shall be as per the table below:
Conductor Size (sq. mm): 30 50 100

Normal Length of the Conductor (m): 3000 2000 1000
4. Tests
4.1 The manufactured conductor shall be tested in full compliance with the governing standard
including following routine tests:
Aluminum wire
a) Tensile test
b) Wrapping test
c) Resistivity test
Steel wire
a) Determination of stress at 1% elongation

b) Tensile test
c) Torsion test or elongation test as appropriate
d) Wrapping test
e) Galvanization test
f) Ductility test
5.1 The Bidder shall provided with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governing standards for
fabrication and testing of the ACSR conductor and two (2) clear copies of all other relevant
standards referenced therein.
5.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of all types of ACSR conductor as required
by governing standards.
5.3 The Bidder shall also furnish the Certificate of Compliance, as specified in Paragraph 4.4 of
BS 215, Part 2:1970, at the time of the shipment of each lot of conductor, or as required by the
appropriate section of the equivalent national standard.

any.
5.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be bound separately from
the Bid documents.

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
Item ACSR Conductor
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Governing Standards
3. Copies of Standards Attached: Yes/No
4. Copies of type test

attached? Yes/No
5. If standards is not BS:215(Part II)

are conductor specifications same as the
BS:215 requirements in respect of the following?:
Diameter Yes/No
Strand size Yes/No
Direction of lay Yes/No
Lay ratio Yes/No
Materials Yes/No
6. Technical data:
Dog Rabbit Weasel
Nominal diameter (mm)

Stranding (Al/Steel)
Breaking strength (kN)
Mass (kg/km)
Resistance at 20o C

B2 . UNDERGROUND 33KV CABLE & JOINTS
1.1 GENERAL
This specification covers the design, manufacture, factory test, supply, delivery,
construction, installation, field-testing and commissioning of 33 kV, XLPE
Insulated, Power Cables including all its accessories required for the entire project.
The equipment and installation works specified in this Section shall conform to the
latest edition of the appropriate IEC specifications and/or other recognized
international standards
1.1.1 The equipment to be furnished shall strictly be in accordance with the

specifications and the Price Schedule.
1.2 EQUIPMENT TO BE FURNISHED
1.2.1 The following cables & its accessories shall be furnished in accordance with
specification:
a) 33 kV XLPE Insulated, single core, , Aluminium conductor Power Cable,

b) 33 kV Straight through Joints required to join cable in underground.
1.2.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for presenting final Bill of Quantity and supplying
the quantity of the cables & all its accessories, components with approval from the
employer before construction to complete the project.
All other materials necessary for proper operation of the Plant and not mentioned in
these specifications shall be supplied under the Contract. The prices of such
materials shall be deemed to be included in the prices of materials in Price Schedule
without any additional cost to the Employer unless stated otherwise.
1.3 33 KV POWER CABLES, & STRAIGHT JOINTS
1.3.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1 General
The following 33 kV power cables, straight joints shall be supplied and installed
according to Tender Drawings and the requirements as hereafter specified.
2 Requirement
1) 33 kV Power cable
The 33 kV power cables of one (1) circuit and spare shall be supplied and installed.
The 33 kV power cable shall be of single-core, cross linked polyethylene (XLPE)
insulated, screened and armoured, PVC sheathed, Aluminum conductor .The
conductor shall be provided with a shielding of semi-conducting tape and/or
extruded semi-conducting material. They shall comply with IEC Publication

The 33 kV power cables shall be rated as follows :
(a) Rated voltage, phase to phase (Uo) 33 kV

(b) Highest voltage of three-phase system (Um) 36 kV
(c) Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage 170 kV
(d) Rated power-frequency short duration
withstand voltage for one minute 75 kV
Maximum Initial conductor Temperature during operation shall be below 90C

and Maximum Final Conductor Temperature during short circuit shall be less
than 250C.
The 33 kV XLPE cables shall be installed in the flexible pipe conduits as shown on
Tender Drawing. Cleats, spacers, supporting structures and other necessary materials
for installation of the cables and flexible pipes shall be provided by the Contractor.
At the opening of the civil structures where the power cables are passing through,
suitable sealing means shall be provided by the Contractor to keep out rain from the
outside.
The method of cable laying shall be designed by the Contractor to ensure higher
security and reliability during and after the installation. The cable installation shall be
carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the procedures approved.
Outdoor type Terminal/ sealing ends shall be supplied and installed for termination of
the 33 kV XLPE power cables.
Thermal expansion and contraction of the cable due to temperature change shall be
considered for designing the joint insulation of the Terminal/sealing end.
2) Straight Through joints

Cables shall be installed in maximum possible lengths and straight jointing between
shorter lengths will not permitted without the prior written approval of the Employer.
Appropriate Cable jointing materials shall be supplied and installed for connection of
the 33 kV XLPE power cables. Locations for cable jointing shall be proposed by the
Contractor during detail survey.
All materials necessary for the cable jointing works in the field including cable brackets
shall be provided to complete the specified underground cable line.
Cross bond or suitable design of earthing shall be employed so that shielding of both
sides of each joint shall be connected to the shielding of the other phase, so as to
suppress the induced voltage. Necessary materials for such appropriate earthing shall be
provided by the Contractor.
The minimum creepage distance of outdoor terminal/sealing-ends shall be as required
for heavily polluted atmospheres in line with the IEC 137 standard or appropriate IEC
Standard.
3) Accessories
The following accessories shall be provided with the power cable for each end.
i. Name plates
ii. Phase Identification
Phase identification for conductor cables shall be in accordance with the following:
Phase A ( R ) : Red
Phase B ( Y ) : Yellow
Phase C ( B ) : Blue
iii. Voltage Identification
The plastic covering shall be embossed with the name of the manufacturer, number
of conductors, the cross sections and type of insulation.
4) Cable Drum
Cable drum shall be non- returnable and shall be made of steel, suitably protected
against corrosion for spare length.
5) Spare parts
a) One (1) lot of necessary materials for repair for four times.
b) One (1) set of spares as recommended by the manufacturer, excluding those

mentioned above.
1.3.2 INSTALLATION WORKS
a) Installation of Underground Lines
The contractor shall lay cables in accordance with Tender Drawing by using flexible
pipes. The underground cable lines consist of 3 numbers of 33 kV power cables.
A color tape printed 33 kV power cable line shall be placed over the bricks as shown
in Tender Drawing.
Joint and/or terminal works for the cables shall be made with utmost care by the skilled
workers. Extra loop of approximately 5 m length at cable termination and joint shall be
made as far as the space is available.
The contractor shall install the steel and/or concrete cable mark as approved by the
Employer at 50 m intervals along the cable route.
The cables shall be terminated with sealing ends and bushings. Each terminal shall be
provided with phase identification marks of R-Y-B.
Arrangement of flexible pipes for cable installation is shown in Tender Drawing. Joints
and terminations of those pipes shall be properly made so that penetration of water
inside the flexible pipes after completion of the works is not allowed.
Prior to pull-through of the cable into the flexible pipes, the Contractor shall calculate
the pull-through length of the cable and confirm that the pull-through tension is not
more than permissible tension.

The shields of the 33 kV power cables shall be grounded in the approved manner at
each joint.
b) Installation of Terminal/ Sealing Ends of 33 kV Cable
The cable end at both sides of the Park at river banks shall be made as per IEC standard.
Necessary additional steel structure with concrete foundation shall be constructed for
the installation of bushings as well as LA.
c) Inspection and Tests
Through the work execution, various inspections and tests on the progressing works
will be ordered to the Contractor by the Employer.
Following inspections and tests will be carried out after completion of the works
section by section. The Contractor shall perform all the inspections and tests in
accordance with IEC Standard.
(1) Underground Power Cables
a) Visual inspection of the underground cable lines
- Back filling and grade

- Cable and joint marks
- Cable termination and connection
b) Measurement insulation resistance of the lines
c) H. V. test
1.3.3 TESTS FOR 33 KV POWER CABLES, STRAIGHT JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES
(1) Test at works
The following tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer's plant before shipment as
far as applicable for type of conductors and cables:
(a) 33 kV XLPE power cable
i) Appearance check
ii) Conductor resistance measurement
iii) Capacitance measurement
iv) Insulation resistance measurement
v) A.C. withstand voltage
vi) A.C. long duration withstand voltage
vii) Impulse withstand voltage
viii) A.C. long duration breakdown voltage
ix) Impulse break-down voltage
x) Dielectric loss tangent
xi) Temperature-voltage characteristic

xii) Dimension
- Conductor outermost diameter
- Insulation thickness
- Sheath thickness
- Over-sheath thickness
- Thickness of each tape
- Interval of tape lapping
- Total diameter
xiii) Bending withstand characteristic

xiv) Over-sheath, tensile strength
xv) - do. - , thermal aging
xvi) - do. - , oil-proof
xvii) - do. - , non-inflammability
xviii) - do. - , thermal deformation
xix) - do. - , hardness
(b) Sealing/termination ends or straight joints

i) Construction
ii) A.C. long duration withstand voltage
iii) Impulse withstand voltage
iv) A.C. long duration breakdown voltage
v) Impulse breakdown voltage
vi) Porcelain or epoxy insulator, construction
vii) - do. - , power frequency flash-over voltage (dry)
viii) - do. - , power frequency flash-over voltage (wet)
ix) - do. - , 50% impulse flash-over voltage
x) - do. - , cantilever strength
xi) - do. - , thermal mechanical performance
(2) Test on Completion
After completely installing the 33 kV XLPE power cables, sealing ends and other
conductors at site, the following tests shall be carried out by the Contractor.
(a) D.C. High voltage test
1.3.4 Special Requirement
Small cut piece lengths of cables will not be accepted. Cables up to 500 meters in length or
as approved by Employer/Employer's Representative shall be of one length shipped in a
drum of adequate size. For higher quantities, multiple lengths/drums may be shipped subject
to the approval of Employer/Employer's Representative.
1.3.5 Drawings, Data & Manuals
The following information shall be furnished along with the Tender.

(a) Manufacturers leaflets giving constructional details, dimensions and characteristics

of different cables.
(b) Current rating of cables including de-rating factor due to grouping, ambient
temperature and type of various installation.
(c) Write-up with sketches illustrating the manufacturers recommendation for splicing,
jointing and termination of different types of cables.
(d) Type test report of power cables. The Bidder shall clearly describe the type and
routine tests to be performed on cables.
(e) Drum length for each of cable.
1.3.6 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The performance figures quoted on schedule of Technical Data shall be guaranteed

within the tolerance permitted by relevant standards and shall become part of the
Contract. In case of failure of the cables to meet the guarantees, the Employer reserves
the right to reject the item. The Contractor shall have to rectify/replace the
defect/defective part at no extra cost to the Employer and without delaying the
commissioning schedule.
1.3.7 Spare Parts ,tools & Instruments
The bidder shall also furnish Manufacturers recommended spare parts, tools &
Instruments with price. The Contractor shall submit an itemized list of such
equipments.
Cable Joint Cabinet , Outdoor
1.1 General
This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, shop test, supply, delivery,
installation works and field test of the equipment complete with all accessories for efficient
and trouble-free operation as specified herein under.
The equipment specified in this Section shall conform to the latest edition of the appropriate
IEC specifications and/or other recognized international standards. In particular:
Manufacturer shall hold valid ISO 9001 (including design) quality certificate.

1.2 Equipment to be furnished
36 kV, 630 A Cable Joint Cabinet ,outdoor type including XLPE Cable Termination Kits at
input & output terminals and essential spare parts & tools. The Cabinet will be erected
above ground Level. The location in site shall be in safe place as agreed by employer
1.2.1 The equipment to be furnished shall strictly be in accordance with the specifications and the
Price Schedule.
The equipment shall be from following manufacturers or equivalent or better.
a) ALSTHOM (Areva) b) Fuji
c) CGELEC d) Reyrolle / Easun Reyrolle
e) ABB f) Siemens
g) Toshiba h) Mitsubishi
1.3 Design Requirements
1.3.1 The equipment shall be used for the 33kV, 50Hz, 3 phase system. The enclosure is made of
hot dip galvanized steel plate with additional corrosion protection on components that will
be installed underground. The cable connectors shall be enclosed safely and connected in
the Cabinet. The cable cabinet shall be supplied with a lock and padlock hasp.
1.3.2 The equipment shall be installed outdoor, erected above surface in a hot, humid climate. All
equipment, accessories shall be provided with tropical finish to prevent fungus growth and
to prevent moisture inside. Connections are made above ground, as necessary selected
cables can be disconnected for maintenance.
1.3.3 The maximum temperature rise in any part of the equipment at specified rating shall not
exceed the permissible limits as stipulated in relevant standards.
1.3.4 The rated peak short circuit current or the rated short time current carried by the equipment
shall not cause:
(a) Mechanical damage to any part of the equipment
(b) Separation of Contacts
(c) Insulation damage of "Current Carrying Part."
1.3.7 The equipment shall be able to carry the rated current continuously and rated short time
current for three seconds without exceeding the temperature limit specified in the relevant
standard.
1.3.8 The equipment shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and thermal effects of
maximum possible short circuit current at the point of its installation.

1.4 Tests
1.4.1 Type and routine tests on the equipment and components shall be in accordance with latest
revision of IEC Standards or equivalent standards approved by the Employer/Employer's
Representative.
Each switch shall include but not limited to the following tests:
(a) Routine tests
- Power frequency voltage dry test
- Measurement of resistance of main circuit
- Mechanical operation test
(b) Design tests
- Insulator test
- Dielectric test, including impulse withstand test
- Radio influence test
- Short-time current test
- Voltage drop test the voltage drop across one complete phase of a switch
shall be measured when carrying rated current.
- Temperature Rise Test
If type tests have been previously conducted on identical equipment, the Contractor may
furnish the certified copies of such previous reports instead of performing tests. The Bidder
shall submit copy of design test report from accredited testing laboratory for the equipment
of the offered model along with the bid.
1.4.2 The type and routine test certificate shall be furnished in the required number of copies to
the Employer/Employer's Representative for approval before dispatch of the equipment
from the works.
1.4.3 Field tests
After installation at Site, the disconnecting switches shall be subjected but not limited to the
following field tests:
(a) Construction inspection
(b) Measurement of insulation resistance
(c) Mechanical operation test

1.6 Drawings, Data and Manuals
1.6.1 The following drawings and data shall be furnished with the Tender.
(a) General arrangement drawing with different sections showing constructional

features.
(b) Technical leaflets on disconnecting switches offered explaining the function of
various parts, principle of operation and special features (if any).
(c) Typical type test results on identical equipment offered in the Tender.
1.6.2 The various drawings, data and manuals shall be submitted for approval and afterwards for
final distribution in quantities and in procedures as set-up elsewhere. The various drawings
and data to be furnished shall include:
(a) Outline dimensional drawings of the equipment showing general arrangement and
location of fittings.
(b) Transport/shipping dimensions with weights.
(c) Foundation and anchor bolt details including loading condition.
(d) Assembly drawing for erection at site with part numbers and schedule of materials.
(e) Electrical schematic and wiring diagram.
(f) Any other relevant drawings and data necessary for erection, operation and
maintenance.
(g) Instruction manual and data sheets.
(h) Any other relevant data, drawing and information necessary for review of the items
stated above.
1.6.3 Spare parts

a) One (1) lot of necessary materials for repair for four times.
b) One (1) set of spares as recommended by the manufacturer, excluding those mentioned
above.

APPENDIX A-2
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 36kV Cable Joint Cabinet
1. phase, outdoor 3
7. Quantity required As per Price Schedule
3. Voltage ratings
(a) Nominal system voltage 33kV
(b) Rated maximum voltage 36kV
4. Frequency 50Hz
5. Insulation levels
(a) Basic impulse level (BIL) 170kV
(b) Power frequency withstand

voltage (1 min.) 75kV
6. Current ratings
(a) Continuous current 630A
(b) Short time current (1 seconds)
(c) Peak short time current
7. Operating mechanism Manual

1. Scope:
This specification covers the design, manufacture, factory test, supply and delivery of 33
KV cable termination and joint kits for XLPE insulated power cable, Aluminum Conductor
used in underground distribution system.
2. Description:
2.1 All high voltage terminations and jointing kits shall be standard quality type. They shall be
factory engineered kits containing all the necessary components to reinstate the cable
insulation, metallic shielding of each core, together with the reinstatement of the sheath, of
the cable being terminated.
2.2 The heat shrinkable termination and joint kit shall be manufactured and tested in accordance
latest version of IEC, or any other national or international standard that ensures at least a
substantially equal quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
2.3 The manufacturer of the termination and joint kit (Indoor, outdoor and straight- through) must
have been accredited with ISO 9001 quality certification.
2.4 The entire termination and joint kit shall be environmentally sealed and capable of
preventing the ingress of external moisture and contamination.
2.5 Kits shall contain sufficient cleaning solvents and cleaning clothes for the proper making of
the joint or termination.
2.6 Voltage stress relief shall be provided and this may be inherent in the heat recoverable
polymeric material.
2.7 The terminating or jointing materials shall not be subjected to storage limitations such as
controlled temperature or humidity restrictions, nor have self life limitations.
3. Other Requirements
3.1 The outdoor termination kits shall be suitable for terminating the cable at steel cross arm
complete with brackets, terminals, saddles and all necessary materials for fixing the
termination. The heat shrinkable termination kit to be supplied and installed under this
scope of work shall be capable enough to cope with all the weather change. Terminations
that do not require manually built stress relief cones or field pouring compound are
preferred.
3.2 The indoor termination kit and terminal lugs shall be suitable for terminating the three cores
of the cable in 33 kV cubical. Terminations that do not require manually built stress relief
cones or field pouring of compounds are preferred.

3.3. The straight through joint kit shall be suitable for jointing single core of cables. The
termination kits shall include all necessary components to join two alike cables sections
together directly buried. Kits that do not require manually built stress relief cones or field
pouring of compound are preferred.
3.4 Each of the above terminations and joint kits shall be complete in every respect and include
clear, detailed instructions in English illustrating steps by step procedure in preparing the
cable and applying the termination compounds.
3.5. Terminating and jointing kit shall be in a separate package, a list of materials indicating
quantities and weights and an instruction sheet shall be included in the package.
3.6 Accessories shall match the cable test ratings in all respects
The termination and joint kits shall be of suitable for following cables:
- Outdoor use for 33 KV 1-cores Al. XLPE insulated Power cables.
4. Testing
The routine tests of the kits shall be done at manufacturer's plant in accordance with IEC or
other equivalent national or international standards including following tests.
- Appearance Test
- Construction Test
- High Voltage Test
1. The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the manufacturer
governing Standard of the termination and joints and kits two (2) clear copies of all
other relevant standards referenced herein.
2. The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of the termination and joint kits as
required by governing standards.
3. The Bidder shall provide complete description, catalogue and drawings of the
termination and joint kits.
4. A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance and deviation,
if any.
5. All data, drawing, catalogue and other technical documents supplied shall be bound
separately from the Bid Document.

E. SPECIFICATION OF LIGHTNING ARRESTER
1.1 General
This specification covers the design, manufacture, factory test, delivery, field test and
installation of lightning arresters, complete with all accessories.
The equipment specified in this Section shall conform to the latest edition of the appropriate
IEC specifications and/or other recognized international standards. In particular:
IEC 60099-4 Metal-oxide Surge arrester without gap for a.c. system
IEC 60099-5 Surge arrester - Selection and application recommendations
IEC 60529 Degree of protection provided by enclosures
Manufacturer of instrument transformer shall hold valid ISO 9001(including design) quality
certificate.
30 kV Lightening Arrestor
1.2.1 The equipment to be furnished shall strictly be in accordance with the specifications and the
Price Schedule.
1.3.1 The lightning arresters shall be pole mounted type, single pole, gap less type rated voltage
30kV for 33kV system. The nominal discharge current shall not be less than 10kA.
1.3.2 The active part of the lightning arresters shall be accommodated in porcelain insulators
which are suitably reinforced to prevent explosion of an arrester.
1.3.3 Pressure relief device shall be provided for the safe discharge of internal pressure.
1.3.4 The lightning arresters shall be mounted on galvanized steel structure or pole. Terminal
connectors for both line and ground terminals shall be furnished.
1.3.5 Surge monitoring device consisting of surge counter, etc., along with insulating bases for
mounting at the bottom of the arrester, shall be furnished.
1.4 Test
1.4.1 All routine tests shall be performed on each piece of arrester as per IEC. In addition, the
following tests shall be carried out.
(a) Construction test

(b) Insulation resistance test and leak current test
1.4.2 Type test certificates on similar equipment and routine test certificate carried out for
following tests shall be furnished for approval of the Employer/Employer's Representative.
(a) Voltage withstand test
(b) Impulse voltage characteristic test

(c) Discharge voltage characteristic test
(d) Discharge current withstand test
(e) Duty cycle test
(f) Pressure relief test
(g) Contamination test
1.5 Drawings and Data
1.5.1 The following documents shall be furnished along with the Tender.
(a) Standard catalog identifying the models and ratings being furnished.
(b) Outline drawings including dimensions
1.5.2 The following drawings and data shall be furnished in required number of copies after
award of contract for approval of Employer/Employer's Representative.
(a) All updated documents furnished with the Tender.

c) Foundation and anchor details including dead load
(d) Transport/shipping dimensions with weight
(e) Any other relevant data, drawings and information
1.6 Nameplate
Each lightning arrester shall be provided with a nameplate of weather resistant material
fitted in a visible position showing the following items as a minimum.
(a) Manufacturers name
(b) Manufacturers serial number and type designation
(c) Year of manufacture
(d) Rated voltage
(e) Nominal discharge current

APPENDIX A-1
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 30kV LIGHTNING ARRESTER
1. Type Outdoor,
3. Mounting pole mounted
4. Rated frequency 50Hz
5. System voltage 33kV
6. Rated voltage 30kV
7. Impulse withstand voltage (BIL) 170kV
8. Power frequency withstand voltage 70kV
9. Nominal discharge current 10kA
10 Surge Counter shall be the ISO 9001 holding company

FLEXIBLE PIPE
a) General
The flexible conduit pipe up to 125 mm diameter(or appropriate size), corrugated

hard polyethylene pipe shall be used for installation of 33 kV XLPE power cable.
The flexible pipe shall be buried before the cable installation and, then the cables
shall be pulled in.
b) Requirement
The flexible conduit pipe shall be of polyethylene and shall be strong enough to
withstand the compression force from heavy trucks or Lorries when it is buried more
than 80 cm below the ground level.
The pipes projected cross section shall be practically rounded.
The pipe shall be corrugated to get flexibility.
The colour of the pipes shall be black.
c) Accessories
The flexible conduit pipe shall be provided with necessary accessories, such as joints
and sealing material etc.
The straight joint sleeve shall be made of high density polyethylene coloured black and
to be so designed as to be screwed on to flexible pipe.
Bell mouth shall be fixed to the end of corrugated pipe to facilitate cable pulling in.
The bell mouth shall be so designed as to screwed into the pipe. It shall be made of
hard density polyethylene and colored black.
Water proof materials for pipes in manhole shall be mounted to an outlet of duct to keep
the water tightness.
The waterproof materials shall be comprised the components such as sand-proof seal,
sealing tape, neo seal compound, VUL-CO tape, PVC tape and other necessary
materials to complete the specified scope of works.

GROUNDING SYSTEM
1.1 General
This specification covers the design, supply, delivery, installation and testing of the
complete Grounding System as described herein.
1.2 Codes and Standards
The complete grounding work shall be in accordance with IEC Standard latest revision
together with the recommendation in the Guide for Safety in Substation Grounding IEEE
No. 80 and the requirements of this section.
Complete installation of the ground grid, test link chamber, grounding of all equipment
located in the site as specified herein but not be limited to the supply of grounding
conductors, jointing materials and all accessories to complete this grounding installation
shall be covered under this specification.
1.4 Grounding Installation Features
1.4.1 The installation shall be complete in all respects for efficient and trouble free service. All
work shall be carried out in a first class neat workmanlike manner. Grounding conductors
shall be handled carefully to avoid kinking and cutting of the conductors during laying and
installation. All connections to the grounding shall be made with the bare copper stranded
cable.
1.4.2 For all connections made to equipment or to the structures, the grounding conductor,
connectors and equipment enclosures shall have good clean contact surfaces. Grounding
conductor connection to all electrical equipments, panels, conduit systems, equipment
enclosures, cable trays, equipment frames, bases, steel structure, etc., shall be by pressure
type or bolting type connectors.
1.4.3 All lap, cross and tee connections between two grounding conductors both below and above
grade shall be made by thermo welding process or compression type connector. The various
joints shall have adequate mechanical strength as well as necessary electrical conductivity
not less than that of the parent conductors of the joints. All accessories for grounding
installation shall be of quality and design approved by the Employer/Employer's
Representative.
1.4.4 Grounding conductors, when crossing underground trenches, directly laid underground pipe
and equipment foundation, if any, shall be at least 500mm below the bottom elevation of
such trenches/pipes.
1.4.5 Cross bond or suitable design of earthing shall be employed so that shielding of both sides of each
Cable joint shall be connected to the shielding of the other phase, so as to suppress the induced
voltage. Necessary materials for such appropriate earthing shall be provided by the Contractor.

1.5 Grounding Conductor
1.5.1 Main ground conductor
The main ground system shall consist of a grounding buried minimum one meter below
grade level. The grounding conductor shall consist of. 100sqmm (min) stranded bare copper
conductor cable or appropriate approved design.
1.5.2 Ground electrodes
The ground electrodes shall be 16mm diameter and 1.5-meter long (min.) copper clad steel
or appropriate approved design. These shall be driven into ground and connected to the
main ground grid.
1.6 Design Requirement
1.6.1 The Contractor shall measure the soil resistivity and calculate the total length of buried
ground conductor, number of grounding electrode and their depth, size and spacing to
achieve a grounding system resistance of not more than 1.0 ohm.
1.6.2 The Contractor shall calculate the cross-section considering the maximum fault level.
1.7 Tests
On completion of the installation, either wholly or in sections, it shall be tested in

compliance with relevant code by the Contractor in the presence of the
Employer/Employer's Representative. The cost of any test including labor, material and
equipment charges shall be borne by the contractor. The ground grid resistance to remote
earth shall be 1.0 ohm or less. If this low resistance cannot be obtained as per his design,
then additional grounding conductors shall be buried in the earth, or if necessary, buried in
treated soil to obtain the required low ground resistance.
1.9 Drawings
After award of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish the grounding layout drawing with
dimensions showing the location of grounding grids, electrodes, test link chambers and
risers backed up by necessary calculations for Employer/Employer's Representative
approval. The work shall have to be started at site only after getting approval from the
Engineer. If alternation is required for any work done before getting Employer/Employer's
Representative approval, the same shall have to be done by the Contractor at no extra cost to
the Employer.


(To Be Completed By the Bidder)
33kV U/G Power Cable, 1Core, 185 sq. mm Al. Conductor,XLPE & accessories
DESCRIPTION UNIT NEA REQ. DATA to
be Filled
33kV 33kV
1 Manufacturer and Country of Origin
2 Year of manufacturing experience Years 5
3 Catalogue/drawing submitted Yes
4 Applicable standard IEC
5 Copies of Standards Attached Yes
6 Type
7 Number of Cores No. 1
8 Rated Voltage kV 33
9 Maximum System voltage kV 36.3
10 Rated Voltage between conductor and screen kV 36.3/3
11 Rated Voltage between two conductors kV 36.3
12 Conductor Material Aluminium
13 Cross section of the Conductor mm2
14 Cross section of each wire mm2
15 No.& diameter of wire in each conductor No./mm
16 Class of Stranding Class 2
17 Operating Capacitance F/km 0.2
18 Maximum Conductor Temperature C 90 90
19 Thickness of Conductor Screen mm 0.6
20 Thickness of XLPE insulation mm 8
21 Thickness of Insulation Screen mm 0.7
22 Thickness of Copper Screen mm 0.12
23 Nominal Thickness of PVC Inner sheath mm 1.3
24 Copper Screen with water tight design yes/no yes yes
25 Armour Sheath provided? yes/no yes yes
26 Nominal Thickness of PVC Outer Sheath mm 2.5
27 Overall Diameter of the Cable mm
28 Continuous current rating at 45 deg. C. ambient
- in ground A
- in duct A
29 Short circuit current
- 0.1 sec kA
- 1.0 sec (minimum kA) kA 17.7
30 Electrical parameter
- Resistance/km
- Reactance/km
- Capacitance/km
31 Max. Partial Discharge

32 AC Test Voltage for 5 min. kV 63

33 Insulation Level:
-Power frequency Withstand Voltage kV 76
-Impulse Withstand, Crest kV 170
34 Min. Insulation Resistance ohms 10378*106
35 Max.Conductor DC Resistance at 20 Deg. C Ohm/km 0.164
36 Geometric Mean Radius (GMR) of the Cable/Conductor mm 6.3
37 Fire resistance treated Yes/No Yes
38 Is manufacturer is ISO 9001 holder? Yes/No Yes
39 ISO 9001 (with design) certificate submitted? Yes/No Yes
40 Type test certificate submitted? Yes/No Yes
41 User's certificate submitted? Yes/No Yes
42 Standard drum length Meter
43 Approx. Net Weight per Meter of cable kg
44 Net weight of cable in drum kg
Straight Through Joint
47 Catalogue Number
48 Copies of Governing Standards Attached Yes
50 Copies of type test attached Yes/no Yes
51 Type
52 Is Splice Kit Performed or Tape
53 splicing voltage level kV 36.3
54 Power frequency withstand voltage kV 75
55 Impulse withstand voltage(BIL) KV
56 Installation Instruction attached Yes/No yes
57 Is ISO 9001 certificate submitted? Yes/No Yes
58 Technical literature/drawings submitted? Yes/No Yes
Deviations from technical requirements:
Signed.
As Representative for
Addreess:
Date:.


36 kV, cable Joint cabinet with accessories 1
DESCRIPTION UNIT NEA REQ DATA to

be Filled

3 Catalogue Number
4 Copies of Governing Standards Attached Yes
6 Copies of type test attached Yes/no Yes
7 Type Outdoor
8 Rated Voltage kV 36
9 Rated current A 630
10 Power frequency withstand voltage kV
12 Installation Instruction attached Yes/No yes
14 Size of the enclosure yes
15 Protection of the enclosure yes
16 type of cable Connectors Yes
17 provision of Cable earthing/discharging with special yes/no yes
earthing devices and tools
18 Enclosure of hot-dip galvanized steel plate with additional yes/no yes
corrosion protection on underground components
19 description of accessories submitted yes

Signed.
Addreess:
Date:.


33 kV, Out Door Termination Kit

be Filled
33kV 33kV
3 Catalogue Number
5 Copies of Applicable Standards Attached Yes/No yes
6 Type
7 Copies of type test Attached
8 Stress relief performed Yes/no
9 Terminator insulation level kV
10 Insulation Material XLPE
11 Maximum design voltage kV 36
13 Installation Instruction attached Yes/no yes
14 Fire resistance treated Yes/no Yes
15 Smoke resistance treated Yes/no yes
Signed.
Addreess:
Date:.


( to be completed by the Tenderer)
LIGHTING ARRESTOR
To be filled
S. No Description Unit NEA requirement by Bidder
Model No.
2 Year of manufacturing experience Years
3 Applicable Standards IEC
4 Type outdoor, gapless,

zinc oxide
5 Voltage rating of LA kV 30
6 Nominal Discharge Current kA 10
7 Surge counter with insulating base furnished yes/no yes
8 Minimum power frequency spark over voltage kV
9 Maximum 1/50 impulse spark over voltage kV

10 Maximum front wave spark over voltage kV
11 Maximum switch surge spark over voltage kV
12 Number of section per pole
13 Insulation level
13.1 Impulse withstand voltage (peak) kV 170
13.2 Power frequency withstand voltage (1min rms) kV 75
14 Creepage distance mm 825
15 Earth terminal and accessories provided yes/no yes
16 Surge counter yes/no yes
17 ISO 9001 holder yes/no yes

18 ISO 9001 certificate submitted yes/no yes
19 Type test certificate submitted yes/no yes
Signed..
As Representative for..
Address
Date


: FLEXIBLE PIPE
DESCRIPTION UNIT NEA REQ DATA to be

Filled
33kV 33kV

2 Applicable standard
3 Type Corrugated hard
polyethylene
4 diameter of the pipe mm
5 Tensile Strength
6 Compressive strength
7 Bending Strength
8 Technical Literature submitted Yes/No yes
9 Type test certificate submitted Yes/No yes
Signed.
Addreess:
Date:.


High voltage Warning/Danger Sheet

be Filled
1 Manufacturer
3 Type of Material
4 Size
Signed.
Addreess:
Date:.


GROUNDING SYSTEM
To be
NEA filled by
S. No Description Unit requirement Bidder
1 Main ground grid conductor material copper

2 Main ground grid conductor size sq.mm
3 Depth of buried main ground conductor
4 Material of riser copper
Cross-section of riser conductor sq.mm
5 Type of joint above and below ground level
6 Ground electrode
copper clad
Material steel
Diameter mm
Length m as per IEEE80
7 Fench grounding included
8 Cross section of conductor rise for fench ground sq.mm
9 Fench separately grounded by electrode yes/no yes
Calculation for grounding grid length and conductor
10 size furnished yes/no yes
11 Earthing system designed for ohm <1
Signed..
Address
Date

B3.POLYETHYLENE POWER CABLE AND ACCESSORIES

(XLPE POWER CABLE AND ACCESSORIES)
1. Scope
This Specification covers fabrication and supply of 12 kV Single-core cross-linked
polyethylene insulated power cable.
2. Description
2.1 The 12 kV XLPE power cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC
60502-2 or the latest version thereof or other equivalent international standards that ensures at
least a substantially equal quality to the standard mentioned above.
2.2 The manufacturer of the XLPE Cable must have been accredited with ISO 9001 including
design quality certification.
2.3 The cable shall be cross-linked polyethylene insulated, PVC separation sheathed, steel tape
armored and PVC outer sheathed.
2.4 The conductor shall consist of compact round stranded hard drawn aluminum wires. They
shall comply with the latest IEC standard or any other national or international standards that
ensure at least a substantially equal quality to the standard mentioned above will also be
acceptable. The maximum conductor temperature shall be 90 deg. C.
2.5 Each conductor shall be wrapped with a layer of semi-conducting tape or free stripping
extrusion as a conductor (strand) screen. The conductor shall be insulated by cross-linked
polyethylene material (XLPE). The XLPE layer shall be surrounded by insulation screen of
semiconducting tape or free stripping extrusion. Above the insulation screen a metallic screen
of plain copper tape shall be provided. All three conductors shall be assembled together with
fillers and bound with a tape, which shall be again warped in PVC inner covering.
2.6 A double layer of galvanized steel tape shall be provided for mechanical protection of the
cable.
2.7 The outer covering of the cable shall be black PVC suitable for the operating temperature of
cable and shall meet the requirements of the IEC Standard or any other national or
international standards that ensure at least a substantially equal quality to the standard
mentioned above will also be acceptable.
2.8 The maximum thickness of insulation at any point shall not fall below the nominal value by
more than 0.1 mm plus 10% of the nominal value.
2.9 The minimum thickness of separation sheath or outer sheath at any point shall not fall below
the nominal value more than 0.2mm plus 2% of the nominal value.
2.10 Rating and features of the cables to be furnished shall be as per the Table 1.

2.11 The outer covering of the cable shall be embossed with the name of the manufacturer, name
of the Purchaser "NEA ", number of conductors, the cross sections, type of insulation
followed by "Electric Cable: 12,000 Volts" at the spacing of 5 meters. Every 2 meters of outer
covering of the cable shall also be embossed with length of the cable.
2.12 Phase identification for three core cables shall be in accordance with the following:
Phase A (R): Red

Phase B (S): Yellow
Phase C (T): Blue
3. Testing
3.1 Type tests
The Bidder shall submit the type test reports along with the Bid. The report shall be issued
by a recognized independent testing authority. The rests shall comply with IEC 60502 Part II
Standard or latest equivalent standard. The employer also reserves the right to have tests
carried out at his own cost by and independent agency, whenever there is a dispute regarding
the quality of supply. The ABC shall be subjected to the following type tests:
partial discharge test;

bending test, followed by a partial discharge test;
tan d measurement;
heating cycle test, followed by a partial discharge test;
impulse test, followed by a voltage test;
voltage test for 4 h.
3.2 The routine tests of the cable shall be done at manufacturer's plant in accordance with IEC-
60502-2, or equivalent latest international standards including following tests.
measurement of the electrical resistance of conductors;

partial discharge test on cables having cores with conductor screens and insulation
screens;
voltage test (see 16.4)
4. Packaging
4.1 Each reel of conductor furnished shall contain only one (1) length of cable.
4.2 The reels shall be made of steel suitably protected against corrosion. Protective external
lagging of sufficient thickness shall be provided and fitted closely on the reels. Binder
consisting of steel straps shall be provided over the external laggings. The drum shall be
new and sufficiently rugged in construction to withstand ocean shipping, road transport,
several loading and unloading, storage in tropics, hauling and field erection of cables
without distortion or disintegration.

4.3 All reel shall be legibly marked in paint with the following information:
a) Size of cable
b) Color of insulation
c) Length in meters
d) Net weight of cable
5. ACCESSORIES
5.1 The cable accessories described hereunder shall be suitable for the above cables. The cable
accessories shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the relevant IEC standard or
any other national or international standards that ensure at least a substantially equal quality to
the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
The manufacturer of the Cable accessories must have been accredited with ISO 9001 with
5.2 Outdoor Type Termination

The outdoor type termination shall be suitable for steel cross-arm mounting and termination
the three cores of the cable. Terminal lugs shall be suitable for aluminum or cooper
conductor in the range of 95 sq. mm. thorough 240 sq. mm. Terminations that do not require
manually built stress relief cones or field pouring of compound shall be supplied.
5.3 Indoor Type Termination
The indoor type termination shall be suitable for terminating the three cores of the cable in
a junction box or bus panel. Terminal lugs shall be suitable to mounting to a standard tinned
copper bus bar or back-to-back. Terminations that do not require manually built stress relief
cones or field pouring of compound shall be supplied.
5.4 Jointing Kit

The jointing kit shall be suitable for jointing three cores of the cable. Kits shall include all
necessary joints, shielding bridge, tape, etc necessary to join two like cable sections together
in either a direct buried or vault environment. Kits that do not require manually built stress
relief cones or field pouring of compound shall be supplied.
5.5 Each of the above terminations/kits shall be complete in every respect and include clear,
detailed instructions in English illustrating steps by step procedure of their application.
5.6 Accessories shall match the cable test ratings on all respects.
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of the manufacturer
rejection.

7.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the Standard governing
manufacturer of the cable and two (2) clear copies of all other relevant standards referenced
therein.
7.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of all types of cables as required by
governing standards.
7.3 The Bidder shall provide complete description, catalogue and certified drawings of all types
of cables.

any.
7.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be bound
separately from the Bid documents.

TABLE1: RATINGSANDFEATURES
1. Nominal Cross-section of
Conductor, sq. mm. 300
2. Nominal Thickness of XLPE, mm 3.4
3. AC Test Voltage for 5 min. kV 15
4. Insulation Level:
a) Power Frequency Withstand, rms kV 28

b) Impulse Withstand Test, kV 75
5. Applicable Standard IEC or Equivalent


Item: Cross Linked Power Cable
Description Unit
A. CABLE
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalogue/ drawings Yes/No
attached? Yes/No
6. Rated Voltage kV
7. No. of Cores
8. Conductor
9. Nominal Cross-sectional area mm2 300
10. Thickness of Conductor Screen mm
11. Thickness of XLPE Insulation mm
12. Thickness of Insulation Screen mm
13. Thickness of Copper Screen Tape
(Minimum) mm
14. Nominal Thickness of PVC
Inner Sheath mm
15. No. and Nominal Thickness of
Steel Armour Tape mm
16. Nominal Thickness of PVC Outer Sheath mm
17. Overall Diameter mm
18. Approximate Net Weight per Meter kg
19. Approx. Conductor DC Resistance
at 20 Deg. C Ohm/km
20. AC Test Voltage for 5 min. Volts
21. Max. Partial Discharge
22. Min. Insulation Resistance Ohms
23. Insulation Level:
Power Frequency Withstand Voltage kV
Impulse Withstand, Crest kV

B. TERMINATORS OUTDOOR
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalogue Number
3. Governing Standard
4. Copies of Governing Standards Attached? Yes/No

attached? Yes/No
6. Stress Relief Performed? Yes/No
7. Insulation Material
8. Terminator Insulation Level kV
9. Max. Design Voltage kV
10. Impulse Withstand (BIL) kV
11. Drawings Attached? Yes/No
12. Installation Instruction Attached? Yes/No
C. CABLE JOINTING KIT
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalogue Number
4. Copies of Governing Standards Attached? Yes/No

attached? Yes/No
6. Is Splice Kit Preformed or Tape?
7. Is Splice Suitable for Direct

Burial? Yes/No
8. Splice Voltage Class kV
9. Impulse Withstand (BIL) kV
10. Drawings Attached? Yes/No
11. Installation Instruction Attached? Yes/No

HDPE PIPE and PPR PIPES

1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of 140 mm Flexible HDPE Pipe and PPR
Pipes used for 300 sq mm XLPE power cable in underground 11kV distribution system.
2. Description
The HDPE pipes are black and PPR are green in colour processing smooth internal and external
surface which should suitable for inserting cable.
The HDPE pipes shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with BS: 3412, Class N HDPE
or any revision thereof or other equivalent national or international standard provided that
ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
The minimum tensile strength of the pipe shall be 240 kg/cm2.
The HDPE pipe should be suitable for 4 kgf/cm2 pressures with thickness not less than 6.5
mm and weight of the HDPE pipe should not be less than 2.5 kg per meter. The HDPE pipe
shall have a minimum tensile strength of 3200 kg/mm2.The carbon content should not
increase more than 2.5% in total. The HDPE pipes should have design at 27 deg C for a stress
of over 50 kg/cm2 with safety factor of 1.3.
The PPR pipes shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with EN ISO 15874, Class PN20
and PN25 or any revision thereof or other equivalent national or international standard
provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will also
be acceptable. The specific chemical structure of green PPR should be present to provide the
well balanced mechanical properties and superior long term heat resistance.
3. Tests
The type test and routine tests shall be carried out for the materials to be supplied according
to the above mention technical specification in accordance with the governing standard.
4. Packaging
The packing should be done for the materials to be supplied accordingly.
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of the manufacturer which
includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shall include, among others,
information to meet the following requirement.



2008
fabrication and testing of materials and two (2) clear copies of all other relevant standards
referenced therein.
6.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, and catalogue of materials.
6.3 The Bidder shall provide certified test report as required by governing standards for
materials.

any.
the Bid documents.

B4.XLPE COVERED CONDUCTOR

1. Scope
This Specification covers the general requirements of design, manufacture and testing of
XLPE covered aluminum alloy conductor for 11kV overhead distribution system.
2. Description
2.1 The manufacturer of the covered conductor must have been accredited with ISO 9001 quality
certification (including design of said conductor in the scope of registration).
2.2 The conductor shall be of multi-strand round compacted hard drawn aluminum alloy
conforming to AS 3675 with latest revision thereof or any recognized international
standards that ensures at least a substantially equal quality to the standard mentioned above.
The Conductor wires shall not have any joints except for those made on the base wire.
2.3 The covering insulating material shall be of track resistant UV stabilized (weather resistant).
The average thickness of the covering insulation shall not be less than that stipulated in the
Technical Requirements. The hardness of the covering XLPE shall be such that it should not
get damaged by the kite string and shall be suitable for fixing insulation piercing Arc
Protectors. The covering shall be fully pressure extruded and dry cured so as to provide a
uniform thickness throughout the length of the conductor.
2.4 Suitable water blocking material shall be incorporated between the conductor and the
covering during the extrusion process to prevent the ingress of water along the conductor. The
water blocking material shall be of contrasting colour to that of the conductor. The water
blocking material shall not affect the inter-strand conduction and also not affect the adhesion
between the conductor and the XLPE cover. Water blocking material shall be stable at
maximum operating temperature of 80oC and full technical particulars with regard to the
above shall be furnished with the offer.
2.5 The following types of covered conductors shall be supplied:
2
A)Nominalconductorareamm 120
i) Number of strands Nos. - 7
ii) Diameter of the wire mm - 4.75
iii) Nominal conductor diameter mm - 14.5
0
iv) Max. linear resistance at 20 C Ohms/km - 0.239
B)CoveringInsulation
i) Minimum average thickness of XLPE covering mm - 2.0
ii) Minimum thickness of XLPE covering at any point - 1.7
iii) Maximum thickness of XLPE covering at any point - 2.5

C) Covered Conductor
i) Minimum breaking strength of conductor (kN) 27.1

ii) Short time current rating/1sec. (kA) 11.0
iii) Conductor Operating Temperatures (Max.)
0
1) Continuous operation C - 80
0
2) Emergency operation C - 100
0
3) Short circuit operation (5 sec) C - 210
iv) Covered conductor overall diameter range mm - 19.3 to 21.9
3. Packaging
3.1 The finished covered conductors shall be delivered in continuous lengths of 500 5 meters
and the ends of the covered conductors shall be effectively sealed with heat shrinkable cap to
prevent ingress of moisture. The conductor shall be wound to the drum with the lowest
number at the inner end of the drum. They shall be supplied in wooden drums made of well-
seasoned wood that is treated to prevent deterioration by termites or fungus attack and suitable
for outdoor storage of twelve (12) months or steel drums. The chemical used for treating the
wood shall not be harmful to the conductor and the drum shall be lined with an impervious
material to prevent direct contact of the covered conductor with the drum.
The external flange diameter shall be such that the distance between the outer edge of the
flange and the packed conductor shall not be less than 75mm so that the drum could be rolled
on the flanges without causing damage to the conductor. Direction of rolling shall be clearly
marked.
The drum shall have spindle hole of adequate diameter and reinforced with steel plates for
mounting the drum on horizontal axle for laying out the conductor.
a) Size of conductor
b) Type of conductor
c) Length in meters
d) Net weight of conductor
e) Direction of rolling
3.4 The standard length of the completed covered conductor in each reel shall be as per the table
below:
Conductor Size (sq. mm): 120
Normal Length of the Conductor (m): 500

4. Tests
4.1 Routine Tests

The manufactured conductor shall be tested in full compliance with the governing standard
including following routine tests:
Test on wire before stranding
i) Wire diameter
ii) Ultimate tensile strength
iii) Wrapping test
iv) Resistivity test
Test on finished covered conductor
i) Inter-strand conductivity test
ii) Thickness of covering
iii) Static water blocking test
iv) Stripping test
v) Spark test
4.2 Type Tests
The Bidder shall submit the type test reports along with the Bid. The Covered Conductors
shall be type tested conforming to AS 3675 of 1993 or revisions thereof, or IEC Standard or
UK ESI or NFC and certified copies of the type test certificates shall be furnished with the
bid. The test shall have been carried out in internationally recognized independent testing
authority. The employer also reserves the right to have tests carried out at his own cost by an
independent agency, whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of supply. The cable
shall be subjected to the following type tests:
a) Tests on wire before stranding
b) Tests on covering material
c) Tests on finished covered conductor
The Type Test Certificates furnished shall be from a recognized independent testing
authority acceptable to the purchaser.
5.1 The Bidder shall provided with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governing standards for
fabrication and testing of the covered conductor and two (2) clear copies of all other relevant
5.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of the types of covered conductor as
5.3 The Bidder shall also furnish the Certificate of Compliance at the time of the shipment of each
lot of conductor, or as required by the appropriate section of the equivalent international
standard.
any.

Item XLPE Insulated Covered Conductor
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
4. Copies of type test attached? Yes/No
5. If standards is not AS:3675

are conductor specifications same as the
BS:215 requirements in respect of the following?:
Diameter Yes/No
Strand size Yes/No
Direction of lay Yes/No
Lay ratio Yes/No
Materials Yes/No
6. Technical data:
Nominal diameter (mm)

Stranding (Al/Steel)
Breaking strength (kN)
Mass (kg/km)
Resistance at 20o C

B5.LV AERIAL BUNDLED CONDUCTOR (ABC) WITH NEUTRAL MESSENGER

SUPPORT
1. Scope
This Specification covers the design, manufacture, factory test and supply of 0.6/1 kV cross-
linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated with insulated neutral messenger conductor supporting
aerial bundled conductors (ABC) for use in the construction of 400/230V, 3-phase, 1-neutral,
1-street lighting, distribution systems.
2. Description
2.1 The cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with UK ESI Standard 43-
14:"Aerial Bundled Conductors XLPE Insulated for LV Overhead Distribution", or BS-7870
(Part V) or latest revision thereof or any recognized international standards that ensure at
least a substantially equal quality to the standards mentioned above.
2.2 The ABC Cable manufacturing company shall have been accredited with ISO 9001:2000
(design included) quality certification.
2.3 The ABC shall be insulated aluminum neutral messenger conductor supported type.
2.4 The conductor shall consist of compact round stranded aluminum wires. The conductor shall
be insulated by extruded black cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) material.
2.5 The complete cable shall consist of five insulated conductors stranded together, and the
direction of lay shall be right-hand. The type of construction shall cause the tensile load to be
shared equally between conductors.
2.6 The outer covering of the R phase of the cable shall be embossed with the name of the
manufacturer, name of the Purchaser " NEA- ", the cross sections, type of insulation followed
by "Electric Cable: 600/1100 Volts" at the spacing of 5 meters. Every 2 meters of outer
covering of the cable shall also be embossed with length of the cable.
2.7 The phase conductor shall be of multi-strand round compact hard drawn aluminum
conforming to IEC 61089 with XLPE insulation. The detail technical specifications for phase
conductor of the ABC are given in Table 1: Technical Data.
2.8 The lighting conductor shall be of multi-strand round compact hard drawn aluminum
conforming to IEC 61089 with XLPE insulation. The detail technical specifications for
lighting conductor of the ABC are given in Table 1: Technical Data.
2.9 The neutral messenger conductor shall be of multi-strand round compact hard drawn
aluminum conforming to IEC 61089 with XLPE insulation. The detail technical specifications
for street lamp conductor of the ABC are given in Table 1: Technical Data
3. Phase Identification
3.1 The identification of the conductors shall be provided by means of ribbing on the external
surface of the insulation. R, Y and B phase conductors shall have one, two, and three ribs
respectively. Space between the ribs in R, Y and B phases shall be 5 mm.. Ribs shall be in
rounded form. The neutral messenger conductor shall be plain without any ribs.
4 Testing
4.1 Type tests
The bidder shall submit the type test reports along with the Bid. The report shall be issued
by an independent accredited testing laboratory. The tests shall comply with relevant IEC
Standard or AS or UK ESI or NFC standard. The Employer also reserves the right to have
tests carried out at his own cost by an independent agency, whenever there is a dispute
regarding the quality of supply. The ABC shall be subjected to the following type tests:
(i) Mechanical strength of the conductors

(ii) Insulation resistance
(iii) Dielectric test
(iv) Impulse voltage withstand
(v) Resistance of each phase of the conductor at 20oC
(vi) Electrical resistance of phase, neutral and street lamp conductors.
4.2 Routine tests
The tests shall be made on the completed cables at the manufacturer's plant in accordance
with governing standards including following tests:
(i) Verification of diameters of conductor and insulated conductor, and thickness of

insulation, and so on
(ii) Breaking load test
(iii) High voltage test
(iv) Conductor resistance at 20 deg C
(v) Dielectric strength
(vi) Insulation resistance
5. Packaging
5.2 All conductors shall be furnished on non-returnable seasoned wooden reels or steel suitably
protected against corrosion. All timber shall be treated to provide protection against rot and
insects. Protective external lagging of sufficient thickness shall be provided and fitted
closely on the reels. Binder consisting of steel straps shall be provided over the external
laggings. The reel shall be new and sufficiently sturdy in construction to withstand ocean
shipping, road transport, several loading and unloading, storage in tropics, hauling and field
erection of conductor without distortion or disintegration. The treatment process shall not
have deleterious effect on the cable.
Before dispatch, the ends of the bundled conductors shall be sealed to prevent moisture
ingress during transportation and storage. Both ends of every length of the assembled
bundle shall be temporarily bound in such a manner as to prevent cores from separating.
(i) Type of conductor

(ii) Size of conductor
(iii) voltage
(iv) Length in meters
(v) Net weight of conductor and Drum Separately
(vi) Direction of rolling
5.4 The standard length of the completed conductor in each reel shall be as per the table below:
Cable Size (sq. mm): 95 &70
NormalLengthoftheConductor(m): 500

Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of the
manufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shall
include, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing which the
Bid shall be liable for rejection.

7.1 The Bidder shall furnish with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the Standard governing the
fabrication and testing of XLPE insulated LV ABC and two (2) clear copies of the all other
Standards referenced therein.
7.2 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) sets of complete description, catalogue, drawings showing
general construction and size of the cables. The Bidder shall also furnish dimensional drawing
of cable drum for each type of ABC.

7.3 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) clear certified copies of all type tests performed on all types
of cables offered.

any.
the Bid documents.

TABLE 1
TECHNICAL DATA
MESSENGER WIRE CONDUCTOR SUPPORTING LV ABC
Number of phase conductor 3

Nominal cross sectional area of phase
95&70
conductor, mm2
Number of neutral messenger conductor 1
Nominal cross sectional area of neutral
95
messenger conductor, mm2
Number of wires in conductor 19
Form of conductor Stranded compacted circular
Min. diameter of conductor, mm 11.3
Nominal thickness of insulation mm 1.7
Nominal diameter over insulation mm 14.9
Max. continuous current carrying capacity 225
per phase (A)
Max. dc resistance of conductor at 20 deg. 0.320
C, /km
Min. breaking load of conductor, kN 13.3
Min. breaking load of cable, kN 53.2


Item LV ABC
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalogue/ drawings Yes/No

attached? Yes/No
6. Rated Voltage kV
7. No. of Cores
8. Conductor
9. Nominal cross-sectional area mm2
10. Diameter of conductor
-minimum mm
-maximum mm
11. Minimum breaking load of conductor kN
12. Minimum breaking load of cable kN
13. Min. thickness of XLPE insulation at any point mm
(excluding ribs)
14. Max. thickness of XLPE insulation at any point mm
(excluding ribs)
15. Maximum overall diameter of the core mm
(excluding ribs)
16. Approximate net weight per meter kg
17. Max. continuous current carrying capacity A
per phase
18. Maximum conductor dc resistance at 20 deg. C /km
19. Maximum conductor ac resistance at 80 deg. C /km
20. Positive sequence reactance of cable at 50 Hz /km
21. Minimum insulation resistance M-km

C.PORCELAIN INSULATORS
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of pin insulators, disc insulators and
stay insulators, as herein specified for use on overhead power line construction.
2. General
2.1 Insulators shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with the Standards referenced for each
type of insulator or equivalent standards.
2.2 Porcelain shall be sound, free from defects, thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed. The
glaze shall be brown in color. The glaze shall cover all exposed parts of the insulators.
2.3 The design of insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any
part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. The porcelain shall not engage directly
with hard metal.
2.4 The cement used in construction of insulators shall not give rise to chemical reaction with
metal fittings and its thickness shall be as uniform as possible.
2.5 The insulators should be manufactured in automatic temperature-controlled kilns to obtain
uniform baking and better electrical and mechanical properties.
2.6 The manufacturer of the Insulators must have been accredited with ISO 9001 (including
design in the scope of registration) quality certification.
C1. PIN INSULATOR
The pin insulator shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 731-1971 and
IS:3188 or the latest version thereof or any other national or international standards that
ensures at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above, will also be
acceptable. The lead thread shall be compatible with the insulator pin specified in these
documents.
The pin insulator shall have following ratings and features:

Highest system voltage 12 kV 36kV
Rated voltage 11 kV 33kV
Creepage distance (min) 265 mm 580mm
Wet power frequency withstand voltage 35 kV 75 kV
Impulse withstand voltage 75 kV 170kV
Puncture power frequency voltage (min) 105 kV 180kV
Visible discharge voltage (Effective) 9 kV 27kV
Cantilever strength 5 KN 10KN
G I pin head Small Large
IS Ref.165P Thimble type IS 2486 Part I-II

C2.DISC INSULATOR
The disc insulator shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 731-1971 or
latest version thereof or any other national or international standards that ensures at least
equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
The disc insulator shall be ball and socket fitting type. The disc insulator shall have the
following ratings and features:
- Highest system Voltage 12 kV

- Rated Voltage 11 kV
- Porcelain Diameter (min) 255 mm
- Spacing 145 mm
- Creepage Distance (min) 280 mm
- Power Frequency Puncture 1.3 x Actual dry
withstand Voltage flashover voltage
- Wet Power Frequency Withstand Voltage 35 kV
- Impulse Withstand Voltage 75 kV
- Puncture Power Frequency
Voltage (min) 105 kV
- Visible Discharge Voltage 9 kV
- Mechanical Strength 45 kN
- Ball and Socket Size 16 mm B
- Applicable Standard for IS: 3188-1980
Special Characteristics
C3. STAY INSULATOR
The stay insulator shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 5300-1969 or
latest version thereof or any other national or international standards that ensures at least
equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
The stay insulator shall have the following ratings and features:
- Highest system Voltage 12 kV
- Rated Voltage 11 kV
- Creepage Distance (min) 41 mm
- Minimum failing load > 40 kN
- Power Frequency Withstand Voltage
Dry 18 kV
Wet 8 kV
- IS designation A
Marking

Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following:
a) Name or trademark of manufacturer.
b) Year of manufacture.
c) Minimum failing load in Newton
d) Name of Project NEA-DSRLRP
Markings on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing.
Tests
The insulators shall comply with the following tests as per IS: 731-1971.
Type Test
a. Visual examination,,
b. Verification of dimensions,
c. Visible discharge test,
d. Impulse voltage withstand test,
e. Wet power frequency voltage withstand test
f. Temperature cycle test,
g. Mechanical failing load test
h. 24-hour mechanical strength test for strain insulators
i. Puncture test
j. Porosity test and
k. Galvanizing test
Routine Test :
The following pre-shipment factory inspection / tests shall be performed on the pin insulators
in the presence of the two inspectors appointed by NEA before delivery.
Visual examination
Mechanical routine test
Electrical routine test
BID DOCUMENTATION
The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governing standards for
fabrication and testing of pin insulator and insulator pin and two (2) clear copies of all other
relevant standards referenced therein.
The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of pin insulator and insulators pin as
The Bidder shall provide standard catalogue and certified dimensional drawings of pin
insulator and insulator pins.
A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance and deviations, if
any.
All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be bound separately from
the Bid documents.


Item: Pin Insulator
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalogue/ Dimensional drawings Yes/No

attached?
Yes/No
6. Marking as per specifications Yes/No
7. Ratings:
Highest System Voltage kV
Rated Voltage kV
Creepage Distance (min) mm
Wet Power Frequency Withstand Voltage kV
Impulse Withstand Voltage kV
Puncture Power Frequency Voltage (min) kV
Visible Discharge Voltage (Effective) kV
Cantilever Strength kN
G.I. Pin Head
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________


Item: Pin Insulator
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalogue/ Dimensional drawings Yes/No

attached?
Yes/No
7. Ratings:
Highest System Voltage kV
Rated Voltage kV
Visible Discharge Voltage (Effective) kV
Cantilever Strength kN
G.I. Pin Head
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________


Item: Disc Insulator
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
1. Catalog/Dimensional drawings Yes/No
5. Copies of type test Yes/No
attached?
7. Ratings:
Highest system Voltage kV
Rated Voltage kV
Porcelain Diameter (min) mm
Spacing mm
Power Frequency Puncture Withstand Voltage kV

Visible Discharge Voltage kV
Mechanical Strength kN
Ball and Socket Size mm
Applicable Standard
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________


Item: Stay Insulator
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalog/Dimensional drawings Yes/No
attached?
7. Ratings:
Highest system Voltage kV
Rated Voltage kV
Minimum failing load kN
Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (1 min)

Dry kV
Wet kV
IS Designation
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

C4.DISC INSULATOR FITTINGS
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of tension type disc insulator fittings, for use on
overhead power line construction.
2. Description
The disc insulator fittings shall be supplied with ball and socket couplings and twisted straps. The
insulator fittings shall conform to the shape and dimension shown in the drawings.
3. Material
3.1 Disc insulator fittings like Ball and socket, nuts, bolts shall be made of hot rolled steel and the
twisted cross arm strap shall be made of MS sheet metal. Cotter bolts and U-bolts shall be of
galvanized steel. Cotter pins shall be of stainless steel.
3.2 All forgings and castings shall be of good finish and free from flaws and other defects. The
edges on the outside of fittings, such as the ball socket and holes, shall be rounded. The
nominal dimensions of the ball and socket, ball eye and twisted cross arm straps, are given in
Drawings. The ultimate strength of the fittings shall not be less than 41 KN.
4. Galvanizing
All ferrous fittings and the parts other than those of stainless steel, shall be hot dip galvanized as per
IS: 2629-1985 or equal internationally recognized standards.
5. Tests
The disc insulator fittings shall comply with the following tests as per IS: 2486 or equivalent national
or international standard.
5.1 Type Test

- Verification of Dimensions,
- Visual Examination Test
- Slip Strength Test,
- Mechanical Test,

- Electrical Resistance Test,

- Heating Cycle Test.
5.2 Acceptance Tests

- Verification of dimensions,
- Galvanizing,
- Mechanical Tests.
5.3 Routine Tests

- Visual Examination Test
- Routine Mechanical Test
6. BID DOCUMENTATION
fabrication and testing of disc insulator and disc insulator fittings and two (2) clear copies of
all other relevant standards referenced therein.
6.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of disc insulator and disc insulator fittings
as required by governing standards.
6.3 The Bidder shall provide standard catalogue and certified dimensional drawings of disc
insulator and disc insulator fittings.

any.
the Bid documents.

0
Item: Disc Insulator Fittings
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer/Catalogue No.
2. Dimensional drawings
attached? Yes/No

attached? Yes/No
6. Steel Classification
7. Ferrous parts are galvanized As per

IS 2629 1985? Yes/No
8. Cotter Pins are Stainless Steel? Yes/No
9. Ultimate Strength of Fittings kN
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

1
C5.INSULATOR PINS
1. Scope
This specification covers the fabrication and supply of bolt type cross arm insulator pins.
2. Description
The insulator pin to be supplied shall conform to the nominated standards or to internationally
accepted standards and to the shape and dimensions shown in the drawings contained in this
specification. The insulator pin shall be furnished with a spring steel split lock washer and nut
assembled on the insulator pin. The ratings and features of the insulator pins shall be as
follows:
For 11 kV For 33kV

Head type Small S165P LargeL300N
Total length 315 mm 450mm
Stalk length 165 mm 300mm
Shank length 150 mm 150mm
Minimum failing load 5 KN 10KN
Applicable standard IS: 2486 (Part I & II) or equivalent nationalor
international standard.
The insulator pins shall be compatible with the insulators specified above.
3. Material
The insulator pins specified herein shall be fabricated from hot rolled steel. The pin shall be a single
piece obtained preferably by the process of forging. It shall not be made by jointing, welding,
shrink fitting or any other processes from more than one piece of material. It shall be of good
finish free from flaws and other defects. The finish of the collar shall be such that a sharp
angle between the collar and the shank is avoided.
4. Galvanizing
All ferrous pins, nuts and washers except those made of stainless steel shall be hot dip galvanized.
The threads of nuts shall be cut after galvanizing and shall be well oiled and greased. The
galvanizing shall conform to IS 2629-1985 or equivalent national or international standard.
5. Finish
All insulator pins shall be reasonably smooth on all surfaces and free of sharp projections.
6. Tests
Insulator pins shall comply with the following tests as per IS: 2486.

2
6.1 Type Tests

- Visual examination test,
- Checking of threads on head,
- Galvanizing test,
- Mechanical test.
6.2 Acceptance Tests

- Checking of threads on head,
- Galvanizing test,
- Mechanical test.
6.3 Routine Test

- Visual examination.
fabrication and testing of pin insulator and insulator pin and two (2) clear copies of all other
7.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of pin insulator and insulators pin as
7.3 The Bidder shall provide standard catalogue and certified dimensional drawings of pin
insulator and insulator pins.

any.
the Bid documents.

3
Item: Insulator Pins
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Type of Steel Used
3. Dimensional drawings Yes/No

attached?
4 Governing Standard

attached?
7. Ratings and Features:

Head Type
Total Length (mm)
Stalk Length (mm)
Shank Length (mm)
Minimum Failing Load (kN)
Applicable Standard
Catalogue Number
IS reference
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

4
D .CROSSARMS AND BRACING ANGLES

D1. CROSSARMS
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized steel cross-arms and
bracing members commonly used in overhead power line construction.
2. Material
2.1 The steel cross-arms shall be fabricated from hot-rolled channels and angles.
2.2 The steel channels and angles shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with Indian
Standards IS: 226-1975 and IS-808-1964 or any revision thereof or other equivalent national
or international standard provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard
mentioned above will also be acceptable. The minimum tensile strength of the steel shall be
4200 kg/cm2.
3. Description
3.1 The steel cross-arms and bracing angles shall be of sizes shown in the Table 1: Cross-arms
and bracing angles, contained herein.
3.2 Conceptual hole pattern and size of holes on cross-arm channels are shown in appropriate
drawings herein, however, the Supplier must confirm with the Project the locations and
sizes of holes prior to the manufacture.
3.3 The surface of the steel shall be flat after drilling or (punching) and free of dimpling or
imperfections. The hole edges shall be broken by reaming. The holes shall be full dimension
after galvanizing and no minus tolerance of specified hole size will be accepted.
3.3 The steel cross-arm and bracing angles shall be furnished reasonably smooth on all surfaces
and free of burrs or sharp projections.
4. Galvanizing
4.1 The steel cross-arms and bracing angles shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance
with IS: 2629-1985 or any revision thereof or other equivalent national or international
standard provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above
will also be acceptable..
5. Tests
5.1 Apart from the tests indicated herein in the referenced standards, the channels and angles shall
undergo following tests:
- Visual Inspection;
- Verification of Dimensions;

5
rejection.

fabrication and testing of channels and angles and two (2) clear copies of all other relevant
7.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, catalogue and certified dimensional
drawings of all channels and angles.

any.

6
TABLE 1: STEEL CROSSARM CHANNELS AND ANGLE BRACES
S.NO. Type Dimension in mm. Ref.

Description DWG.
1. 11 kV, Single Pole, Triangular:
1.1 Pole Top Channel 100x50x6.4x5x300 DWG.8H
1.2 Standard Channel 100x50x6.4x5x1200 DWG.9H
2. 11 kV, Double Pole:

2.1 Standard Channel 100x50x6.4x5x2390 DWG.10H
2.2 Bracing Member Angle 40x40x5x2071 DWG.11H
2.3 Bracing Member Angle 40x40x5x2719 DWG.11H
3. Transformer Platform Complete set

Channel 100x50x6.4x5x2500 CS11-
Channel 100x50x6.4x5x1200 TRN-05
4. Lightning Arrester and Cut-out Support

(at Transformer Platform):
4.1 Support Channel 100x50x6.4x5x2348 DWG.15H

7

Item: Cross-arm and angle
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
3. Minimum tensile strength of steel
4. Is the cross arm and angles fabricated from

hot-rolled steel sections? Yes/No
6. Standard attached? Yes/No
6. Governing Standard for galvanizing
7. Drawings of cross arm and bracing? Yes/No
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

8
D2.FLAT CROSSARM BRACE
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication, testing and supply of flat, galvanized steel cross-arm braces.
2. Material
2.1 The flat cross-arms brace shall be fabricated out of hot rolled steel flat.
2.2 The steel flat for cross-arms brace shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with Indian
Standards IS: 226-1975, and IS-1731-1971 or any revision thereof or other equivalent
national or international standard provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to the
standard mentioned above will also be acceptable. The minimum tensile strength of the steel
shall be 4200 kg/cm2.
3. Description
3.1 The brace shall be furnished reasonably smooth on all surfaces and free of burrs or sharp
projections.
3.3 The brace shall have a minimum tensile strength of 3182 kg at the bolt-hole and bolt slot.
3.4 The brace shall be capable of being bent 10 degrees at the bolt hole or slot and 140 degrees
at any point between hole and slot without cracking of the base metal on the outside of bent
portion.
3.5 The brace shall be drilled and dimensioned in accordance with Dwg.7H attached herein.
4. Galvanizing
4.1 The flat cross arm brace shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with
IS: 2629-1985 or any revision thereof or other equivalent national or international standard
provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will also
be acceptable.

9
5. Tests
Apart from the tests indicated herein in the referenced standards, the flat cross arm brace shall
rejection.

fabrication and testing of flat cross arm brace and two (2) clear copies of all other relevant
7.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, catalogue and certified dimensional
drawings of flat cross arm brace.
any.
the Bid documents.

0

Item: Flat cross-arm brace
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
3. Minimum tensile strength of steel
4. Is the flat cross arm brace fabricated from

hot-rolled steel sections? Yes/No
5. Governing Standard for manufacturing and

testing
6. Governing Standard for galvanizing
7. Standards attached? Yes/No
8. Drawings of flat cross arm brace? Yes/No
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

1

2
D3.TRANSFORMER PLATFORMS
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the fabrication and supply of transformer platforms used in overhead
power line construction.
2. Material
2.1 The transformer platform shall be fabricated from hot rolled channels, angles and steel
members.
2.2 The steel channels and angles for transformer platform shall be fabricated in accordance
with Indian Standards IS: 226-1975 and IS-808-1964 or any revision thereof or other
equivalent national or international standard provided that ensure at least equal or better
quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable. The minimum tensile
strength of the steel shall be 4200 kg/cm2.
3. Description
3.1 The platform shall be fabricated out of galvanized steel members, field assembled by bolting.
3.2 The platform will support the transformer above the ground and will be supported by two-pole
structures of tubular steel or pre-stressed concrete (PSC) poles. Transformers will be bolted to
the platform at four (4) points. Provision should be made for the mounting of transformers of
different physical dimensions and ratings up to 300 kVA.
3.3 The platform shall be designed by the supplier and fabricated, in general, in accordance with
the conceptual configuration shown in Dwg. CS11-TRN-05 contained herein. The design
shall provide support for a transformer of a minimum of 1500 kg in weight with a minimum
safety factor of 2.0. The Platform shall be stiff and shall be capable of withstanding horizontal
forces and an overturning moment due to seismic effects on a transformer with centre of
gravity 0.5 meter above its base and seismic horizontal acceleration of 0.4g. The platform
shall be stiff and shall not visibly deflect under static loading.
3.4 The platform shall be supplied disassembled, complete with all required members and
fastenings. Packing may be made by banding structural members. Fastenings shall be
separately packed. Structural members shall be clearly identified for ease of assembly in
accordance with the assembly drawing furnished by the supplier.
3.5 The platform shall be suitable for fixing to support tubular poles of 150 to 250 mm diameter,
and o PSC poles of rectangular section with 250 to 350 mm in width and 140 to 180 mm
depth.

3
4. Galvanizing
4.1 All ferrous parts of transformer platform shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance
will also be acceptable.
5. Tests
5.1 Apart from the tests indicated herein in the referenced standards, the transformer platform
shall undergo following tests:
rejection.

7.1 A preliminary design of the platform shall be submitted with the Bid. Data to be supplied with
the preliminary design shall be:
a) Steel classification proposed to be used and the characteristics thereof;

4
b) Two copies of Preliminary detail drawings of the proposed platform;
c) Data regarding:
i) Vertical and horizontal loading on poles,

ii) Resultant safety factor,
iii) Resultant deflection,
iv) Resultant percent of allowable tension, compression, and shear limits for the steel
selected and associated fastening,
v) Moments on pole due to seismic effects on the platform and transformers.

any.
the Bid documents.

5

(To be completed by the Bidder)
Item: Transformer Platform
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Preliminary details dwg.

furnished? Yes/No
3. Steel Classification/
Characteristics furnished? Yes/No
4. Governing Standard for galvanization
5. Vertical Load on pole
6. Resultant Safety Factor
7. Resultant Deflection at design load mm
8. % of allowable tension
9. % of allowable compression
10. % of allowable shear limits
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

6
D4.POLE CLAMPS
1. Scope
1.1 This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized steel pole clamps with nuts,
bolts and washers for use on overhead power line construction.
2. Material
2.1 The pole clamp shall be fabricated out of hot-rolled steel flat.
2.2 The steel flat for pole clamp shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with Indian
Standards IS: 226-1975, and IS-1731-1971 or any revision thereof or other equivalent
national or international standard provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to the
standard mentioned above will also be acceptable. The minimum tensile strength of the steel
shall be 4200 kg/cm2.
3. Description
3.1 Outline details of pole clamps are shown in the drawings DWG.1H - DWG.4H. Dimensions
may be changed to comply with the final pole sizes selected. Therefore, the dimensions must
be confirmed with the Project prior to manufacture.
3.2 Two (2) numbers of galvanized, 16 mm. (dia.) X 60mm. (length), fully threaded bolts with
two (2) nuts and washers shall be provided with each pole clamp.
3.3 The fittings shall be free of burrs, splinters, splits, sharp points and edges, which may damage
conductors or show evidence of poor workmanship.
3.5 The pole clamps shall have a minimum tensile strength of 3182 kg at the bolt-hole and bolt
slot.
4. Galvanizing
4.1 The pole clamps and nut, bolts and washers shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance
will also be acceptable.

7
5. Tests
5.1 Apart from the tests indicated herein in the referenced standards, the pole clamps shall
rejection.

7.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, catalogue and two (2) copies of certified
dimensional drawings of pole clamps.

any.
the Bid documents.

8

Item: Pole Clamps
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
4. Drawings of Pole Clamp

furnished? Yes/No
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

9
E. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER,DO,LA,MCCB,GS,EARTHING
E1.SILICON STEEL CORE TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
1. Scope
These specifications cover the requirements of oil-immersed, natural-cooled single and three-
phase distribution transformers suitable for outdoors installation on 11kV and 33 kV, 50 Hz
distribution systems.
2. Service Condition
The transformers shall be designed and constructed for outdoor installation and operation under
the following conditions:
Ambient temperature: -5oC to 45oC

Relative humidity: up to 100%
Altitude: up to 2000m above the mean sea level
3. Standards and Quality Certification
3.1 The equipment specified in this Section of the Contract shall conform to the latest edition of the
appropriate IEC specifications and/or other recognised international standards. In particular:
IEC 60076 Power transformers

IEC 60137 Insulating Bushings for alternating voltages above 1 kV
IEC 60156 Insulating liquids-Determination of the breakdown voltage at power frequency-
test method
IEC 60296 Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers and switchgear
IEC 60551 Determination of transformer and reactor sound levels
IEC 60616 Terminal and tapping materials for power transformer
IEC 60722 Guide to lightning and switching impulse testing of power transformers and
reactors
IEC 60733 Determination of water in insulating oils.
IEC 5493 Protective coating of iron and steel structures against corrosion.
3.2 The manufacturer of the offered transformers must have been accredited with the latest edition of
ISO 9001 (including design in the scope of registration) quality certification.
4. Description
4.1 Technical details are given in Table 1.

4.2 The quantity of the transformers to be supplied has been given in the Price Schedule.

0
4.3 Tank
Each transformer shall be provided with a case of rigid construction, which shall be oil-tight
and gas-tight. The thickness of all tank sides except the tank bottom and cover shall not less
than 3.2 mm. The thickness of tank, the tank bottom and cover shall not be less than 4.0 mm.
The tank shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage or permanent distortion, a pressure
25% greater than the maximum operating pressure. The tank cover shall be bolted. Each
transformer shall be provided with earthing terminal with clamp type connector. The radiator
shall be of pressed steel or corrugated type design.
4.4 Core
The transformer shall be of core type. The cores shall be constructed with interleaved grade
non-aging, high permeability, grain oriented and cold rolled silicon steel laminations, properly
treated after being sheared to remove any burr and shall be re-annealed to remove any residual
stresses. The steel shall be thin in lamination.
All steel sections used for the support of the core shall be thoroughly sand blasted after
cutting, drilling and welding.
All laminations shall be properly insulated with the materials that will not deteriorate due to
pressure and hot oil.
The core shall be rigidly clamped with positive locking device to ensure adequate mechanical
strength. Core and coil assembly shall be capable of withstanding the vibrations and shock
during transportation, installation, service and adequate provision shall be made to prevent
movement of core and coil assembly relative to the tank during these conditions.
The core shall be provided with lifting lugs suitable for lifting complete core and coil
assembly of transformer.
The Bidder shall offer the CORE for inspection and approval by the purchaser during the
manufacturing stage. Bidder's call notice for this purpose shall be accompanied with the
following documents, as applicable, as a proof towards use of PRIME CORE
MATERIALS.
Invoice of the supplier
Mill's Test Certificates
Packing List
Bill of Lading
Bill of Entry certificate by the Customs.
Core materials shall be directly purchased either from the manufacturer or through their
accredited marketing organization of repute and not through any agent.
After getting the call notice, the owner may visit the factory for the inspection of core during
the manufacturing process at the cost of NEA.
4.5 Winding
The design, construction and treatment of winding shall give proper consideration to all
service factors. The completed assembly of core and coils shall be dried in a vacuum
sufficient to ensure elimination of air and moisture within the insulating structure. After the
drying process, the assembly shall be immediately impregnated with dry oil. The windings of

1
the transformer shall be fabricated of copper materials. Aluminium winding materials will not
be accepted.
4.6 Oil Preservation System
The transformer of all ratings shall be provided with conservator. The conservator vessel
shall have a capacity between highest and the lowest levels of not less than 7.5% of the total
cold oil volume of the transformer.
Each conservator vessel shall be fitted with a breather in which silica gel is the drying agent.
Windows in the silica gel breathers shall be sufficiently large enough to allow crystal colour
change to be easily observed. The position of the silica gel breather shall be such that
maintenance can be carried out without the need to de-energise the transformer.
4.7 Short Circuit Capacity
The transformer shall be designed and constructed to withstand without injury the mechanical
and thermal stresses produced by short-circuit current limited by the impedance of the
transformer only.
4.8 Tap Changer
An externally - operated tap changer for transformers rated 50 kVA and above shall be furnished
with each transformer, to be operated only when the transformer is de-energized. The tap
changer shall include an operating handle, visible indication of tap position and means for
locking the tap changer in any desired position. The locking device shall be arranged to prevent
locking the tap changer in an off position. Mechanical means shall be provided for limiting the
maximum and minimum travelling of the extreme tap positions to be at the maximum and
minimum position of the tap changer.
4.9 Insulating Oil
The insulating oil shall be refined mineral oil. Necessary quantity of oil for the transformer shall
be furnished by the contractor.
4.10 Bushings
The bushings shall be made of homogeneous and well vitrified porcelain. The colour of the
insulator shall be brown and the surface shall have polished glaze.
The high voltage bushings shall have bolted terminal lugs (samples should be recommended by
NEA) suitable for terminating 20-100 mm2 stranded ACSR conductor.
The low voltage bushings shall have bolted terminal lugs (samples should be recommended by
NEA) suitable for terminating aluminium conductor compatible to the kVA rating of the
transformer.

2
The low voltage neutral bushings shall include a bolted terminal lug for terminating together an
earth wire and an aluminium conductor of neutral circuit of the LV system.
4.11 Temperature rise
Average winding temperature rise above maximum ambient temperature (45oC) when carrying
maximum continuous rated kVA shall not exceed 55oC. The temperature rise of the insulating oil
shall not exceed 50oC when measured near the top of the main tank.
4.12 Accessories
The following accessories shall be provided with each transformer.

Lower oil filter and drain valve
Liquid level gauge
Lifting Lug
Name plate
Tank grounding terminal connector suitable for grounding cable #6 SWG solid or stranded
copper
Pressure relief device for 25 kVA and higher ratings
4.13 Markings
The face of the transformer body shall display the words Property of Nepal Electricity Authority"
on all four sides written in indelible paint.
5 Tests
Tests shall be performed in accordance with the relevant IEC standards supplemented by the
specific requirements indicated below. In the absence of IEC recommendations the tests must be
equivalent at least to the conditions, provisions and definitions of the above-mentioned standards.
5.1 Type Tests
The Bidder shall submit, along with the Bid, type test reports (detail) on the following tests
performed on identical units.
- Temperature rise tests

- Impulse voltage tests
The type test certificates shall be furnished for each type of transformer offered which, in
addition to other required data, shall show the actual no-load and full-load losses of the
transformer at rated load. For the purpose of evaluation, the higher values of no-load and load
losses shall be considered from the values guaranteed by the Bidder and the values given in the
type test reports. The test of the transformer shall have been conducted by recognised national
/international or independent testing laboratory other than manufacturer.

3
5.2 Routine Tests
The following tests shall be performed on each unit of transformer in the presence of the
inspectors appointed by NEA before delivery.
- Applied voltage test

- Induced voltage test
- No load loss and excitation current test
- Impedance voltage and load loss tests
- Resistance measurement
- Ratio tests
- Polarity and phase relation tests
- Leakage tests
- Insulation resistance tests
The bidders are required to furnish the testing facilities available at the manufacturers premises
for conducting the tests listed above in 5.2
6. Evaluation
6.1 The transformer no-load and load losses shall not exceed the following prescribed values. If the
guaranteed no load and load losses exceed the prescribed values below, the offer shall be
rejected.
For 11/0.4 kV
S.N. Rating No Load Loss Load Loss

(Watts) (Watts)
1 50 kVA, 3-ph 120 750

2 100 kVA, 3-ph 220 1210
3 200 kVA, 3-ph 365 2100
4 300 kVA, 3-ph 550 3000
6.2 Transformers shall be evaluated for the loss values (no-load losses and load losses) during bid
evaluation based on the following loss capitalization formula:
PE = Pb + KL LL + KNL NLN
Where,
PE = Evaluated price
Pb = Bid price
KNL =Value of no-load loss
KL = Value of load loss
LL = Guaranteed load losses at rated current
L NL= Guaranteed no-load losses.

4
The transformer losses shall be capitalized as follows:
KNL =Value of no-load loss= USD 4,684/ kW

KL = Value of load loss= USD 1180/ kW
6.3 Penalty for Excessive losses: During testing, if it is found that the actual measured losses are more
than the values quoted by the bidder, a penalty shall be recovered from the bidder at double the
loss capitalization rates arrived at clause 6.2 above. For fraction of a kW, proportionate penalty
will be recovered.
"A transformer found to have excess load loss and No- load Loss up to 15% and 10% of the
guaranteed value (specified by the Bidder) respectively upon testing carried out before delivery at
the delivery point shall be acceptable, provided, however, that each of the Load loss and No load
Loss derived from the test carried out for such transformer shall, in any case, not exceed the
prescribed value specified in Clause 6.1 above. Any transformer failing to meet these criteria shall
be rejected".
6.4 For the purpose of this Specification type tests are defined as tests performed on similar
transformers of the same general arrangements, same ratings and same mechanical and electrical
characteristics.
6.5 If at any stage it is established that the type test report submitted by the bidder is not satisfactory,
discrepant or ambiguous, the NEA reserves the right to ask the bidder/supplier to conduct the
type test on the rating/s of transformers chosen by the NEA in presence of their representative to
reputed national/international testing laboratory prior to its mass production and all the cost
involved in such testing shall be borne by the bidder/supplier.
7.1 The Bidder shall furnish with the Bid, the following documentation:
a) One (1) clear copy of the IEC standards governing fabrication and testing of the transformers.
b) Two (2) clear certified copies of type tests carried out for each rating as required by the governing IEC
standard and the specifications.
c) Two (2) copies of certified outline drawings for each kVA rating showing dimensions, arrangements, and
locations of all parts.
d) A clause-by-clause commentary on the specification, specifying compliance or deviations, if any.
RATINGS AND FEATURE FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER

5
TABLE1
Type Three-phase, 11/0.4 kV
Rated power As specified in the Price Schedule
Rated voltage - Primary 11kV

- Secondary 400/230V
Max system voltage- Primary 12kV
- Secondary 440V
Rated Frequency 50Hz
Connection - Primary Delta

- Secondary Grd. Wye
Cooling System ONAN
Vector group Dyn 11

Rated impedance voltage 3.5 - 4.5%
BIL for windings and
bushings for primary side 75kV
Withstand voltage, 50 Hz, 60 Sec.
- Primary 28kV
- Secondary 3kV
No load tap changer +/- 2.5%, +/- 5% on HV side
(for 100 kVA and above)
Mounting Platform
Insulation levels (IEC) 76 LI 75 AC 28/AC 3
Insulation temperature class A
(IEC 76)
Maximum allowable noise level at
3 metre hemispherical radius <44 dB
Applicable standard IEC

6
(To be completed by Bidder for each transformer rating)
Item: Distribution Transformer
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Copies of IEC standards attached? Yes/No
3. Copies of type test for each rating attached? Yes/No
4. Copies of outline drawings
for each size attached? Yes/No
5. Winding material: ________
6. Primary Winding BIL _________kV
7. Primary Bushing BIL __________kV
8. Accessories listed below furnished?
a) Lower oil filter valve Yes/No
b) Liquid level guage Yes/No
c) Lifting lugs Yes/No
d) Hand hole Yes/No
e) Tank earthing terminal Yes/No
f) Overload protection Yes/No

If yes, details attached? Yes/No
9. Testing facilities available
Description Name of the test equipment/facility
Applied voltage test

Induced voltage test
No load loss and excitation current test
Impedance voltage and load loss tests
Resistance measurement

7
Ratio tests
Polarity and phase relation tests
Leakage tests
Insulation resistance tests
10. Design information
Rated kVA (IEC rating), kVA..

Number of phases ................................
Frequency, Hz ......................
Voltage ratio at no-load , kV................................
Winding connections.............................................
Type of core sheet
Magnetising current at normal ratio:

hv, Amp .
lv, Amp ..
Maximum flux density in core iron at normal

voltage and frequency based on the net section of iron:
Cores, T
Yokes, T ..
Type of winding:
hv .. ..
lv .
Maximum current density in winding at rated power:

hv, Amp/mm2 .
lv, Amp/mm2 ..
Type of insulation used for:

hv winding .
lv winding ..
No-load loss at normal voltage ratio and 75oC, Watt ...................

Load loss at rated current and at 75oC, Watt ...................
Regulation at 75oC and rated power as a percentage of normal noltage:

at 1 p.f, %
qt 0.8 p.f, % .
Impedance voltage at 75oC and rated power:

at normal tapping,% ..
at -5% tapping %
at +5% tapping %

8
Efficiency at 1 p.f 125% and rated current, % .............

Temperature rise at rated kVA by
thermometer in oil ........................................
Temperature rise at rated kVA by
resistance of windings ....................................
Permissible overload ........................................
Transformer insulating oil specification ...
Total volume of insulating oil at 20oC, litre ..
Effective expansion capacity of conservator, litre .
11 Approximate weight and dimensions
Transformer core and windings, kg..................

Tank and fittings, kg.................
Oil , kg..................
Total weight, kg..................
Thickness of tank sides, mm
Thickness of tank bottom, mm
Thickness of radiator, mm
Approximate dimensions including fittings:
Overall length, mm..................
Overall width, mm..................
Overall height, mm..................

9
E2.SURGE ARRESTERS
1. SCOPE
This specification covers the manufacture, testing and supply of distribution type polymer-housed
surge arresters commonly installed on overhead power lines.
2. DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 The surge arresters shall be suitable for use on a three-phase, wye-connected, uni-grounded
(solid grounding), 11 kV, 50 Hz distribution circuits at an altitude up to 2000 meters, and
ambient temperatures ranging from -5 deg. C to 45 deg. C.
2.2 The surge arrester housing shall be of polymer type, manufactured using industry
recognized polymeric material having superior insulating properties necessary for outdoor
installations. The housing shall display in an indelible manner: Arrester type, voltage rating,
and year of manufacture.
2.3 The surge arresters shall be of gapless metal-oxide type.
2.4 The surge arresters shall have line terminals and ground lead terminals accommodating
copper or aluminium conductor sizes from 13.3 mm sq. through 53.49 mm sq. Each arrester
shall be provided with nut and wire clamp as the line terminal and ground terminal
accessory hardware.
2.5 The surge arresters shall be furnished with necessary mounting bracket and accessories
necessary for steel channel (100x50x50x6mm) cross-arm mounting.
2.6 The surge arresters must be manufactured by a company approved to quality standard ISO
9001. The ISO 9001 certification number, the name of the authorized approving
authority with the contact address and telephone and fax numbers shall also be stated. The
Bidder shall enclose a verified copy of the ISO 9001 certificate with the bid.
2.7 The surge arresters shall have the following characteristics:
a. Voltage rating (Ur),Vrms 9

b. Nominal system voltage, kVrms 11
c. Maximum system voltage, kVrms 12
d. System frequency, Hz 50
e. Nominal discharge current, kA 10
f. Creepage distance (terminal to base), mm 390
g. Minimum power-frequency withstand
Wet, kVrms 50
Dry, kVrms 70
h. Impulse withstand (1.2/50sec), kVcrest 95
i. Maximum discharge (residual) voltage
at 10kA lighting impulse current, kVcrest 29

0
j. Steep current residual voltage, kVcrest 32

k. Pressure relief class B
High current for 0.2s 20 kA
Low current for 0.5s 0.8 kA
The surge arresters shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC 60099-4 (latest
revision).
8. QUANTITY
3.1 The quantity of the arresters to be under this Bid shall be as given in price schedule.
4.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governing test
specification and a full description and list of electrical and protective characteristics of the
surge arresters offered. The Bidder shall have to provide two (2) clear copies of certified
type-set results of the surge arresters offered.

1

(To be filled by the Bidder/Manufacturer)
The Bidders/manufacturers are required to furnish the following information in the Data Sheet.
Separate sheets can be used if additional space is required. The information furnished shall be
supported by the catalogue and test reports. The information not supported by the catalogues, test
reports etc. shall be deemed to have been "Not provided". The bidders/manufacturers are also
required to underline the information asked for in the catalogue and /or test reports. Any deviation
from NEA's requirements shall be clearly mentioned giving the reasons thereof.
Offered
S. No. Description NEA's requirement
specifications
Catalogue No.
1.
Model offered
Applicable standard IEC 600 99
Certification: ISO 9001 (including
design)
Name of the authorized
approving authority
2 Certification number
Date of certification
Address, telephone and fax

numbers of the approving
authority
Copy of certified type test To be provided
3
attached
Surge arrester type Gapless metal oxide
4
with polymer housing
Ground lead disconnector Yes
5
provided?
6 Ratings:
11
a. System Voltage, kV
b. Max. system voltage, 12

kVrms
c. Voltage rating (Ur),

kVrms 9
d. System frequency, Hz 50
2
e. Nominal discharge
current, kA 10
f. Creepage distance, mm 390
g. Min. power frequency
withstand
Wet, kVrms 50
Dry, kVrms 70
h. Impulse withstand
(1.2/50sec), kVcrest 95
i. Maximum discharge
(residual) voltage at 10 kA
lightning impulse current, kV 29
crest
j. Steep current residual
voltage, kV crest 32
k. Pressure relief class B
Governing standards and
8
type test reports submitted Yes
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

3
E4.DROP OUT FUSES
1 SCOPE
This Specification covers the manufacture, testing and supply of drop out fuse commonly
used on the primary side of 11 kV distribution transformers as protective device.
2. DESCRIPTION
2.1 The drop out fuse shall be suitable for use on three-phase, wye-connected, unigrounded, 50
Hz distribution circuits at an altitude up to 2000 meters.
2.2 The drop out fuse shall be tested in full compliance with ANSI C 37.41-1981, ANSI C
37.42 or IEC 60282-2.
2.3 The drop out fuse shall incorporate wet-process glazed porcelain insulators. The insulator
shall display in an indelible manner: manufacture, type and voltage rating.
2.4 The fuse holder shall accommodate a non-expendable cap or an expendable cap determined
by interrupting rating.
2.5 The drop out fuse shall be furnished with a galvanized steel-mounting bracket that may be
adapted for steel channel (100x50x50x6mm) cross arm mounting.
2.6 The drop out fuse shall have clamp type terminals to accept copper or aluminium
conductors ranging from 25 mm2 to 150 mm2.
2.7 The drop out fuse must be manufactured by a company approved to quality standard ISO
9001 (including design in the scope of registration). The ISO 9001 certification number, the
name of the authorized approving authority with the contact address and telephone and fax
numbers shall also be stated. The Bidder shall enclose a verified copy of the ISO 9001
certificate with the bid.
3. RATINGS
3.1 The drop out fuse shall have the following electrical characteristics:
a) System voltage kVrms 11
b) Design rating kVrms 15
c) Minimum power frequency withstand:
Dry kVrms 35
Wet kVrms 30
d) Impulse withstand, kVcrest 95
e) Interrupting capacity, kA 10
f) Creepage distance, mm 220
(Leakage to ground)
g) Temperature Rise Limit (In air)
i. Copper contacts silver faced 650C
ii. Terminals 500C
Metal parts acting as spring The temp. shall
not reach such a value that elasticity of the
metal is changed
3.2 The drop out fuse shall have fuse holder from 100 Ampere to 300 Ampere capacities.
4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS

4
4.1 The typical constructional details of the drop out fuse are as follows:
a. Copper current path;
b. Copper arc shortening rod;
c. Bird-proofed one-piece solid porcelain insulator;
d. Tinned plated bronze terminals for use with copper or aluminium conductor;
e. Two-place locking to prevent side movement of hood, contacts or hooks;
f. One piece stainless steel channel;
g. Stainless steel backup spring to maintain contact pressure;
h. Silver to silver contacts;
i. Galvanized steel hooks for load break tool;
j. Cast bronze top tube casting and pull ring;
k. High strength fibre glass fuse tube coated with ultra violet inhibitor;
l. Hot stick hole in trunnion casting for hot stick work;
m. Cast bronze lower tube casting;
n. Stainless steel fuse link ejector and spring insures proper toggle action;
o. Fuse holder toggle latch limits tension of fuse link;
p. Cast bronze hinge for corrosion resistance;
q. Large nut to fasten fuse link without breaking strands;
4.2 The design of drop out fuse shall be such that the fuse holder can be interchanged with those of
other manufacturer.
10. TESTS
Tests shall be performed in accordance with the relevant latest IEC standards supplemented by
the specific requirements indicated below. In the absence of IEC recommendations the tests
must be equivalent at least to the conditions, provisions and definitions of the above-mentioned
standards.
5.2 Type Tests
The Bidder shall submit, along with the Bid, detail type test reports performed on similar or
higher rating of drop out fuse. The test shall have been conducted by recognised national or
international testing lab in accordance with the latest version of IEC or ANSI C 37.41-1981,
ANSI C 37.42 and it must include following tests :
a. Dielectric tests (rated impulse withstand and rated one minute power frequency
withstand test voltages)

5
b. Temperature rise test

c. Pull out test for embedded components of the fuse base (Mechanical test)
d. Beam strength of porcelain base
5.2 Routine Test
The drop out fuse shall be subjected to the routine tests at the manufacturers premises as
per applicable standards.
6.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid literature/catalogue giving a full description of the
drop out fuse and the fuse holders, including their operational details.
6.2 The Bidder shall provide a clear copy of certified type test results of the drop out fuse offered.
6.3 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governing test
specification and a full description and list of electrical and protective characteristics of the
drop out fuse offered.

6
DATA SHEET
(To be filled in by the Bidder/ Manufacturer)
reports etc. shall be deemed to have been "Not Provided". The bidders/manufacturers are also
Offered
S. No. Description NEA's requirement specification
s
Manufacturer:
1. Catalogue No.:
Model offered:
Applicable standard ANSI C 37.41, C 37.42
or IEC 60282-2
Certification: ISO 9001 (Including
design)
2. Name of the authorized approving
authority
Certification number
Date of certification
Address, telephone and fax numbers of
the approving authority
3. Copy of certified type test attached To be provided
4. Steel mounting bracket provided To be provided
Clamp type terminals for copper/ Yes
5.
aluminium cable 25-150 mm2 size
Ratings:
a. System Voltage, kVrms 11
6. b. Design rating, kVrms 15
c. System frequency, Hz 50
d. Min. power frequency withstand

Wet, kVrms 30
Dry, kVrms 35
e. Impulse withstand, kVrms 95
f. Creepage distance (leakage to 220
ground), mm
g. Interrupting capacity , kA 10
7. All the features mentioned in the
specifications Yes/No
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________

7
Date ________________________________________________________
E5.FUSE LINK
1. Scope
This Specification covers the supply of button head fuse links commonly used in the
protection of distribution transformers.
2. Description
2.1 The button-head fuse link shall be fabricated in full compliance with American National
Standard specification ANSI C 37.42-1981, or latest revision thereof or any other national
or international standards that ensures at least a substantially equal quality to the standard
mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
2.2 The fuse link shall have fast characteristics and shall be suitable for protection of
distribution transformers.
2.3 The fuse link shall be supplied in accordance with the type and ratings shown in the bid
package.
3.1 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) clear copies of governing standards for fabrication and
testing of fuse links
3.2 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) clear certified copies of catalogue of fuse links.
3.3 The Bidder shall furnish a clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying

compliance and deviations, if any.
3.4 The Bidder shall also furnish with the Bid two (2) copies of the following data with respect
to the fuse links furnished:
a) Time-Current (TC) characteristic curves at 30C, including minimum melting time

and total clearing time.
b) Preloading adjustment factors or curves.
c) Ambient temperature adjustment factors or curve
from the Bid documents

8
DATA SHEET
Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalog Numbers
4. Copies of Standard attached?
5. Time Curves attached
Minimum melting time Yes/No
Total clearing time Yes/No
6. Preload adjustment data attached? Yes/No
7. Ambient temperature adjustment data attached? Yes/No
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

9
E6.MOULDEDCASECIRCUITBREAKERS
1. Scope
This Specification covers the manufacture, testing and supply of moulded-case circuit
breakers (MCCB).
2. Description
2.1 The MCCB shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with IEC-60947-2 or latest revision,
or any other national or international standards that ensures at least a substantially equal
quality to the standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
2.2 The manufacturer of MCCBs must have been accredited with ISO 9001 including design
quality certification.
2.3 The MCCB shall be suitable for connection to 400/230 volt, 3 -phase, 4 wire, uni-grounded
circuits.
2.4 The MCCB shall be rated in accordance with the parameters shown in Table 1.
2.5 The MCCB shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case and shall be factory sealed. The
MCCB shall have a quick make, quick break, over current switching mechanism that is
mechanically trip-free for simultaneous tripping of all poles. Tripping due to overload or
short circuit shall be clearly indicated by the position of the handle. The ON and OFF
positions shall be clearly marked on the breaker case.
2.6 The MCCB shall have line load reversibility features.
2.7 Marking shall be in accordance with IEC-60947-2.
2.8 The MCCB shall be of inverse time and instantaneous trip type. The trip device shall be of
thermal-magnetic, or static release type.
2.9 The MCCB shall be provided with terminal connection of the screw-type or bus-bar type as
specified in Table 1. For MCCB with bus bar connection certain additional hardware shall
be furnished with each MCCB as specified in Table 2.
2.10 The circuit breakers shall be suitable for mounting in outdoor distribution panels and each
breaker shall be furnished complete with one (1) set of bolt fastenings, complete with nuts
and lock washers of the correct diameter for the mounting hole and of a length equal to the
depth of the MCCB body plus approximately two (2) centimetres.

0
3. Tests
Tests shall be carried out as per the requirements laid down in the relevant governing standards,
which should at least include following tests:
Type Tests
a) Temperature rise test

b) Tripping limits and characteristics
c) Dielectric properties
d) Operational performance capability
e) Overload performance
f) Short-circuit breaking capacities
g) Shot-time withstand current
Routine or Sample Test
a) Mechanical operation test

b) Calibration of releases
c) Dielectric withstand
4.1 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) clear copies of the IEC Standards/governing standards for
fabrication and testing of the MCCB and two (2) clear copies of all other relevant standards
referenced therein.
4.2 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) clear certified copies of all type tests of MCCB as required
by the governing standard.
4.3 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) clear certified copies of catalogue and outline drawings for
each MCCB rating showing dimensions, arrangements and name and location of all parts.
4.4 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) copies of time - current characteristic trip curves for each breaker rating.
4.5 The Bidder shall furnish a clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance and
deviations, if any.
4.6 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be bound separately from the Bid
documents.

1
TABLE1
RATINGANDFEATURES
Rated Voltage 600 Volt
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage 8 kV
Number of Poles 3
Ampere Ratings As per Price Schedules
Ambient Temperature -5 to 55 Degree C
Interrupting Capability (IEC category P2)
Service Breaking Capacity:
a) 50-100 Amps. 25 kA
b) 100-300 Amps. 36 kA
The MCCB rated 50 Amperes through 200 Amperes shall be furnished with thermal-magnetic or
static trip.
The MCCB rated 250 - 500 Amperes shall be furnished with Thermal-adjustable magnetic or static
trip.
The MCCBs are intended to be used in the Distribution Panel Boards of the distribution
transformers and shall include busbar terminals as specified in table 2.

2
TABLE 2
MCCB W/BUSBAR TERMINALS
BREAKER RATING ADDITIONAL HARDWARE TO BE FURNISHED

WITH EACH BREAKER
100 500 AMPERES 4 x 95 sq. mm. compression type cable terminals and 16 x 50 sq. mm.
compression type cable terminals mounted on MCCBs, 8 staking bus
spacers and additional 4 x 95 sq. mm. bolted type cable terminals
mounted on the bus bar.
Notes:
Above hardware and accessories shall be assembled in the Distribution Panel and supplied
accordingly.
All conductors will be stranded Aluminium.
All breaker terminals, compression terminals, stacking spacers, and bolting shall be compatible
with Aluminium conductors to avoid bimetallic reaction.

3

reports etc. shall be deemed to have been "Not Provided". The bidders/manufacturers are also
S. No. Description NEA's requirement Offered specifications

1. Manufacturer
Catalogue No.
Model offered
2 Applicable standard IEC 60947-2
Certification: ISO 9001 including Design
3 Ratings and type:
Rated Voltage, V 600
Nominal current rating, A
4 Service Breaking Capacity, A 25 kA up to 100 A
36 kA above 100 A
5 Impulse withstand voltage, kV 8
6 Interrupting Capability (IEC category P2)
7 Trip device Thermal magnetic or static
for breaker rated up to 200 A
Thermal adjustable magnetic
or static for rating greater
than 200A
8 Line load reversibility Yes
9 All Bid documents furnished As per Clause 4 of Specs
10 Ancillary fittings provided As per Table 2
11 Copies of standards attached? Yes
Copies of certified type tests

Yes
attached?
Copies of outline drawings

attached? Yes
Copies of time - current

characteristic trip curves for
each breaker rating attached? Yes
.Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

4
E7.DISTRIBUTIONPANELBOARD
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication, testing and supply of Distribution Panel Boards.
2. Description
2.1 The panel board shall be pole-mounted and used in conjunction with pole-mounted
distribution transformers to house moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) feeding 400/230
Volt circuits.
2.2 The manufacturer of panel boards must have been accredited with ISO 9001 quality
certification.
2.3 The panel board shall be rectangular in shape with an entrance door in the front of the panel
board. The panel board shall be equipped with interior standoffs suitable for mounting
MCCB and for supporting cables. The panel board will be fixed to the pole by exterior
mounting brackets attached to the back of the panel board. Details of these components
shall be as specified in the following text.
2.4 The panel board shall be fabricated to prevent ingress of moisture due to rainfall and
dripping. The panel board shall be provided with means for natural ventilation.
Material
2.5 The panel board case and door shall be fabricated out of steel sheet of minimum 2 mm. in
thickness and pole mounting brackets shall be fabricated out of mild steel flat of 6 mm. in
thickness.
2.6 The interior standoffs shall be fabricated of steel sheet of sufficient thickness to support
installed circuit breaker and cables without lateral movements.
Construction
2.7 The panel board case and all interior and exterior attachment shall be spot-welded. All
welding shall be of the highest quality. The panel boards shall be formed and welded square
and all attachments to the interior and exterior surfaces shall be welded square and
perpendicular to the panel attached.
2.8 The panel board shall be so constructed as to be water tight from blowing of free-falling
rain. There shall be no apertures in the panel board case other than those provided for the
entrance door, cable fittings, or ventilation. The top extension and bottom shall be so
formed to provide a drip edge and prevent water from flowing on the respective under-
surfaces.

5
2.9 All individual pieces of metal shall be edge finished prior to assembly to provide surfaces
and edges which are free from sharp points and edges. After welding in place, all welds
shall be finished to smooth condition.
Panel board Front
2.10 The front panel shall be fabricated as a separate piece containing the panel board door and
doorframe. The front shall be attached to the panel board housing by suitable bolting
arrangements to provide a watertight and dust tight seal at the perimeter.
2.11 The door shall be equipped with a gasketed removable door, door-handle lock, and suitable
hinges.
2.12 The door and panel frame shall be so fabricated to provide an integrated structure which is
warp-resistant and which will maintain dust-tight and watertight seal.
2.13 Gasketing material shall be heat-resistant and shall retain its resilience over time to
precluded degradation of dust-tight and watertight properties.
2.14 The insertable (and removable) door handle shall provide a door a locking function. The
handle shall be insulated.
2.15 The door hinge may be continuous type or separate hinge units. However, the type of hinge
furnished must accommodate, and not degrade, the dust-tight and watertight characteristics
and must provide adequate door alignment and support over time.
MCCB Standoffs
2.16 The standoffs shall be shaped and dimensioned to accommodate the MCCBs as required by
Bid Packages.
2.17 The standoffs shall be precisely located.
Cable Standoffs
2.18 The cable standoffs shall be properly shaped and dimensioned.
2.19 The standoff shall have the metal edges contoured and smoothed to prevent abrasion of
applied cable serving.
2.20 The standoff shall be located within the panel board to make allowance for cable bending
radii and the location of other components.
Bus bars
2.21 The neutral and phase bus bars shall consist of copper bus bar insulated from the panel
board by 600 V porcelain insulators. The copper bus bar shall be of proper size (ampere
capacity) and properly dimensioned.

6
2.22 The bus bars shall be located within the panel board to provide adequate clearance for the
installation and correct functioning of all items.
2.23 If it is required to drill or penetrate the panel board back to install 600 V insulators, the
outside of the panel board shall be permanently sealed over the attachment to retain water-
tightness.
Cable Entrance Fittings and Knockouts
2.24 Knockouts for cable entrance fittings (bushings) shall be provided in the bottom of the panel
board.
2.25 All necessary cable entrance fittings shall be supplied for proper connection of all circuits to
fulfil the requirement of the Bid Package. The fittings shall be designed to be suitable for
exposed cables entering the panel board from below and shall secure the cable with inserts
to prevent lateral and longitudinal movement of the cables.
2.26 The fittings shall be threaded multi-piece construction which when installed securely locks
the fittings to the panel board. The fittings may be of metal or polymer material. Metal
fittings shall be galvanized or plated as appropriate. The fitting inserts may be single or
multi pieces and shall be of material sufficiently elastic and resilient to securely grip the
PVC cable sheath without damage. The fitting components shall enable capturing of the
inserts to preclude insert creep and fallout due to clamping pressure.
Ventilation
2.27 The panel board shall be provided with apertures for natural draft ventilation in the panel
board bottom and in the top overhang.
2.28 The ventilation apertures shall be covered with bronze screen materials of a mesh
sufficiently to preclude passage of small insects. The edges of the bronze screening shall be
surely fastened to the panel board by means of soldering or epoxy adhesive. The mesh shall
be protected during panel board fittings to preclude clogging of mesh openings by finished
materials.
Pole Mounting Bracket
2.29 The panel board shall be provided with two (2) pole mounting brackets. The size of poles
will be confirmed by the Project before manufacturing.
Grounding Stud
2.30 The panel board shall be provided with a brass grounding stud located in an approved
location.
2.31 The grounding stud shall be fitted to the panel board to insure low resistivity and water
tightness of the installation.

7
2.32 The grounding stud shall be complete with pressure washer, lock washer, and nuts.
Finish
2.33 After fabrication, the panel board shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, mill scale,
and weld slag on all interior and exterior surfaces and all surfaces of all component. After
thorough cleaning of panel board one (1) coat of red oxide metal priming paint and two (2)
finish coats of paint color shall be thoroughly applied. The paint color shall be of light grey.
The finish coats shall be of oil based or epoxy paint. Alternatively, powder coating of panel
board may also be acceptable.
2.34 The bronzed screen ventilation holes, working surfaces of door hinge and door lock, and
outside face of grounding stud shall be free from all finishing materials.
3.1 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) copies of certified fabrication drawings showing all views,
section, and dimensions of individual components and assembled panel board.
3.2 The Bidder shall furnish complete description of all materials to be used, including cable
entrance fittings and finishing materials.

3.4 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be bound separately from the Bid
documents.

8
Item Distribution Panel board
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Copies of fabrication drawings attaches? Yes/No
3. Description of all materials attached? Yes/No
4. Description of cable entrance fittings attached? Yes/No
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

9
E8.GROUND RODS AND CLAMPS
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized steel ground rods and clamps for
use in overhead power line construction.
2. Description
Ground Rod
2.1 The ground rod shall be made of high carbon, open-hearth steel so as to achieve maximum
strength. It shall be hot dip galvanized.
2.2 The ground rod shall be 19mm in diameter and 4,000 mm in overall length.
2.3 The driven end of the ground rod shall have a truncated cone point. The cone point shall be
approximately 13mm long, measured along the axis of the ground rod. The driving head of
the ground rod shall have an approximate 3 mm, 45 degrees chamfer.
2.3 The manufacturing process shall assure that ground rod does not bend when driven into hard
soils.
Ground Rod Clamp
2.5 The ground rod clamp shall be heavy duty forged steel clamp provided with a hex head cup
point set screw of high strength steel with machine-cut threads. It shall be so manufactured
that it gives low resistance connection. The ground rod clamp shall be galvanized.
2.6 The clamp shall suitably accommodate and clamp a 19 mm. ground rod and a stranded
grounding conductor of 7/12 SWG size (SPECIFICATION: SP 4.5.2).
3. Galvanizing
3.1 The galvanization of ground rod and clamp shall be in accordance with IS: 2629-1985 or any
revision thereof or other equivalent national or international standard provided that ensure at
least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
4. Tests
Grounds rods and clamps shall undergo type and routine tests in accordance with the relevant
governing standard.

0
5.1 The manufacturer must have been accredited with ISO 9001:2000 with design and
manufacturing quality certification.
rejection.
fabrication and testing of grounding rod and clamp and two (2) clear copies of all other
6.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of ground rods and clamps
as required by governing standards.
6.3 The Bidder shall provide catalogue and certified dimensional drawings of all types of
ground rods and clamps.

any.
the Bid documents.

1

Item: Ground (Earth Rods and Clamps)
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Material Description Yes/No

furnished?
3. Governing Standard for manufacturing

and testing
6. Catalogue/ dimensional drawings

attached for all items? Yes/No
7. Dimensions (Ground Rod):
Length mm.
Diameter mm.
8. Catalogue number
Rod
Clamp
9. Copies of type test results

attached? Yes/No
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

2
E9.GROUNDING CONDUCTOR
1. Scope
This specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized stranded steel grounding conductor
for use in the neutral grounding of distribution transformers and body grounding of electrical
equipment.
2. Description
2.1 The conductor shall be 7-wire stranded conductor and shall conform to the characteristics as
specified in Table 1 contained herein. Stranded conductor shall be galvanized.
2.2 The manufacturer of ground Conductor must have been accredited with ISO 9001:2000 with
design and manufacturing quality certification.
3. Galvanizing
3.1 The grounding conductor shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with IS: 2629-
1985 or any revision thereof or any other national or international standards that ensure at
least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
4. Tests
The grounding conductor shall undergo type and routine tests in accordance with the relevant
governing standard.
rejection.


3
fabrication and testing of grounding conductor and two (2) clear copies of all other relevant
6.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, and catalogue of grounding conductor.
6.3 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of grounding conductor as required by

any.
the Bid documents.
TABLE 1
GROUNDING CONDUCTOR MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
7-No. 12 SWG
Diameter of single strand 2.67 mm
Weight 299 kg/km
Short time fusing current 12 kA
Resistivity 15 Micro-Ohm-cm

4

Item: Grounding Conductor
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer

and testing
5. Diameter mm
6. Cross Section sq. mm
7. Short time fusing

30 cycles Amps
8. Weight (Approx.) kg/km
9. Resistance
20 degree C (Approx.) ohms/km
Signed ________________________________________________________
On behalf of ________________________________________________________
Address ________________________________________________________
Date ________________________________________________________

5
E10.LOAD BREAK SWITCH
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the fabrication, testing and supply of epoxy insulated pole-mounted,
11 kV, vacuum interruption or air interruption type, 3-phase, gang-operated load break
switches, complete with all accessories.
1.2 The quantity of the load break switches to be procured under this contract and the kV ratings
have been specified in the Price Schedule.
2. Description
2.1 The manufacturer of Load Break Switches must have been accredited with IS0 9001 including
2.2 The switch assembly shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with IEC:60265-1, IEC:
60529 and IEC: 60060-1, or latest revision thereof or any recognized international standards
that ensure at least a substantially equal quality to the standard mentioned above, will also be
acceptable.
2.3 The switch shall be outdoor enclosed construction type, pole mounted, 3-pole, pre-assembled
with load break switches for installation in 11 kV, 3-wire, uni-grounded circuits. The switch
shall be designed so as to prevent the rain water from stagnation and shall be equipped with
the air-tight plug for pressurizing in hermetically sealed test, if necessary.
2.4 The load break switch shall consist of vacuum bottle(s) encapsulated within solid dielectric
epoxy modules or air insulated with spring-assisted operating mechanism. The mechanism
shall consist of three vacuum bottles mechanically linked to a single, spring- assisted
operating mechanism. The operating mechanism shall be actuated from outside the
mechanism housing to be operated from ground. The switch enclosure shall be made of
stainless steel plates.
2.5 The switch terminal bushings shall be fabricated of wet-process porcelain and shall contain
clamp-type terminals accepting copper or aluminum conductors ranging from 25 sq. mm. to
150 sq. mm. An earthing terminal shall be provided on the exterior of the switch, complete
with clamp-type terminal that will accept grounding conductors to 50 sq. mm.
2.6 The switch shall have ground level pole mounted manual operating mechanism that will
operate the switch mechanism in lockable OPEN or CLOSED positions. The switch operating
mechanism shall incorporate flexible or rigid control members from the operating handle to
the switch mechanism. The switching mechanism shall be robust and easily replaceable.
2.7 The switch shall be provided with galvanized cross arms and bracing suitable for mounting in
11 meter long, single pre-stressed concrete pole or steel tubular pole. The switch assembly
shall also incorporate a pole-mounting frame for the ground level operating handle suitable for
6
steel telescopic tubular poles ranging in diameter from 140 mm to 300 mm and for pre-
stressed concrete poles ranging in width from 200 mm to 350 mm and depth from 140 mm to
180 mm. A drawing with the mounting arrangement shall be furnished with the bid.
2.8 The switch shall be supplied with all other accessories, not specifically mentioned above,
for complete installation, including the following:
Lifting provisions.
Corrosion-resistant nameplates and line diagram.
Switch operating mechanism(s) with padlock provision and single keylock provision.
Ground provisions
2.9 The switch shall be rated as follows:

Rated Maximum Voltage 12 kV
Nominal Voltage 11 kV
Rated Frequency 50 Hz
Rated Normal Current 400 to 600 A
Momentary Current (RMS) 40 kA
Rated Short Circuit Making Current (Peak) 50 kA
Impulse withstand voltage 95 kV
Min. power frequency withstand voltage
Dry 42 kV
Wet 30 kV
3. Tests
The switch shall be tested in accordance with the relevant provisions of the governing standard.
4.1 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) clear copies of governing standards for fabrication and
testing of switch and two (2) clear copies of all other relevant standards.
4.2 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) clear certified copies of all tests performed on of switch
offered type of the load break switch as required by the governing standard.
4.3 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) clear certified copies of catalogue and outline drawings for
each type of switch showing dimensions, arrangements and name and location of all parts.
the bids.

7
Item Load Break Switch
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalog Number(s)
3. Governing standards
4. Copies of Certified Test

results attached? Yes/No
5. Description and drawings of

Switch attached? Yes/No
6. Drawings with pole mounting arrangement

attached? Yes/No
7. Is the load breaking vacuum interruption type? Yes/No
8. Is the medium of insulation epoxy resin (solid dielectric)? Yes/No
9. Switch Ratings:
Rated Voltage kV
Nominal Voltage kV
Frequency Hz
Rated Current Amp
Rated Short Circuit Making Current Amp
Impulse withstand voltage kV
Min. power frequency withstand voltage
Dry kV
Wet kV
Mechanical endurance Operations
10. Are all the accessories including necessary

hardware for pole mounting offered? Yes/No.

8
Drawings
1. The conceptual arrangement (line diagram) of MCCB inside panel board is
attached herewith.
The bidder is required to furnish the certified fabrication drawings showing all views, section, and
dimensions of individual components and assembled panel board and shall take approval of
drawings from the project prior to manufacture.

9
F. STEEL BOLTS, NUTS AND MISCELLANEOUS FASTENING COMPONENTS

F1.STEEL BOLTS, NUTS
1. Scope
1.1 This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized steel bolts and nuts, as
specified herein, for use in overhead electric line construction.
2. Material
2.1 The bolts and nuts shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 1363 (Part I)-1984
or the latest version thereof or any other national or international standards that ensures at
least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
3. General
3.1 Bolts and nuts shall be furnished in the types, diameters and lengths specified in the Price
Schedule. However, the dimensions and length of threading of bolt must be confirmed
with the Project prior to manufacture.
3.2 Thread forms shall be consistent with all material/items listed herein and shall not strip or
slip under sustained tensile loading equal to the design tensile strength of the threaded
material item.
3.3 The manufacturer must have been accredited with ISO 9001:2000 with design and
manufacturing quality certification.
4. Machine Bolt and Nut
4.1 Each machine bolt shall be furnished with two (2) hexagonal nuts and two (2) plain washers
assembled thereon.
5. Double-Arming Bolt and Nut
5.1 Each double-arming bolt shall be furnished with four (4) hexagonal nuts and two (2) washers
assembled thereon.
6. Galvanizing
6.1 The stranded stay wire shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with IS: 2629-1985
or any revision thereof or other equivalent national or international standard provided that
ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable.

0
7. Tests
7.1 The bolt and nut shall undergo type and routine tests in accordance with the relevant
governing standard.
rejection.

fabrication and testing of bolt and nut and two (2) clear copies of all other relevant standards
referenced therein.
9.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of bolt and nut as required by governing
standards.
9.3 The Bidder shall provide catalogue and certified dimensional drawings of all types of
bolt and nut.

any.
the Bid documents.

1
Item Galvanized Steel Nuts and Bolts
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer

furnished?

and testing
6. Catalog numbers attached

for all items? Yes/No

2
F2.PREFORMEDWIREPRODUCTS
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of pin insulator ties and wire strand
grips for stay set commonly used in overhead power line construction.
2. Description
2.1 The design of the preformed wire products specified herein shall be appropriate for the
optimum combination of conductor strand diameter, inside diameter, rod diameter, pitch
diameter, number of pitch lengths, direction of lay, and raw materials of the specific
application.
2.2 The manufacturer of the Preformed Wire Products must have been accredited with ISO
9001:2000 with design and manufacturing quality certification.
2.3 The preformed wire product shall be so designed to grip the designated surface evenly, with
evenly-spaced gaps, and shall not bridge the gripped surface due to excessive number of
strands in the grip or tie.
2.4 All pin insulator ties shall be suitable for use on the following ACSR conductors fabricated in
accordance with British Standards Institution BS 215: part 2: 1970:
ACSR 100 mm2;

50 mm2; and
30 mm2.
3. Pin Insulator Top Tie
3.1 The top tie shall be designed for use with C-Neck Pin insulators specified in
SPECIFICATION: SP3.1.1 (IS: 731-971) and ACSR bare conductors shown in Table 1.
However, details of neck diameter and other details of the pin insulator shall be provided
before manufacturing of ties.
3.2 The tie shall be manufactured of aluminum-clad steel wire. It shall be furnished with a
semiconductive-rubber tie pad so as to protect insulator against abrasion. The top tie shall be
right-hand lay. Applied length of tie shall not be less than 800 mm.
3.3 The tie shall be color-coded for conductor size and insulator head-style. The tie shall have an,
identification tag attached showing manufacturer's catalog number and applicable conductor
identification.
3
4. Double-Support Top Tie
4.1 The double-support top tie shall be designed for use with C-Neck Pin insulators specified in
4.3 The tie shall be color-coded for conductor size and insulator head-style. The tie shall have an
identification tag attached showing manufacturer's catalog number and applicable conductor
identification.
5. Pin Insulator Side Tie
5.1 The side tie shall be designed for use with C-Neck Pin insulators specified in
5.3 The side tie shall be color-coded for conductor size and insulator head-style. The side tie shall
have an identification tag attached showing manufacturer's catalog number and applicable
conductor identification.
6. Double Side Tie
6.1 The double side tie shall be designed for use with C-Neck Pin insulators specified in
6.2 The tie shall be manufactured of aluminium-clad steel wire. It shall be furnished with a semi
conductive-rubber tie pad so as to protect insulator against abrasion. The top tie shall be right-
hand lay. Applied length of tie shall not be less than 800 mm.
6.3 The double side tie shall be color-coded for insulator neck size and crossover point and for
insulator identification. The double side tie shall have an identification tag attached showing
manufacturer's catalogue number and applicable conductor identification.

4
7. Steel Wire Strand Grip for Stay Set
7.1 The steel wire strand grip shall be designed for use with thimble eye or double eye stay rod
and tightner fabricated in accordance SPECIFICATION: SP3.2.1, stay wire fabricated in
accordance with SPECIFICATION: SP3.2.2 (B.S. 183 1972/(1983)) and stay insulator
fabricated in accordance with SPECIFICATION: SP3.1.1 (IS:5300-1969).
7.2 The steel wire strand grip shall be furnished for strand size and grade in accordance with
Table 2.
7.3 The steel wire strand grip shall be manufactured of a galvanized steel wire in cabled loop
form with long and short legs. The grip shall have a left-hand lay. Galvanizing shall be
equivalent to Class C zinc coating per ASTM A-475.
7.4 The steel wire strand grip shall be color-coded for strand size and length and shall have one
(1) or two (2) crossover marks for different diameter fittings. An identification tag shall be
attached showing the manufacturer's catalogue number and applicable strand size.
8. Tests
It shall undergo type and routine tests in accordance with the relevant governing standard.
rejection.


5
fabrication and testing of preformed wire products and two (2) clear copies of all other
10.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of preformed wire products as required by
10.3 The Bidder shall provide complete description, and catalogue of preformed wire products.

any.
the Bid documents.
TABLE 1
INSULATOR TIES
Tie Application Identification Tag and Color Code

100 sq. mm. "Dog" 50 sq. mm. "Rabbit" 30 sq. mm. "Weasel"
TT-1 Red TT-2 Yellow TT-3 Blue
TopTie
Double Support Top Tie DTT-1 Red DTT-2 Yellow DTT-3 Blue
Side Tie ST-1 Green ST-2 Black ST-3 Pink
Double Side Tie DST-1 Green DST-2 Black DST-3 Pink
Note: All designations shown are used for product identification for the purpose of this IFB.

6
TABLE 2
STEEL WIRE STRANDED GRIPS
Tie Application for Strand Size

Identification Tag and Color Code
7/8 SWG
GS-1 Red
7/12 SWG GS-2 Blue
Note: All designations shown are used for product identification for the purpose of this IFB.

7
Item: Preformed Wire Products
Description Unit
a) Pin Insulator Tie
1. Manufacturer

furnished?
3. Aluminium-clad steel wire Yes/No

and testing
6. Catalogue numbers attached

7. Bidder certifies that

all items offered are
suitable for use with
100, 50 & 30 sq. mm. ACSR Yes/No

all items offered are
insulators specified
SPECIFICATION- SP3.1.1 Yes/No
9. Holding strength: Kilograms

sizes 100 sq.mm 50 sq.mm 30 Sq.mm
Top Tie
Double Support Top Tie
Side Tie
Double Side Tie

8
b) Steel Wire Strand Grip
1. Manufacturer

furnished?

and testing
6. Catalogue numbers attached


steel strand grip offered is
insulator, stay set and stay wire
specified in SPECIFICATIONS: Yes/No
SP3.1.1, SP3.2.1 and SP3.2.2
respectively
8. Holding rating of grip kg
a) 7/8 SWG
b) 7/12 SWG

9
F3.BANDING MATERIALS AND TOOLS
1. Scope
This specification covers the supply of banding strap, buckles and application tools commonly
applied as a fastening and binding system.
2. Description
Banding Strap and Buckle
2.1 The banding strap and buckle shall be made of stainless steel, and shall be:
a) Type 1: 19 mm. in width and 0.7 mm in thickness. Minimum breaking strength of the
strap shall be 1250 kg minimum. The strap shall be come on strap winder made of
weather resistant plastic. The strap winder shall have handle for carrying, box for
buckles and it shall be suitable for field handling. One roll shall contain 50 m. of
banding strap. Buckle shall be suitable for use with banding strap.
b) Type 2: 13 mm. in width and 0.7 mm. in thickness. Minimum breaking strength of the
strap shall be 850 kg minimum. The strap shall be come on strap winder made of
weather resistant plastic. The strap winder shall have handle for carrying, box for
buckles and it shall be suitable for field handling. One roll shall contain 50 m. of
banding strap. Buckle shall be suitable for use with banding strap.
Tools for application of banding strap and buckle
2.2 Tools for application of banding strap and buckle shall be suitably designed and sized for use
with stainless steel banding and buckle described in paragraph 2.1 above. The tool shall be
durable and suitable for long-term outdoor use.
3. Tests
The binding materials shall undergo type and routine tests in accordance with the relevant
governing standard.
4.1 The manufacturer of the banding materials and tools must have been accredited with ISO
rejection.

0
fabrication and testing of banding materials and tools.
5.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, and catalogue of banding materials and
tools.
5.3 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of banding materials and tools as required
by governing standards.

any.
the Bid documents.

1
Item: Banding Material and Tools
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalogue number
13 mm size
19 mm size
3. Minimum Breaking Strength
13 mm size kg
19 mm size kg

2
F4.PARALLELGROOVE(PG)CLAMPS
1. Scope
1.1 This Specification covers design fabrication testing and supply of universal parallel groove
(UPG) clamps and fittings commonly used in overhead electric power lines.
2. Description
2.1 The PG clamp shall be designed and manufactured to achieve full compatibility between
clamps and conductors and produce uniform and electrically efficient connections between
conductors for the class of connection intended.
2.2 The manufacturer of PG Clamp must have been accredited with ISO 9001:2000 with design
and manufacturing quality certification.
2.3 The PG clamp is intended to be used for ACSR to ACSR conductor.
2.4 The body of PG clamp shall be made of aluminium alloy from a permanent mould process
and hardware consisting of nuts, bolts and washer shall be made of hot dip galvanized steel.
The PG clamps shall have sufficient mass and contact area to provide the thermal capacity
required for load cycling and fault current. The clamps shall be designed to provide the
distributed current density necessary to prevent hot spots, and current carrying rating of the
conductors for which they are designated. PG clamp shall have oxide inhibiting compound
and contact aid.
2.5 The clamps shall be manufactured to accommodate ACSR conductors as shown in Table 1.
2.6 The grooves on the clamps shall be open-edged on two (2) edges for easy installation over a
run conductor and insertion of tap conductor.
2.7 The clamp shall be tested in accordance with the relevant ANSI standard or other equivalent
national or international standard specifying the performance requirement for the electrical
and mechanical characteristics of clamps. The clamps shall conform to all testing
requirements of that standard for the classes of clamps considered.
2.8 Each clamp shall be marked with the type and size of conductor, which will correctly fit each
groove.
3. Tests
The PG clamps shall undergo type and routine tests in accordance with the relevant
governing standard.

3
rejection.

fabrication and testing of PG clamp.
5.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, and catalogue/drawing of PG clamp.
5.3 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of PG clamp as required by governing
standards.

any.

4
TABLE 1
PG CLAMP for ACSR to ACSR conductor
Groove A Groove B Identification
D D D-D
D R D-R
D W D-W
R R R-R
R W R-W
W W W-W
D= 100 mm2 ACSR Conductor

R= 50 mm2 ACSR Conductor
W= 30 mm2 ACSR Conductor

5
Item: Universal Parallel Groove (UPG) Clamp
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer

furnished?

and testing
6. Catalog/ dimensional drawings

attached? Yes/No

6
F5.COMPRESSIONCONNECTORSANDCOMPRESSIONTOOLS
1. Scope
This Specification covers the design, testing, and supply of electrical compression connectors
commonly used in overhead electric power line construction,
2. Description
2.1 Compression connectors shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the relevant
national or international standard.
2.2 The manufacturer of Compression Connectors must have been accredited with ISO
2.3 The compression connectors shall be designed and manufactured to achieve full
compatibility between connectors and tools and produce uniform and electrically efficient
connections between conductors for the class of connection intended. Conductor sizes are
nominal and allowance shall be made for the actual conductor sizes to be supplied.
2.4 The compression connectors shall be tested in accordance with ANSI Standard C119.4, latest
revision, or other equivalent national or international standard specifying the performance
requirements for the electrical and mechanical characteristics of connectors under operating
conditions, and shall conform to all testing requirements of that Standard for the classes of
connectors concerned.
2.5 Compression Connectors

The compression connectors for ACSR conductor to ACSR conductor shall be made of
electrical grade aluminium. The connectors shall have sufficient mass and contact area to
provide the thermal capacity required for load cycling and fault current. The connector shall
be designed to provide the distributed current density necessary to prevent hot spots, and
conductivity shall exceed the full load current rating of the conductors for which they are
designed.

7
Full tension sleeve connectors
The sleeve shall be dual tension (2-piece) for use with ACSR conductors listed in Table 1.
For ACSR conductors, the steel sleeve for the conductor core shall be heavily plated for
resistance to corrosion and compatibility with aluminium and shall be abrasive lined for
maximum holding strength.
For ACSR conductors, the aluminium outer sleeve for 100 sq. mm. ACSR conductor shall
have a filler hole to permit entering over the steel sleeve and permit inhibitor application. An
aluminium hole plug shall be furnished.
The full tension sleeve connector shall be furnished in accordance with Table 1.
The conductor shall achieve the same mechanical strength that of undamaged conductor at
connecting point.
Repair Sleeve
The sleeve shall be one-piece aluminium for use with ACSR conductors.
The sleeve shall completely enclose all strands and restore full ampere capacity rating to
burned or mechanically damaged strands.
The repair sleeve shall be furnished in accordance with Table 1.
4. Tests
The compression connectors shall undergo type and routine tests in accordance with the
relevant governing standard.
rejection.


8

fabrication and testing of compression connectors.
6.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, and catalogue/drawing of compression
connectors.
6.3 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of compression connectors as required by

any.
TABLE1
Connectors to be Furnished Conductors as per British

(Designation) Connector Type Standard BS 215: Part II
A-1T 100 sq. mm. ACSR "DOG"
Full Tension Sleeve
A2T 50 sq. mm ACSR "RABBIT"
A3T Full Tension Sleeve
30 sq. mm ACSR "WEASEL
Full Tension Sleeve
A- 1R 100 sq. mm. ACSR "DOG"
A- 2R Repair Tension Sleeve 50 sq. mm ACSR "RABBIT"
A- 3R Repair Tension Sleeve 30 sq. mm ACSR "WEASEL
Repair Tension Sleeve

9
Item: Compression Connectors
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer

furnished?

and testing
5. Catalogue/ dimensional drawings

attached? Yes/No

0
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
( Line & Distribution Transformer Construction Mateirals)
1.0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. General ...............................................................................................................
B. Pole numbering ..................................................................................................
2.0 POLES, CROSSARMS, AND STAYS

A. Poles ....................................................................................................................
B. Pole setting .........................................................................................................
C. Pole Framing ......................................................................................................
D. Stays ....................................................................................................................
E. Stay Insulators ...................................................................................................
F. Field Modifications ............................................................................................
3.0 CONDUCTOR
A. Materials .............................................................................................................
B. Sagging................................................................................................................
C. Sag Charts ..........................................................................................................
D. Stringing .............................................................................................................
E. Damaged Conductor .........................................................................................
F. Sag Error ............................................................................................................
G. Conductor Attachment .....................................................................................
H. Line Splices For Tensioning And Looping ......................................................
I. Connectors..........................................................................................................
4.0 CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES

A. Pre-Formed Ties and Grips ..............................................................................
B. Pin Insulator Ties ..............................................................................................
C. Preformed ties for Stay Wire............................................................................
D. Application .........................................................................................................
5.0 LINE CONSTRUCTION

A. Arrangement of Conductor ..............................................................................
B. Attachments To Poles ........................................................................................
C. Conductor Ties...................................................................................................
D. Conductor Support ............................................................................................
E. Pole Wiring.........................................................................................................
6.0 INSTALLATION OF STAYS

1
7.0 TRANSFORMER STRUCTURES

8. 36kV &12 kV XLPE ARMOURED CABLE FOR 33 kV& 11 kV UNDERGROUND LINE
9. ABC CABLE
10. INSTALLATION CRITERIA

2
1.0GENERALINSTRUCTIONS
A. General
The general instructions included in this section shall be applied to all 11 kV and 400/230 volt
overhead line construction under this Project. Additional general instructions are included in each
section as they are applied specifically to the subject covered in that section.
These construction standards provide basic requirements for new facilities.
The clearances of conductors and structures shall be as per the construction standard drawing no.
CSG-01, CSG-02 and CSG-03.
Deviations from these standards may become necessary due to unique or special conditions. In such
cases, the directions of the Employer shall be followed.
The safety rules of the NEA shall be strictly observed at all times by the Contractors' and NEAs
work forces.
B. Polenumbering
Poles and structures shall be numbered in accordance with a numbering system provided by NEA.
Each pole or structure shall be paint stencilled with the assigned number.
2.0POLES,CROSSARMS,ANDSTAYS
A. Poles
Poles shall be installed by length and class at locations in accordance with the construction plan.
B. Polesetting
Pole holes shall be dug large enough in diameter to admit a tamping bar all around the periphery of
the pole and shall have a uniform dimension as per the type of pole used at the top and bottom.
Poles shall be planted in the ground to the depth specified in Table 2. Before planting a pole, the
bottom of the hole made for planting the pole, shall be cleaned of free soil and firmly tamped, to
prevent the hole from settling.
The stability of a pole, particularly a pole without stay, is greatly influenced by the size of the pole
hole, the nature of the soil and the care exercised in back filling and tamping. Two active hand
tampers and one slow shoveler shall result in good compaction.

3
Poles shall be set to stand perpendicular except at terminals, angles and other points of excessive
strain where they shall be given a rake not to exceed 10 centimetres against the direction of strain.
Poles located at the sides of banks or other locations, where washouts may occur, shall be protected
by suitable cribbing, or shall be referred to the Engineer for recommended action.
After the pole is in position and the hole is back filled and tamped, soil shall be piled and packed
firmly around the pole. Pole setting shall be inspected prior to acceptance and any back fills that
have sunk shall be refilled.
Poles located in shallow river beds shall be protected by gabions as designated by the Employer.
Gabions should be approximately 2 metres x 1 metre x metre. Four such gabions are required for
each pole.
Set pole and pour 860 mm diameter foundation and level areas around pole and set gabions in
pattern shown in CSG-06. It is important to lace adjacent gabions together along the perimeter of
all contact surfaces. Fill gabions with hard, durable, clean stone, 100 mm to 200 mm in size in three
layers. Install two connecting wires at each layer. Lace gabion lids securely and make certain that
all edges are closed. Fill void between pole and gabion with hard, durable, clean rock 200 mm
minimum size.
C. PoleFraming
Pole and structures shall generally be framed in accordance with these standards and the
construction structure data sheets. Where special framing requirements are necessary, the Employer
shall provide framing instructions for the specific structure.
Each cross-arm shall be attached to the pole by a pole clamp or by machined bolts of sufficient
length to pass completely through the holes provided on the pole and cross-arms and receive their
full complement of nuts.
Bolts of proper length shall be used. Excess nuts shall not be used to make use of a bolt which
would otherwise be too long. The end of a machined bolt projecting more than 3 centimetres
beyond the nut shall be cut off to a length of 2 centimetres beyond the nut. Each bolt, when
installed, shall have its full complement of nuts.
D. Stays
Stay leads specified in construction documents are defined as the horizontal distance from the
centre line of the pole at ground line to the point where the anchor rod should enter the ground
assuming the ground to be level. For the correction in stay leads for uneven ground see Drawing
No. CSG-11.
The Engineer, upon request, may designate the actual location of stay anchor rods on slope of hills.
The stay stake indicates the point where the anchor rod enters the ground. The anchor hole shall be
dug accordingly.

4
The attachment of one stay shall not overlap that of another stay when two or more stays are carried
to a pole or anchor. Each shall be entirely independent of the other. This does not prevent the use of
multiple eye rods for nuts designed for such use.
All stays to be installed on a pole line shall be placed and drawn reasonably tight before the
conductors are tensioned. After the conductors are tensioned and sagged to their final position, the
stays shall be carefully inspected to see that each is carrying its share of the load on the pole as
intended. If multiple stays are not carrying equal strain, the slack stay shall be pulled up until it is
sharing load as intended.
Stay anchors must be installed full depth and set to pull against undisturbed soil to develop full
tension. An anchor not properly installed will move and allow movement of the top of the pole,
thus slacking the conductors. Stay anchors installed in soft or unstable earth shall be placed at
specified depth and back filled with 5 cm. maximum size crushed stone placed to a depth of 1 meter
from the bottom of the pole.
E. StayInsulators
Stay insulators shall be installed on all stays in accordance with the construction drawings.
F. FieldModifications
During the erection work at the field there may be necessity to modify galvanised steel hardware
and may have to be drilled, reamed, filed or cut. Under such a condition the area of the steel
exposed, after these modifications, shall be coated with a zinc-rich paint to protect the steel from
corrosion.
3.0CONDUCTOR
A. Materials
XLPE covered conductors refer to an assembly of strands of hard drawn aluminium alloy for
greater strength which are termed as All Aluminium Alloy Conductor (AAAC) Conductor.
Dog conductors refer to an assembly of strands of hard drawn ACSR Conductor.
B. Sagging
Conductors shall be sagged in accordance with the sag chart specified by these specifications.
The importance of careful sagging of conductors cannot be over emphasised. Conductors have
definite characteristic that control their behaviour resulting from changes of temperature, wind
speed and additional load due to ice or wet snow.
Conductors must not be sagged too tightly (less than specified sag) as unspecified extra tensions
may result in failure of conductor structure.
5
Conductors sagged too loosely (more than specified sag) may contact adjacent conductors hardware
or any structure. Excess sag can reduce clearance beneath the line with the ground to the point of
danger.
C. SagCharts
Unless otherwise noted, all sag charts are calculated on the basis of 35 kg/sqm wind pressure
Sag is always measured vertically, without wind, when conductors are being installed or re-sagged.
Unless otherwise specified by the Employer for a specific condition, initial or stringing sag shall be
applied to the installation of all new unstressed conductor. The initial sag is always less than the
final sag.
Sags for the various temperatures shall be furnished by the Engineer in a table form for spans not
covered by the sag chart.
In order to ascertain the sag for a given stringing temperature, select the point corresponding to the
proper temperature on the scale on the left-hand side of the sag chart. Lay a straight edge so that it
passes through this point and the point of the centre scale representing the length of span to be
sagged. The straight edge will then indicate the proper stringing sag on the right-hand scale.
Interpolate if the temperature of span is not exactly the same as designated on the chart. The low
voltage neutral conductor shall be sagged with the same sag as the low voltage phase conductor. If
the low voltage conductor, as a group, has less design sag than the high voltage phase conductor
installed above it, the low voltage conductor, as a group, shall be installed to the same sag as the
high voltage conductors installed above.
D. Stringing
The dynamometers and similar apparatus shall be used for tensioning of conductor to obtain
appropriate sagging of conductors.
For stringing of Dog Conductors & XLPE Covered (AAAC) Conductors of all sizes, stringing
rollers or roller shall be used to support the conductor as it is pulled out and sagged. Stringing
rollers shall be used regardless of size of aluminium conductors, bare or covered.
Stringing rollers shall be suspended at each insulator support position so that the conductor shall
roll smoothly over the roller protecting conductor from any physical damage.
Stringing sheaves shall have a diameter at least 20 times the conductor diameter and so finished as
to prevent damage of any kind to the conductor as it is pulled through the sheaves.
Conductor drum shall be located at a sufficient distance from the first structure to avoid excessive
bending of the conductor over the sheaves and excessive downward loading on the cross-arms.

6
Attention shall be paid to the fact that all sag charts contained herein for ACSR & AAAC
conductors are calculated on the basis of non pre-stressed conductor. For this reason, at no time
during the stringing or sagging operation, shall conductors of this type be pulled to sags which are
less than those shown by the charts.
Special care shall be taken at all times to prevent the conductor from becoming kinked, twisted or
abraded in any manner. Where it is necessary to drag conductors on the ground, the conductors
shall be protected by covering all stones or other objects which might damage the conductor with
boughs or trees or suitable pieces of lumber. These requirements are specially important when
ACSR &AAAC conductor is being handled on river crossing spans. Floats with rollers shall be
used to prevent the conductor from dragging along the river bottom.
In stringing conductors across highways, the conductors shall be fully protected from passing
vehicles by use of temporary guard structures.
E. DamagedConductor
Damaged conductors shall be repaired by using a repair sleeve provided that no more than 2 strands
of the outer aluminium layer are damaged and further provided that none of the sleeve core strands
are damaged. For a conductor damaged in excess of the above conditions, the damaged section of
the conductor shall be cut out and a tension splice installed.
When cutting out damaged section of conductor, no more than 1 tension splice shall be permitted in
a span and no splice be made within 8 meters of an insulator attachment.
F. SagError
Sag error shall not exceed + 40 mm from the sag defined by the sag chart.
G. ConductorAttachment
Conductors shall be secured to pin insulators with pre-formed conductor ties or with tie wire.
Insulator ties, except at jumper supports in structures, shall be made with pre-formed ties when
available.
Conductors shall be connected to dead end assemblies with tension set.
H. LineSplicesForTensioningAndLooping
Cleaned and polished contact surfaces are necessary to make conductor splices so that it shall
remain free from trouble. Great care shall be taken to completely clean the strands of aluminium
conductor. The splicing sleeve must be centred over the conductor ends before compressing to
make a splice of required strength.
The outer strands of aluminium shall be carefully cleaned with a wire brush to remove all foreign
matter till the aluminium shines brightly. The cleaning applies to both new and old conductors.
7
Splicing sleeves for aluminium conductor are supplied by the manufacturer pre-filled with inhibitor
compound.
Splices in line conductors shall be so located that the end of the splicing sleeve is at least 30 cm
from the end of a suspension or dead end clamp. Non-tension loops, such as between dead ends,
shall be spliced with a connector when the conductor are of same metal and size.
I. Connectors
1. Cleaned and polished contact surfaces are necessary to make electrical connections that will
be free from trouble.
2. Tap connectors are supplied by manufacturers pre-filled with inhibitor compound. Excess
inhibitor compound shall not to be removed but it shall be wiped over the connector as a
moisture seal. Connectors shall not be covered or taped.
3. Compression connectors shall be located in such a manner that there shall be at least 30 cm
of conductor between the end of the connector and the end of a dead end
4. Connectors shall be installed on non-tensioned portion of the conductor such as loops in

preference to the conductor in the span.
5. Connectors installed on conductor shall be located in a span adjacent to the crossing rather
than the crossing span when practicable.
6. Aluminium compression connectors, pre-filled with inhibitor compound, shall be

compressed on the cleaned area of aluminium conductor. Where necessary, inhibitor
compound shall be applied to the cleaned conductor and connector before assembly.
7. Aluminium compression connectors shall be used for connecting aluminium to aluminium

conductors.
4.0CONDUCTORACCESSORIES
A. PreFormedTiesandGrips
Taps for jumpers and services shall not be made over the legs of ties or dead end grips.
B. PinInsulatorTies
Pin insulator ties are of 2 types:

8
a. With single top grooves: Single top ties may be used to turn line angles to 7 degrees where
single insulators are permitted. Please refer material list CSG-29, 30 for specific
applications.
b. With side grooves with specific size of ties for specific conductor in each tie style:
Specific usage is dictated by insulator pin loading and use of single insulators as specified in
material list CSG29, 30.
C. PreformedtiesforStayWire
Preformed ties for stay wire are furnished as per material list CSG29, 30.
Preformed ties for stay wire are right hand lay. Preformed ties for stay wire may be removed and
replaced up to 3 times, when initially installed, to permit adjustment of stay tension.
D. Application
When applying ties or grips the manufacturers identification tag and colour coding shall be
checked to insure that the tie or grip is the right unit specified for application on the specific
conductor or wire strand.
Preformed ties for stay wire are furnished with two crossover markings. When applying preformed
ties on hardware, the grip shall be installed using the crossover point closest to the loop of the grip.
5.0LINECONSTRUCTION
A. ArrangementofConductor
The standard position of 33 kV & 11 kV phase conductors on the cross-arm in the normal triangular
configuration looking from the normal source of power supply shall be seen as:
Red (R) on top of the pole, Yellow (Y) on right hand end of the cross-arm and Blue (B) on left hand
end of the cross arm.
B. AttachmentsToPoles
Bolt holes are provided on poles for cross-arms, cross-arm braces and stay bolts.
C. ConductorTies
Pre-formed ties and grips shall be used for attaching conductors to structures when available.

9
If pre-formed materials are not available, the wire shall be soft conductor so that when made up, the
tie wire will bind the conductor tightly. No tie wire shall be used for a second time.
Jumpers on structures shall always be made with tie wire as per Drawing No. CSG-29
Tie wire shall be of the same metal as that of the bare conductor to which the tie is applied.
D. ConductorSupport
The conductor supports on straight lines shall be carried on the top wire groove of the pin insulator.
Conductors shall be attached to the side conductor groove of pin insulator on the outside of angles
so that transverse conductor tension will tend to hold the conductor in the insulator groove.
Conductor ties shall not hold a conductor on the insulator when uplift exists. If uplift is found, it is
required to consult with the Employer to determine remedial action to be taken.
E. PoleWiring
All taps or connections passing from one level to another on the pole shall, as far as possible, be
vertical. Connections shall have sufficient length so that the line conductors are not moved from
normal positions and normal movement is not restricted. Connections shall have at least 30
centimetres clearance from other conductors. Any connection carried from one side of the pole to
the other side shall be supported on pin insulators.
6.0INSTALLATIONOFSTAYS
1. Where stays are installed on a line angle structure, line of stay shall bisect the outside line
angle.
2. The span of stay extending between poles shall not be greater than 50 meter.
3. Anchor and anchor rods shall be set so that the axis of the rod and line of stay shall be straight.
The portion of the anchor rod above the ground shall not be bent at an angle to connect a stay
wire. If this occurs, anchor and anchor rod shall be reset. The anchor rod shall not be exposed
for more than 15 centimetres above the ground after the anchor is set.
4. If gravel back fill is required to set anchor in soft or unstable soil, as per Drawing No. CSG-07,
gravel back fill shall be designated as "Local Material".

0
5. If a stay is installed on a pole where low volt conductor is dead ended or double dead ended and
extends past stay, a piece of plastic hose slit along the length shall be placed over the stay wire
extending from the upper stay attachment to 200 mm below lowest low voltage conductor.
After installation, the hose shall be wrapped with plastic tape and the hose shall be secured to
the upper stay bolt with tie wire. Plastic hose shall be "Local Material".
6. The successful Bidder shall make preliminary survey of the work site to finalize the type of
poles being used. The size / type and quantity of pole clamps may subject to variations as per
fiend requirements.

1
7.0TRANSFORMERSTRUCTURES
1. Distribution panel-board material and equipment ratings shall be determined by the kVA rating
of the transformer and number of 400/230 volt out going distribution circuits. Please see
Drawing No.CS11-TRN-01 to CS11-TRN-05 and associated material list for associated
equipment ratings and quantities.
2. Where outgoing distribution circuits are installed, pole moment loading must be balanced by
another outgoing distribution circuits in the opposite direction or by installation of stays.
3. Two separate rods shall be used to earth the transformer structure.
a. One for surge arresters and equipment
b. Another for the neutral of transformer low voltage winding
Each earth rod shall be driven at a minimum distance of 2 metres from the adjacent pole
resulting in a minimum distance of 6 meters between the two ground rods.
4. Ground conductor lead shall be stranded steel wire.
6. 1/2" banding material shall be used to strap grounding conductors to pole(s) at one (1) meter
intervals.
7. Compression connectors and PG clamp shall be used to make all electrical connections.
9. Conductor shall be terminated on main breaker and neutral bus with cable socket of proper size.
If a sufficient number of connectors are not provided with the main breaker, the Contractor shall
provide the remaining number required as local material.
10. Distribution Panel Board installation includes MCCB fitting and necessary connections with
transformers and outgoing feeders

2
8.36kV&12kVXLPEARMOUREDCABLEFOR33kV&11kVUNDERGROUNDLINE
1. 36kV & 12 kV underground Cable Installation works
1.1 Scope of works
This specification covers the installation of 33kV&11 kV underground distribution networks

with following details:
i. 36kV & 12 kV 1 cores XLPE insulated armoured aluminium cable along the specified route
complete with accessories HDPE, PPR pipes and cable joints.
ii. Outdoor cable terminations for above cable complete with accessories including lightning
arrestors, earthing and hardware fitting etc.
1.2 Power Cable
The power cable for the specified job shall be 36kV & 12 kV , 1 cores Cross linked
polyethylene (XLPE) insulated armoured aluminium cable .
1.3 Cable Termination Kits
The joints for underground power cables shall be complete with all necessary materials for
joints. The Contractor shall submit the details of the joints for approval of the Employer.
Cable joint shall be done as per the manufacturers instruction.
1.4 Cable Installation
36kV & 12 kV underground cables shall be laid at the places where the overhead line
installation is difficult and the road crossing areas occurs. Contractor shall carry out site
survey to finalize the locations and quantity of material for each location. The contractor
shall submit the 1:200 scaled map showing route location of the 33kV&11 kV underground
cable lines for prior approval from the Employer.
1.5 Cable Terminations
The Contractor shall prepare cable terminations for indoor and outdoor terminations. The
termination works shall be made with utmost care by the skilled technicians. The
termination works shall be according to the manufacturer's instructions.
The outdoor termination works shall include but not limited to following:
- Installation work complete with accessories

- Phase checking and connection to the existing overhead line.
- Dismantling of existing wires, terminal etc as required.

3
1.6 Cable Rising
In each outdoor cable termination, the cable shall be protected by PPR pipes of required dia
at the rising portion on the pole. The protection pipe shall be fixed to the pole with suitable
clamps from 0.3 meter below the ground to 2.5 meter above the ground. PPR Pipe shall be
provided by the contractor.
2. Cable Trench Works
2.1 Scope of Works:
This specification covers but not limited to the construction of cable trench along the side of
road or footpaths and cable trench across the asphalt road with HDPE pipe for power
cable installation as per specification.
2.2 Cable Trench Excavation Works
The Contractor shall mark the cable route at site before excavation as per the survey map. In
case of any change in the design route due to site condition, the modification works shall be
done by the contractor without any extra cost to NEA. The contractor shall excavate cable
trench of at least 90 cm. depths at the route along the road and 140 cm. depths at the
crossing portion of the main road as per the drawing / instruction of the Employer.
All excavation works are to be kept dry and clean, in order that the work is not affected or
interfered with water entering the excavations.
Water from excavation or dewatering shall be properly drained away from the site, so as not
to inconvenience users of adjacent properties or sites.
The contractor shall be responsible for smooth and continuous work. The Contractor shall
take necessary measures to minimize disturbance to traffic and pedestrian movement.
The XLPE power cable should be lying inner by using the HDPE pipe at the cable trench
and PPR pipe is use for cable rising at the pole.
2.3 Backfilling Works
The contractor shall form a clean backfill free of sharp objects of minimum 15 cm thickness
at the bottom of the cable trench, lay the cable on the bottom backfill layer, and provide a
covering clean backfill free of sharp objects of minimum 20 cm thickness above top of the
buried cable as shown in design. The remaining upper layer of cable trench space shall be
filled using the excavated earth and gravel as show in Drawing no. CSG-34. Back filling
shall be done in layer not exceeding 15 cm in thickness. Each layer shall be rammed and
compacted well.

4
2.4 Road Crossing
HDPE pipes of appropriate size (not less than 300 mm) shall be used for road crossing. The
pipe shall be laid in an angle to avoid sharp bends at the point of entry and exit of the cable.
The pipe shall be provided by the contractor.
2.5 Surplus soil
Surplus soil shall be disposed/removed off immediately in the approved spoil bank area or
shall be used for embankment and backfilling upon approval of the Client. Such disposal
shall also be subject to the local regulation and the Employers approval.
2.6 Earthing
Earthing rod as specified shall be driven into the ground near the pole. 6 SWG G.I. wire
shall connect the earthing rod, lightning arrestor and armour of the cable.
2.7 Lightning Arrestor
9kV Lightning Arrestor shall be fixed in the suitable cross arm at each cable connection
with overhead line and ground through Earth Wire together with sheath earth.
2.8 Material Handling
The Contractor shall use appropriate crane for safe unloading of cable drum. Rollers of
appropriate size shall be used. The Contractor shall provide sufficient number of roller for
the cable pulling works. Cable drum shall be mounted on cable jacks and shall be rolled off
gently avoiding kinks and twist

5
9.ABCCABLE
FOR 0.4 kV
OVERHEAD LINE
A. GENERAL
1. The insulated neutral messenger supported Aerial Bundle Conductor consists of five XLPE
insulated cores (3 phases, one neutral and one street lighting) of hard- drawn stranded
aluminium conductors which are laid up together.
2. Special care should be taken when handling the cable drums, and the unwinding, pulling,
stringing and clamping the cables.
3. Precautions should be taken to prevent the bundle from dragging over the ground, ensure
adequate protection when crossing fences or any other obstacles to avoid damage to the
cable insulation.
B. POLE PREPARATION
1. Hardware can be fitted to poles before or after the poles are set up.
2. Hardware can be fixed to poles by means of:
Pigtail hot dipped galvanised bolts, nuts and washers

or
hook hot dipped galvanised bolts, nuts and washers
I PROCEDURE FOR SETTING UP THE LINE
1. Before setting up the lines, necessary precautions must be taken such as the suitable staying
of line poles to avoid the overstraining of the supports and hardware, which are not designed
to resist to dead end line stresses.
2. Suspension fittings should be used where the line angle is less than 600. When the line angle
exceeds this value double strain assemblies must be used.
3. Hardware should be fitted to either side of the poles to accommodate angles in the line. In
the event of an accident this will allow the cable to swing free and avoid damage.
4. When ABC lines are installed on a hill a double dead end assembly is recommended instead
of a suspension bracket on the peak of the hill, as the weight of the ABC will load the
bracket excessively. On a gradient the cable is pulled from the higher to the lower point.
5. Following the line adjustment, the strained bundles sections will be kept on stringing blocks
during a minimum period of 24 hours before clamping the line and angle suspensions.

6
C. RUNNING OUT PREPARATION
I. CABLE LAYING
1. The drum is positioned 8-10 m behind the support, used for final adjustment. It is slightly
set off (1m) from the pole on the side of the first stringing block, to prevent any friction of
the twisted cable against the pole.
2. In the case of strong gradient the drum is positioned at the higher point (extremity) on a
drum carrier equipped with mechanical breaking device to regulate the running out the
cable.
3. The cable drum (drum carrier) should be positioned to allow the cable to roll off the top of
the cable drum and 8-10 metres from the first pole. (such distance is equal to the length of
the pole over the ground)
4. The cable must not drag on the ground during laying operations.
5. The rotation of the cable drum will be controlled by the operator and if necessary be
regulated with a breaking system.
6. Passing the conductors through the stringing blocks and pulling the bundle with a pulling
grip performs the pulling
7. Stringing blocks (wide grooved pulley) shall be hung on poles, by means of a nylon or rope
sling in chocker fashion or a special device developed for such application consisting or a
pulley and a saddle which includes a bracket and a lashing device.
8. The pulled extremities must be tied with cable ties to avoid untwisting of the bundle.
Pulleys are fitted on supports, just below the pigtail/hook bolts in such a manner that the
bundle is near the level of the suspension clamp. This ensures:
- easy placement of the bundle in the suspension clamps.
- minimum untensioning during the installation of the strain clamps.
9. Stringing blocks or pulleys must not be suspended from the pigtail/hook bolts.
These are not designed to support the loads exerted during the pulling.
10. The pulling of the bundle should be by mechanical means. However, it can be done
manually in the case of line section not exceeding 100 metres with maximum spans of 50
metres.
11. Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to the cable insulation.

7
II LINK BETWEEN THE PULLING ROPE AND THE BUNDLE
1. A pulling rope is threaded through all the pulleys on the route. This rope should be
- 10mm Polyester rope, for a manual pulling
- 12mm Polyamide rope, in case of mechanical pulling
2. Attach the pulling rope to the ABC by means of a ball bearing swivel and pulling socks set.
This set includes:
- a galvanised steel sock fixed in permanence to the rope
- a galvanised steel sock is slipped over the bundle, selected according to
bundle diameter
- a swivel is fitted between the two galvanised steel socks.
3. Prepare adequate protection where cables cross fences of any other structures on route
4. The foreman verifies that the rope slide normally and that ABC does not suffer any damage
by sharp objects.
5. The people in charge of the drum carrier regulate the breaking according to the sag chart
instructions given to him.
6. The pulling action should be slow and continuous avoiding unnecessary jerking.
III REALISATION OF THE FIRST TERMINAL POLE
1. No lineman has to remain on poles.
2. At the last pole of the run, the bundle is clamped with a come-along and tension is provided
by a cable/chain hoist linked to the pole by nylon or rope sling.
3. The recommended tension is obtained by a dynamometer and sagging of conductors shall be

made according to the sag chart.
4. When the required tension/sag has been reached, locate with an adhesive tape where the
strain clamp shall be positioned and then proceed to fit the strain clamp on the bundle. Exert
an extra load on the bundle in order to facilitate the installation of the strain clamp to the
pigtail/ hook bolt.
5. Fit a cable tie in front and behind the clamp to keep all conductors together.
6. Release the apparatus and remove the stringing block.
7. The dead end assembly consists of:

8
- One pigtail or hook bolt

- One dead end clamp for self supporting bundle
- Two cable ties made of polyamide for clamping bundled conductors
IV REALISATION OF THE FIRST LINE SECTION
1. The tensioning of the first line section shall be made at the first double strain point. For such
procedure a chain or cable hoist equipped with a reel is needed.
2. The loads being more or less equilibrated, no staying is required.
3. The line adjustment for the fixing of the dead end clamp on bundle is obtained as follows:
3.1 Proceed simultaneously on the two tensioning devices (one at the termination pole
and the other at the double strain assembly) in order to obtain the adjustment of the
first line section and the slack bridge needed for the double strain assembly.
3.2 Install the strain clamps by exerting a supplementary traction in order to facilitate
the fixing of the clamps on the bolts.
3.3 Release the loading device at the double strain point.
3.4 Remove the equipment (Cable hoist Pulley)
3.5 The others line section are realised in the same manner
3.6 The last line section is realised as the first terminal pole
V INTERMEDIATE POLES
1. Lift the cable from the pulley and fit the bundle into the suspension clamp.
2. Close the suspension clamp and fit a cable tie on the ABC either side of the suspension
clamp
3. The suspension assembly consists of:
- One pigtail or hook bolt

- One suspension clamp for self supporting bundle
- Two cable ties
VI CABLE JOINTS
1. Using pre-insulated ferrules should join the cables.

9
2. Lay two cables to be joined in juxtaposition in order to stagger the joints and prepare to
joint phase to phase etc.
3. Strip the insulation according to the length (strip length) indicated on the ferrules. Take
particular care not to damage the aluminium stands.
4. Pass the conductor through the seal at the end of the ferrule and onto the center barrier. The
seal should be securely seated on the insulation of the conductor.
5. Crimp the ferrule with standard compression die indicated on the ferrule, starting at the
center and progressing to the outside. Pre-insulated ferrules are also used for repairing
accidental damage to conductors.
VII LINESMEN TOOLS
Necessary tools required for ABC Cable stringing:
- unwinding machine or similar equipment provided with drum braking system
- a ground hoist or winch, strong enough to give an efficient suppleness.
- traction rope having a length and a mechanical resistance sufficient to allow pulling
and stringing operations upto ten spans of ABC
- stringing blocks (one per support) 10 spans -11 supports
- hydraulic compression tool (performance motorized since faster more easy to use in
remote areas)
- Pulling grip for ABC Cables
- Pulling grips for bundle
10.INSTALLATIONCRITERIA
GENERAL INSTRUCTION
1. The line alignment should be as straight as possible to minimise requirements for stays.
2. The basic span shall be maintained within the following limits:-
a) For 33 kV& 11 kV: 50 m to 70 m

b) For 400 V and 230 V: 40 m to 55 m

0
3. The entire construction works shall be performed as per the construction units specified.
Whenever the construction unit does not cover any specific activity, the Contractor and the
Project shall mutually settle the cost as per the man-hour involvement for the same and
according to the labour rate quoted by the Contractor in his Bid.
4. Detailed schedules of material to be used are provided in each structure drawing of the
construction standards. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to judge the
appropriateness of the listed material according to the site conditions. If there is any need
for addition/reduction or deviation from the listed material size/quantity, the Contractor
shall ask the Project for the approval of the same.
5. All types of line clearances shall be maintained as per the construction standards provided to
the Contractor. Deviations from the standards may be allowed only for unique or special
conditions.
6. Safety rules of the NEA shall be strictly observed at all times by the Project, Contractor and
their personnel. Special care shall be taken to maintain the optimum conductor sag to
provide adequate safety to the construction and the property or people.
7. All fastenings (e.g. preformed ties, nut bolts, stays etc.) shall be so installed that the
constructed line components shall not fail to remain within the safety margin while
maximum working load is applied.
8. If the Contractor requires clarification of any construction standard or unit or he feels any
doubt in his interpretation of construction activities he should clarify the points with the
Project in writing and the decision thus made shall be valid for further work.
9. HV Insulators: The Contractor shall use HV pin insulators in the alignment of the line
where the break angle does not exceed the limits provided hereafter.
S.No. Conductor Size in sq. mm. Minimum Break Angle in Degrees

1 120 (XLPE Covered Conductor) & 7
Dog Conductor
In the case where the break angle exceeds the above values the Contractor shall make dead-
end at the angle structure and use disc insulator fittings.
10. Stays:- The Contractor, in general case, shall install at least one stay for the supports in the
following cases:
1. Dead end structure

2. Tee-off (Tap) structure
11. Transformer mounting:- Each transformer (except single phase pole mounted) shall be so
mounted on the plate-form that the centre of the transformer is in the middle of the plate-form.
Deviations are not permitted from this rule.

1
SECTION VI-SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EXECUTION OF WORKS

( Line & Distribution Transformer Construction Mateirals)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Site Office Management
3. Tools and Equipment
4. Approval of Drawings
5. Extra Work
6. Materials
7. Local Materials
8. Construction Time Schedule
9. Measurement of work and material
10. Workmanship and quality of work
11. Commissioning of work

2
1. Site Office Management
1.1 The contractor and / or sub contractors as proposed by the bidder as per GCC shall
establish and maintain throughout the period of the performance of the contract a site office
to serve as a base for all the operations necessary to perform the works and shall maintain
adequate store facilities for storing materials and equipment issued by the employer. In case
the above-mentioned facilities and establishments are not found satisfactory during the site
verification, the employer shall have right to instruct the contractor for rectification of the
same.
1.2 Prior to the beginning of construction works the contractor at his own cost shall establish a
demonstration and training installation of 11/0.4 kV structures as listed in construction
standards of tender document. The installation shall include at least 3 spans of AAAC
conductor and ABC cable of each size to illustrate the type of materials used for tangent,
angle and dead end construction for 11/0.4 kV line. Such structures need not be spaced
more than 10 meters apart. The intent of establishing such arrangement shall be to provide
visible examples of the application of the various materials to be used and to provide
training and testing facility for the contractor's line construction personnel.
2. Contractor's key personnel and workforce
2.1 The contractor shall have experienced and qualified administrative, accounting and store
keeping staffs capable to undertake respective jobs. An office manager with adequate
qualification and experience to run such establishment efficiently must head the site office.
The contractor shall employ only experienced, competent and skilled office staff as required
in the tender document.
2.2 The line construction and supervisory staff of the contractor shall be examined by the
employer to ensure their capability to perform proper quality of work as per Evaluation
Criteria (Section 3) clause no. 2.5 before commencement of the work.
2.3 The site and field staff as approved by the employer shall be made available for the entire
construction period of the project. All the staff and workforce of the contractor shall be
issued identity cards jointly certified by the contractor and the employer. Replacement of
any such staff or site personnel must not be made without prior permission of the employer.
2.4 The contractor is required to pay salary and wages of his staff and workforce at an interval
not exceeding a month. The rate of wages payable to the labours shall not be less than as
prescribed by the labour law of Nepal.
3. Tools and Equipment

3.1 The Contractor shall have owned, leased or hired tools and equipment for successful
execution of the work. Prior to beginning of the work the contractor shall show these items
in his possession. In case of the heavy tools equipment and vehicles the contractor is
required to submit the source of these items with credible documents such as contract papers
conforming their availability at the time of the execution of the works.
3
3.2 The employer shall examine to verify the availability of all such tools and equipment before
commencement of the work. The contractor shall be allowed to start his work only after
verification of such tools and equipment in satisfaction of the employer. No tools and
equipment shall be provided by employer.
The contractor shall have following tools and equipment for the execution of the contract:
SN Description of Tools and Equipment Unit Quantity

1 Crane Truck (Minimum 3 Ton lifting capacity) Nos. 1
2 General Purpose Truck (Minimum 10 Ton Nos. 1
capacity)
3 Max or Rachet Puller suitable for HV/LV Cable Nos. 5
Tensioning
4 Come along Clamp suitable for HV/LV Cable No. 5
Tensioning
5 Crimping Device for jointing Cables Nos. 2
4. Approval of Drawings
4.1 The contractor shall update and revise all plan and profile drawings provided to him by the
employer after performing check survey of each of the segment of the scheme.
4.2 The contractor must get approval from the employer in writing before he starts execution of
construction of any of the segment of work. If the contractor executes any work without the
employer's prior approval, he may be asked to revise the same without paying any
compensation to him.
5. Extra Work
5.1 Extra work and goods supply shall be performed in accordance with written directives as
issued by the Project to the Contractor.
5.2 Extra work or goods supply for which there are applicable unit prices will be paid for at
such unit prices.
5.3 Where there are no applicable contract unit prices, the price to be paid by the Project to the
Contractor for extra works / goods supply shall be fixed through negotiation between
Employer and the Contractor based on:
- the GoN norms and respective district rate approved by the District Rate Fixation
Committee in case of extra works to be performed
- the prevailing market rate of the goods, in case of extra goods to be supplied.
4
In no case, such price shall exceed Projects cost estimates for the item.
5.4 Nothing in this Clause shall excuse the Contractor from proceeding with the extra work as
directed in writing by the Project.
5.5 Any variation in the quantities of unit price construction units, within the ranges stated in
the Special Conditions of Contract, Clause 1.3, from nominal bid quantities of such unit
price construction units shall not be construed as Extra Work.
6. Materials
6.1 Major construction materials (Distribution Transformers, switches, insulators, poles,

conductors, cables etc.), for installation of the Works shall be provided to the Contractor by
the Project.
6.2 All materials and equipment of the Project shall be located at the Projects or such other
areas where they are being stored. During issue and handling over of these materials it shall
be the Contractors responsibility to load all of them and provide all necessary lifting and
handling equipment, labour and suitable transport as required to transport the various items
of materials and equipment to the Contractors site of storage and operations.
6.3 The listing of materials shall show the limiting allowance for breakage and scrap and
material unit prices, which may be applied to the contractors accountability to the Project
for all materials and equipment issued by the Project. Allowances for such materials shall be
as under:
- HV Covered Conductor 0.5 %
- ABC Cables 0.5 %
6.4 Accountability for all materials and equipment issued by the project shall be based on the
material lists associated with the various construction drawings contained in the
Construction Standards and the allowances referenced in clause 3 above. At the time of final
material accounting, any deficit in the Contractors material account shall be charged to the
Contractor at the unit price rates enlisted by the project during handing over of the materials
to the Contractor.
6.5 If the Contractor fails to account for all materials and equipment issued by the Project as set
forth in clause 4 above, the Contractor shall be charged for the missing materials or
equipment. The Project shall have the right to withhold money due or to become due to the
Contractor, as reimbursement for the deficit in the Contractors material.
6.6 Prior to the rehabilitation work, representative of the NEAs local branch office the Site
Engineer and the contractor shall jointly inspect the materials to be dismantled and list down
such materials. It shall be the contractors responsibility to pack those goods appropriately,
transport them to the nearest NEA store and get receipt. Such receipts shall be enclosed with
the subsequent invoices claimed by the contractor.

5
7. Local Materials
7.1 Certain minor items of materials, including civil materials, required by the Construction
Standards are designated Local Materials in the Standards and shall be furnished and
installed by the Contractor as part of the completed unit of construction.
7.2 The contractor shall include the cost of such items of materials in his quoted construction
unit prices and no other payments for such materials shall be made to the contractor.
7.3 The project, may, at it option, require the projects approval of any or all Local Materials
prior to procurement of such items by the Contractor.
7.4 It shall be the Contractors responsibility to determine his requirements for any items of
Local Material in a timely manner and make procurement accordingly. No delays shall be
allowed, and no exceptions made to the required use of Local Materials due to the
unavailability of such materials.
8. Construction Time Schedule
8.1 Before the commencement of construction works the contractor shall be required to submit
a detail construction time schedule showing details of each event of construction of different
components of works so as to complete the whole work within the time frame as per the
requirement of the contract. The contractor's proposal shall be examined by the employer to
ensure his ability to perform the work in time and approval shall be given with any
modification, if necessary, in satisfaction of the employer.
8.2 If the contractor fails to execute the any component of work within the period specified in
the construction schedule, the employer shall have right to warn the contractor to make up
for such delay in time. In case the contractor fails to overcome delay in different
components of the works instead of repeated reminders by the employer, he shall be made
fully responsible for any delay in final time schedule and no consideration shall be made for
any extension of construction period for the whole work.

6
9. Measurement of work and material
9.1 The contractor after completion of work of any segment of work as per approved drawing of
the project shall submit detail work measurement in structure data sheet (SDS) as per the
format Sheet-1 in this section of the tender document.
9.2 Measurement of the work performed by the contractor shall be jointly checked by the
contractor and the staff deputed by the employer. In case of any discrepancy or
dissatisfaction of employer staff the contractor shall be notified for making corrections for
the same and the contractor shall have to submit his revised measurement schedule.
9.3 The contractor shall be issued materials based upon the requirements to perform his work
conveniently. The contractor is required to submit detail of materials measurement in
material data sheet (MDS) for each of the segment as per the prescribed format Sheet-3 in
this section of the tender document. The contractor shall assess quantity of each and every
item of materials from the material data sheet. Small items such as binding wire, nails,
binding tape etc. could be assessed on flat basis.
9.4 While submitting running bill the contractor must submit details of quantity of materials
issued to him, quantity consumed as assessed from the material measurement sheet and
quantity in his possession. Materials issued, used and in contractor's possession must be
reconciled as per the prescribed format Sheet-3 in this section of the tender document. The
materials in possession of the contractor shall be the opening material balance for the next
running bill. The contractor shall also submit copies of store vouchers showing details of
materials issued to him. Statement of materials submitted shall be checked and certified by
the employer before payment of each of the running bill.
10. Workmanship and quality of work
10.1 The contractor shall be attentive to maintain workmanship and quality of work while
performing the work and shall obey to all the instructions of the field staff of the project
time to time in this regard.
10.2 Special items such as concrete works, cable jointing works and transformer installation
works etc. must be performed in presence of the project field staff. In case of the concrete
works the project staff shall assess quantity of cement and steel to be used for each of the
job and this must be followed for performing the job. Sand and aggregate must be supplied
as per the standard specification of the tender document. The project field staff shall check
quality of such materials and the contractor shall use the same after his approval. Curing of
concrete works must be carried as per standard practice. The field staff shall have right to
ask the contractor to repeat concrete works in case of his failure to execute the job as above
or in his absence.
7
10.3 Each and every item of the standard data sheet (SDS) shall also be checked by the project
staff for the satisfaction of quality of workmanship as per the prescribed specification of the
tender document. In case of failure of the contractor to execute any item of the work as per
proper workmanship or quality, the project shall have right to ask the contractor to revise or
remedy such work at the cost of the contractor.
11. Commissioning of work

11.1 After completion of entire work of any village or load centre, the project after necessary
tests shall arrange to electrically charge the same. In case of successful operation in
satisfaction to the project the contractor shall be issued a provisional certificate starting
from the date of such commissioning.
11.2 The Project shall be authorized to change such date of commissioning in case of failure of
the line due to any defect in the quality of construction.
11.3 Final acceptance of work shall be issued only after completion and satisfactory
commissioning of whole work of the contract.

8

MATERIAL DATA SHEET (MDS)
(SUBMITTED WITH R. B. No..)
Tender No:- Site Office:-

Tender Details:- Scheme:-
Name of Contractor:- Load Centre:- SDS No:-
Running Bill No:- Running Bill Date:- Current Issue Date:-
C.U. Description Unit Quantity Material Used

Qty. as per current bill
1 2 3 4 5
Submitted by:- Checked by:- Approved by:-
Contractor's Signature:- Site Supervisor:- Site In charge/Engineer:-
Contractor's Seal:

9

MATERIAL RECONCELLATION REPORT (MRR)
(SUBMITTED WITH R. B. No..)
Tender No:- Site Office:-

Tender Details:- Scheme:-
Name of Contractor:- Load Centre:- SDS No:-
Running Bill No:- Running Bill Date:- Current Issue Date:-
Balance to
Item
Description Unit As per Contract Issued to Contractor Material Used Balance with Contractor be issued as
No.
per contract
Material
Upto Upto used as Amount
Curren Curren Open Current Closing
Qty Amount previous Total previous Total per of closing
t issue t bill Balance issue balance
issue bills current balance
bill
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Contractor's Signature:- Site Supervisor:- Store Keeper:- Site In charge/Engineer:
Document for ICB - PMD 071/72 02, Lot3/- 210 -


Structure Data Sheet
District: Tender No:

VDC: Tender Detail:
Scheme: Name of Contractor:
Conductor (Sq.mm.) Length (km) Transformer

Pole Frame Stay Swit
HV HV COM LV (kVA)
Covere
Line Length (m) d HV Dog LV ABC Cable
Cond. Cond. ABC Cable
SN 11m HV LV HV LV 2 2 95 mm2
120 100 mm 95 mm Loa
(km)
mm2 (Km) (Km) Bre
(Km) Swit
HV COM
D
HV COM LV 60 m 50 m SA TO DE DDE HS TR A1 A2 B C D E S D F S D F 120 120 95 95 300 200 100
A
span span

Section VI: STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Sec.VI G :-
Construction Standard Drawings
Document for ICB - PMD 071/72 02, Lot3/213

Section VII: STANDARD
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
UNI
S.No. QTY. MATERIAL
T
PIN INSULATOR WITH PIN AND
1 3 NOS
NUTS/WASHER
STEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL
2 1 NOS
( 50x100x300 ) mm.
POLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS
3 1 NOS
AND WASHERS (PC1)
4 1 NOS
( 50x100x1200 ) mm.
POLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS
5 1 NOS
AND WASHERS (PC2)
FLAT CROSSARM BRACE
6 2 NOS
(40 X 6 X 660) mm
BOLTS WITH SUITABLE NUTS AND
7 1 LOT
WASHERS
8 3 NOS PREFORMED WIRE (TOP TIE)
9 1 NOS PSC POLE 11 M
11 kV SINGLE ARM STRUCTURE
(SA)
PSC POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
S.No. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL

1 6 NOS
NUTS/WASHER
2 2 NOS
( 50x100x300 ) mm.
3 2 NOS
( 50x100x1200 ) mm.
FLAT CROSSARM BRACE
4 4 NOS
(40 X 6 X 660) mm
5 1 LOT
WASHERS
PREFORMED WIRE (DOUBLE SIDE
6 6 NOS
TIES)
7 1 NOS PSC POLE - 11 M
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY

11 kV DOUBLE ARM STRUCTURE (DA)
PSC POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

1 5 NOS PIN INSULATOR WITH PIN AND NUTS/WASHER
2 3 SET DISC INSULATOR WITH HARDWARE
3 3 NOS DEAD END CLAMPS
4 1 NOS STEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL ( 50x100x300 ) mm.

POLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS AND
5 1 NOS
WASHERS (PC1)
7 1 NOS
WASHERS (PC3)
FLAT CROSSARM BRACE
8 4 NOS
(40 X 6 X 660) mm
9 1 LOT BOLTS WITH SUITABLE NUTS AND WASHERS
11 3 NOS INSULATED PIERCING CONNECTORS
12 1 SET HT STAY (TYPE AS REQUIRED)

11 kV TAP OFF STRUCTURE (TO)
PSC POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

1 3 NOS DISC INSULATOR WITH HARDWARE
POLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS AND WASHERS

4 1 NOS
(PC1)

6 1 NOS
(PC2)
FLAT CROSSARM BRACE
7 2 NOS
(40 X 6 X 660) mm
10 1 NOS PSC POLE 11m

11 kV DEAD END STRUCTURE (DE)
PSC POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

FLAT CROSSARM BRACE
6 4 NOS
(40 X 6 X 660) mm
9 3 NOS INSULATED PIERCING CONNECTOR

11 kV DOUBLE DEAD END STRUCTURE
(DDE)
PSC POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

3 1 NOS
(PC1)
BRACING ANGLE FOR OFFSET STRUCTURE
4 1 NOS
(827 X 40 X 5) mm
5 1 NOS
(PC2)
FLAT BRACE FOR OFFSET STRUCTURE
6 4 NOS
(40 X 6 X 374) mm

11 kV OFF SET STRUCTURE (OS)
PSC POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

1 3 NOS
NUTS/WASHER

4 1 NOS
( 50x100x6.4 x2390 ) mm.
5 2 NOS
WASHERS (PC1)
6 2 NOS BRACING ANGLE ( 40 x 40 x 5 x 2071 ) mm.
7 2 NOS
WASHERS (PC4)
8 2 NOS
WASHERS (PC5)
10 1 LOT
WASHERS
11 3 NOS PREFORMED TIE (TOP TIE)
13 1 SET HT STAY SET (TYPE AS REQUIRED)

11 kV H - STRUCTURE (HS)
PSC POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
Refer Drawing No: CS11 - TRN - 01 -

04
1 6 NOS PIN INSULATOR WITH PIN AND

NUTS/WASHER
2 2 NOS STEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL( 50x100x6.4 x300
) mm.
3 2 NOS POLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS AND
WASHERS (PC1)
4 2 NOS STEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL( 500x100x 6.4 x
1200 ) mm.
5 2 NOS POLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS AND
WASHERS (PC2)
6 4 NOS FLAT CROSS ARM
7 3 NOS 9 kV SURGE ARRESTOR
8 3 NOS DISTRIBUTION CUTOUT WITH FUSE
HOLDERS
9 1 NOS CHANNEL FOR LA & DO ISLC 1002348 MM
10 2 NOS PLATFORM CHANNEL (TR1) ISMC 100 2500
MM
MM
MM
MM
14 8 NOS BRACING ANGLE (TR5) 50 X 50 X 5841 MM
15 2 SET BRACING BAND (TR6 OR TR6P) WITH
2-M16 BOLT, 2-M16 X 50 BOLT, 8-M16 NUT, 8-
M16 WASHER
16 16 NOS M16 X 50 BOLT WITH 2-M16 NUT, 2-M16
WASHER
17 8-STTP NOS M16 X 250 BOLT WITH 2-M16 NUT, 2-M16
12-PSC WASHER
18 8-STTP NOS M16 X 350 BOLT WITH 2-M16 NUT, 2-M16
12-PSC WASHER
19 1 NOS TRANSFORMER
20 3 NOS TRANSFORMER EARTHING
21 AS REQ. M GROUNDING CONDUCTOR (COPPER)
22 6 NOS PREFORM TIES
23 2 NOS STEEL TUBULAR POLE/ PSC POLE

11/0.4 kV TRANSFORMER
STRUCTURE
TELESCOPIC/PSC POLE
(INTERMEDIATE)

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

1 3 NOS
NUTS/WASHER
2 1 NOS
( 50x100x300 ) mm.
3 1 NOS
WASHERS (TC1)
4 1 NOS
( 50x100x1200 ) mm.
5 1 NOS
WASHERS (TC2)
FLAT CROSSARM BRACE
6 2 NOS
(40 X 6 X 660) mm
7 1 LOT
WASHERS
9 1 NOS STEEL TUBULAR POLE 11 M
11 kV SINGLE ARM STRUCTURE (SA)
STEEL TUBULAR POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

1 6 NOS
NUTS/WASHER
2 2 NOS
( 50x100x300 ) mm.
3 2 NOS
( 50x100x1200 ) mm.
FLAT CROSSARM BRACE
4 4 NOS
(40 X 6 X 660) mm
5 1 LOT
WASHERS
PREFORMED WIRE (DOUBLE SIDE
6 6 NOS
TIES)
7 1 NOS STEEL TUBULAR POLE - 11 M

11 kV DOUBLE ARM STRUCTURE (DA)
STEEL TUBULAR POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS


5 1 NOS
WASHERS (TC1)
7 1 NOS
WASHERS (TC3)
FLAT CROSSARM BRACE
8 4 NOS
(40 X 6 X 660) mm

11 kV TAP OFF STRUCTURE (TO)
STEEL TUBULAR POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

1 3 NOS DISC INSULATOR WITH HARDWARE

4 1 NOS
T)

6 1 NOS
(TC2)
FLAT CROSSARM BRACE
7 2 NOS
(40 X 6 X 660) mm
10 1 NOS STEEL TUBULAR POLE 11m

11 kV DEAD END STRUCTURE (DE)
STEEL TUBULAR POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

FLAT CROSSARM BRACE
6 4 NOS
(40 X 6 X 660) mm

11 kV DOUBLE DEAD END STRUCTURE
(DDE)
STEEL TUBULAR POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

3 1 NOS
(TC1)
BRACING ANGLE FOR OFFSET STRUCTURE
4 1 NOS
(827 X 40 X 5) mm
5 1 NOS
(TC2)
FLAT BRACE FOR OFFSET STRUCTURE
6 4 NOS
(40 X 6 X 374) mm

11 kV OFF SET STRUCTURE (OS)
STEEL TUBULAR POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

1 3 NOS
NUTS/WASHER

4 1 NOS
( 50x100x6.4 x2390 ) mm.
5 2 NOS
WASHERS (TC1)
7 2 NOS
WASHERS (TC4)
8 2 NOS
WASHERS (TC5)
10 1 LOT
WASHERS
11 3 NOS PREFORMED TIE (TOP TIE)
13 1 SET HT STAY SET (TYPE AS REQUIRED)

11 kV H - STRUCTURE (HS)
STEEL TUBULAR POLE

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

For PSC Pole
S.NO. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL
1 1 NOS SUSPENSION CLAMP
1 for STP POLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS AND

2 NOS
0 for PSC WASHERS (TC8)
1 for PSC PIGTAIL WITH HEXAGONAL NUTS
3 NOS
0 for STP AND WASHERS (16 X 203) MM
4 1 NOS POLE 9 METER

LV TYPE A1 (Suspension Type)


1 2 NOS ANCHOR CLAMP

2 NOS
2 for PSC
3 NOS EYE NUT
0 for STP
4 NOS
6 1 SET LT STAY SET

LV TYPE A2 (Suspension Type
with Angle)



3 NOS
1 for PSC
4 NOS EYE NUT
0 for STP
5 NOS
7 5 NOS INSULATED CABLE CAPS
9 1 SET LT STAY

LV TYPE - B (Suspension with an Anchor for
Dead)

LV Type 'C'


2 for PSC PIGTAIL WITH HEXAGONAL NUTS AND
2 NOS
0 for STP WASHERS (16 X 203) MM
1 for PSC
3 NOS EYE NUT
0 for STP
4 NOS

LV TYPE - C (Four Anchor Dead End)


3 NOS
2 for PSC
4 NOS EYE NUT
0 for STP
5 NOS

LV TYPE - D (One Suspension with two
anchor dead end)

LV Type 'E'


2 NOS
1 for PSC
3 NOS EYE NUT
0 for STP
4 NOS
7 1 SET LT STAY
LV TYPE - E (Single Anchor Dead End)

Particular A , mm B , mm C , mm
Pig Tail A1 300 150 150
Pig Tail A2 200 120 80

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS



SN ELECTRIC SYMBOLS EXISTING PROPOSED

1 Transformer
2 Fuse Cutout
3 Disconnecting Switch
4 Load Break Switch
5 Auto Reclosure
6 Substation
7 Lighting Arrester
8 Pole Telescopic with Stay
9 Pole P.S.C. with Stay
10 Tapping Point



S.No. MATERIAL (HT-STAY) QTY. UNIT MATERIAL (LT-STAY) QTY
HT STAY SET (600 x 600 MM LT STAY SET (300 X 300 MM

1 1 NOS 1
PLATE AND ROD) PLATE AND ROD)
2 HT TURN BUCKLE 1 NOS LT TURN BUCKLE 1
3 HT THIMBLES 1 NOS LT THIMBLES 1
4 POLE CLAMP(TC6) 1 NOS POLE CLAMP(TC8) 0
5 HT STAY INSULATOR 1 NOS STAY INSULATOR 1
PREFORM TIE FOR STAY PREFORM TIE FOR STAY

6 4 NOS 4
WIRE 7/8 SWG WIRE 7/12 SWG
7 7/8" SWG STAY WIRE 12 M 7/12" SWG STAY WIRE 10
8 HT EYE BOLT 0 NOS LT EYE BOLT 0

HT AND LT - SINGLE STAY



1 1 NOS 1

6 8 NOS 8

HT AND LT DOUBLE STAY

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS


1 1 NOS 1
5 POLE CLAMP(TC8) 1 NOS

7 8 NOS 8
10 POLE 11M 1 NOS POLE 9M 1

HT AND LT FLYING STAY










D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
CON
NSTRUCTIION STAND
DARDS NEPAL ELECTRIC
CITY AUTH
HORITY
CSG-28
BC-SAG CHA
AB ART 70&95 SQ MM
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
(G)
F
F
Dia 18
E
C
B 24
A 10
12
20
10
Type Unit A B C D E F G Remarks

PC1 mm 295 195 183 150 50 25 6
PC2 mm 306 206 194 150 50 25 6
PC3 mm 262 162 150 204 50 25 6
PC4 mm 316 216 204 150 50 25 6
PC5 mm 354 254 242 150 50 25 6
PC6 mm 402 302 290 150 50 25 6
Note :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
NEPAL ELETRICITY AUTHORITY
Drawn by
All Dimension Rectangular Clamp for PSC pole
Checked by
in
DWG. 2H
mm Approved by

D ia. A
6
(C)
<B >
D ia. 18
<A >
<D >
T ype U nit A B C D R em arks
TC6 mm 200 302 50 268

TC8 mm 155 257 50 223
N ote :- D im ensions are subject to approval prior to m anufacture.
N E P A L E L E C T R IC IT Y A U T H O R IT Y
D raw n by
A ll D im ension Sem icircular Stay C lam p for T ubular P ole
C hecked by
in
D W G . 3H
mm A pproved by

Clam p for Stay TC6
Placement of Clam p at M ax. Diam eter

Placem ent of C lam p at Norm al D iam eter
Placem ent of C lam p at M in. D iam eter
39 48 62
C lam p for Stay TC8
Placem ent of C lam p at M ax. Diam etre
Placem ent of C lam p at Norm al Diam etre
50 66
N ote :- D im ensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
N EPA L ELEC TRICITY A U TH O RITY
D rawn by
A ll D imension Placement of Sem icircular Stay Clamp for Tubular pole
Checked by
in
D W G . 4H
mm A pproved by

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
Strap for 33 kV Pin Insulator String.(404 x 50 x 6 mm)
404
344
N/B 13 X 51 mm
273
160 Rad. 8
51
Dia. 26
13
50
Front View
Top View
Strap for 11 kV Pin Insulator String ( 396 x 50 x 6 mm).
396
348 N/B 13 X 51 mm
273
Rad. 8
160
51
Dia . 22
13
50
Front View
6
Top View
Drawn by
All Dimension Strap for Pin Insulator string ( 11 kV )
Checked by
in
DWG. 6H
mm Approved by

Cross Arm Brace for 33 kV ( 760 x 40 x 6 mm )
760
665
Dia. 18
40
36 28
Front View
6
Top View
Cross Arm Brace for 11 kV ( 660 x 40 x 6 mm )
660
566
Dia. 18
40
36 28
Front View
6
Top View
Drawn by
All Dimension Cross Arm Brace for 11 kV.
Checked by
in
DWG. 7H
mm Approved by

Cross Arm for 33 kV ( 300 x100 x 50 x 7.5 mm )
250
Dia. 26
Top View
Rad. 9 50
100
202
254
300
Front View
Cross Arm for 11 kV ( 300 x 100 x 50 x 6.4 mm )
250
Dia. 22
Top View
Rad. 9 50
100
202
254
300
Front View
Drawn by
All Dimension Cross Arms for 11 kV.
Checked by
in
DWG. 8H
mm Approved by

1800
1680
Dia. 26
Dia. 16
Top View
1900
940
294
238
182
Rad. 9 Dia. 16 50
100
Front View
1200
1100
1020
Dia. 16
Dia. 22 Top View
Dia. 18 50
Rad. 9
100
Dia. 16
182
272
800
Front View
Drawn by
All Dimension Cross Arms for 11 kV.
Checked by
in
DWG. 9H
mm Approved by

Cross Arm for 33 kV H-Pole (3300 x 100 x 50 x 7.5 mm )
3300
2210
2140
1860
1790 Dia. 18
Rad. 9 50
100
2000
Front View Dia. 26 Dia. 16
50
3100
3200
3300
Top View
Cross Arm for 11 kV H-Pole ( 2390 x 100 x 50 x 6.4 mm )
2390
1885
1815
1675
1535
1465 Dia. 18 50
Rad.9
100
Front View
Dia. 22 Dia. 16
Top View
Drawn by
All Dimension Cross Arms for 11 kV H - Pole Structure.
Checked by
in
DWG. 10H
mm Approved by

Bracing Angle for 11 kV H-Pole ( 2071 x 40 x 40 x 5 mm )
2035
1959
1675
1391
1315
1220
1180
Rad. 9
2071
Front View
Bracing Angle for 11 kV H-Pole ( 2719 x 40 x 40 x 5 mm )
Rad. 30
Rad. 30
D ia. 18
2683
Front View
2719
Front View D ia. 18
N ote :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
N EPA L ELECTRICITY A UTH ORITY
D raw n by
All D imension 11 kV A ngle Bracing for H - Pole Structure.
Checked by
in
D W G . 11H
mm A pproved by

11 kV H- Pole Cross Bracing
Front View
27
2683
Drawn by
All Dimension 11 kV Angle Bracing Assembly for H - Pole Structure.
Checked by
in
DWG. 12H
mm Approved by

Cross Arm For LA and DO ( 100 x 50 x 6.4 x 2348 mm )
2348
2312
2252
2000
1748
1688
800
Rad. 9 Dia. 18
1718
2282
Drawn by
All Dimension Cross Arm For LA and DO 100 x 50 x 6.4 x 2348 mm
Checked by
in
DW G. 15H
mm Approved by



D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
1Sec.VIa:-.Scope of Works and General Technical Specifications

1. INTRODUCTION
Electricity has been considered as an important input to improve quality of life and
most important factor for the acceleration of economic development. Considering
importance of electricity, GoN/NEA has emphasized for extension of electrical
distribution system in rural areas in order to increase electricity access to rural people as
a part of its rural development. In addition, NEA has realized that quality and reliable
electric supply can only exploit full potential benefit of the investment in electricity
sector. Construction of new substation or up gradation of the existing substations is one
of the important factors to provide quality and reliable supply. As a result of these
activities there will also be increase in electricity sales. Nepal Electricity Authority
(NEA) is carrying out the upgradation of substations and reinforcement of 11KV and
400 Volt distribution lines with the joint financing from the ADB and Government of
Nepal (GON). Distribution System Augmentation Sub-project under Project
Management Directorate of NEA is mainly responsible for project management and
administration.
2. OBJECTIVEOFTHEPROJECT
The main objectives of the program are to construct and upgrade the substations and
distribution lines at various locations of the country which will add up the substation
capacity to take up the loads coming due to the ongoing rural electrification and
strengthening the existing substations to improve the reliability of the system & quality
of supply, reduction in number of tripping and reduction of losses. Due to the lack of
area substation or the insufficient capacity of existing substation/distribution lines in
these proposed areas, the growing electricity demand could not be fulfilled and rural
electrification could not be accelerated in these areas.

THE SCOPE OF WORKS AND COVERAGE
S DISCRIPTION OF WORKS UNIT
MAHENDRANAGAR
.
KRISHNANAGAR
BIRATNAGAR
N
NEPALGANJ
NEPALGANJ
MAHOTTARI
CHAURAHA
BHAIRAWA
BIRTAMOD
DHANGADI
DHANGADI
GAIDAKOT
BISNUPUR
BAGLUNG
SURUNGA
POKHARA
REMARKS
RAJBIRAJ
DHANUSA
TANAHUN
SINDHULI
HARIPUR
AURAHI
RANGELI
GORKHA
BELBARI
KHANAR
PARBAT
.
ITAHARI
MYAGDI
DAMAK
LAHAN
TOTAL
FICAL
DANG
1 33/11KV 10/13.3/16.6MVA sets 1 1 1
UPGRED
6/8MVA UPGRED 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 33 KV LINE UG KM 11 0
TTP KM 4 25
3 11KV LINE COVER CONDUCTOR KM 10 10 5 4 5 5 5 5 4 5 10

PSC
DOG CONDUCTOR KM 10
PSC
DOG CONDUCTOR TP KM
300MM2 XLPE AL KM 2 1 1
CABLE 3Q
4 0.4 KV LINE ABC 95MM2 KM 5
COMPOSITE
ABC 70MM2 PSC KM 10
ABC 70MM2 TP KM
5 11/0.4 KV TR. 300 KVA SETS 2

200 KVA SETS 4
100KVA SETS 4

2Sec.VI b:- Specification of Electrical Equipment, Technical Data Sheet

( 33/11 kV Sub-Station Construction Materials)
POWER TRANSFORMER
General
This specifications covers the design, manufacture, assembly, shop test, supply,
delivery, installation works and field test of the power transformers complete with all
accessories, fittings and auxiliary equipment for efficient and trouble free operation as
specified hereinafter.
The equipment specified in this Section of the Contract shall conform to the latest
edition of the appropriate IEC specifications and/or other recognized international
standards. In particular:
IEC 60076 Power transformer

IEC 60137 Insulating bushings for alternating voltages above 1 kV
IEC 60156 Insulating liquids - Determination of the breakdown voltage at power
frequency Test method
IEC 60296 Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers and
switchgear
IEC 60551 Determination of transformer and reactor sound levels
IEC 60616 Terminal and tapping markings for power transformer
IEC 60722 Guide to the lightning impulse and switching impulse testing of power
transformers and reactors
Manufacturer of power transformer shall hold valid ISO 9001 (including design)
quality certificate.
Equipment to be furnished:
33/11 kV, 6/8 & 10/13.3/16.6MVA Power Transformer.
The equipment to be furnished shall strictly be in accordance with the specifications

and the Price Schedule.
1.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENT

1.1.1
1.1.2 The Transformer shall be connected to Three Phase 50Hz system with Higher side
Voltage being 33 kV.
1.1.2 The Transformers shall be installed Outdoor in the Hot and Humid atmosphere. The
Transformer shall be Oil Immersed and designed for the cooling system as specified in
the appendices.
1.1.3 The Transformer should be capable of operating continuously at its rated output without
exceeding the temperature rise limits as specified in the appendices.
1.1.4 The Transformer winding shall be designed to withstand short circuit stresses at its
terminal with full voltage maintained behind it for a period as per IEC-76.

1.1.5 The Transformer shall be capable of operation at the rated output under the following
conditions:
i. The voltage varying 10% of rated Voltage.
ii. The Frequency varying 5% of rated Frequency.
1.1.6 The Transformer shall be capable of delivering its rated output at any tap position.
1.1.7 The Transformer shall be free from annoying hum and Vibration when in Operation
even at 10% over Voltage. The noise level should be as per respective IEC Standards.
1.1.8 The manufacturer of the transformer shall be the holder of valid ISO 9001
certificate(including design).
1.2 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
1.2.1 Tank
The Tank should be suitable to house complete core, and maintain oil level up to the
top of the core and windings even when the cover is open. The Tank shall be all welded
Construction and fabricated from the sheet steel of adequate thickness. All seams shall be
properly welded to withstand requisite impact during short circuit without distortion. All
welding shall be stress relieved.
The Tank shall be reinforced by stiffener of structural steel for general rigidity. The
Tank shall have sufficient strength to withstand stress without any deformation by
mechanical shock during transportation and vacuum filling in the field.
The Transformer cover shall be bolted on to the tank with weather proof, hot oil
resistant, resilient gasket in between for complete oil tightness. If gasket is compressible,
metallic stops should be provided to prevent complete compression. Bushing turrets, cover
of inspection holes and other devices shall be designed to prevent leakage of water into or
oil from the tank during normal or abnormal conditions. The tank cover shall be provided
with two numbers of grounding pads and connected separately to tank grounding pads.
The tank shall be provided with sets of bi-directional flanged wheels for rolling the
Transformer parallel to either central lines on the rail.
All heavy removable parts shall be provided with mounting rails along with the eye bolt
for ease of handling and necessary lugs and shackles shall be provided to enable the whole
Transformer to be lifted by the Crane or other means. Manholes of sufficient size shall be
provided for access to leads, windings, bottom terminal of bushing and taps.
There shall be the provisions for the opening of the part of the Tank cover for cleaning of
the Cores and Coils with Hot oil during overhauling.
1.2.2 Core & Windings:
The Transformer shall be of Core type. The Core shall be constructed with interleaved
grade non-aging, low loss, non-ageing, high permeability, grain oriented, and cold rolled

silicon steel lamination, properly treated after being sheared, to remove any burr and shall
be re-annealed to remove any residual stresses.
All Steel sections used for the support of the core shall be thoroughly sand blasted after
cutting, drilling and welding.
All lamination shall be properly insulated with the materials that will not deteriorate due to
pressure and hot oil.
The core shall be rigidly clamped to ensure adequate mechanical strength. Core and Coil
Assembly shall be capable of withstanding the vibrations and shock during transportation,
Installation, service and adequate provision shall be made to prevent movement of core &
coil assembly relative to the tank during these conditions.
The bidder shall submit following documents, as applicable, as a proof towards use of
PRIME CORE MATERIALS before manufacturing a Transformer.
i. Invoice of the supplier.

ii. Mill's Test Certificates
iii. Packing List.
iv. Bill of Lading
v. Bill of Entry certificate by the Customs.
Core Materials shall be directly purchased either from the manufacturer or through their
accredited marketing organization of repute and not through any agent.
The core shall be provided with lifting lugs suitable for lifting complete core and Coil
assembly of transformer.
The Coils shall be manufactured from electrolytic copper of suitable grade as per relevant
IS. The maximum current density for design of the transformers shall not exceed 320
A/Sq.cm. They should be properly insulated and stacked. All Insulating materials shall be
of proven design. Coils shall be so insulated that impulse and Power Frequency Voltage
stresses are minimum.
1.2.3 Tapping
1.2.3.1 No Load Tap as specified in the appendices shall be provided on the high
voltage winding of the Transformers.
1.2.3.2 The Transformer shall be capable of operation at rated output at any tap position
provided the primary does not vary by more than 10% of the rated voltage corresponding
to the normal tap.
The winding including the tapping arrangement shall be designed to maintain the
electromagnetic balance between H.V. and L.V. winding at all voltage ratios.

1.3 Transformer Oil
The Transformer Oil shall conform to the latest revision of IEC Publication 296,
properly inhibited for preventing of sludging.
The necessary first filling of oil shall be supplied for the Transformer in non-returnable
container suitable for outdoor storing. Ten percent (10%) excess oil shall also be provided
to take wastage into account.
1.4 Oil Preservation System
Oil preservation system shall be by means of Conservator Tank.
1.4.1 Conservator Tank System
1.4.1.1 The Conservator Tank shall be mounted on a bracket fixed on the Tank.
1.4.1.2 The Conservator Tank shall be provided without compartment, for the main
Transformer Tank.
1.4.1.3 The Conservator Tank shall be connected with the Main Transformer tank by pipes
through double float Bucholz relay (Gas Operated Relay) with valves at both ends.
1.4.1.4 Contact of the Oil in the compartment for the Main Tank with atmosphere shall be
prohibited by using a flexible urethane air cell. The cell shall be vented into the
atmosphere through a silica gel breather and shall inflate or deflate as Oil volume
changes.
1.4.1.5The Conservator Tank shall be provided with its own breather, filler cap and drain plug.
1.4.1.7 The Conservator Tank shall be provided with dial type Level Indicator visible from
the ground level and fitted with low oil level alarm Contact and Plain oil level gauge .
1.5 Temperature Indicators
1.5.1 One set of Winding Temperature Indicator shall be supplied and fitted locally so
as to be readable at a standing height from ground level. Necessary Current Transformer
and Heating Coil for obtaining thermal images of winding temperatures and detector
elements shall be furnished and wired or fitted inside the transformer marshaling box.
1.5.2 The above Winding Temperature Indicator shall be provided with necessary
contacts to take care of the following:
i. Starting cooling Units in stages with the rise of Temperature.
ii. Alarm on High Temperature.

iii. Trip on Higher Temperature.
One set of Oil Temperature Indicator with Maximum reading Pointer and Electrically
Separate sets of Contacts for Alarm and Trip shall be Mounted locally so as to be readable
at the standing height from ground level.
1.6 Bucholz Relay (Gas Operated Relay For Conservator Type of Oil Preservation)
1.6.1 The Bucholz relay shall be provided with two floats and two pairs of electrically
separate contacts One pair for Alarm & other pair for Tripping function.
1.6.2 The Bucholz relay shall be provided with the facility for Testing by Injection of
air by hand pump and with cock for draining and venting of air.
1.6.3 Sudden Pressure Relay
A Sudden Gas Pressure relay shall be furnished and mounted on top of the Tank in the
region of the Gas Space. The Relay shall respond to sudden increase in the internal Gas
Pressure in the Transformer due to internal arcing. The Relay shall be provided with
trip contact.
The above relay shall be stable during change in Oil or Gas pressure due to change in
ambient temperature and / or loading.
1.7 Transformer Bushings
All Bushings shall confirm to the requirements of the latest revisions of IEC
Publication 137.
The Bushings shall be located so as to provide adequate electrical clearances between

phases and also between phase and ground as per relevant standards.
All Bushings shall be porcelain type and shall be furnished complete with terminal
connectors of adequate capacity. The porcelain used in bushings shall be Homogenous,
Nonporous, Uniformly glazed to Brown colour and free from Blisters, Burns and other
defects.
Stresses due to expansion and contraction in any parts of the Bushings shall not lead to
deterioration.
Liquid / Oil filled Bushings for 36kV and above shall be equipped with Liquid Oil level
Indicators and means for sampling and draining of liquid. The angle of inclination to
vertical shall not exceed 30.
Oil in oil filled Bushings shall meet the requirement of the Transformer Oil standards
specified.

1.8 Marshalling Box
A Sheet metal weatherproof marshalling box of IP-55W construction shall be provided.

The box shall contain all the auxiliary devices except those which must be located
directly on the Transformer. All terminal blocks for external cable connections shall be
located in this box.
The Marshalling Box shall have the following but not limited to them
1.8.1 Load disconnect Switch for Incoming Power Supply for Auxiliaries.
1.8.2 Cooler Fan and Pump Motor starters.
1.8.3 FAN START STOP Control Switches for ONAF type only.
1.8.4 AUTO-MANUAL Switches.
1.8.5 Wiring and Termination individually of the following alarm contacts for remote pre trip
alarm.
Bucholz relay alarm for Main Tank.
Winding Temperature High Alarm.
Oil Temperature High Alarm.
Tank Oil Level Low Alarm.
Tap Change incomplete alarm.
1.8.6 Wiring and Termination individually of the following Trip Contacts for remote trip
and trip alarm.
Winding Temperature High Trip
Oil temperature High Trip
Bucholz Relay Trip or Sudden Oil Pressure Relay Trip
Pressure Relief Device.
Cubicle Illumination lamp with door switch and space heater with thermostat and ON-
OFF switch shall be provided.

1.9 Wiring
Wiring shall be done as specified
1.10 Cable Termination
Marshalling box shall be designed to facilitate cable entry from bottom. Removable
plates shall be furnished with compression type cable glands to make entry dust proof
and no weight is transferred to the terminal. The glands shall be suitable for terminating
Cable Armor.
Sufficient space shall be provided to avoid sharp bending and for easy connection. A
minimum space of 200mm from the gland plate to the nearest terminal block should be
provided.
1.11 Terminal Blocks
Terminal Blocks shall be as specified
1.12 Painting Works
All painting works shall be done as specified
1.13 Auxiliary Supply
All indication, alarm and trip contacts provided shall be suitable for separation on a
nominal 110V DC system.
1.13.1 Current Transformer
The Bidders are required to propose the detail scheme of ac circuit after making a Site
visit and studying the existing ac system of the Transformer Protection and Metering.
The existing data are enclosed. The details about the Current Transformer will be
finalized after the approval of the scheme or as instructed by the Owner.
1.14 TESTS
1.14.1 Routine Tests
During Manufacturing and on Completion, the Transformer shall be subjected to the

following Routine Tests but not limited to as laid down in the latest revision of the IEC
Publication 76.
i. Applied Voltage Tests
ii. Induced Voltage Tests
iii. No-Load and Excitation Current Test
iv. Impedance Voltage and Load Loss Test.

v. Resistance Measurement
vi. Ratio Test
vii. Polarity and Phase Relation Test
viii. Leakage Test.
ix. Insulation Resistance Test
x. Insulation Power Factor Test
1.14.2 Special Tests
The Following tests shall be performed.
i. Zero Phase Sequence Impedance measurement.
ii. After fabrication, the tank fitted with all Valves, Covers, Conservator Tank etc
shall be completely filled with Transformer Oil and subjected to a pressure of
25% over the Normal pressure of the Oil. This pressure shall be maintained for
12Hours during which time there should be no leakage of oil nor there shall be
permanent set when pressure is released. If any leakage or permanent set occurs,
the test shall be conducted again after rectification of the defects.
iii. The Transformer Tank shall be subjected to full Vacuum as far as possible for
12Hours.
iv. After assembly, each core shall be pressure tested for 1 minute at 2kV ac
between all bolts, side bolts, structural steel works and core.
v. Excitation loss and current measurement shall be made at 90%, 100% and 110%
of rated Voltage.
1.14.3 Design Tests
Following design Test shall be performed on the Transformer in accordance with latest
revision of IEC Publication 76, if such tests have not yet performed by the
Manufacturer earlier in size commensurate with the Tendered Transformer. However, if
such had been performed earlier, then the design tests can be submitted. If the
submitted design tests in the opinion of the Owner, cannot be approved, then such tests
have to be conducted.
i. Temperature Rise Test
ii. Impulse Voltage Withstand Test
iii. Short Circuit Test

1.14.4 Tests of Miscellaneous Components
The various components of the Transformer such as insulating oil, Bushings, Current
Transformers etc. shall be tested with the relevant Standards.
The bodies of all valves and pipe works shall withstand a hydraulic pressure of 20psig
for 15 minutes. The Testing medium shall be insulating oil as per IEC Publication 296.
1.14.5 Test Certificates
Test Certificates should be submitted in required number of copies for approval.
The Routine, Special and Design Test Certificates of the Transformer shall be furnished
for approval before the delivery of the Equipment from the Factory.
The Routine and Type test Certificates of miscellaneous components shall be furnished
for approval.
1.14.6 Field Tests
After Installation at Site, the Transformer shall be subjected but not limited to the
following field tests
i. Construction Inspection & Completeness inspection
ii. Insulating Oil Test
iii. Insulation Resistance Measurement
iv. Ratio Test
v. Tap Changer Operation Test
vi. Magnetic Balance Tests
vii. Short Circuit Test
viii. Magnetizing Current Test
ix. Vector Group Test
x. Winding Resistance Test
xi. Calibration of WTI & OTI.
xii. Setting of Alarm / Trip And cooler Controls and operation Check.

1.15 TENDER EVALUATION
1.15.1 Capitalization of Transformer Losses
When evaluating the individual bid received from various Bidders, the transformer shall
be evaluated for the cost of losses based on the following relation
PE = Pb + KL x LL + KNL x LNL
PE = Evaluated Price
Pb = Bid Price
KL = Value of Load Loss
LL = Guaranteed load losses at rated current (Maximum MVA base)
KNL = Value of no load Loss
LNL = Guaranteed no load losses
The transformer losses shall be capitalized as follows:
Value of No Load Loss = US$ 4684.00 per KW

Value of Load Loss = US$ 1180.00 per KW
1.15.2 The Bidder shall furnish guaranteed no load and full load loss data at rated load with
the bid for al rating of transformers contained herein. The supplier shall furnish a test
certificate for each transformer supplied, which shall show the actual no load and full
load losses of the transformer at rated load. For the purpose of evaluation, the higher
values of no-load and load losses shall be considered from the values guaranteed by the
Bidder and the values given in the test reports.
1.15.3 If the actual no load and full load losses of any transformer exceed the guaranteed
values then the contract price for that transformer shall be reduced by the following
calculated amounts for the losses in excess of the guaranteed values:
No Load Loss = US$ 4684.00 per KW

Load Loss = US$ 1180.00 per KW
Any transformer shall be rejected if losses exceed the guaranteed value by an amount in
excess of the following
Total losses: 10%

Component losses: 15% (unless the total loss exceeds 10 %)

1.16 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The Performance figures quoted on the Technical data shall be guaranteed within the
tolerances permitted by relevant standards listed below, and will a part of the successful
Tenderer's Contract.
1.17 DRAWINGS, DATA & MANUALS
1.17.1 Submission
Submission of Drawings, Data & Manuals by the Tenderer along with the Tender
Document and that after the Award of Contract for approval shall be as follows:
1.17.2 Drawings and Details to be submitted with the Tender
i. Tenderer's Proposed typical general arrangement drawing showing

Constructional Features of
Tank including Conservator, level Gauge etc.
Bushing Configuration Arrangement
Cable Termination Arrangement
Wheel Base Dimension and Detail
Head Clearance required for De-tanking of Coil Assembly.
ii. Routine and Type Test Certificates of Similar Transformer as quoted
iii. Technical Manuals on Accessories such as
Bucholz Relay, Sudden Gas Pressure / Oil Pressure Relay
Temperature Indicators
High and Low Voltage Bushings
1.17.3 After Award of Contract
After Award of Contract, the successful Bidder shall submit the required numbers of
copies of following data for approval
i. Outline Detail Drawing showing the general arrangement, indicating the space
required for:
Cable Termination Arrangement
Wheel base Dimension & Details

ii. Head Clearance required for De-tanking of Core and Coil Assembly
iii. Foundation Plans and Loading
iv. Transport / Shipping details with net weight and weights of various parts.
v. Final calculation of the Impedance for Each Transformer.
vi. Schematic flow diagram of cooling System showing the number of Cooling
Units.
vii. Technical details along with Control Schematic and Wiring Diagram for
Marshalling box, Remote Tap Changer Control Panel.
1.17.4 Any other relevant Data, Drawings and information necessary for the review of
the items under Clause 1.17.3 of this section whether specifically
mentioned or not, shall be furnished along with this information.
1.17.5 The General Arrangement Drawing, the Schematic Wiring Diagram showing
the Control Scheme, Cable Termination Arrangement, Location of Terminal
Blocks, etc. shall be furnished for comment / approval in compliance with the
Clause 1.17.3 of this Section. The Employer / Owner will return those
drawings after their review with the comments and / or and the Configuration
and the arrangement of the accessories fitted on the Transformer. The
Contractor on receipt of their returned drawings, with comments from the
Owner, shall prepare final schematic drawing, and coordinate the terminal
markings of their final wiring diagram. The outgoing terminals of the wiring
diagram shall be specially indicated for different functions, such as closing,
tripping, alarm, indication etc. The responsibility for correctness of the
wiring diagram shall lie with the Contractor.
The Owner will only check the final schematic diagram after submission. If any
modification, addition or alteration is considered necessary thereon to comply
with the Owner approved schematic drawing stated hereinabove, the said
modification, addition, or alteration shall be carried out by the Contractor either
at works if it is before delivery or at site after delivery at no cost to the Owner.
1.18 NAME PLATE
Each Transformer shall be provided with a nameplate of weather resistant

material fitted in a visible portion showing but not limited to the following
items.
i. Kind of Transformer.
ii. Number of the Specification.
iii. Manufacturer's Name

iv. Year of Manufacture.
v. Manufacturer's Serial Number
vi. Number of phases and Frequency.
vii. Rated Power
viii. Rated Voltages and Currents
ix. Connection Symbol.
x. Impedance Voltage at Rated Current.
xi. Type of Cooling
xii. Total Weight
xiii. Insulating Oil Weight
xiv. Class of Insulation
xv. Temperature Rise
xvi. Connection Diagram
xvii. Insulation Levels
xviii. Weight of Transportation and untanking.
xix. Details regarding Tapping.
xx. No-Load losses
xxi. Load Losses
1.19 TRANSPORTATION
The Core and Coils shall be completely dried before shipment and Assembled
with Tank and with Oil or Dry Nitrogen depending upon the size of the
Transformers. In order to facilitate Handling and shipping, as many external
accessories as practical, including bushing shall be removed and replaced by
special shipping covers.
Bushings, Radiators and other accessories which may be affected by moisture

shall be packed in moisture proof containers.

1.20 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
The Technical Details of the Transformer shall be as per Appendices enclosed

with this specification.
1.21 TRANSFORMER ACCESSORIES
The List of Transformer Accessories are given in the Appendices enclosed with
this (Appendix A-1).
APPENDIX A-1:
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF POWER TRANSFORMER AND ACCESSORIES
Description For different locations
Rated Capacity 10/13.3/16.6,6/8MVA

Quantity Required As per price schedule
Type Out Door Oil Immersed
Type of Cooling ONAN
Temperature Rise above 45C
Ambient Temperature
In Oil by Thermometer 50C
In winding by Resistance 55C
Number of Phases 3
Maximum Voltage (Phase to Phase)
Primary, kV 36
Secondary, kV 12
Rated Voltage (Phase to Phase)
Primary, kV 33
Secondary, kV 11
Insulation Level of Winding
Basic Impulse level as per IEC 76
Primary, kV 170
Secondary, kV 75
Power Frequency Induced Over Voltage (Impulse)
Primary, kV 70
Secondary, kV 28
Connections
Primary Delta
Secondary Star
Vector Group Reference
Primary Secondary Dyn 11
Tap Changer
Type of Tapchanger No-Load
Range of Taps 10%, Step 2.5%
Number of Taps 9
Method of Tap Changer Control
Mechanical Local Yes

APPENDIX A-1.1
Percentage Impedance Voltage
at Rated MVA and 75C
System Grounding
Primary Ungrounded
Secondary Solidly Grounded
System Fault Level 10kA at 33kV
Neutral Terminals
Primary No
Secondary Yes

APPENDIX A-1.2
Transformers furnished under this Specification shall be equipped with

1 Oil Conservator with one compartment with filler caps and drain plugs.
2 Two sets of Silica Gel Breather with Connecting Pipes and Oil Seals.
3 Air Release Plugs.
4 Double float Bucholz Relay with Electrically Separate Trip and Alarm Contacts for
Transformer Tank
5 Two Nos. of Shut-Off valves at both sides of each Bucholz.
6 Sudden Gas Pressure relay with Trip Contact.
7 Mechanically Operated Self Resetting type Pressure relief Device with visible
Operation Indicator and Trip Contact.
8 150mm Dial Magnetic level Gauge with Low Oil level alarm.
9 Direct reading Plain Oil Level Gauge.
10 150mm dial Oil Temperature Indicator with Maximum Reading pointer and
individually adjustable Separate Sets of Contact for Alarm and Trip.
11 150mm Dial Winding Temperature Indicator with individually adjustable electrically

separate sets of Contacts for two stage cooler control, Alarm and Trip with detector
element complete with Heating Coil, CT's etc.
12 Drain Valve with Threaded Adapter.
13 Sample Valve (Top and Bottom)
14 Filter Valve with Threaded Adapter (Top and Bottom)
15 Cover Lifting Eyes
16 Jacking Pads, Hauling and Lifting Lugs.
17 Bi-directional Wheels.
18 Rails
19 Clamping Device with Nuts & Bolts for clamping the Transformer on Foundation rails.
20 Ladder with Safety device for access to the Transformer top and Bucholz relay.
21 Grounding Pads each with 2nos. tapped holes, bolts and washer for Tank, `Radiator
and cable end box Grounding.
22 Rating Plates and Terminal marking plate.
23 Marshaling Box for housing Cooler Control Equipment and Terminal Connections.
24 Any other Accessories.

2. STATION SERVICE TRANSFORMER
2.1 General
installation, field testing and commissioning of the station service transformers complete with
all accessories, fittings and auxiliary equipment for efficient and trouble-free operation as
specified herein under. The Contractor shall undertake all the works (complete supply and
installation) relating to the connection of the station service transformer to the HV/LV control
and distribution panels.
The equipment specified in this Section of the Contract shall conform to the latest edition of
the appropriate IEC specifications and/or other recognized international standards. In
particular:
IEC60076 Power transformers

IEC 60137 Bushings for alternating voltages above 1 kV
IEC 60156 Method of determination of electric strength of insulating oils
IEC 60296 Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers and switchgear
IEC 60551 Measurement of transformer and reactor sound levels
IEC 60616 Terminal and tapping markings for power transformer
IEC 60722 Guide to lightning and switching impulse testing of power transformers
Manufacturer of station service transformer shall be ISO 9001 Certificate (including design)
holder.
2.2.1 The equipment to be furnished shall strictly be in accordance with the specifications
2.3.1 The transformers shall be connected to three phase, 50Hz system of 33kV system.
2.3.2 The transformer shall be installed outdoor in a hot, humid atmosphere. The transformer
shall be oil immersed and designed for the cooling system as specified in Appendices.
2.3.3 The transformer shall be capable of operating continuously at its rated output without
exceeding the temperature rise limits as specified in Appendices.
2.4 Construction Features
2.4.1 Tank
The transformer shall be provided with steel case of rigid construction, which shall be
oil-tight complete with oil preservation system.
The tank shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage or permanent distortion, a

pressure 25% greater than the maximum operating pressure resulting from the system

of oil preservation used. The tank cover shall be bolted and provided with suitable hand
hole. Two grounding pad complete with clamp type terminal connector shall be
provided on the tank wall near the base.
2.4.2 Core & Coils
The core shall be built up with interleaved grade non-aging, low loss, high
permeability, grain-oriented, cold rolled silicon steel lamination properly treated for
core material. The coils shall be manufactured from electrolytic copper of suitable
grade. They should be properly insulated and stacked.
All insulating material shall be of proven design. Coils shall be insulated that impulse
and power frequency voltage stresses are minimum.
The core and coil assembly shall be securely fixed in position so that no shifting or
deformation occurs during movement of transformer or under short circuit stresses.
2.4.3 Tap changer
An externally operated tap changer shall be furnished with each transformer, to be

operated only when the transformer is de-energized. The tap changer shall include an
operating handle, visible indication of tap position and mans for locking the tap changer
in any desired position. The locking device shall be arranged to prevent locking the tap
changer in an off position. Mechanical means shall be provided for limiting the
maximum and minimum travelling of the extreme tap positions to be at the maximum
and minimum positions of the tap changer.
2.4.4 Insulating oil
The insulating oil shall conform to the latest revision of IEC Publication 296, properly
inhibited for preventing of slugging.
2.4.5 Oil preservation system
Oil preservation shall be by means of conservator tank system.
2.5 Accessories
The following accessories shall be provided with each transformer:
(a) Upper oil filter valve

(b) Lower oil filter and drain valve
(c) Oil sampling device
(d) Liquid level gauge
(e) Lifting lugs
(f) Nameplate
(g) Hand-hole
(h) Tank grounding terminal connector suitable for grounding cable

2.6 Tests
2.6.1 Routine tests
Transformer shall be subjected to the following tests but not limited to them:
(a) Applied voltage test
(b) Induced voltage test
(c) No-load loss and excitation current tests
(d) Impedance voltage and load loss tests
(e) Resistance measurement
(f) Ratio tests
(g) Polarity and phase-relation tests
(h) Leakage tests
(I) Insulation resistance tests
2.6.2 Design tests
Transformer shall be subjected to the following tests but not limited to them. These
tests may be waived if a record of the tests performed on an identical unit can be
supplied.
(a) Temperature rise tests
(b) Impulse voltage tests
2.6.3 Field test
After installation at Site, the transformer shall be subjected but not limited to the
following field tests.
(c) Ratio test
(d) Polarity test

APPENDIX A-1
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF STATION SERVICE TRANSFORMERS
1. Rating (ONAN) 50kVA

2. Quantity required as per price schedule
3. Service Outdoor
4. Type Oil-immersed
5. Type of cooling ONAN
6. Temperature rise above
45 deg. C ambient temperature
(a) In oil by thermometer 50 deg. C
(b) In winding by resistance 55 deg. C
7. Number of phases and frequency 3 phase. 50Hz
8. Maximum system voltage
(a) Primary 36kV
(b) Secondary 440V
9. Rated voltage (line to line)
(a) Primary 33kV
(b) Secondary 400/230V
10. Insulation level
(a) Basic impulse
level as per IEC 60076
- Primary 170kV
(b) Power frequency induced
over voltage (1 min.)
- Primary 70kV
- Secondary 3kV
11. Connection
(a) Primary Delta
(b) Secondary Star
2. Vector group reference Dynll
13. Type of tap changer
voltage taps 2.5%. 5% on HV side
14. Percentage impedance
voltage at rated kVA and
75 deg. C 3% on 50kVA
15. System grounding
(a) Primary Ungrounded
(b) Secondary Solidly grounded

3. 33kV Circuit Breaker
3.1 General
This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, shop test, supply,
delivery, installation works and field test of 33kV vacuum circuit breakers
complete with all accessories for efficient and trouble free operation as specified
here in under.
Circuit breakers shall be offered from reputed makes like Hitachi /GE /ABB
/Mitsubishi /LG /Fuji / Siemens/CGL, Areva or equivalent.
The equipment specified in this Section shall conform to the latest edition of the
appropriate IEC specifications and/or other recognized international standards. In
particular:
IEC 60056 High-voltage alternating switchgear

IEC 62271 High-voltage alternating switchgear and control gear
IEC 60376 Specification and acceptance of new sulphur hexafluoride
IEC 60694 Common specifications for high-voltage switchgear and control
gear standards
3.2.1 The equipment to be furnished shall strictly be in accordance with the

specifications and the Price Schedule.
3.3.1 The circuit breakers shall be suitable for 3 phase, 50Hz in 33kV system.
3.3.2 Circuit breaker shall be installed outdoor in a hot and humid climate. All
equipment and accessories shall be provided with tropical finish to prevent
fungus growth.
3.3.3 The maximum temperature rise in any part of the equipment at specified rating
shall not exceed the permissible limit as stipulated in relevant standards. The de-
rating of the equipment shall be made taking 45 deg. C as an ambient temperature
of the site, if it is designed for any lower ambient temperature.
3.3.4 The rated peak short circuit current or the rated short time current carried by the
equipment shall not cause:
(a) Mechanical damage to any part of the equipment.

(b) Separation of contacts.
(c) Insulation damage of Current Carrying Part.
3.3.5 Technical particulars of the circuit breaker shall be as per Appendix 1.5.1.

3.3.6 All auxiliary equipment shall be suitable for 3 phase 4 wire, 50Hz, 400 V.
3.4.1 This circuit breaker shall be outdoor, three phase, single throw, pneumatically or
spring charged motor operated, vacuum type, trip free in any position, complete
with operating mechanism and supporting structure.
3.4.2 Bushing or tanks shall be accurately aligned and assembled with the operating
mechanism as a complete rigidly mounted unit on a structural steel base or
frame at the factory, to permit shipment and installation as an assembled unit.
3.4.3 Contacts
The contacts shall be designed to have adequate thermal and current carrying capacity
for carrying full-rated current without exceeding the allowable temperature rise as
specified by IEC standards. They shall be designed to have long life so that frequent
replacement or maintenance will be unnecessary. The surfaces of either of both moving
and stationary arcing contacts, which are exposed directly to the arc, shall be faced with
suitable arc resisting material.
3.4.4 Local test switch
Each mechanism shall be equipped with a local test switch for electrically testing the
closing and tripping operations of the circuit breaker. A separate manually operated
cutout device to disconnect the circuits to remote closing, re-closing and tripping
devices shall be provided on each circuit breaker. A warning nameplate requiring
operation of this device before operation of the local test switch shall be mounted
adjacent to the local test switch.
3.4.5 Emergency trip
Each circuit breaker shall be provided with an emergency hand trip device. This device
shall be provided with mechanically interlocked contacts to disconnect circuits from
remote closing and re-closing devices.
3.4.6 Position indicator
The circuit breaker shall be equipped with mechanical position indictor. The indicator
shall be provided for each pole.
3.4.7 Operating mechanism
The operating mechanism of the circuit breakers shall be spring charged by 110V D.C.
motor and with mechanical charging.

The tripping circuit mechanism and the closing control circuit mechanism shall each
have a nominal voltage rating of 110 volts DC. The tripping circuit shall operate
satisfactorily for a tripping operation over a voltage range of 70-110%. The closing
control circuit shall operate satisfactorily over a voltage range of 85-110%.
3.4.8 Operation Counter
There shall be the counter to read the number of operation of VCB.
3.4.9 Accessories
The Contractor shall furnish following accessories as an integral part of the circuit
breaker:
(a) Padlocks and duplicate keys
(b) Operation counter
(c) Earthing terminals
(d) Nameplate
(e) Other necessary accessories
(f) Operating handle
3.4.10 Spare parts
Following spare parts shall be provided in required quantities as listed in Price

Schedule.
3.5 Tests
3.5.1 Routine tests
One circuit breaker of each type ordered under the Contract shall be fully assembled at
the manufacturers works and subjected to routine tests in accordance with IEC 56 and
shall comprise but not limited to the following.
(b) Leakage test
(c) Operating speed check
(d) Dielectric test
(e) Pressure test
(f) Control and secondary wiring check test
(g) Mechanical operation test
(h) Operating mechanism system check
3.5.2 Design tests
The Contractor shall conduct the following design tests on one circuit breaker being
furnished. However, if these tests have been previously conducted on identical circuit
breakers, the Contractor may furnish certified copies of such previous reports instead of
performing tests on the actual circuit breakers being furnished. The Bidder shall submit
the copy of design test for identical circuit breaker with the proposal.

(a) Bushing tests

(b) Dielectric withstand test
(c) Current carrying test
(d) Normal current switching test
(e) Short circuit switching test
(f) Mechanical operation life test
If a circuit breaker has been used for design tests, the test breaker will not be accepted
unless the following minimum maintenance are completed, including any other
provisions not included herein, but required to render the breaker equivalent of a new
breaker:
(a) Replace all latches and pins
(b) Replace all major parts which are subject to fatigue, including, but not
restricted to, contacts, movable cross-heads, spring and linkages.
3.5.3 Field tests
After installation at Site, the circuit breaker shall be subjected but not limited to the
following field tests:
(c) Operating speed check
(d) Mechanical operation test
(e) Operating mechanism system check
3.6 Performance Guarantee
The performance guarantee figures quoted on the schedule of technical data shall be
guaranteed within the tolerances permitted by relevant standard and will become a part
of successful Tenders Contract.
3.7.1 The following drawings and data shall be furnished along with the Tender.
(a) General equipment layout
(b) Outline drawings of the breaker and control cubicle with accessories
3.7.2 After award of Contract the successful Bidder shall submit the required number
of copies of the following drawings and data for approval of the
Employer/Employer's Representative.
(a) General equipment layout
(b) Outline drawing of the breaker and control cubical with
accessories.
(c) Loading data and foundation detail.
(d) Elementary control wiring diagram.
(e) Internal wiring diagram.
(f) External
connection diagrams, showing terminal boards and other external connection points
for each assembly and the required interconnecting wiring.
(g) Drawing showing typical cross-section of the operating mechanism
and breaker mechanism.

(h) Drawing showing typical cross-section and assembly of interrupting device.

(i) Drawing showing assembly of principal component parts and accessories.
(j) Drawing showing details of bushing or porcelain supporting columns,
including dimension details of flanges and outline dimensions.
(k) Drawing to show details at all points where adjustments may be made to
operating dimension mechanism, breaker mechanisms and contacts.
(l) Any other drawings and data required for design and installation of circuit
breaker.
(m) Instruction manual for storage, installation, operation and maintenance of
circuit breaker and operating mechanism.
3.8 Nameplate
Each circuit breaker shall be provided with nameplate of weather resistant material
(d) Rated voltage, kV
(e) Rated insulation level, kV
(f) Rated frequency, Hz
(g) Rated normal current, A
(h) Rated short-circuit breaking current, kA
(i) Rated interrupting time cycles
(j) Weight of circuit breaker, kg
3.9 Special Tools

In addition to the tools, which are regularly furnished with such breakers, the
Contractor shall also supply all necessary special tools or equipment for assembling and
disassembling the breaker. The Contractor shall submit an itemized list of such
equipment.
APPENDIX 1.5.1
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33 kV CIRCUIT BREAKER
1. Type Vacuum, outdoor type
3. Voltage rating
4. Insulation level
(a) Impulse withstand voltage 170kV
(b) Power frequency withstand voltage (1 min) 75kV
5. Frequency 50Hz

6. Current rating
(a) Rated continuous current at 800A

45 deg. C ambient
(b) Rated interrupting current 25 kA
7. Re-closing duty cycle 0-0.3 sec-CO-3 min.-CO

(Rated operating sequence)
8. Auxiliary supply
(a) Control circuit DC 110V
(b) Space heater and AC, 3Ph-4W, 400V, 50Hz

auxiliary equipment
9. Total maximum Break time 60 ms
10. First pole to clear factor 1.5
11. Additional auxiliary contacts 8 NO, NC
12. Maximum make time 120 ms
12. Spring charging motor 110 V DC
4. 33 kV DISCONNECTING SWITCH
4.1 General
installation works and field test of disconnecting switches complete with all accessories
for efficient and trouble-free operation as specified herein under.
particular:
IEC 60129 High-voltage alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches

Manufacturer of isolator shall hold valid ISO 9001 (including design)quality certificate.

33 kV Disconnecting Switch
4.3.1 The disconnecting switches shall be used for the 33kV, 50Hz, 3 phase system.
4.3.2 The equipment shall be installed outdoor in a hot, humid climate. All equipment,
accessories and wiring shall be provided with tropical finish to prevent fungus growth.
4.3.3 The maximum temperature rise in any part of the equipment at specified rating shall not
exceed the permissible limits as stipulated in relevant standards. The de-rating of the
equipment shall be made taking 45 deg. C as an ambient temperature of the site, if it is
designed for any lower ambient temperature.
4.3.4 The rated peak short circuit current or the rated short time current carried by the
equipment shall not cause:
(a) Mechanical damage to any part of the equipment
(b) Separation of Contacts
(c) Insulation damage of "Current Carrying Part."
4.3.5 The grounding switch shall be capable of making to a dead short circuit without
damage of the equipment or endangering operator.
The disconnecting switches shall be rotating post type with contact blades moving
through horizontal plane.
4.3.6 The rating, the accessories to be furnished and the schedule of equipment are detailed in
Appendices.
4.3.7 The disconnecting switches shall be able to carry the rated current continuously and
rated short time current for three seconds without exceeding the temperature limit
specified in the relevant standard.
4.3.8 The disconnecting switches shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and thermal
effects of maximum possible short circuit current at the point of its installation.
4.4.1 The 3-pole disconnecting switches shall be gang operated type so that all the poles
make and break simultaneously.
4.4.2 The disconnecting switches shall be designed for upright mounting on steel structure.

4.4.3 The disconnecting switches shall have padlocking arrangement in both "open" and
"closed" positions.
4.4.4 All current carrying parts shall be non-ferrous metal or alloy. All live parts shall be
designed to avoid sharp points and edges.
4.4.5 All metal parts shall be of such material and treated in such a way as to avoid rust,
corrosion and deterioration due to atmospheric conditions. Ferrous parts shall be hot-
dip galvanized.
4.4.6 Bolt nuts, pins, etc. shall be provided with appropriate locking arrangement such as
locknuts, spring washers, key etc.
4.4.7 Bearing housing shall be weatherproof with provision for lubrication. The design,
however, shall be such as not to require frequent lubrication.
4.4.8 All bearings in the current path shall be shorted by flexible copper conductor of
adequate size (minimum-70sqmm) to allow the specified fault current through it
without injury.
4.4.9 Main contacts

The main contacts shall be of silver-plated copper alloy and controlled by powerful
springs designed for floating and pressure point contact.
The contacts shall have sufficient area and pressure to withstand the electromagnetic
stresses developed during short circuit without excessive heating liable to pitting or
welding.
Contacts shall be adjustable to allow for wear, shall be easily replaceable and shall have
minimum movable parts and adjustments.
The blade shall be made of electrolytic copper tube or aluminum tube of liberal section.
Rotating feature of the blade at the end of tube travel for contact wiping shall be
provided.
Arcing horns shall be provided to divert the arc from main contacts to the separating
horns after the main contacts have opened. Arcing horns shall be renewable type.
4.4.10 Insulators and terminals

Insulators shall be post type, brown glazed and composed of stacked units.
The porcelain used for insulators shall be manufactured by wet process and shall be
homogeneous and free from cavities and other flaws.
Caps and pins shall be of the highest quality malleable iron or forged steel and
smoothly galvanized.
Arcing horn as required shall be furnished.
All insulators of identical ratings shall be interchangeable.
The terminals of the disconnecting switch shall be provided with terminal connectors.
4.5 Operating Mechanism
4.5.1 Disconnecting switches for 33kV.

The operating mechanism for 33kV shall be manually operated.
The manual operating mechanism shall be of torsion type suitable for operation
in the horizontal plane. The operating handle shall be equipped with each switch and

shall be arranged for mounting on the steel base supporting structures. Means shall be
provided on each switch for taking up loose motion in the operating mechanism and for
adjusting the travel of each blade independently. The Contractor shall furnish all
supplemental members required to secure the installation of the complete switch
mechanism to the supporting structures.
All switches shall be self-locking in the open and closed positions independent
of the control shaft restraint. Each mechanism shall be provided with an indicator
showing direction of rotation for opening or closing, and shall be provided for
grounding and for padlocking in the open and closed positions.
Each operating mechanism shall be furnished complete with all necessary operating
pipes, interphase shafts, pipe couplings, guide bearings, ground braids, mounting
brackets, mounting bolts, operating handle, auxiliary switches and offsets required for
operation from the ground. All operating rods and levers shall be cut to length and all
machining operations and threading shall be complete in the factory.
The manually operated disconnecting switches shall also be provided with a
minimum four (4) normally closed and four (4) normally open auxiliary contacts for
remote indications.
4. 6 Assembly
Each disconnecting switches along with its base frame and operating mechanism shall
be completely assembled and checked at manufacturer's works for correct alignment
and operation prior to dispatch.
All parts and accessories shall have appropriate match marks and part number for
identification at site.
4.7 Tests
4.7.1 Type and routine tests on the equipment and components shall be in accordance with
latest revision of IEC Standards or equivalent standards approved by the
Each switch shall include but not limited to the following tests:
(a) Routine tests
- Power frequency voltage dry test
- Measurement of resistance of main circuit
- Control and secondary wiring check test
- Mechanical operation test
(b) Design tests
- Insulator test

- Dielectric test, including impulse withstand test
- Radio influence test
- Short-time current test
- Voltage drop test the voltage drop across one complete phase of a switch
shall be measured when carrying rated current.
- Temperature Rise Test
If type tests have been previously conducted on identical disconnecting switch, the
Contractor may furnish the certified copies of such previous reports instead of
performing tests. The Bidder shall submit copy of design test report from accredited
testing laboratory for the disconnecting switch of the offered model along with the bid.
4.7.2 The type and routine test certificate shall be furnished in the required number of copies
to the Employer/Employer's Representative for approval before dispatch of the
equipment from the works.
4.7.3 Field tests

After installation at Site, the disconnecting switches shall be subjected but not limited
to the following field tests:
(c) Mechanical operation test
(a) General arrangement drawing with different sections showing constructional

features.
(b) Technical leaflets on disconnecting switches offered explaining the function of

various parts, principle of operation and special features (if any).
(c) Typical type test results on identical equipment offered in the Tender.
4.8.2 The various drawings, data and manuals shall be submitted for approval and afterwards
for final distribution in quantities and in procedures as set-up elsewhere. The various
drawings and data to be furnished shall include:
(a) Outline dimensional drawings of the equipment showing general arrangement

and location of fittings.
(b) Transport/shipping dimensions with weights.

(c) Foundation and anchor bolt details including loading condition.

(d) Assembly drawing for erection at site with part numbers and schedule of
materials.
(e) Electrical schematic and wiring diagram.
(f) Any other relevant drawings and data necessary for erection, operation and
maintenance.(g) Instruction manual and data sheets.
(h) Any other relevant data, drawing and information necessary for review of the
items stated above.
APPENDIX A-1
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33kV DISCONNECTING SWITCH

(WITH GROUNDING SWITCH)
1. Type
3-pole, single throw,

outdoor
3. Voltage ratings
4. Frequency 50Hz

6. Current ratings
(b) Short time current (1 seconds) 25 kA
(c) Peak short time current 32kA
(d) Making current of grounding switch 32kA
7. Operating mechanism Manually gang operated

APPENDIX A-2
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33kV DISCONNECTING SWITCH

(WITHOUT GROUNDING SWITCH)
1. Type
3-
pole, single throw, outdoor
3. Voltage ratings
4. Frequency 50Hz

6. Current ratings
(b) Short time current (1 seconds) 25kA
(c) Peak short time current 32kA
7. Operating mechanism manually gang operated

5. POWER FUSE
5.1 General
installation works and field test of power fuse.
Manufacturer of fuse shall be holder of valid ISO 9001 Certificate
5.2.1 The equipment to be furnished shall strictly be in accordance with the Price Schedule.
5.3.1 Power fuse shall be in accordance with IEC standards. The fuse set shall be of drop out
type and fuse shall be contained inside fibreglass suitable for outdoor use in a tropical
climate. Complete fuse mountings and holders shall be furnished as specified in
Technical Particulars enclosed. Refill units are to be furnished separately.
5.3.2 All terminals shall be of high conductivity copper alloy and all terminals for aluminium
shall be plated with hot-flowed electro-tin or cadmium.
5.3.3 The insulated stick furnished for replacing the fuses shall be 6m (20 feet) and a
combination type suitable for operating hook stick disconnected. The stick shall be of
fibreglass or plastic over a wood or plastic foam cane and have voltage withstand rating
of 246kV per meter.
5.3.4 Technical particulars of power fuse shall be as per Appendices enclosed.
5.4 Tests
In addition to the manufacturer's routine production tests, power fuse of each type and
rating shall be subject to the tests in accordance with IEC standards.
5.5 Data
The contractor shall furnish complete data for applying and coordinating the fuses
supplied. This data shall include log-log time-current curves of minimum and
maximum clearing for each fuse size furnished.

APPENDIX A-1
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF POWER FUSE
A. 33kV POWER FUSE.
1. Type Single pole, single throw, drop out,

hook stick operated, outdoor type
2. Quantity required
(a) Power fuse As per Price Schedule
3. Voltage ratings
(a) Nominal voltage class 33kV
4. Basic impulse level (BILL) 170kV
5. Current rating 100A
6. Interrupting rating
(Max. rms)
8kA
(Symmetrical)
7. Mounting position
(a) Power fuse Vertical

6. INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER
6.1 General
and installation works and field test of instrument transformers as specified herein
under.
particular:
IEC 60044 Voltage transformers

IEC 60044 Instrument transformers
Manufacturer of instrument transformer shall hold valid ISO 9001(including design)

The Following Equipment shall be furnished, if seemed necessary, after the approval of
Schematic Diagram submitted by the Bidders or as Instructed by the Owner. The Schematic
diagram should be prepared and submitted by the Bidders with Technical Proposal, after
studying the existing Protection and Metering System, such as to provide necessary and
adequate Protection to the Transformer Bay as a Whole. The Bidders are required to make
the Site visit and access necessary Data and Drawings from the respective Substation.
Similarly, the details about the Ratio / Burden / Class will be finalized after the approval of
the Schematic Diagram or as Instructed by the Owner.
i. 33 kV Current Transformer for Measurement & Protection

ii. 331kV / 110V Potential Transformer for measurement & Protection
iii. 33 kV Bushing current Transformer for Protection
iv. 11kV Bushing Current Transformer for Protection
v. 11kV Current Transformer for Measurement & Protection.
V 11kV / 110V Potential Transformer for measurement & Protection
6.3.1 Instrument transformers shall be suitable 33kV 50Hz. 3 Phase with neutral solidly
grounded system.
6.3.2 Instrument transformers shall be installed outdoor in a hot, humid climate. All
equipment and accessories shall be provided with tropical finish to prevent fungus
growth.

Burden of the instrument transformers stated herein is the minimum value required.
Where higher burden is required to suit the designs, the Contractor shall supply the
same without additional cost.
6.4.1 The instrument transformers shall be oil-filled construction and shall be designed for
outdoor service and suitable for vertical mounting.
6.4.2 The core and coils of current transformer shall be mounted in a steel tank on the top of
the unit with the primary coil leads extending through insulated bushings for series or
multiple connections. A steel base shall support the high voltage bushing and tank. The
high voltage bushing shall be sealed to the tank and the base with oil-tight joints.
6.4.3 The primary terminals of instruments shall include provisions for externally connecting
the primary winding. The secondary terminals shall be enclosed in a weatherproof
terminal box.
6.4.4 Porcelain bushings shall have adequate mechanical and electrical strength. The color of
porcelain shall be brown.
6.4.5 Junction boxes

Junction boxes shall be rigid weatherproof type complete with terminal blocks suitable
for cable size having the range up to 2x6 sq. mm for termination of the secondary
connections (such as delta or wye connection). They shall be made of metal, which will
resist corrosion on both inside and outside surfaces; otherwise they shall be suitably
protected by galvanizing. Cover of the junction box shall be of hinge door type
complete with door handle. Two drainage holes shall be provided at the bottom of the
junction box. In case the junction boxes are steel sheet, the thickness of such steel sheet
shall be at least 1.2mm. Junction boxes shall be sized and arranged to provide easy
access for external cables and adequate space for internal wiring and installed
equipment. Enclosure protection class of the junction boxes shall be IP55W
The terminal blocks used should be provided with shorting links on the top of the unit
with the primary coil leads extending through insulated bushing for series or multiple
connections .A steel base shall support the high voltage bushing and tank. The bushings
shall be sealed to the tank and the base with oil tight joints.
6.4.6 Termination
(a) Current transformers
All current transformer secondary winding terminals shall be connected to terminals on
terminal located in the junction boxes. In addition, a short -circuit type terminal block
shall be provided for each maximum ratio of each core at the terminal blocks in both
the secondary terminal box and junction box.
(b) Potential transformer

All PTs secondary terminals shall be connected to terminals on terminal blocks
located in the junction boxes.

6.4.8 Protective devices

(a) The secondary phase wire for external connection shall be equipped on all
potential transformers with switch and fuse. Fuses shall be rated to provide external
short-circuit protection and shall be high rupturing capacity non-deteriorating type.
Switches shall be rated not less than 250V AC 50Hz. Switches and fuses shall be
contained within the junction box provided for termination. Supply fuse failure
supervision shall be provided.
6.4.9 Accessories
The following items shall be provided for each instrument transformer:
(a) Nameplate
(b) Oil level gauge
(c) Oil valves or plugs
(d) Power factor test terminals
(e) Necessary terminal connections
(f) Grounding terminals
(g) Other necessary accessories
6.5 Tests
Tests shall be performed as specified hereunder.
6.5.1 Current transformer
(a) Routine tests

Each current transformer shall be subjected to the following tests.
- Applied potential test
- Induced potential test
- Accuracy tests (including excitation curve for relaying class)
- Polarity check
- Winding resistance measurement for each ratio
(b) Design tests
Type test records of an identical unit of current transformer shall be submitted

to Employer/Employer's Representative. In case type test records are not
available, the actual tests shall be performed. The items of test shall be as
follow:
- Short time current test
- Temperature rise test
- Power frequency withstand voltage (wet) test
- Impulse voltage withstand test
- Temperature rise test
6.5.2 Potential transformer
(a) Routine tests
Each capacitor voltage transformer shall be subjected but not limited to the
following tests:

- Power frequency withstand voltage (dry) test.
- Dielectric tests for electromagnetic unit

- Accuracy tests
- Polarity check
- Ratio test
(b) Design tests
Type test records of an identical unit of potential transformer shall be submitted.

In case type tests records are not available, the actual tests shall be performed.
The items of test shall be as follows:
- Voltage test between phase and ground terminals

- Power frequency withstand (wet) test
- Impulse test
- Radio-influence voltage test
- Short-time over voltage test
- Thermal burden test
6.5.3 Field tests
After installation at Site, all instrument transformers shall be subjected but not limited
to the following tests:
(a) Constructions inspection
(b) Polarity check
(c) Ratio test
(d) Measurement of insulation resistance
(a) Outline dimensional drawings of the equipment
(b) Characteristics and performance data
(c) Type test certificates of similar equipment
6.6.2 After award of Contract the successful Bidder shall submit the required number of
copies of the following drawings for approval of the Employer/Employer's
Representative.
(a) Outline dimensional drawings of the equipment

(b) Transport/shipping dimensions with weights
(c) Foundation and anchor bolt details
(d) Characteristic and performance data including ratings, ratio and phase angle
curves, accuracy for standard burdens, and thermal burden ratings.
(e) Instruction books including complete information for installation, testing,
operation and maintenance with renewal parts data.
(f) Any other relevant drawings and data necessary for review of the items stated
above.

APPENDIX A-1
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33kV CURRENT TRANSFORMER
1. Type Outdoor, oil immersed for

protection and metering
3. Rated primary voltage 33kV
4. Max. system voltage 36kV
5. Impulse withstand voltage 170kV
7. Number of cores 2
8. Current Ratio 300-150/5A
9. Rated Burden 50 VA
10. Accuracy 5P/20 and 0.5 for metering
11 Power Factor 0.85
12 Over voltage factor 1.1 Continuous

1.5 For 30 sec
13 No of secondary windings as required
14 over load factor 200%
15. Short time thermal rating 25 kA

APPENDIX A-2
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
1. Type Outdoor, oil immersed
3. Rated primary voltage 33/ 3 kV
4. Max. system voltage 36kV
5. Impulse withstand voltage 170kV
7. Connection Line to ground
8. Number of secondary winding 2
9. Voltage ratio 33,000/ 3/110/3V
10. Rated burden for each winding 100 VA
11. Accuracy 3P and 0.5 for metering
12. Power factor 0.85
13. Rated voltage factor 1.1 continuous, 1.5 for

30 sec

7. LIGHTNING ARRESTER
7.1 General
This specification covers the design, manufacture, factory test, delivery, field test and
installation of lightning arresters, complete with all accessories.
particular:
IEC 60099-4 Metal-oxide Surge arrester without gap for a.c. system
IEC 60099-5 Surge arrester - Selection and application recommendations
Manufacturer of instrument transformer shall hold valid ISO 9001(including design)

30 kV Lightening Arrestor
7.3.1 The lightning arresters shall be station type, single pole, gap less type rated voltage
30kV for 33kV system. The nominal discharge current shall not be less than 10kA.
7.3.2 The active part of the lightning arresters shall be accommodated in porcelain insulators
which are suitably reinforced to prevent explosion of an arrester.
7.3.3 Pressure relief device shall be provided for the safe discharge of internal pressure.
7.3.4 The lightning arresters shall be mounted on galvanized steel structure. Terminal
connectors for both line and ground terminals shall be furnished.
7.3.5 Surge monitoring device consisting of surge counter, etc., along with insulating bases
for mounting at the bottom of the arrester, shall be furnished.
7.4 Test
7.4.1 All routine tests shall be performed on each piece of arrester as per IEC. In addition, the
following tests shall be carried out.
(a) Construction test

(b) Insulation resistance test and leak current test
7.4.2 Type test certificates on similar equipment and routine test certificate carried out for
following tests shall be furnished for approval of the Employer/Employer's
Representative.
(a) Voltage withstand test

(b) Impulse voltage characteristic test

(c) Discharge voltage characteristic test
(d) Discharge current withstand test
(e) Duty cycle test
(f) Pressure relief test
(g) Contamination test
7.5 Drawings and Data
7.5.1 The following documents shall be furnished along with the Tender.
(a) Standard catalogue identifying the models and ratings being furnished.
7.5.2 The following drawings and data shall be furnished in required number of copies after
award of contract for approval of Employer/Employer's Representative.
(a) All updated documents furnished with the Tender.

(c) Foundation and anchor details including dead load
(d) Transport/shipping dimensions with weight
(e) Any other relevant data, drawings and information
7.6 Nameplate
Each lightning arrester shall be provided with a nameplate of weather resistant material

(d) Rated voltage

(e) Nominal discharge current

APPENDIX A-1
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 30kV LIGHTNING ARRESTER
1. Type Outdoor, station type
3. Mounting Pedestal
5. System voltage 33kV
6. Rated voltage 30kV
7. Impulse withstand voltage (BIL) 170kV
8. Power frequency withstand voltage 70kV
9. Nominal discharge current 10kA
10 Surge Counter
shall be the ISO

9001 holding company

8 CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL
8.1 General
8.1.1 This specification covers Study, Design, Manufacture, Assembly Factory Test, Supply,
Delivery, Installation works and Field Test and Commissioning of Control and Relay
Panels as specified herein under. The panel shall be used for the protection of the
following :
Transformer Protection equipment/ relays as required shall have to be supplied and

installed accordingly.
8.1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of Design and Construction of
Equipment supplied. However, the equipment supplied shall conform, in all respects, to
high standards of Engineering, Design and Workmanship and be capable of performing
in continuous commercial operation up to Contractor's guarantee in a manner
acceptable to the Employer who will interpret the meaning of Drawings and Specifications
and shall have the power to reject any work or material which in his judgment are not in
full accordance therewith.
The Tenderer shall submit his proposed Control Panel Arrangement & Layout. The
Tenderer is warned that the available space in the existing control rooms is very limited
and the panels shall be of such size to fit in available space.
The cost of any relocation of equipment in the control room and outdoor switchyard
necessary to complete the specified works shall be included in his bid price and no
additional payment will be made for such work.
8.1.3 The indication and annunciation schemes for existing substations shall be compatible with
the existing system as far as possible.
8.1.4 Manufacturers for Protection Equipment
All protection relays like over current, earth fault, differential, definite time over current
etc shall be of static type and shall be from following manufacturers or equivalent.
a) ALSTHOM (Areva) b) Fuji
c) CGELEC d) Reyrolle / Easun Reyrolle
e) ABB f) Siemens
g) Toshiba h) Mitsubishi
8.2.1 Control and Relay panels shall be more or less of the color matching with the existing one

8.2.2 In addition to the above, the following shall be supplied:
(a) Floor channel seals, vibration damping pads, kick plates, earthing pads and
holding down bolts and nuts.
(b) Special tools and tackle.
8.3 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
8.3.1 The Panel Dimensions specified are tentative only and it is the responsibility of Tenderer
to ensure that all the equipment required can be properly accommodated in the respective
space. The panels shall also be of a size & type which can be easily accommodated within
the space of existing Panels & existing control room without the necessity for expansion
of the control room. Such oversized panels will not be accepted.
8.3.2 The 33 kV panel shall be of Simplex type or Duplex type as per the layout of the
respective Substation.
i. In case, the Panels are Duplex type, it shall comprise two vertical front and rear
panel sections connected back-to-back by formed sheet steel roof tie members and
a central corridor in between. The corridor shall facilitate access to internal wiring
and external cable connections. Both ends of the corridor shall be provided with
double leaf doors with lift off hinges.
Doors shall have handles with built-in locking facility. Separate cable entries shall
be provided for the front and rear panels. However, interconnection between
panels shall be by means of inter panel wiring at the top of the panels.
ii. If the panels are of Simplex type, it shall comprise of two vertical fronts side by
side, with door at rear sections with built in locking facility.
8.3.3 Panels shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be dust, moisture and vermin proof.
Panel enclosures shall provide a degree of protection not less than IP 54 as per IEC.
8.3.4 Panels shall be free standing, floor mounting type and shall comprise rigid welded
structural frames enclosed completely with specially selected smooth finished, cold rolled
sheet steel of thickness not less than 3mm for front and rear portions and 2mm for sides,
top and bottom portions. There shall be sufficient reinforcement to provide level surfaces,
resistance to vibration and rigidity during transportation and installation.
8.3.5 All doors, removable covers and panels shall be gasketed all around with gaskets.
Ventilation louvers, if provided, shall have screens and filters. The screens shall be made
of either brass or GI wire mesh.
8.3.6 Design, materials selection and workmanship shall be such as to result in neat appearance
inside and outside with no welds, rivets or bolt heads apparent from outside, with all
exterior surfaces true and smooth.
8.3.7 Panels shall be suitable for floor mounting. Metal sills in the form of galvanized steel
channels properly drilled shall be furnished along with anchor bolts and necessary

hardware for mounting to a concrete floor. Any irregularity between the sills and flooring
shall be sealed to prevent entry of dust, moisture and vermin. Panels shall have additional
rolled channel plinth at the bottom with smooth bearing surface. The panels shall be fixed
on the sills with intervening materials. The type of anti-vibration strips which shall be
supplied by the Contractor shall be subject to the approval of the Employer.
8.3.8 Cable entries to the panels shall be from the bottom unless otherwise specified. The
bottom plates of the panels shall be fitted with removable plates of adequate size for
holding the cables using cable connectors to seal from dust and moisture. All cable
connectors required shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be screwed type and
shall be suitable for PVC armored cables.
Control and relay panel enclosure protection class shall be of IP 54. When in closed
position there shall not be any chances of entering lizards, mousse etc inside the panel
8.4 Component Mounting
8.4.1 All equipment on front of panel shall be mounted flush or semi-flush. In case of
semi-flush mounting, only flange or bezel shall be visible from the front.
8.4.2 Equipment shall be mounted such that removal and replacement can be accomplished
individually without interruption of service to adjacent equipment. Equipment mounted
inside the panel shall be so located that terminals and adjacent devices are readily
accessible without the use of special tools. Terminal markings shall be clearly visible.
8.4.3 Cut-outs and wiring for free issue items, if any, shall be according to corresponding
equipment manufacturers drawings. Cut-outs, if any, provided for future mounting of
equipment shall include cover plates.
8.4.4 The centerline of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be not less than
750mm from the bottom of the panel. The centerline of relays with targets and/or
requiring adjustment, motors, test switches, and recorders shall be not less than 450mm
from the bottom of the panel. No components shall extend below 200mm.
It will be preferable if existing panel layout is used to give uniform appearances.
8.4.5 The centerline of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be matched to give a
neat and uniform appearance. Likewise, the top lines of all meters, relays and recorders,
etc. shall be matched.
8.4.6 No equipment shall be mounted on the doors without prior approval of the Employer.
8.4.7 In the existing substation, panels shall be as far as possible matched with the existing
panels in the control room in respect of Dimensions, Color, Appearance, Size and
Arrangement of equipment on the front.
8.4.8 The standard phase arrangement when facing the front of the switch-board shall be R-S-T
from left to right, from top to bottom, and front to back. All relays, instruments, other
devices, buses and equipment involving three phase circuit shall be arranged and
connected in accordance with the standard phase arrangement.

8.5 Mimic Diagrams
8.5.1 Mimic diagrams shall be provided on panels as required. Mimic diagrams shall be
screwed on to panels and shall be made of anodized aluminium or plastic of approved fast
color material which can be easily cleaned. The width of the mimic bus shall be subject to
approval of the Employer.
8.5.2 The colors for the various voltages in the mimic diagram shall be as per the existing
colors.
8.5.3 When semaphore indicators are used for disconnecting switch positions, they shall be so
mounted in the mimic that the disconnecting switchs close position shall complete the
continuity of the mimic. Similarly, when control switches of stay-put type are mounted in
the mimic, the 'close' position of the switch shall complete the mimic.
8.6 Annunciators
8.6.1 Annunciators of the visual and audible type shall be provided on the panels when called
for in the equipment lists, if enclosed. Annunciators shall be suitable for operation for the
voltages specified.
8.6.2 Annunciators shall be of facia type with 35mm x 50mm (minimum) translucent plastic
window for each alarm point. Annunciator facia plates shall be engraved in block letter
with respective alarm inscriptions, which will be furnished to Contractor by Employer.
Alarm inscriptions shall be engraved on each window in not more than three lines and size
of the lettering shall be not less than 3mm. The inscriptions shall be visible only when the
respective light is lighted. If any other type of Annunciators are to be used, prior approval
from the Owner should be taken before manufacturing..
8.6.3 The annunciators shall be suitable for operation with normally open fault contacts which
close on a fault. When specified in bill of materials, some of the annunciator points shall
be suitable for operation with normally closed faults contacts which open on a fault. It
shall be possible at site to change annunciators from "open to fault" to "close to fault" and
vice versa. Annunciators shall be suitable for accepting fleeting faults of duration not less
than 15 milliseconds.
8.6.4 Annunciators shall be compact self- contained units with associated relays mounted
behind the facia units. In case the associated relays cannot be housed behind the
annunciator facia units, these shall be mounted and wired in a separate panel which shall
be included in the offer. However, the latter arrangement is not preferred due to additional
space requirement and wiring interconnections. Alarm relays and facia units shall be
interchangeable.
8.6.5 Annunciator facia units shall be suitable for flush/semi-flush mounting on panels.
Replacement of individual facia inscription plates and lamps / LED / LCD shall be
possible from front of the panels.
8.6.6 One alarm buzzer common to annunciators on all the panels shall be provided. Similarly,
"Sound Cancel", "Acknowledge, "Reset" and "Lamp Test" push buttons common to

annunciators on all the panels shall be provided. These common devices shall be located
in a particular panel as determined by the Employer.
8.6.7 In case of static annunciator schemes, special precaution shall be taken by the Contractor
to ensure that spurious alarm conditions do not appear due to false influence of external
magnetic fields on the annunciator wiring and switching disturbances from the
neighboring circuits.
8.6.8 Each annunciation window shall be provided with two lamps to provide safety against
lamp failure. Lamps shall operate in parallel such that failure of one will not affect
operation of the other.
8.6.9 Sequence of Operation of the Annunciator shall be as follows:
Alarm Condition Fault Contact Audible Visual Alarm

Alarm
Normal Open Off Off

Abnormal Close On Flashing
Sound cancel Close or Open Off Flashing
Acknowledge Close or Open Off Steady On
Back to Normal Open Off Steady On
Reset Open Off Off
Lamp Test Open Off Steady On
In case 'RESET' push-button is pressed before abnormality is cleared, the lamps shall
continue to glow steady and shall go out only when 'Normal' condition is restored.
8.6.10 Any new annunciation appearing after the operation of "Sound Cancel" for previous
annunciation, shall provide a fresh "Audible Alarm" with accompanied "Visual Alarm"
even if the process of "Acknowledging" or "Resetting" of previous alarm is going on or
yet to be carried out.
8.6.11 Provision of testing facilities for flasher and audible alarm circuits of annunciators shall be
provided.
8.7 Specific Protection Requirements
8.7.1 Relay Protection
8.7.1.1 Overcurrent and Earthfault Protection
i. Non-Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection shall:
be single pole & have an inverse characteristic with a definite minimum time of
3sec.at 10times setting.
have a variable setting range of 20-200% of rated current
ii. Non-Directional Earth Fault Protection shall :

be single pole type.
have an inverse characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3sec. at 10 times

setting.
have an adjustable setting of 10-80% of rated current.
8.7.1.2 Directional Overcurrent Protection (not applicable)
i. Phase over current relay shall :
be single pole X 3 type
have an inverse characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3secs. at 10 times setting.
have a variable setting range of 50-200% of rated current.
have a characteristic angle of 45 degree.
have a directional controlled low transient over-reach high set instantaneous unit of
continuously variable setting range 200-1200% times of rated current.
be of voltage polarized directional controlled type.
ii. Directional Earthfault overcurrent protection (not applicable)
Earth fault overcurrent relay shall :
Single pole type.
be of zero-sequence voltage polarized directional controlled.
have an inverse characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3 secs. at 10 times setting.
have an adjustable setting range of 10-80% of rated current.
have a directional controlled low transient over reach high set with a continuously
variable setting range of 5-20 times of rated current.
have a characteristics angle of 45 degree.
8.7.1.3 Local Breaker Back Up Protection
Relay shall :
- be triple pole type.
- have an operating time of less than 15 milliseconds.
- have 2 over current and 1 Earth fault elements.

- have a re-setting time of less than 15 milliseconds.
- have a setting range of 30-320% of rated current.
- have a separate time delay relay with a continuously adjustable setting

range of 0.1-1 second.
- have necessary auxiliary relays to make a comprehensive scheme.
- have a continuous thermal withstand two times rated current irrespective

of setting.
- provide both retrip and back-up trip output contacts.
8.7.1.4 Differential Relay
The Differential Relay shall be used for 3 MVA transformer Protection. It shall be of
Three phase with Six through current restraint inputs. The Relay shall have built in trip
relay, indicator & test switch. It shall have complete phase and Earth fault Protection.
The Harmonic restrained operation time of the Relay shall be Approximately 30ms at
3times of pickup current. Similarly, unrestrained operation time shall be 10-20ms at
2times pickup current with minimum impulse time of 3minutes.
The Relay shall have variable percentage restraint for external fault, even at use of OLTC.
The Relay shall have second harmonic restraint from all the three phases for inrush
security & fifth harmonic restraint for all three phase for over excitation security. The
sensitivity shall be settable to 10 - 50% of rated current of 1A.
Un-restrained operation settable to 20 times of rated current.
The relay shall be provided with separate interposing CT for ratio and Phase Angle
matching and equalizing of zero sequence current, or by other programming method.
8.7.2 Manufacturer of Protection Relay shall be as specified
8.7.3 Other Requirements
i. Layout of panel in the control room, individual panel layout incorporating the
hardware and control wiring diagrams and schematics shall be prepared by the
Contractor and be sent to the Employer for approval.
ii. All auxiliary relays, if and when required for the completeness of the various
protection schemes covered in this order, shall be deemed to be included in the scope
of supply whether or not such items are specifically mentioned in the enclosed bill of
material.

ii. Omission of hardware specifically mentioned in Price schedule material such as

auxiliary relays/protective relays, etc. if found necessary during detailed
engineering shall be shipped to the Employer with spare parts, without any extra
cost to the Employer.
iv. All terminal blocks for CT and PT circuits shall be of disconnecting line type.
Suitable plastic covers for all terminal blocks shall be provided in order to prevent
dust accumulation.
v. Panels shall be mounted to concrete foundation on galvanized steel channels with an

intervening layer of anti-vibration strips made of shock absorbing materials which
shall be supplied by the Contractor.
Vi. Cable entries for all the panels shall be from bottom. The bottom plates of the panels
shall be fitted with removable plates of adequate size for holding cables and sealing
from dust and moisture.
vii. A ground bus of bare copper strip of minimum size 25 x 6mm along the length of each
panel shall be provided and shall be connected to the ground mat of the station.
Miscellaneous Accessories
8.7.4 Space Heater
Each panel shall be equipped with space heaters to prevent moisture condensation within
the enclosure and shall be completed with switch fuse units for power supply. Space
heaters and switch fuse units shall be suitable for continuous operation.
8.7. 5 Plug Point
A 230 V, 1 phase, 50Hz AC plug point shall be provided in the interior of each cubicle
with on-off switch for connection of hand lamps.
8.8 Tests
8.8.1 Relay and Control Panels shall be subjected but not limited to the following tests:
i. Mechanical operation test
ii. Verification of degree of protection
iii. Calibration test for meters
iv. Characteristic test for relays
v. High voltage test of insulation (2000 volts for 1 minute)
vi. Electrical control, interlock and sequential operation tests

vii. Verification of wiring as per approved schematic diagram.
8.8.2 Type tests and routine tests shall be carried out on all associated equipment as per relevant
standards approved by the Employer.
8.8.3 Certified copies of all type and routine test certificates shall be submitted for the
Employer's approval before dispatching the control and relay panel.
8.8.4 After completion of the installation, panels shall be subjected but not limited to the
following field tests :
i. Electrical control, interlock and sequential operation tests
ii. Calibration test for meters
iii. Measurement of insulation resistance
vi Characteristic test for relays
8.8.5 Transformer Protection
33/11 kV , 6/8 &10/13.3/16.6 MVA transformer shall be protected by the

following relays
a Over current relay
b Earth fault relay
c Differential relay
d Definite over current relay (if applicable)

APPENDIX:1.4.1
BILL OF MATERIAL
The bill of materials shall cover only the major equipment, or such information as will require particular
information from the Tenderer. Tenderer is to be understood that, all other associated auxiliary equipment and
accessories, although not listed in the bill of materials, but necessary for the complete and sound function of the
control board as described in this specification, shall be furnished by the Contractor.
TRANSFORMER CONTROL & RELAY PANEL

1. Major Components
Legend Description Quantity per Panel
1. ANN Annunciator assembly, 24 active points,110V DC, 4 rows high by 6 1Lot
columns wide, flush mounted, and with:
3-separately mounted push buttons
2-separately mounted indicating lamps,
one white lamp, and one red lamp
Following minimum annunciation shall be provided:
1. Transformer HV Backup Protection trip
2. Transformer LV Backup Protection trip
2. Transformer Differential Protection trip
3. 6/8 &10/13.3/16.6MVA Transformer)
4. Transformer Bucholz Alarm / Trip
5. Transformer Low Oil Level
6. Tap Changer Bucholz Alarm / Trip
7. Tap Changer Low Oil Level
8. Circuit Breaker Trip
9. Transformer Winding Temperature High
10. Transformer Winding Temperature Extra High
11. Tap changer Temperature High
12. Tap changer Out of Step
13. Transformer Cooling System Fail
14. Pressure Relief Device Operated
15. AC Fail
16. DC Fail
17 22. Spare
2. Relay Only main relays and instruments are listed here. All the trip relays
and auxiliary relays required for satisfactory operation of the scheme
shall be included by the Contractor.
2.1 50/51/50N/ Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection with Instantaneous Protection 1Lot
51N
2.2 50B Breaker Failure Protection 1Nos
2.3 Trip circuit supervision relay 1Nos
2.4 51E Transformer Protection 1Nos
2.5 87 Differential Relay 1Nos
2.6 Interlocks, Switching & Tripping Relay 1Lot
3. A Indicating ammeter , Digital 3Nos
0-100A; 0-200A 300-200-100/5A
4. MWH Electronic type with 0.22 Class To be Supplied by
NEA
5. P.F. Power factor 0.6-1-0.6 lead 1Nos
6. KVA 0-10 MVA 1Nos

7. CS Breaker control switch, and with : 1Nos

2-separately mounted indicating lamps,
8. CS Disconnecting control switch, and with: 2-separately mounted 1Nos
indicating lamps
9. Electrically operated mimic disconnect device, 110V DC, to 1Lot
indicate the position of disconnecting switch
10. Electrically operated mimic connected to position of line ground 1Lot
switch
11 Trip Transfer Switch, for transferring trip signal, reclosing relay, 1Lot
PT circuit to bus tie Breaker. (wherever required)
12 Multiple Adjustable Ratio Intermediate Current Transformer for 1 Set
Differential Protection, if required
8.8 ENERGY METERS
8.9 SPECIFICATION FOR SOLID STATE ENERGY METERS
1. Scope
This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, testing and
delivery at site of CT and VT operated A.C. static watt hour meter. The meters shall be
3-Phase 4 wire 0.5 accuracy class for measurement of active, reactive (lead & lag) and
apparent power and energy as per power tariff requirement of A.C. balanced and
unbalanced load at nominal frequency in the range of 47.5Hz to 52.5Hz using Digital
Technology. Meter shall be manufactured using latest and state of art technology and
methods prevalent in electronic industry.
It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the hardware, software,
communication and design of the system. The material shall, however, conform in all
respects to the best standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be
capable of performing for continuous commercial operation.
Energy meters shall be numeric type and shall be offered from reputed makes like
Landis & Gyr, ABB or EDMI or equivalent.
2.0 Service Conditions
The meters to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:
Environmental Condition
a) Maximum ambient temperature -5 to 550C

b) Maximum ambient temperature in shade 45 0C
c) Minimum temperature of air in shade 35 0C
d) Maximum daily average temperature 40 0C
e) Maximum yearly weighted average temperature 32 0C
f) Relative Humidity (%) 10 to 95
g) Maximum Annual rainfall (mm) 1450
h) Maximum wind pressure (Kg/m.sq) 150
i) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (meters) Upto 2000
j) Isoceraunic level (days/year) 50

k) Seismic level (Horizontal acceleration) 0.3g

l) Climate: - Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and
fungus growth.
The meters should be designed for tropical condition and shall be constructed to be
capable of withstanding all severe stresses and vibrations and dust environments likely
to encounter in actual practice.
3.0 Applicable Standards, Accuracy and Certification
The meters shall conform (for testing, performance and accuracy) in all respects the
relevant /International standards with latest amendments thereof.
S.No Standard No. Title
IEC62053-22 Ed. 1.0 B 2003 A.C. Static Watt-hour Meters For Active Energy,
1.
with latest amendment. Class 0.5s / 0.2 s
There should be no drift of accuracy, which means that the initial accuracy is sustained
over the entire life of the meter and there should be no need for adjustment of the
accuracy after installation.
The manufacturer of the offered meter must have been accredited with ISO 9001
(including design) quality certification.
4.0 Rating & Type of Service
The energy meters shall be outdoor type connected with the secondary side of out door
current and voltage transformers.
S.No Item Specification
i) Type of Installation Indoor in panel board,
ii) CT Secondary /5A
ii) PT Secondary For 3 Phase 3 Wire and 4 Wire (HT Metering):

110 V/ 3 Volts (Phase to Neutral)
110 V Volts (Phase to Phase)
For 3 Phase 4 Wire (LT Metering):
400 V/ 3 Volts (Phase to Neutral)
400 V Volts (Phase to Phase)
The voltage range shall be +15% to 40% of
rated voltage (Secondary side of Potential Transformer).

iv) Power Factor range Zero Lag-Unity-Zero Lead. For leading Power factor the
value of KVAh should be equal to KWh, for the purpose of
calculation of average power factor (on the basis of KWh /
KVAh ). i.e. The value of KVAh shall be based on lagging
value of KVARh & KWh.
v) Power consumption As per IEC62053-222003 with latest amendment.
vi) Frequency range 50Hz 5%
vii) Earthing System Solidly Grounded
The maximum continuous current of the meter for guaranteed accuracy is 2 times
(200 %) of Ib. The starting current for the meter should be 0.1% of Ib. The meter shall
not register with no-load. It should also meet the requirements of withstanding short
time over current for 1.0 second up to 20 times Ib. The meter shall be suitable for
balanced as well as unbalanced loads at all power factors. Unbalance in load should not
affect the accuracy of meter.
5.0 General and Constructional Requirements
5.1 The meter should be housed in a safe high grade Thermo engineering plastic/
polycarbonate casing and is dust/moisture proof conforming to IP: 52. The
meter cover should be made up of molded flame retardant polycarbonate, which
is tough, resilient and can be fixed up with the help of screws. Provision should
be made for sealing the cover also.
5.2 The meter shall have Poly carbonate opaque base and cover of Poly-carbonate
material. The thickness of material for meter cover and base shall be 2 mm
(minimum).
5.3 (a) The terminal block should be made out of molded Bakelite/
polycarbonate and should house solid brass terminals with 2 fixing
screws per terminal. The terminals should be liberally designed to permit
high overload withstand capability. The engineering plastic used for
terminal block and cover shall withstand the heat deflection test as per
ISO: 75 and Glow wire test as per IEC:62053-22.
The terminal block should have cover which should be separately

sealable at two places and housed at the bottom of the meter and once
sealed should prevent unauthorized tampering.
(b) The terminals in the terminal block shall be of adequate length in order
to have proper grip of conductor with the help of two screws.
(c) Dust proof window of any transparent material (Toughened glass or poly
carbonate), which shall not fade in prolonged use, shall be provided to
permit clear view of the register. The fixing arrangement shall be such
that the window glass cannot be removed without breaking the seals.
(d) The extended terminal cover shall be transparent.

(e) Meter shall be designed in such a fashion that it should be installed in a

separate box (surface type) which may be fixed on the electric pole in
outdoor condition.
(f) All the insulating materials used in the construction of the meter shall be
of non-hygroscopic, non-ageing and of tested quality.
(g) The entire design and construction shall be capable of withstanding the
severest stress likely to occur in actual service. The soldering shall be
perfect without dry solders.
(h) All parts that are likely to develop corrosion under normal working
condition shall be effectively protected against corrosion by suitable
method to achieve durable results.
(i) The meters shall be designed with application of specific integrated

circuits. The electronic components shall be mounted on the printed
circuit board using latest Surface Mount Technology (SMT).
(j) The meter shall have a suitable test output device for testing meter.
Preferably the blinking LED or other similar device like blinking LCD
shall be provided. The test output device should have constant pulse rate
i.e. Pulse/kWh and pulse/kVARhand its value (meter constant) should be
indelibly printed on the name plate.
(k) The Push button shall be provided for high resolution reading of display,
as brought out elsewhere in this specification.
(l) The meter accuracy shall not be affected by AC/DC magnetic field upto
0.2 Tesla on all the sides of meter i.e. front, sides, top and bottom of the
meter. Moreover meter accuracy shall not be affected if permanent
magnet of 0.5 Tesla is applied for 15 minutes.
(m) The meter shall also be capable to withstand and shall not get damaged
if phase to phase voltage is applied between phases & neutral for five
minutes.
(n) Non specified display parameter in the meter should be blocked and it
should not be accessible for reprogramming at site.
(o) Complete metering system should not be affected by the external

electromagnetic interference such as electrical discharge of cables and
Capacitors, harmonics, electrostatic discharges, external magnetic fields
and DC current in AC supply etc. The meter shall withstand any type of
High Voltage and High Frequency surges which are similar to the surges
produced by induction coil type instruments without affecting the
accuracy of the meter. The manufacturers should have type test
certificates for the same.

(p) The meter should have facility for data retrieval through optical port
using CMRI and Laptop PC and RS232 communication port for remote
meter reading facility.
(q) The meter PCB should be wireless to avoid improper and loose
connections/ contacts.
5.4 Sealing
Proper sealing arrangement shall be provided on the meter to make it tamper
proof and to avoid mishandling by un-authorized person. At least two (2) seals
on the body, two (2) seals on the terminals block and one seal each on
maximum demand resetting device and communication ports shall be provided.
Meter base and cover shall be tightened from rear side with at least two nos. so
that meter body could not be opened at site in any case and two nos. firms
stickers seals bearing serial no., which should not be repeated shall be provided
between meter base and cover.
The meter shall be totally sealed and tamper-proof with no possibility of any
adjustment at site. The harmonics shall be filtered out while measuring
Connection Diagram & Terminal Marking
The connection diagram of the metering module shall be clearly shown inside
portion of the terminal cover and shall be of permanent nature. The meter
terminals shall also be marked and this marking should appear in the above
diagram. In case any special precautions need to be taken at the time of testing
the meter the same may be indicated along with the circuit diagram.
7.0 Marking of Meter:
The marking on every meter shall be in accordance with IEC 62053. The basic
marking on the meter name plate shall be as follows:-
i. Manufacturers name and trade mark.
ii. Type designation
iii. Number of phases and wires
iv. Serial number
v. Month & year of manufacture
vi. Reference voltage/ PT ratio
vii. Frequency
viii. Rated secondary current of CT (-/1 or -/5 A).
ix. Principal unit(s) of measurement.
x. Meter constant (impulse/kWh).
xi. Class index of meter.
xii. Text SUPPLIED BY NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
xiii. P.O. No. & Date.
xiv. Guarantee period
8.0 Real Time Clock

The real time quartz clock shall only be used in the meter for maintaining time
(NS) and calendar. The time accuracy shall be as per provision of relevant IEC
Standard. Facility for adjustment of real time should be provided through
CMRI and Laptop with proper security.

9.0 M.D. Registration and Demand Resetting
9.1. The meter shall continuously monitor & calculate the average demand in kVA
during the Integration period and maximum out of these shall be stored along
with date & Time in the meters memory. The integration period shall be
programmable for 15/30/60 minutes on real time basis on block / sliding
window principle that should also be programmable.
9.2 The meter shall also display M.D. reset count. The M.D. resetting should be
possible in following way:-
a. Automatic reset on a predetermined date & time of the month.
10. T.O.D. Compatibility
There shall be provision for at least 8 (Eight) different TOD register at least in 6
channels for maximum demand kVA, kWh, kVARh and power factor.
Similarly, there shall be provision for at least 4 (Four) TOD time zones for
energy and demand. The number and timings of these TOD time Zones shall be
programmable from base computer as per the requirements of Employer.
11. Self Diagnostic Features.
11.1 The meter shall be capable of performing complete self diagnostic check at
regular interval to monitor the circuits for any malfunctioning to ensure
integrity of data memory location all the time. The meter shall also keep log in
its memory for unsatisfactory functioning or nonfunctioning of Real Time
Clock battery, also it shall be recorded and indicated in reading file at base
computer software.
11.2 All display segments: "LCD Test" display shall be provided for this purpose.
12. Display of Measured Values
12.1 Permanently backlit LCD panel shall show the relevant information about the
parameters to be displayed. The corresponding non-volatile memory shall have
a minimum retention time of 12 years. In the case of multiple values presented
by a single display it shall be possible to display the content of all relevant
memories. When displaying the memory, the identification of each parameter
applied shall be possible. The principal unit for the measured values shall be
the kilowatthour (kWh) for active energy, kVARh for reactive energy and
kVAh for apparent energy.

12.2 The display shall be minimum full 8 or more digit type display of liquid crystal
display (LCD). The display shall be digital type with non-destructive read out.
The meter should have non-volatile memory (NVM) so that the registered
parameters will not be affected by loss of power. An additional LCD display
should show the legend of the quantity.The size of digit should be minimum
9X5 mm. The adequate back up arrangement for storing of energy registered at
the time of power interruption shall be provided.The meter should have
alternate display modes for showing required information. Default mode
should be auto scroll type. The number of parameters and the scrolling period
shall be field programmable. In alternate mode, required parameters should be
displayed and should be possible to view the parameters using push button.
12.3There shall be arrangement for displaying of consumer ID, consumer no, name
and address for which record number field should be at least of 8 digits.
12.4 The meter shall be capable of recording and displaying automatically the
following:
Display Parameters (Auto Display)
Following parameters shall be diplayed continuously in cyclic order on the

meter face to enable NEA to know the parameter at any instant. The time for
display shall be programmable and shall not drift throughout the life cycle of
meter.
1. Active and Reactive Power,kW & kVAR (forward and reverse)

2. Cumulative Active Energy, kWH (forward and reverse)
3. Cumulative Reactive Energy, kVARH (forward and reverse)
4. Cumulative Apparent Energy, kVAH (forward and reverse)
5. TODActive Energy, kWH (forward and reverse)
6. TOD Reactive Energy, kVARH (forward and reverse)
7. TOD Apparent Energy (kVAH) (forward and reverse)
8. Maximum Demand kVA since Reset (forward and reverse with
occurrence, Date & Time)
9. M.D. Reset Count
10. Last month MD (between reset)
11. Date of last month MD reset
12. Cumulative MD
13. Instantaneous Power Factor
14. Line Frequency
15. Instantaneous phase currents
16. Phase voltage (Instantaneous)
17. Real time & date
18. Self diagnostic (LCD) segment check and Battery check
19. CT & PT Ratio

Display Parameters (Push Button)
After using pushbutton the following parameters should be displayed.
1. Active and Reactive Power,kW & kVAR (forward and reverse)

2. Cumulative Active Energy, kWH (forward and reverse)
3. Cumulative Reactive Energy, kVARH (forward and reverse)
4. Cumulative Apparent Energy, kVAH (forward and reverse)
5. TODActive Energy, kWH (forward and reverse)
6. TOD Reactive Energy, kVARH (forward and reverse)
7. TOD Apparent Energy (kVAH) (forward and reverse)
8. Maximum Demand kVA since Reset (forward and reverse with
occurrence, Date & Time)
9. M.D. Reset Count
10. Last month MD (between reset)
11. Date of last month MD reset
12. Cumulative MD
13. Instantaneous Power Factor
14. Line Frequency
15. Instantaneous phase currents
16. Phase voltage (Instantaneous)
17. Real time & date
18. Self diagnostic (LCD) segment check and Battery check
19. CT & PT Ratio
NOTE : The meter display should return to Default Display mode

( mentioned above ) if the ' Push button ' is not operated for more
than 15 seconds.
12.5 The meter should measure & record total energy consisting of energy due to
harmonics.
12.6 Maximum Demand Integration Period: - Integration period for kVA MD

should be of 30 minutes real time based. However, it shall be programmable to
15 minutes if required.
13. Memory
The data stored in the registers should not be lost in the event of power failure
and the meter should have non-volatile memory, which does not even need
battery back-up. Each meter shall have a non-volatile memory and the data
stored on the NVM should be retained upto twelve years without power.
Following monthly data should be stored for 12 months in the non-erasable

memory along with the name of the month and shall be accessible for reading
through Lap Top.

i. Active energy import, kWh

ii. Active energy export, kWh
iii. Maximum Demand, kVA
iv. Average power factor or kVARh
v. Average frequency for each successive 15-minute block
vi. Reactive Energy Import (while Active Import/Export)
14. Data Communication Capability

14.1 Each meter shall have an optical port on its front for tapping all data stored in its
memory. Portable or hand held data collection devices/ Lap Top PC shall be used
for this purpose. The overall intention is to tap the data stored in the meters
memories once in a month, and transmit the same to a central computer. It shall also
be possible to obtain a print out (hard copy) of all data collected from the meters,
using the local PC. The data transfer should be reliable and fraud proof.
14.2 Additionally, the metering system shall have a serial RS232 port for transferring
the meter data to a remote location via a suitable communication infrastructure.
14.3 The metering system shall be compatible with suitable Base Computer software.
14.4 All meters of the same model shall be totally identical in all respects except for
their unique identification codes. They shall also be totally sealed and tamper
proof, with no possibility of any adjustment at site, except for clock correction.
14.5 There shall be magnetic device at optical port to hold up one end of
communication cable (used to down load the data to Lap Top).The bidder shall
supply a minimum of 40 numbers of optical probe for connection with the Lap Top
computers. The price of the optical probe shall be included in the price of the meter
itself.
15. Software:
The purchaser shall have the right to use the software as required for the operation
of the meter. The supplier shall not charge extra costs for the use of the software.
Further, the software should be able to dispaly the three-pahse voltages and current
waveforms measured by the meter. It should able to display the phasor diagram.
The following software shall be supplied by the meter manufacturer without any
extra cost.
15.1 Software for reading and programming the meter contents through CMRI/Laptop
Computer.
15.2 Base Computer software for accepting data from CMRI and downloading
instructions from Base Computer to MRI.
15.3 Base Computer should have facility to program the display and/or other required
parameters in the meter.
15.4 The meters should be capable to communicate directly to Lap Top Computer.

15.5 The base computer software shall be executable on MS Windows

98/2000/XP/Vista system.
15.6 For efficient and speedy recovery of data downloaded through CMRI/Laptop PC
on base computer, licensed copies of base computer software shall have to be
supplied. This software will be used at numbers of places up to Branch level. As
many copies of base computer software as required up to Branch level shall be
provided free of cost. If there is common software for downloading of data to be
given out to branch offices and the operation of software is restricted through
security code, a code generating software shall be provided by the manufacturer.
The code so generated will be distributed from central level to the branch offices as
per requirements.
15.7 The base computer software shall be Window based & user friendly. The data
transfer shall be highly reliable and fraud proof (No editing shall be possible on
base computer by any means.
15.8 The protocol used in the meter shall have to be provided at the time of supply for
the purpose of Automatic Meter Reading System. The Suppliers shall also have to
submit the protocol for meters supplied in the past and ensure that protocol
corresponds to the type of meter supplied. The protocol shall be shared by NEA.
15.9 Security Features
1. Communication session count should be available though display and with Lap
Top.
2. The meter should log the date and time of at least last five program changes in a
billing period.
3. The meter should have programmable facility to restrict the access to the
information recorded at different security level such as communication read,
communication write etc.
15.10 The Supplier or Manufacturer shall provide a software for generating a report in
concise and desired format so that these can be used for billing, meter data
management, outage management etc.
16. Additional Features
16.1 External Power Supply
Meter shall be provided with super capacitor and battery. The

rated shelf life of battery shall be of 15 years. Super capacitor will provide carry
over power for all normal power outages at least for 36 hr. duration. Battery will
work when super capacitor is discharged or when programmed meter is stored
for extended period without electric supply. No auxiliary supply should be
required for the meter.

16.2 Meter Calibration
The meter should have a blinking LED, which blinks and is analogous to
the rotation of the disk in an electro-mechanical meter for calibration of kWh.
The watt-hour per pulse constant is definable by the manufacturer.
16.3 Recovery of Data
The meter shall have provision to communicate with the CMRI/PC even
in event of failure of display. In event of failure of component affecting more
than just LCD function, manufacturer shall extract the stored data at no cost to
the purchaser during the warranty period. All the cost (including transportation
to and fro) involved in the process shall be borne by the supplier. Similarly, the
memory of the meter shall be suitably protected and secured against unexpected
fault conditions.
16.4 Connection Check
The meter should have capability to check the correctness of connections at site.
16.4 Missing Voltage Indication

There shall be visual display of the missing voltage on the face of the meter.
17. Guarantee
The Meter shall be guaranteed for the period of five years from the date of
commissioning of meter. Meters found defective/ functioning abnormally within
the above guarantee period shall be replaced / repaired by the supplier free of cost
within one month of receipt of intimation. If the defective meters are not
replaced/repaired within the specified period above, the NEA shall recover an
equivalent amount plus 15 % supervision charges from any of the bills of the
supplier.
18. Tests
18.1 Type Tests:-The Meter shall be fully type tested as per the relevant standards
within 5 years from the date of opening of Tender. The type test reports of the
offered meters shall be submitted along with the offer. All the Type Test shall
be carried out from an internationally recognised independent meter test
laboratory, such as PTB, Germany; PTP, Austria; KEMA, Holland; NMI,
Holland; CESI, Italy; Falcon, UK etc, Ofgem (formerly known as Offer) and
test lab recognised and approved by ANSI (American National Standards
Institute) or testing laboratories and authorities duly accredited by the
Internationally recognised accreditation body like International laboratory
Accreditation Co-operation (ILAC) to prove that the Meters meets the
requirements of the specification. In case of test lab recognised and approved
by ANSI/ILAC, the certificate of approval/ recognition shall be submitted
with the Bid. Type Test Reports conducted in manufacturers own laboratory
and certified by testing institute shall not be acceptable. The purchaser
reserves the right to demand repetition of some or all the type tests in presence

of purchasers representative at purchaser's cost. For this purpose, the tenderer

shall quote unit rates for carrying out each type test. However, such unit rates
will not be considered for evaluation of the offer. In case the meters is type
tested earlier to 5 years from the date of opening of tender, the
supplier/manufacturer have to carry out the fresh type tests at their cost before
signing the contract.
18.2 Acceptance Tests:-All acceptance tests as per relevant IEC standard shall be
carried out on the meter.
18.3 Routine Test:- All routine tests as per relevant IEC standard shall be carried
out on all the meters.
19. Guaranteed Technical Particulars
The technical particulars as specified in IEC shall be guaranteed and statement

of guaranteed technical particulars shall be furnished along with tender.
20. Drawings Leaflets
Two sets of drawing showing clearly the general arrangements, fitting details,
electrical connections and design features of each component part should
accompany the tender. Technical leaflets or brochures giving operating instructions
should also be furnished along with the tender. TENDERS without DETAILS
ARE LIABLE FOR REJECTION.
21. User's Manual

The supplier shall furnish the operation & maintenance manual of the Meter
offered and the required software for the smooth functioning of the meter.
22. Departure from Specification

If the supplier wishes to depart from this specification in any respect, he should
draw the attention to such points of departure explaining fully the reasons thereof.
Unless this is done, the requirements of this specification shall be deemed to have
been accepted in every respect.
23.1 The Bidder shall provide the following with the Bid:
a) One (1) clear copy of the governing standard referenced, and

b) Certified type test results for all characteristics of the meter as per
IEC62053-22.

9. 12kV SWITCHGEAR
9.1 Scope of work:
9.1.1 All the works/material as specified in Bill of Quantity and the scope of work shall be
the integral part of the job and all the cost reoccurred in this respect and shall be
included in the bid price. Only the cost of specifically mentioned work/ material shall
be born by NEA. So the bidder is requested to visit the site and contact the Owner in
case of any items/ works not understood before the bid submitted.
9.1.2 12KV cubicle type Indoor Switchgear Panel shall be an air insulated metal clad
switchgear with withdrawable vacuum circuit breaker with the fault interrupting
capacity of at least 25 KA at 11KV solidly grounded system. The switchgear shall be
arranged in single busbar. The cubicle shall be of modular design provided with space
heaters, with the following modules integrated neatly to form a dead front type
switchgear capable of extension on the both side, forming a single row, single bus bar
switchgear panels.
Breaker compartment.
Bus bar Compartment
Cable, C.T. and P.T. Compartment
Instrument and Relay Compartment (LV Compartment)
9.1.3 All Switchgear operation shall be performed behind a close door. Additionally it shall
even be possible to perform all preparations for work inside the cubicle with full degree
of protection.
9.1.4 The use of insulation material shall be reduced to minimum, only ripped insulators with
high-anti-tracking characteristics shall be used for necessary conductor supports.
9.1.5 Cubicle front shall be covered by a door with inspection windows for mechanical
indication for CB ON/OFF position, spring charged and counter indication of CB
operation.
9.1.6 The cubicle shall be of modular design consisting of separate modules for busbar,
circuit breaker, cable and low voltage compartment, and instrument component. Each
compartment shall have its own pressure relief flap. The fixed contact shall be mounted
in bushing moved by circuit breaker carriage.
9.1.7 Earthing to cable feeder and busbar shall be done via earthing switch manually operated
from panel front.
9.1.8 Fixed contacts shall have flat silver plating and contact pressure of male and female
contacts during connected position according to the International Standard.
9.1.9 Bus bars and Jumpers shall have made of flat electrolytic bare copper contact with

special heat shrinkable sleeves which provide effective insulation between phases or
phase to earth, even if bridged by vermin or other conducting body and suitable for
rated current not less than 2000 A. Bus bar shall be latched per panel and easy to
replace by standard normal material. Flexible insulation shrouds shall cover the bus bar
to Jumper Joints and jumper to stationary contact joints.
9.1.10 Bottom of the cubicle shall be covered with a bottom mica plate through which cables
are passed into the panel through the appropriate cable glands.
9.1.11 The proposed switchgear panel shall be extendible.
9.1.12 The proposed switchgear panel shall be suitable for mounting of standard Current and
Voltage Transformer according to IEC standard.
9.1.13 It is observed that most of the fault and damages inside the CB is due to the short circuit
condition carrier out by crawling animals like rat , lizards etc. So special attention shall
be given during design and fabrication for preventing them to enter into the chamber.
9.1.14 Panel shall be of enclosure protection of class IP54
9.2. WITHDRAWABLE PART (CARRIAGE)
9.2.1 The chassis shall be made of sheet-steel section and shall carry the switching device,
moving mechanism, 4 rolling contact bearings for movement and interlocking
mechanism. Movement for carriage shall be done manually and shall be independent
from switch room floor.
9.2.2 Moving contacts shall be double flat contact with silver plated contact pieces. The
flexible fixing shall allow high tolerance and avoiding overheating.
9.2.3 Connection of auxiliary supply to the fixed part shall be verified via multi-pole plug
which shall be included in the interlocking system. For the easy and assured insert of
the plug the hose should come from the fixed part and the plug shall be on the
withdrawable part.
9.2.4 CB and Isolating Switch Carriage shall have the provision to operate mechanically
behind the closed door in Operating and Test Position.
9.2.5 Carriage of the same rating shall be exchangeable. It shall be possible to insert CB with
higher current in lower rated cubicle but not vice versa.
9.3 11 KV METALCLAD SWITHGEAR:
9.3.1 Main Equipment Characteristics
9.3.1.1 Insulation:
i 12KV primary equipment shall be insulated to meet or exceed the following criteria:

Rated Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage (KVp): 75
Rated Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (Kvrms): 28
ii 12KV cubicles shall be designed to provide phase segregation within the enclosures.
9.3.1.2 Clearances:
i 12KV Primary Equipment clearances between phases and phase to earth shall
not be less than as in BS162 or in this specification, whichever is greater.
ii The layout of the equipment shall provide for safe access for operation and
maintenance whilst the remaining sections equipment are alive.
iii Minimum clearances in air for the 12KV 'Indoor' Primary Equipment shall not
be less than:
Phase to Phase (mm): 127
Phase to Earth (mm): 76.2
iv The busbars shall be insulated by High Grade Phase Insulation. Busbars

partitioning shall be done by means of a bushing plate with Cast-Resin
Insulators. and Cubicles shall be partitioning with earthed sheet metal barriers.
9.3.2.3 Current Carrying Capacity:
i Switchgear 12KV Busbars and Connections thereto shall be designed to carry

current corresponding to Maximum Permissible Overload of the connected
equipment without exceeding temperature rise specified in the Relevant
Standards.
ii Switchgear 12KV buswork shall be designed to safely withstand with an

appropriate margin of the Mechanical and Thermal Effects corresponding to at
least the following short circuit currents:
Symmetrical three-phase
(Is)(KA)rms: 25
Peak making Current (KA)p : 63
9.3.2 Circuit Breakers:
9.3.2.1 General
The 12 KV Circuit Breakers shall be Vacuum type, easily withdrawable and housed in
a cubicle. It shall consist of three Vacuum Interrupter, three Support and the Operating
Mechanism. The Operating Mechanism shall have Motor Charged Spring Operated

with provision of hand operated mechanism. With the breaker in close state, spring
energy shall be for a "Trip/Close/Trip" Cycle.
9.3.2.2 Main Data:
Type: Metal enclosed, Indoor switch type: Metal enclosed, Indoor switchgear cubicle
type with vacuum interrupters.
Nominal Service Voltage (kV) : 11
Rated Voltage (kV) : 12
Rated Frequency (Hz) : 50
Rated Nominal Current (A) :-
Breaker for Bus Coupling : 1200A
Feeder Breaker : 800A
Incomer for Main Power Transformer :1200A
Rated Short-Time Breaking Current (asymmetrical) at Rated Voltage, KArms : 25
Rated Short-Time Making Current at Rated Voltage (KA)p : 62.5
Rated Operating Mechanism: Motor-spring operated .
Provision for Manual Operation.
Bus Bar Rating 2000 A.
9.3.2.3 Technical Requirements:
i The Circuit Breakers shall meet requirements of BS 5311 and IEC 56.
ii Vacuum Interrupter:
The Arcing chamber with the two stem connected contacts shall be located between
two ceramic insulators. One contact shall be fixed to the housing and the moving
contact shall be connected to the housing via vacuum tight bellows. The metal bellows
shall enable the moving contact to carry out its strokes. The metal bellows must be able
to withstand the movement corresponding to 30,000 make / break operation without
failing. The insulators shall be made of metallized aluminium oxide ceramic
which permits them to be brazed to metal so that there is no need to use conventional
seals. The Vacuum Interrupter shall remain vacuum tight throughout its working life.
iii The Transformer CB shall be capable of interrupting the corresponding 11KV

distribution lines in the event of failure of the respective feeder breakers.
iv The Operating Mechanism shall have two Trip Coils and be electrically Trip-

Free and Antipumping.
v The Spring Charging Motor, the Closing Coil, the Tripping Coils and all other
control devices of all circuit Breakers shall be suitable for 110V d.c
Operation.
vi A Manually Operated Mechanism for closing and tripping shall be provided in

the breaker cubicle for Maintenance and Emergency Operation. This device
shall be so interlocked that while it is operative, the breaker cannot be
operated remotely.
vii Each Circuit Breakers shall be equipped with an Operation Counter (to
register tripping operations) and position indicator, on the cubicle front.
viii Provision shall be made for Remote alarm/indication of the following status
through a pair of NC+NO contacts:
Circuit Breaker "Open".

Circuit Breaker "Closed".
Circuit Breaker "Trip".
Circuit Breaker "Device Mechanism Faulty".
Trip Circuit Healthy.
Circuit Breaker "Failure"
ix The circuit breaker shall be equipped with a local control switch and local
remote selector switch auxiliary contacts for remote indication. All
contacts shall be wired to terminal block in the breaker cubicle.
x Each of the circuit breakers shall be housed in a free standing indoor type
cubicle. This cubicle (and others comprised in the 11KV metal clad
switchgear) shall be of standard construction and shall be suitable
for attachment of cable connection as described in relevant cubicles.
These cubicles shall be equipped with copper earthing busbars of not less than
200Sq.mm.
xi Plugging contact apertures shall be fitted with fully automatic metal safety
shutters to close the apertures and prevent access to live part when truck
partition is withdrawn and to open when the truck partition is being plugged
in. The shutters shall form reasonable dust, drip, fire and insect proof
enclosures over the apertures. The respective sets of shutters shall be clearly,
boldly and permanently marked 'Busbars' and 'Feeders' respectively.
xii Auxiliary Switches shall be provided as required for Indication, Control,

Protection and Interlocking. In addition, a minimum of two Normally Open
and two Normally Closed Auxiliary Contacts shall be provided as spare
contacts. All available contacts of Auxiliary Switch Assembly shall be wired
to the Terminal Blocks on the fixed portion of the equipment of the switches
and terminals shall be such as to facilitate future extension.

xiii All auxiliary switches shall have contacts with strong wiping action. the
switches shall be located in an accessible position and adequate physical
protection shall be provided.
xiv The Circuit Breakers shall be tested in accordance with BS5311 and IEC56
and IEC60 and shall include the following routine tests:
Mechanical operating tests

Power Frequency Voltage withstand tests.
Tests on auxiliary and control circuits
xv The quality assurance of the equipments and their auxiliary shall be based on
ISO9001 Standard.
xvi The Minimum Operating Cycle (without maintenance) of Interrupters and

Operating Mechanisms shall be suitable for operation over 10Years or 10,000
operations with rated current or 100 operation with rated short circuit current
and overall life shall be more than 30,000 operating cycles.
xvii The Vacuum Circuit Breaker installed in the Switchgear shall move into
following position in the Circuit Breaker Components:
Running Position (Run)
Main Circuit and Control Circuit connected to all circuits.
Test Position (Test )
Main circuit separated from the circuit and only Control Circuits are
Connected.
Disconnected Position
As a Control Circuit Connector that would be plugged by hand during the test
position both Main and Control circuit are disconnected from the Circuit.
9.4. EARTHING SWITCHES
The Earthing Switch is operated by means of detachable lever from outside the cable
compartment. It shall be mechanically interlocked with the CB so that the earthing
switch in close position in section of CB truck into the service position is not possible.
The operation of the Earthing Switch shall not be possible as long as the CB is not in
isolated position.
9.4.1 The 11KV metalclad switchgear shall include earthing switches to facilitate earthing of
each cubicle as specified.

9.4.2 Main Data
Rated Voltage KV 12
Rated Current A 1200
Short Circuit Current withstand capability (as specified above)
Bus Bar Rating A = 2000
9.4.3 Technical Requirements:
i. The Earthing Switches shall meet the requirements of BS 5253 and IEC 129.
ii. Auxiliary Switches shall be provided as specified for the Circuit Breakers.
iii. Provision shall be made for padlocking in the Open and Closed position.
iv. Manual control of the switches and position indicator external to the cubicle
shall be provided.
v. The Earthing Switch shall be interlocked manually with transformer circuit

breakers.
9.5. INTERLOCKING
The following operation shall be taken place only when the under stated interlocking
conditions are fullfilled to ensure Personal and Operational Safety.
9.5.1 Transferring the withdrawable part from the Disconnecting Position to the Service
Position:
i. Control Circuit Plug Inserted
ii. High Voltage Compartment Door closed.
iii. Circuit Breaker in OPEN Position.
iv. Earthing Switch in OPEN Position
9.5.2 Transferring the Withdrawable part from the Service Position to the Disconnected
Position.
i. Circuit Breaker in OPEN Position.
9.5.3 Operating the Circuit breaker
i. Withdrawable part in the Interlocked Final Position (Service or Disconnecting

position)

9.5.4 Operating the Earth Switch
i. Withdrawable part in the interlocked disconnected position. windows shall be

provided to allow visual inspection.
The Switches shall be tested in accordance with BS5253, IEC129 and IEC265 and shall
include the following routine tests:
Operating and Mechanical tests
Measurements of the resistance of the main circuit.
9.5.5 Safety Device
Individual explosion vents should be provided for breaker / busbar / cable chambers on
the top of the panel to let out the gases under pressure generated during an unlikely
event of fault.
Cubical with the front plate is pressure tested for the internal arc fault as per PHELA
recommendations.
Circuit breaker and the sheet metal enclosures are fully earthed.
9.6. LOW VOLTAGE COMPARTMENT:
The Low Voltage Compartment of the Switchgear shall be located on the top front of
the Panel and shall be accessible with a separate door and partitioned against high
voltage part. Connection of control and Metering cable is by means of a multiple plug
to the withdrawable part possibly at front face of the breaker. Low voltage devices
metering and protection equipment shall be mounted flush in the door or on the
mounting plate inside.
Wiring inside the cubicle shall be done by 2.5 Sq.mm insulated stranded copper wires
for current circuits and 1.5 Sq.mm for voltage circuits.
The following equipments shall be mounted in the low voltage compartment.
1 No Ammeter, Digital Type of class C designation, with selector switch. ( for

incoming and out going circuit breaker)
1 No Voltmeter, Digital type, with Voltage Selector switch.( for incoming circuit
breaker only)
1 No KVA meter, Digital type of class designation. .( for incoming circuit breaker
only)
1 No Energy meter 3Phase 4 wire, 3Element, as specified. .( for incoming and out
going circuit breakers)

1 No Power Factor Meter Digital type 3Ph, 4Wire, 3Element. .( for incoming and
outgoing circuit breaker only)
3 Nos Overcurrent Relay Static Type 5A secondary current with .( for incoming and
out going bus coupler circuit breaker)
Setting range 50-200% (for Overcurrent element)
Setting range 200-400-600% (for High Set Element)
1 Earthfault Relay, Static Type, with Secondary Current 5A and with Instantaneous
tripping Setting range 10-40% (For incoming and outgoing circuit breaker)
Auxiliary relay and coupling relay if required
Anti condensation heater (for incoming and outgoing circuit breaker)
9.7 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
9.7.1. The 12kV Metalclad Switchgear shall include protection and metering Current
Transformers as specified. The Current Transformers shall be Epoxy Resin insulated
block type Current Transformers as follows:
Accuracy
Circuit Ratio Class Burden
Core 1 (for
For Incoming Protection) 1200/600/5 5P20 30VA
Core 2 (for
Metering) 1200/600/5 0.5 30VA
Core 3 Differential PS 30VA
Core 1 (for
For Buscoupler Protection) 1200/600/5 5P20 30VA
Core 2 (for
Metering) 1200/300/5 0.5 30VA
Core 1 (for
For Outgoing Protection) 600/300/5 5P20 30VA
Core 2 (for
Metering) 600/300/5 0.5 30VA
9.7.2 The current transformer shall comply with the requirements of BS 3938 and IEC 185
shall confirm to the specified insulation requirements and shall withstand without
damage the applicable short-circuit current specified. Primary ratio taps shall not be
accepted. The ratio given above is tentative one, the final decision shall be taken prior
approval of the drawing
9.7.3 The manufacturer of current transformer shall be the holder of valid ISO 9001
certificate.

9.7.4 Maximum temperature rise at rated primary current shall not exceed 50 degree
centigrade.
9.7.5 Accuracy classes for the protection and metering shall not be less than 5P20 and 0.5
respectively. Burden and accuracy class shall be adequate to ensure correct operation of
associated protective devices and instruments. Saturation curves shall be provided with
C.T. Characteristics.
9.7.6 Each set of secondary windings shall be wired to suitable terminal blocks and earthed at
the first control or relay panel to which they are connected. Differential Protection
Circuits (involving more than one set. of CT's) shall be earthed at one location only.
9.7.7 The Current Transformers shall be tested in accordance with BS 3938 and IEC 185 and
shall include the following Routine Tests :
i. Verification of terminal markings polarity etc.
ii. Power frequency tests on primary windings.
iii. Power frequency tests on secondary windings.
iv. Overvoltage inter-turn tests.
v. Determination of ratio error and phase displacement.
9.8. VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
9.8.1. The 11kV Metalclad Switchgear shall include Voltage Transformers in incomer as
required by the Single Line Diagram as follows:
i. Type : Epoxy-resin insulated, single pole with 7.3A Primary side fuses
ii. Basic Impulse Level : 75kV
iii. Primary Voltage : 11/ 3 kV
iv. Secondary Circuit : 110/ 3 V
v. Rated burden : 100 VA
vi. Accuracy classification : 0.5 Class
9.8.2. The voltage transformers shall comply with the requirements of BS 3941 and IEC 186.
Accuracy class for the metering case shall be 0.5 Bidder shall insure whether 100VA is
sufficient for the smooth operation.
9.8.3 The voltage transformers and their fuses shall meet the specified insulation
requirements and have a rated primary voltage of 11kV with knee of saturation curve

not lower than 12kV and ratios per single line diagram.
9.8.4 The voltage transformer shall be provided with high rupturing capacity (HRC) fuses for
primary and secondary circuits. The fuses shall be rated for the short circuit levels
specified.
9.8.5 The voltage transformers shall be tested in accordance with BS 3941 and IEC 186, and
shall include the following routine tests:
i. Verification of terminal markings.
ii. High voltage power frequency withstand test on primary windings.
iii. High voltage power frequency withstand test on secondary windings.
iv. Tests for accuracy.
9.8.6 The voltage transformer shall be installed at the suitable place in the incoming circuit
breaker.
9.9 CONTROL PROTECTION AND INSTRUMENTATION:
9.9.1 This covers the detailed requirements 11kV switchgear panel cubicles, and design,
manufacture, transport, installation and commissioning of new 12KV Metal clad VCB
switchgear.
9.9.2 The substation will normally be attended and operation will be semi-automatic.
Normally closing of circuit breakers shall be manual operation and operation of
earthing switches will be manual if it is not mentioned.
9.9.3 Local control facilities adjacent to the equipment shall be provided for maintenance,
inspection and emergency operation.
9.9.4 The control system shall be designed to permit the following operating modes :
9.9.4.1 Automatic start/stop operation refers to spring-charged motor for operating mechanism
of 11kV VCB.
9.9.4.2 Automatic tripping of 11kV VCB, LV MCB if faults occur in protected lines
equipments or circuits.
9.9.5 The control system shall be arranged in such way that it is possible to change between
local automatic and local manual control any time.
9.9.6 Solid state modular equipment shall be used wherever possible.
9.9.7 The designs shall be in general conformity with the single line diagrams and layout
drawings accompanying this specification.
9.9.8 Under manual control the individual operations shall each be subject to safety

interlocks being satisfied.
9.9.9 The control scheme shall be operationally simple, safe, easy to maintain and
functionally consistent.
Each module shall have sufficient test points to felicitate fault finding. Control circuits
shall be brought out to isolating terminals to permit efficient trouble shooting.
9.9.11 Each cubicle shall be provided with a sufficient point annunciator to identify an alarm
condition, including audible alarm, test, acknowledge and reset push buttons.
9.9.12 Control switches for circuit breakers shall be of the discrepancy type. Two independent
movements shall be required to initiate an operation. The position of manually operated
disconnector shall be indicated by means of discrepancy indicators.
9.9.13 The design shall be such that as to avoid nuisance alarms and shall block those devices
which assume alarm conditions when the equipment is under shutdown. Annunciator
windows shall be engraved with identification of the alarm condition.
9.9.14.1 Annunciators shall have the following sequence :
Condition Lamp Alarm
Normal Off Off

Alarm Flashing On On
Acknowledge On Off
Reset after return
Normal Off Off
Lamp test On Off
9.9.14.2 Required signals or alarm systems :
CB Off/On position by green/red lamp

Flag or lamp indication of faults for :
Overcurrent Protection, E/F Protection, DC Supply Failure, CB Failure, MCB
tripped, AC supply failure, Interlocking system disturbed, CB driving faults.
9.9.15 The annunciator shall be of solid state type and suitable for operation at 110 V dc and
shall be able to withstand IEC 255 class 3 tests without malfunctioning.
9.9.16 Protection required :
i. For incoming & outgoing O/C and E/F protection with

instantaneous tripping
ii. For buscoupler panel O/C protection.
9.9.17 Transformer Protection :
Following protection shall be provided for the step-down power transformers in

incomer feeders:
9.9.17.1 Transformer Differential

Differential relay shall be provided for the protection of 33/11kv 6/8,10/13.3/16.6 MVA
transformer.
9.9.17.2 Overcurrent (if applicable)
Backup protection shall be provided in the form of inverse time over current relay
connected into the transformer LV neutral connected current transformer.
9.10 FACTORY TESTS:
Factory tests shall include inspection and routine testing of all relays and devices as
per BS and IEC publications. Continuity and insulation testing of all devices and
wiring and complete control sequences testing shall be performed to the extent
feasible in the plant.
All electronic equipment items and the subsystem shall be operated continuously
for a minimum of two hundred (200) hrs. prior to shipment in accordance with the
approved testing procedures to ensure the operational integrity of each component
and of the total system.
Type test reports for each protective relay shall be provided.
Each component of protective equipment shall be tested at the Manufacturer's work

or at site to establish its performance characteristics.
9.11 MINIMUM REQUIREMENT FOR SWITCHGEAR
9.11.1 All 11kV feeder and bus coupler cubicles shall house single circuit breaker per pond.
Each circuit and feeder shall be equipped with the following devices and equipment
Withdrawable module with :
Hand operated drive mechanism

1 Set
Auxiliary block with 4NO+ 4NC contacts for position indication 1 No
Multiple pole lug for control signals 1 No.
motor operated spring charged mechanism 1 No.
Close/trip buttons 1No.
Trip coil 1No.
Closing coil 1No.

Counter indicating number of switching operation 1No.
Auxiliary block with 11NO + 11NC 1Wi (alarm contact) 1No.
Auxiliary switch for spring charged indication 1 No.
Service track for removing of withdraw able module 1 No
Breaker carriage (if applicable) 2No
9.11.2 Bus Coupler
Copper busbars, rating shall be 2000A 1 Set
Epoxy resin insulated block type current transformer as mentioned

above in clause 9.7. 2 Nos.
1st Core : 0.5 class 30 VA (for measurement)

2nd Core : 5P20 30 VA (for protection)
Breaker Carriage 1No.
9.11.3 Trunking (Adaptor) Chamber:
Trunking Chamber should have the voltage rating 12 Kv and the current rating of bus
bar shall not be not less than 2000A. Contractor must verify the overall dimension by
inspection at the site for accurate fitting .It is up to manufacturer / designer whether
needed or not .If it is needed then its cost should be within the cost of required VCB.Its
cost shall not be paid separately.
9.11.4 Specification of Meter to be installed
Please refer above in the Energy Meter
10. CABLES
10.1 General
This specification covers the design, manufacture, factory test, supply, delivery, field
test and installation of all Power, Control and Instrumentation cables required for the
entire project.
Manufacturer of 12kV power cable shall be holder of valid ISO 9001 Certificate
10.2 Equipment to be furnished:

c) 12 kV XLPE Power Cable
d) 600 volt power cable
e) Control and instrumentation cable
f) Communication cable

10.2.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for estimating and supplying the quantity of various
types and sizes of the cables. In course of actual execution if it is found that additional
cross-section, types or quantities of cables are required than those indicated in his
proposal, the same shall be supplied without any additional charge to the Employer.
10.3.1 12kV power cable
(a) General
The 12kV power cable shall be cross linked polyethylene insulated, shielded
and armored cable.
(b) Conductor
Conductor shall consist of stranded Copper wires. They shall comply with IEC
Publication. The maximum conductor temperature shall be 90 deg.C.
(c) Current rating
The maximum current rating for the cable routes and conditions of installation
shall be stated for 12kV power cable by the Contractor.
(d) Anti-termite covering
Anti-termite protection shall be applied to the cable and shall consist of a non-
magnetic metallic barrier.
(e) Outer covering
The outer covering of the cable shall be extruded, continuous black PVC
suitable for the operating temperature of cable and shall meet the requirements
of IEC standard.
(f) Cable drum
Cable drum shall be non-returnable and shall be made of timber, pressure

impregnated against fungal and insect attack. Alternatively cable drum may be
made of steel suitable protected against corrosion.
(g) Outdoor and indoor termination for high voltage cable.
Outdoor and indoor termination shall be done by heat or cold shrinkable type
termination kits.

Termination for cable shall be provided in sufficient quantities for complete

installations of substations.
(h) Jointing accessories
Cable shall be installed in maximum possible length and straight through

jointing between shorter lengths will not be permitted without the prior written
authority of the Employer/Employer's Representative. Jointing accessories for
stranded copper conductor cables shall be designed for identification ferrules.
(I) Voltage identification
The plastic over sheath shall be embossed with the name of the manufacturer,
name of the Employer, number of conductors, the cross sections, type of
insulation followed by:
Electric cable - 12,000 volts
(j) Phase identification
Phase identification for either triplexed or multi conductor cable shall be in

accordance with follows :
- Phase A (R): Red
- Phase B (S): Yellow
- Phase C (T): Blue
10.3.2 1100 volt PVC insulated cable.
(a) General
The low voltage cables shall be 1100v grade polyethylene insulated, armored
and PVC sheathed. Low voltage power cables shall be suitable for grounded
neutral with phase to phase voltage level of 400V and phase to neutral voltage
of AC system and 110V DC system.
(b) Conductor
Conductor shall consist of stranded annealed copper wires. They shall comply
with IEC publication. The cable is intended for use at normal conductor
operating temperatures not exceeding 75 deg.C.
(c) Insulation
The electrically and thermally stable polyethylene insulation shall be extruded

onto the conductor so as to prevent contamination and voids in the insulation.

(d) Current rating
The maximum continuous current rating for the cable routes and conditions of
installation shall be stated for low voltage power cable by the Contractor.
(e) Anti-termite covering
Anti-termite protection shall be applied to the cable and shall consist of a non-
magnetic metallic barrier.
(f) Jacket
The cable core assembly shall be covered with a flame retardative and moisture
resistant PVC jacket, which is free-stripping from the insulation. The overall
jacket shall be clean, dry, and free of grease and shall be suitable for ink or paint
application.
(g) Identification
Each cable shall have a printed legend on the overall jacket with a
manufacturer's name, name of the Employer, voltage class, the number and size
of conductors, type of insulation.
The colours for core identification and colour sequence shall be in accordance
with follows:
- Single-core: Black
- Twin: Red and black
- Three-core: Red, yellow and blue
- Four-core: Red, yellow, blue and black
10.3.3 Control and instrumentation cable
(a) General
All control and instrumentation cable shall be 600V grade as per IEC multicore,
colour-coded, PVC insulated, cable armored cable. Each multicore cable shall
have not less than 20 percent or 4 spare cores whichever is the greater.
(b) Conductor
Copper conductor shall be stranded circular non-compacted copper conductor of

minimum cross-section of 2.5 sq. mm.
(c) Insulation
The electrically and thermally stable PVC insulation shall be extruded onto the
conductor so as to prevent contamination and voids in the insulation.
(d) Assembly

Multi conductor cables shall be assembled in accordance with applicable IEC

standard.
A flame retardative binder tape may be used underneath the overall jacket of
multi-conductor cables, if required to achieve the desired flame retardative
characteristics. Tapes, if used, shall be non hygroscopic.
(e) Anti-termite covering
Anti-termite protection shall be applied to the cable and shall consist or a non-
magnetic barrier.
(f) Jacket
The cable core assembly shall be covered with a flame retardative and resistant
jacket, which is free-stripping from the insulation.
The overall jacket shall be clean, dry, and free of grease and shall be suitable for
ink or paint application.
Cable jacketing and the interstices within the jacket shall be free of water.
Evidence of water shall be grounds for rejection of the cable.
(g) Identification
Each cable shall have a printed legend on the overall jacket, with the
manufacturers name, name of the Employer, voltage class, the number and size
of conductors, and a unique number or code indicating the production run or
batch. The identification shall remain legible for the life of the cable.
10.4 Special Requirement
Small cut piece lengths of cables will not be accepted. Cables up to 500 meters in
length or as approved by Employer/Employer's Representative shall be of one length
shipped in a drum of adequate size. For higher quantities, multiple lengths/drums may
be shipped subject to the approval of Employer/Employer's Representative.
10.5 Drawings, Data & Manuals
The following information shall be furnished along with the Tender.
(a) Manufacturers leaflets giving constructional details, dimensions and

characteristics of different cables.
(b) Current rating of cables including de-rating factor due to grouping, ambient
temperature and type of various installation.
(c) Write-up with sketches illustrating the manufacturers recommendation for

splicing, jointing and termination of different types of cables.

(d) Type test report of all types of power, control and instrument cables. The Bidder
shall clearly describe the type and routine tests to be performed on cables.
(e) Drum length for each type of cable.
10.6 Tests
11.6.1 Routine and design tests
Routine test in accordance with the provision of standard as listed in Sub-Clause 2.3 of
Section IVA shall be carried out for each drum of cable.
Type test and acceptance test as per standards as listed in Sub-Clause 2.3 of Section
IVA shall have to be carried out to prove the general qualities and design of a given
type of cable and for the purpose of acceptance of the lot. The test certificate shall be
approved by Employer/Employer's Representative before shipment.
The following tests shall be included in the routine test by the manufacturer at the
factory as minimum requirements for this specification:

(b) Conductor resistance test
(c) High voltage test
(d) Insulation resistance test
(e) Physical and aging test for insulation and jacket
10.6.2 Field tests
After installation at site, cables shall be subjected but not limited to the following tests:
(a) Measurement of insulation resistance

(b) DC dielectric test
The performance figures quoted on schedule of Technical Data shall be guaranteed

within the tolerance permitted by relevant standard and shall become a part of the
Contract. In case of failure of the cables to meet the guarantee, the
Employer/Employer's Representative reserve the right to reject the equipment. The
Contractor shall have to rectify the defect t no extra cost to the Employer and without
delaying the commissioning schedule.

11. BATTERY AND BATTERY CHARGER
11.1 General
This specification covers the design, manufacture, delivery, installation and field test of
the maintenance free battery and suitable battery charger for 110V DC system complete
with all necessaries for efficient and trouble-free operation as specified herein under.
Manufacturer of battery and battery charger shall be holder of valid ISO

9001Certificate
The Battery charger shall also include D.C. distribution board.
110 V Battery and Battery Charger
11.3.1 Battery & battery charger
11.3.1.1 Maintenance free Battery
(a) The Maintenance free Battery shall be rated for supplying total DC load of the
each substation. The duration of the load shall be ninety (90) minutes. The total
DC load cycle shall consist of the following:
0-1 min. - Simultaneous tripping of all breakers on under

voltage. In case the circuit breakers charge after tripping,
starting current of the spring charged motor of all the
above circuit breakers shall be considered for the entire 0-
1 minute period.
- Emergency lighting load
- Control, indication, protection and annunciation load
1-89 minutes - Emergency lighting load
- Control, indication, protection and annunciation load.
Last minute -Control, indication, protection and annunciation load,

emergency lighting load.
- Closing of breaker-one at a time and spring charging if

spring charging occurs after closing of breaker. Consider
staring current of one spring charging motor and running

current of another spring charging motor to occur

simultaneously during the entire one minute a period.
The Contractor shall compute the Ampere hour rating (10 hour rating) of the
battery considering margin over the above duty cycle so that the battery shall be
capable of delivering the ultimate DC load of the substation when the future
switchgear and its protection panel will be installed in the same substation. The
minimum capacity shall be not less than 240 AH.
(b) The Contractor shall compute the Ampere-hour capacity at 10-hour discharge
rate based on the above cycle and furnish the calculation. The minimum
ambient temperature shall be 5 deg. C. The minimum voltage at the end of the
load cycle shall not be less than 1.75 volts per cell.
(c) The batteries shall be storage type as specified.
(d) The cells shall be maintenance free Lead acid type.
(e) Each cell shall be in a suitable leak proof container with sealed cover.
(f) The batteries shall be furnished complete with cell interconnectors and a
suitable rack protected with acid resistant paint. The arrangement of the rack
shall be such as to allow easy access and adequate space for normal
maintenance in battery room.
(g) Rated life of each battery shall be at least ten (10) years.
(h) The Bidder shall furnish along with the Tender, his proposed layout of the
battery racks to suit the space available.
(i) The manufacturer of above said maintenance free battery shall be holder of ISO
9001 certificate.
11.3.1.2 Battery charger
(a) The battery charger shall be suitable for maintenance free batteries and solid-
state electronic type using silicon rectifiers and complete with all switches,
fuses, contactors and instruments.
(b) The battery charger shall be suitable for 400 volts +10%, 3-phase, 50Hz supply.
The charger shall have fully automatic voltage regulation and electronic current
limiting. The voltage regulation shall be within +1% for a 0-100% load
variation and +10% voltage variation on the AC side. Cooling shall be by means
of natural convection.
(c) The minimum rating of the battery charger shall be not less than 75 amperes.
(d) The battery charger shall be housed in a freestanding floor mounted cabinet with
enclosure protection of IP-30 as per IEC.
(e) The instruments, switches and lamps shall be flush or semi flush mounted on the
front panel.

(f) The battery charger shall be constant voltage type with provision of voltage
variation from float charging to boost charging voltage. The float charging
voltage shall be between 2.1 to 2.2 volts per cell or at any other voltage
recommended by the battery manufacturer. At float charging voltage the charger
shall furnish the continuous DC load consisting of control, indication,
annunciation, breaker spring charging mechanism and continuously On
emergency light as well as float charge its associated battery. The boost
charging voltage shall be about 2.4 to 2.5 volts/cell or at any other voltage
recommended by the battery manufacturer. During equalizing or boost charging,
the continuous DC load shall be fed by the charger. The loads that can not
tolerate the high equalizing or boost charging voltage shall be connected
through dropper diode. The battery charger shall recharge the completely
discharged battery to fully capacity in 9 hours. The charger shall have 10%
excess capacity.
(g) The manufacturer of above said battery charger shall be holder of valid ISO
9001 certificate. In case such manufacturer is not available the contractor has to
take the written permission from the employer.
11.3.2 Wiring
The wiring shall be complete in all respects so as to ensure proper functioning of

control, protection and metering scheme.
All wiring shall be completed up to terminal blocks.
Wiring shall be done with 2.5sqmm (minimum) Class 5 stranded copper conductor,
flexible PVC insulated wire. The wire shall have a voltage grade of 600V as per IEC.
Lower cross section of wires may be used for solid-state devices only.
Each wire shall be identified at both ends with wire designations in accordance with the
approved wiring diagram. Interlocking type ferrules shall be used for identification.
Not more than two wires shall be connected to any terminal at each end. If necessary, a
number of terminals shall be jumpered together to provide wiring points.
Wires shall be neatly bunched and adequately supported so as to prevent sagging strain
on termination. Wires shall not be spliced or tapped between terminal points.
All spare contacts of relays and contactors shall be wired up to the terminal block.
11.3.3 Cable termination
The equipment shall be designed to facilitate cable entry from bottom. Removable
plates shall be furnished with compression type cable glands to make entry dust tight
and no weight is transferred on the terminal. The glands shall be suitable for
terminating cable armor. Compression type cable lugs as required shall be furnished for
termination of power and control cables.

minimum space of 200mm from the gland plate to the nearest terminal block shall be
provided.
11.3.4 Terminal blocks
Terminal blocks shall be specified in Technical Requirements under Sub-Clause 2.4 of

Section VA.
11.3.5 Ground bus
A copper ground bus of 25mm x 6mm cross section shall be furnished along the entire
length of each panel.
All devices shall be grounded to the ground bus.
11.4 Accessories
11.4.1 The following accessories shall be furnished for the batteries:
(a) One (1) connector bolt wrench
(b) One (1) cell testing voltmeter with leads.
(c) Battery racks
(d) Other necessary accessories
11.4.2 The charger shall be complete with the standard accessories including but not limited to
the following:
(a) Solid state surge protectors on the AC and DC sides
(b) AC failure alarm relay
(c) DC time delay low voltage relay
(d) Ground detection alarm for positive and negative leads
(e) Manual voltage adjust switch
(f) DC ammeter and voltmeter
11.5 Tests
11.5.1 Type and routine tests at manufacturers works and acceptance test at site shall be
carried out on battery as per stipulation of latest standard of IEC.
The test shall include following tests:

(a) General inspection.
(b) Leakage test and internal short test for each cell.
(c) One cell shall be type tested for discharge at ten-hour rate to 1.85V DC at 25
deg. C.
After initial charging the following tests shall be performed at site :
(a) Capacity test
(b) Efficiency test
11.5.2 The battery charger shall be subjected to the following tests at manufacturers works:
(a) Measurement on insulation resistance

(b) High voltage test
(c) Performance test
(d) Temperature rise test
11.5.3 Test certificates shall be submitted to the Employer/Employer's Representative for

approval.
11.6.1 The following drawings and detail shall be furnished with the Tender:
(a) Layout arrangement of battery and battery charger in the available space shown
in the drawing.
(b) Schematic and wiring diagram of battery charger
(c) Cell voltage characteristic for battery
(d) Technical leaflets on battery and battery charger
11.6.2 The following drawings and manuals shall be submitted by the successful Bidder for
approval
(a) Dimensional layout arrangement of battery and battery charger

(b) Dimensional outline drawing of battery charger panel clearly showing the
location of meters, switches etc.
(c) Wiring diagram of the battery charger panel
(d) Instruction manuals of battery and battery charger
The performance figures quoted in Schedule of Technical Data shall be guaranteed

within the tolerance permitted by relevant standard. In case of failure of the equipment
to meet the guarantee, the Employer reserves the right to reject the equipment. The
Contractor shall have to rectify the defect as no extra cost to the Employer and without
delaying the commissioning schedule.

12. GROUNDING SYSTEM AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
12.1 General
This specification covers the design, supply, delivery, installation and testing of the
complete Grounding System as described herein.
12.2 Codes and Standards
The complete station grounding work shall be in accordance with the recommendation
in the Guide for Safety in Substation Grounding IEEE No. 80 and the requirements of
this section.
Complete installation of the ground grid, test link chamber, grounding of all equipment
located in the substation as specified herein but not be limited to the supply of
grounding conductors, jointing materials and all accessories to complete this grounding
installation shall be covered under this specification.
12.4 Grounding Installation Features
12.4.1 The installation shall be complete in all respects for efficient and trouble free service.
All work shall be carried out in a first class neat workmanlike manner. Grounding
conductors shall be handled carefully to avoid kinking and cutting of the conductors
during laying and installation. All exposed ground conductor runs shall be taken in a
neat manner, horizontal, vertical and parallel to building walls or columns and shall not
be laid haphazardly. All connections to the grounding grid shall be made with the bare
copper stranded cable.
12.4.2 For all connections made to equipment or to the structures, the grounding conductor,
connectors and equipment enclosures shall have good clean contact surfaces.
Grounding conductor connection to all electrical equipment, switchgear, transformers,
motors, panels, conduit systems, equipment enclosures, cable trays, distribution boards,
equipment frames, bases, steel structure, etc., shall be by pressure type or bolting type
connectors.
12.4.3 All lap, cross and tee connections between two grounding conductors both below and
above grade shall be made by thermo welding process or compression type connector.
The various joints shall have adequate mechanical strength as well as necessary
electrical conductivity not less than that of the parent conductors of the joints. All
accessories for grounding installation shall be of quality and design approved by the
12.4.4 Grounding conductors, when crossing underground trenches, directly laid underground
pipe and equipment foundation, if any, shall be at least 500mm below the bottom
elevation of such trenches/pipes.

12.5 Grounding Conductor
12.5.1 Main ground grid

The main ground system shall consist of a grounding grid buried minimum one meter
below grade level. The grounding grid shall consist of one no. 100sqmm (min) stranded
bare copper conductor cable.
12.5.2 Ground electrodes

The ground electrodes shall be 16mm diameter and 1.5-meter long (min.) copper clad
steel. These shall be driven into ground and connected to the main ground grid.
12.5.3 Risers
The risers shall consist of stranded bare copper conductor or connected at one end to
the main ground mat and at the other end to the equipment.
12.6.1 The Contractor shall measure the soil resistivity and calculate the total length of buried
ground conductor, number of grounding electrode and their depth and spacing to
achieve a grounding system resistance of not more than 1.0 ohm.
12.6.2 The Contractor shall calculate the cross-section considering the maximum fault level.
12.7 Tests
On completion of the installation, either wholly or in sections, it shall be tested in

compliance with relevant code by the Contractor in the presence of the
Employer/Employer's Representative. The cost of any test including labor, material
and equipment charges shall be borne by the contractor. The ground grid resistance to
remote earth shall be 1.0 ohm or less. If this low resistance cannot be obtained as per
his design, then additional grounding conductors shall be buried in the earth, or if
necessary, buried in treated soil to obtain the required low ground resistance.
12.8 Lightning Protection
The outdoor equipment of the substation and the substation building shall be protected
against lightning. The lightning protection shall be achieved by one or more lightning
masts or horizontal lightning conductors above the protected equipment. The design of
the lightning protection system shall be subject to the approval of the
12.9 Drawings
After award of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish the grounding layout drawing
with dimensions showing the location of grounding grids, electrodes, test link chambers
and risers backed up by necessary calculations for Employer/Employer's Representative
approval. The work shall have to be started at site only after getting approval from the
Engineer. If alternation is required for any work done before getting
Employer/Employer's Representative approval, the same shall have to be done by the
Contractor at no extra cost to the Employer.

13. LIGHTING SYSTEM
13.1 General
This specification covers the design, complete supply and installation of the lighting
system for the Project including all necessary supervision, labor, tools, equipment and
accessories, miscellaneous materials, testing, and putting in acceptable operation of the
lighting system.
13.2 Scope of Works
13.2.1 All equipment shall be complete and operative in all details and shall be left in a
satisfactory working condition. The Contractor shall furnish and install all materials and
equipment, which are obviously a part of the complete illumination installation and
without any additional charge to the Employer.
13.2.2 The miscellaneous materials include, but are not limited to, all conduit, wires, controls,
lighting panel boards, junction boxes, fittings, supports and other accessories required
for the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the indoor and outdoor
lighting system.
13.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the following work in addition to furnishing and
delivering of the equipment, materials and accessories specified hereinafter in this
specification.
(a) Assembling at the plant site
(b) Erection and complete installation
(c) Testing of all equipment
(d) Commissioning of all equipment prior to trial operation
(e) Trial operation and all necessary adjustments prior to initial operation.
(f) Obtaining Employer/Employer's Representative approval and written

acceptance for satisfactory operation.
13.3 Codes & Standards
The lighting installation shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of the National
Electrical Code (ANSI CI) of the National Fire Protection Association of America. In
addition any rules or regulations applicable to the work shall be followed. In case of
any discrepancy, the more restrictive rule shall be binding.

13.4 Requirements
13.4.1 Illumination level of the new control building and outdoor switchyard complex
The illumination level above working plane in various areas in lux is as specified
below.
(a) Control room: 300 lux
(b) Battery room: 150 lux
(c) Store: 150 lux
(d) Other indoor area: 150 lux
(e) Outdoor equipment area: 20 lux
(f) Road: 10 lux
(g) Other outdoor area: 10 lux
(h) Emergency lighting: 10 lux
13.4.2 Protection of Work
The Contractor shall effectively protect, at his own expense, such of his work, materials
or equipment as is liable to injury during the construction period. All openings to any
part of the conduit system, as well as associated fixtures and equipment, both before
and after being set in place, must be securely covered or otherwise protected to prevent
obstruction of the conduit or injury due to carelessly or maliciously dropped tools or
materials, grit, dirt or any foreign matters. The Contractor will be held responsible for
all damages so done until his work is fully and finally accepted. Conduit ends shall be
covered with capped bushings.
13.4.3 Methods and materials
All works shall be done in a first-class, neat and workmanship manner by mechanics
skilled in the trade involved. All details of the installation shall be mechanically and
electrically correct.
All materials shall be new, of the best of their several kinds, and without imperfections
and blemishes. All materials be standard products of manufacturers latest design.
Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall
be of same manufacturer.
All conduits and equipment shall be installed in such a manner as to preserve access to
any other equipment installed.
13.4.4 Steel conduit

All conduits except otherwise stated shall be rigid steel, hot dipped galvanized.
Minimum diameter of all conduits shall be 19mm.
Each piece of conduit shall be straight, free from blisters and other defects, cut square
and taper reamed and shall be furnished in 3-meter lengths and threaded at each end.
Couplings shall be cleanly cut.
In no case shall the conduit be filled by more than 40 percent.
13.4.5 Installation of conduit system
The work covered by this section comprises the installation of the metallic conduit
system.
Flexible steel conduit shall be used in dry and non hazardous locations to provide
flexible connections between the rigid conduit system and conduit boxes, and between
the rigid system and any machine subject to vibration. Flexible conduit shall be
galvanized steel.
Where interference occurs, the Employer/Employer's Representative shall be notified

before any relocation is made. If it should become necessary to make a field change
before consulting the Employer/Employer's Representative, every precaution shall be
taken to insure that the change is coordinated with other conduit work, structural work,
plumbing work, piping and architectural features; and information shall be obtained
regarding the completed conduit run to insure that there will be no interference when
the conduit run is extended. A complete record of such change shall be sent at once to
the Employer/Employer's Representative.
Exposed conduits shall be run in straight lines parallel to column lines, walls, or beams.
Where conduits are grouped, the bends and fittings shall be installed so as to present an
orderly appearance. Unnecessary bending or crossing shall be avoided.
Supports for exposed horizontal conduit runs shall be provided every 1.0m for 19mm
conduit and not more than every 1.5m for 25mm conduit and larger, where it is difficult
to provide supports at intervals other than those specified above, the supports for 19mm
conduit may be every 1.5m and supports for 25mm and larger every 2.0m as a special
case and the Employer/ Employer's Representative approval must be taken. Supports
for exposed vertical conduit runs shall be not more than 1.5m for 19mm and 25mm
conduit and not more than 2.5m for 32mm and larger conduit.
Conduit shall be supported on approved types of galvanized wall brackets, ceiling

trapeze, strap hangers, or pipe straps, secured by means of anchor bolts on hallow
masonry units, expansion bolts in concrete or brick, and machine screws on metal
surfaces. Wooden plugs inserted in masonry or concrete shall not be used as a base to
secure conduit supports.
Conduit joints and connections shall be made thoroughly watertight and rustproof by
means of the application of a thread compound, which will not insulate the joint. Each
threaded joint shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all the cutting oil before the

compound is applied. Red lead is suitable for application for embedded conduits, and
white lead is suitable for application for exposed conduits.
Couplings may be used in dry and exposed locations. They may also be used in wet
exposed locations in vertical runs only, provided they are installed with fixed threaded
connection at top. They may be used in concrete if adequately waterproofed to prevent
leakage.
Standard radius bends are generally to be used for steel conduits but special long radius
bends shall be used wherever specifically required, the long radius bends are to have
radii as large as the physical conditions will permit.
Field bends of metallic conduit shall be made in such a manner that the internal
diameter of the conduit is not materially changed, and the protective coating on the
inside and also on the outside of the conduit is not injured. The bends shall be free of
kinks, indentation, or flattened surfaces. Heat shall not be applied in making any
conduit bends.
Structural steel shall not be cut or drilled to avoid interferences except with the specific
approval of the Employer/Employer's Representative in each case. Where the
Employer/Employer's Representative approves cutting holes in reinforced concrete for
conduit, the reinforcing bars shall not be cut, but shall be bent to permit passage of the
conduits.
Galvanized structural steel members may be drilled or punched for conduit supporting
bolts, provided the holes are immediately painted with aluminium paint and galvanized
or rust-resisting bolts are used.
Conduits and fittings shall be properly protected during the construction period against
mechanical injury, from impact from structural steel heavy machinery, or batches of
mass concrete pours. Conduits, which extend out of floors, walls, or beams, shall be
boxed or otherwise protected and the ends shall be plugged or capped.
In supporting embedded steel conduit, if welding or brazing is used, extreme care

should be taken to avoid injury of the surface of the conduit. Welding or brazing shall
not be done on the bottom of a conduit or on the inside of a bend, or at any other
location that might interfere with the pulling of conductors. The welded or brazed joint
shall be painted.
Metallic conduit shall be securely fastened to sheet metal boxes and cabinets, each with
a locknut and insulated bushing inside the box and a locknut outside. The conduits shall
be of such length that when the bushings are screwed tight against the ends of the
conduits no appreciable space will be left between the bushings and the locknuts. The
locknuts shall be tightened against the box without deforming the box.
After a conduit run is completed, it shall be inspected and swabbed out. Compressed air
may be used in blowing out any excessive amount of water.
In complete installation, each outlet box shall be provided with cover, unless a fixture
canopy is used.

Round outlet boxes shall not be used where conduits or connectors require the use of
locknuts of bushings to be connected to the side of the box. Rectangular or octagonal
boxes having knockout or opening at each flat bearing surface for the locknut or
bushing shall be used.
13.4.6 Wire & Cable
The contractor shall furnish and install all wire and cable required for the complete
installation. All wire shall be of stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated. The wire
shall have a voltage grade of 600V as per IEC. Minimum cross-section shall be
2.5sqmm. All wire shall be run in conduit.
All wiring between distribution boards and lighting panels and all outdoor branch
circuit wiring shall be done using power cables as specified in Sub-Section 11.
Cables and wires shall be installed without joints as far as practicable. Where splicing
or joints are required, they shall be made in accordance with the cable manufacturers
recommendations.
All splicing shall be done in outlet boxes and junction boxes and not in the conduit or
on the trays. All connectors and splicers shall be of the solderless type and shall be self-
insulated. In lieu of self-insulated type connectors and splices, the Contractor may use
the non-insulated type, but be will wrap the connection or splice with insulating tape to
the same dielectric value as the original insulation. If insulating tape is used, they shall
be of a type as recommended by the manufacturer of the wire or cable.
13.4.7 Outlet and switch boxes
Furnish and install for each outlet, and outlet box suited to the use for which the outlet
is to be put and to the location in which it occurs.
All outlet and conduit fittings in exposed conduit runs shall be cast metal with integral
threaded hubs (Condulets) with appropriate covers and shall be provided with
gasketed covers. Sealing fittings shall be furnished where required.
13.4.8 Junction and pull boxes
Junction and pull boxes for indoor use shall be made from sheet steel and shall have
set-in or flange construction cover. All corners shall be placed approximately 150mm
apart. Each box and cover shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. All drilling
for conduits or armoured cable shall be done in the field. The box sizes shall be in
accordance with the National Electrical Code.
Junction boxes for outdoor use shall be similar to the above except they shall be
provided with screwed-on covers with gaskets to make them weatherproof. Conduit
connections shall be made through threaded hubs or chase nipples welded to the box.

13.4.9 Lighting fixtures
The Contractor shall furnish, install and wire required number of lighting fixtures to
meet the various maintained illumination levels as specified in this specification. It
shall be noted that the illumination intensities indicated for various areas are the
maintained illumination levels (and not initial illumination level) considering a
maintenance factor of not more than 0.7. The Contractor shall be responsible for
producing the above illumination levels for each specific area with the type of fixture
specified.
Lamps - All fixtures shall have installed therein by the Contractor a lamp of wattage as
noted in this specifications. They shall be of the incandescent filament, fluorescent or
high-pressure mercury type as required for each unit. Lamps shall be furnished by the
Contractor.
Lamps to be used shall have the longest life, from the respective kinds approved for this
application. If the fixture provided has more than one lamp and it requires ballast, then
one ballast per lamp shall be furnished.
Accessories - Each fixture shall be supplied with necessary straps, supports, or hangers
or other miscellaneous materials and devices to install them in a satisfactory manner,
and to conform to the architectural treatment in the area in which they are to be
installed. All fluorescent fixtures shall be equipped with high power factor, approved
ballasts and rapid starts lamps.
The Contractor shall prepare the detailed layout to meet the above requirement. The
lighting layout and wiring drawings of the Contractor shall be submitted for the
Employer's/Employer's Representative's approval.
Fixture type for each area is as specified below:
(a) Control Room: Indoor, pendant type fixture with acrylic prismatic lens, complete
with two (2)-40W. cool white fluorescent lamp and glow start high p.f. ballasts.
(b) Switchgear Room/Toilet: Indoor, industrial pendant type fixture with sheet steel
reflector complete with two (2)-40W, cool white fluorescent lamp and glow start high p.f.
ballasts.
(c) Battery Room: Indoor, pendant or surface mounted moist proof and acid-
proof, with sheet steel reflector complete with one (1) 60W incandescent lamp covered with
clear glass globe.

(d) Substation/outdoor: Outdoor, weather-proof, high pressure mercury vapor or
sodium fixture, complete with one (1)-300W lamp, ballast, aluminium reflector and photo
electric control.
(e) Emergency Lights: Indoor, recessed or pendant mounted fixture with
porcelain enameled standard dome reflector Substation complete with one (1) - 60W
incandescent lamp.
All the fixtures shall be approved by the Employer/Employer's Representative before

shipping.
All florescent lamp shall be CFL with equivalent lux.
13.4.10 Lighting panels
The Contractor shall furnish and install all 400/230 volts lighting panels as required and
shall be obviously included in the cost of electrical wiring of the building.
Each 400/230-Volt lighting panel shall be, three phase, four wire, and solid neutral.
Each branch circuit shall have a 20-ampere single pole quick-make quick-break circuit
breaker. Each circuit breaker shall empty thermal means of inverse time overload
protection supplemented by an instantaneous magnetic short circuit trip. The maximum
load on each branch circuit shall be limited to 2400W. The number of branch circuit in
each lighting panel shall be determined based on the load and the above criteria. Mains
shall be provided with solderless lugs.
All circuit breakers shall have a interrupting capacity suitable for the fault level fed by
the preceding transformer. Power supply to 230V receptacles, as required shall be taken
from this panel. The enclosure protection of the panel shall be IP-50 per IEC.
13.4.11Emergency lighting
Emergency lighting shall be provided in Control Rood, Switchgear Room and Battery
Room. The power source for the emergency lighting shall be drawn from the D.C.
distribution board. The emergency lighting shall be normally Off type.
13.4.12 Receptacles
The Contractor shall furnish and install all receptacles and specified herein.
The receptacles shall be of 230V, 20 Ampere, 3-pole, 3 wire, polarized with third pole
grounded.
The receptacles shall be provided on the walls of all the rooms at a spacing of 6m.
(maximum) between two receptacles with minimum of two (2) receptacles per room.

13.4.13 Local wall switches
Local wall switches for controlling lighting cubicles shall be furnished and installed for
each enclosed area such as offices, switchgear rooms, battery room, etc. All switches
shall be single pole or 3-way as required.
General indoor areas - Local switches mounted indoors shall be single pole and shall be
rated 6 amperes at 230 Volts.
Outdoors and wet locations - Local switches installed in outdoor and wet locations shall
be weatherproof switches, single pole or as required rated 20 Amperes at 230 Volts.
13.4.14 Grounding
Each lighting fitting shall be provided with an grounding terminal suitable for
connection to the earthling conductor.
All metal or metal enclosed parts of the housing shall be bonded and connected to the
grounding continuity throughout the fixture.
13.5 Tests
13.5.1 The Contractor shall thoroughly test and measure insulation resistance for all cables and
equipment and prove that same are free of grounds and short circuits. If a ground or
short circuit is found on any cable or equipment, the faulty condition shall be
eliminated or the cable and/or equipment replaced. The minimum value of insulation
resistance shall be 10 mega ohms.
13.5.2 All equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirement of
this specification and other specifications.
13.5.3 Functional tests shall be performed to check each requirement.
13.5.4 All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Employer/Employer's

Representative. Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel for all tests.
13.6 Drawings
The Contractor shall furnish shop drawings, relevant catalogues, data sheets, etc.,
required to cover specific information for all items in any way designed for the works.
None of the following items shall be installed until final approval of all the data sheets
and drawings, as listed, has been given by the Employer/Employer's Representative.
(a) Conduit
(b) Cable
(c) Lighting panel boards

(d) Shop drawings or catalog cuts for all lighting fixtures and receptacles
(e) Switches and molded case circuit breakers
(f) Junction and pull boxes
(g) AC and DC contactor for emergency lighting panel boards
(h) Layout drawings showing fixtures, conduit and circuitry of fixtures

(I) Calculation of illumination level in various areas.
14. LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION BOARD
14.1 General
This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturers

works, supply and delivery, properly packed of low voltage distribution boards.
14.2 Standards
The equipment covered by this specification shall unless otherwise stated be designed,
constructed and tested in accordance with the applicable section of the latest relevant
IEC Specification. The equipment conforming to any other national standard, which
ensures equivalent quality, are acceptable. In such cases the Bidder shall clearly
indicate the standard adopted and furnish a copy of the English version of the standard
along with the proposal. Should there be any dispute on design standard; the most
stringent one shall be followed.
14.3.2 Each distribution board must have sufficient number of spare feeder (at least 20% of
various sizes used in the Distribution Boards with a minimum 1 no. on each bus). The
incoming molded case circuit breakers and bus bar ratings shall be selected considering
the spares also.
14.3.3 The distribution boards shall be complete with all accessories and materials.
14.3.4 The base channel frames for the distribution boards for grouting in the floor complete
with anchor bolts, nuts and leveling attachments.
14.3.5 Special tools and tackle for erection and maintenance of the distribution boards and
other equipment.
14.3.6 The Contractor shall furnish as many distribution boards as required to cater to his
requirements, without any additional cost. If Tender's requirement, the same shall be
supplied without any extra cost to the Employer.

14.4.1 The AC distribution board is meant for miscellaneous loads such as but not be limited
to battery charger, illumination, ventilation and air conditioning, space heater, station
auxiliaries, etc.
14.4.2 The DC distribution board is meant for distribution of DC power to switchgear, control,
relay and metering panel, emergency lighting fire protection system etc.
14.4.3 The distribution boards will be located indoor in a hot and humid atmosphere. All
equipment, accessories and wiring shall be provided with suitable finish for prevention
of fungus growth.
14.4.4 The AC distribution board shall be designed for operation in a 400V +10%. 3 phase, 4-
wire, 50Hz +5% neutral ground system. The DC distribution board shall be designed
for 110V DC, 2-wire system.
14.4.5 The de rating of the equipment shall be done taking 45 deg. C as an ambient
temperature of the site, if it is designed for lower ambient temperature. Furthermore,
design and selection of all equipment shall be made liberally with a good margin of
safety factors.
14.5.1 General
The distribution boards shall be self standing sheet steel cubicle or wall mounted panel
having following features:
(a) The construction shall be compartmentalized.
(b) All distribution boards shall be dead front type. All switches, circuit breakers,
etc. shall be operable from the front.
(c) All bolts and nuts exposed to external atmosphere shall be cadmium plated or
zinc passivated.
(d) The working height shall be limited to a maximum of 2,000mm. The design
shall be such as to permit easy extension of distribution boards at site on either
end.
(e) The distribution boards shall consist of vertical sections, fabricated from a
minimum of 2mm thick sheet steel, shaped and reinforced to form a rigid
freestanding structure.
(f) The minimum clearance of the power terminal lug from the bottom plate shall
be maintained as 200mm.

(g) The AC distribution board designed for 4-wire system shall have a fully
insulated neutral bus of cross-section same as the main phase buses.
(h) Anchor bolts and nuts for each distribution board shall be supplied along with
the distribution board.
(I) All distribution boards mounted indoor shall be provided with enclosure
protection of IP 50 as per IEC.
14.5.2 Bus bars
Bus bars shall be copper, liberally sized for the specified current ratings (both short
circuit and continuous currents). Maximum temperature of the bus and bus connection
shall be limited to 90 deg. C.
All bus bars, links, etc., shall be covered to prevent accidental contacts.
Buses shall be spaced with adequate clearance between phases and between phase and
ground.
Bus supports shall be of molded insulators suitable for polluted atmosphere.
All bus works shall be braced to withstand stresses due to short circuit current,
corresponding to the respective fault level of the system to which it is connected. The
bus bars shall be able to withstand for 1 second the above short circuit current
thermally.
Appropriate color code shall be used to identify the various phases of bus bars and the
neutral (wherever applicable).
14.6 Specific Requirement
14.6.1 Molded case circuit breakers (MCCB)
The molded case circuit breakers shall be of panel mounting type. It shall have all the
live parts enclosed in a molded case and all contacts shall be silver-plated. The breakers
shall be trip free and with quick-make and break operating mechanism. The molded
case circuit breakers shall be provided with magnetic short circuit protection and
thermal overload device. The characteristic curve of these protections shall be furnished
along with the offer. The protection device of the incomer MCCB shall be coordinated
with feeder MCCB. Each breaker shall have a common trip, causing on overload on one
pole to trip all other poles.
The MCCB handle, after breaker tripped due to a fault shall occupy a mean position.
The breaker shall be capable of interrupting a RMS current corresponding to the fault
level of the system to which the respective distribution board is connected.

It shall be possible to close and trip the breaker without opening the compartment door.
The breaker shall be provided with mechanical On-Off indicator at the front properly
marked. Each circuit breaker shall be provided with alarm switch and auxiliary switch.
The rating of the MCCBs shall be so selected that maximum standardization consistent
with the economy is possible. The incoming and bus section breakers shall have shunt
trip coils.
14.6.2 Cable termination
Distribution board shall be designed to facilitate cable entry from bottom. Removable
plates shall be furnished with compression type cable glands to make entry dust tight
and no weight is transferred on the terminal. The glands shall be suitable for
terminating cable armor. Compression type cable lugs as required shall be furnished for
termination of power and control cables.
minimum space of 200mm from the gland plate to the nearest terminal block shall be
provided.
14.6.3 Ground bus
Grounding terminals on the distribution board shall be provided at either end for
connection of copper ground conductor to ground grid.
14.6.4 Nameplate
Nameplates showing Feeder Designation shall be provided for each module of

distribution board at front door top. Also nameplate shall be furnished at the top for
each distribution board.
Material for nameplate shall be a plastic sheet, 3mm thick or approved equivalent. The
letters shall be white on black background.
The nameplate shall be held by self-tapping screws. The size of the nameplates shall be
proportionate to the size of the modules. Also individual panel number and danger plate
shall be furnished at the back of the panel.
14.7 Tests
14.7.1 Routine and type test
Type test certificates and results as per relevant IEC. Specification for all the equipment
offered under the scope of this specification shall be furnished.
Each distribution board shall be completely assembled, wired adjusted and tested for
operation under simulated conditions to ensure correctness of wiring and proper
functioning of all equipment.

All component parts such as MCCBS, meters, etc., shall be tested in accordance with
relevant IEC Specification.
All current carrying parts and wiring shall be subjected to a high potential test.
All routine tests shall be conducted on all distribution boards.
14.8 Drawings, Data & Manuals
The following drawings and details shall be furnished along with the Tender.
(a) Bidders proposed distribution scheme in single line diagram for all distribution
boards.
(b) Bidders proposed typical general arrangement drawing showing constructional

features and layout of individual equipment along with the following:
- Space required in the front as well as back of distribution board.
- Power cable entry points
- Bus bar clearance, phase to phase and phase to neutral
- General cross-section drawing of the cubicle
(c) Technical leaflets on : MCCB, Terminal Boards, Insulators.
14.8.2 After award of contract the successful Bidder shall submit the following drawings for
approval of the Employer/Employer's Representative.
(a) Confirmed outline dimensional drawing of all distribution boards, showing the
general arrangement and indicating the following:
- Space required in the front and back

- Power cable entry points
- Bus bar clearance phase to phase to neutral
- Configuration of bus bars
- Technical details of supporting insulator and their spacing
- Outgoing power termination arrangement
- Transport/shipping dimensions with weights
- Foundation and anchor bolt details including dead load and impact load
(b) Any other relevant drawing and data necessary for approval.

15. STEEL STRUCTURE
15.1 General
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, delivery and installation of
steel structures to be used for supporting electrical equipment and gantry structure.
15.2 Codes & Standards
The steel structure shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with
ASTM or equivalent.
15.3 Scope of Works
The works includes, but is not necessarily limited, the following:
(a) Calculate and design as per requirements of this specification
(b) Prepare complete detailed shop drawings and submit for approval of the
(c) Prepare bill of materials and complete dispatch list.
(d) Furnish all materials, labor, tools, plant, consumable, etc., including bolts, nuts,
washers for fabrication in shop and on site and for erection.
(e) Fabricate and deliver to job site, unload, store and erect structural steel for
towers and all equipment frame.
(f) Assemble bolt on ground at job site fabricated members for erection.
(g) Erect fabricated materials and connect by field bolting.
(h) Align and level erected structural steel.
15..4 Technical Requirements
15.4.1 The steel structures for extension of existing substations shall be so designed and
fabricated that the connecting and joining works can be done with ease and exactness.
15.4.2 Design load of conductors shall be as follow:
Description Tension of conductor per phase
- Incoming line 1,000 kg

- Internal bus 500 kg
- Overhead ground wire 300 kg

15.4.3 Steel structure dimensions, framing, member size and length, number, size and length
of bolts, thickness of each filler and other necessary details to fabricate each piece shall
be shown on the approved detail drawings. No change shall be made without the
written approval of the Employer/Employer's Representative.
15.4.4 Bolts shall have hexagonal heads and hexagonal nuts with the same dimension between
flats on bolt heads and nuts. Bolt holes are not to be more than 1.5mm larger in
diameter than the corresponding bolt diameter. The design is to be such as to keep the
number of different parts as small as possible and is to facilitate transport, erection and
inspection.
15.4.5 No welding will be permitted in steel structure fabrication
15.4.6 Bill of material shall give the size, length and galvanized weight of each member and
the total weights of steel structures. It shall also include the number of bolts, nuts and
washers per structure.
15.4.7 Workmanship shall be first class throughout.
All pieces must be straight, true to detail drawings and free from lamination flaws and
other defects. All clipping, back-cuts, grindings, bends, holes, and etc. must be true to
detail drawings and free of burrs.
15.4.8 Threads of bolts and nuts shall be cleanly rolled or cut and the face and head of nut
shall be truly at right angle to the axis of the bolt.
15.4.9 After fabrication has been completed and accepted, all materials shall be clear of rust,
loose scale, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign substances.
15.4.10 All materials including nuts and bolts shall be hot dip galvanized. The process of
galvanization shall be as per latest version of IEC or ISI. The thickness of zinc coating
shall not be less than 85 microns (610 gm/sq. m).
15.4.11 The material shall not be hammered or otherwise straightened in a manner that will
injure the protective coating. If the material has been harmfully bent or warped in the
process of fabrication or galvanizing, such defects shall be cause for rejection.
15.4.12 One of each type of structure shall be assembled in the shop to such extent as to insure
proper field erection. Reaming of untrue holes will not be permitted. Shop-assembled
parts shall be dismantled for shipment.
15.4.13 The structures shall include all necessary access ladders to give access to the various
levels of the structures.
15.4.14 In addition to dead dynamic loads imposed by equipment, steel work shall be designed
to withstand simultaneously wind loads as follows:
(a) On flat surface: 121kg/sqmm

(b) For lattice structures: 121kg/sqm on 1.71 times the times the projected area of
the members of one face of the structure.
15.4.15 All structures shall be designed so that no failure or permanent distortion shall occur
when tested with applied forces equal to 2.5 times to maximum simultaneous working
loadings.
15.4.16 At or near ground level, all uprights shall be provided with holding down bolts
provided under this contract.
15.4.17 Details and fastenings shall be designed to have factor of safety against failure not less
than the main members of the structure.
15.4.18 Pockets and depressions likely to hold water shall be avoided and all parts of the
structures shall be properly drained.
15.4.19 Bolts and nuts shall be galvanized and fitted with spring washers. Taper washers are to
be added where necessary. Threads of bolts shall be spun galvanized and threads of
nuts shall be oiled.
15.4.20 All member shall be cut to jig and holes shall be drilled or punched to jig.
Parts shall be carefully cut and holes accurately located so that the members are in
position the holes can be accurately aligned before being bolted up., Drifting of holes
will not be permitted.
15.5 Tests
15.5.1 All tests shall be carried out by the Contractor using his own instruments, testing
equipment as well as qualified testing personnel.
15.5.2 The following shop test shall be performed with relevant provision of ASTM or
equivalent.
(a) General inspection
(b) Material test
(c) Assembly test
(d) Galvanizing test
15.5.3 The results of all tests shall conform to the specified requirements as well as agreed
guarantee figures finalizes with the Contractor.
15.5.4 Employer/Employer's Representative shall have the right to inspect any material,
workmanship etc. of the equipment and may reject any item defective or unsuitable for

the use and purpose intended, or not in accordance with the intent of the
15.6 Drawings
15.6.1 The Contractor shall submit the calculation sheet, design & shop drawing and
guaranteed performance data.
15.6.2 The shop detail drawings shall show the details of all parts to be fabricated.
15.6.3 Erection drawings shall include bills of materials for each type of structure with the
piece mark, size, length and calculated weight of each member.
15.7 Packing, Marking and Shipping
15.7.1 Methods of packing, marking, shipping, and storing shall be submitted to the
Employer/Employer's Representative for review and acceptance.
15.7.2 Members of steel structure shall not be dropped or dragged on the ground and shall not
be set on the ground for an extended period of time.
All steel shall be maintained clean and free of foreign matter and at no time shall it be
set on wet or muddy ground.
15.7.3 Boxes of bolts, nuts and similar connectors, and hardware assemblies shall be stacked
off the ground and shall be covered with plastic sheets for protection from elements.
15.7.4 Materials, which are defective or damaged when, delivered shall be repaired or replaced
and shortages shall be made good immediately by the Contractor.
16. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
16.1 General
This specification covers the design, fabrication, properly packed for transportation,
deliver, and installation, testing and putting into efficient and trouble-free operation of
the bus material and insulator complete with all accessories.
16.3 Technical Requirements
16.3.1 Insulators
(a) General

All types of insulators shall satisfactorily withstand the specified climatic and
service conditions. The strength of insulators as given by the electro-mechanical
tests load shall be such that the factor of safety when supporting their maximum
working loads shall be not less than two and a half.
Design shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part
of the insulators and fittings do not lead to development of defects.
All insulators, whether cylindrical post or string shall have plain shed profiles.
Damaged insulators shall be replaced.
Arcing horns are not required on post type and string insulators within
substations.
(b) Materials
Porcelain insulators shall be in accordance with IEC where applicable. Porcelain

shall be sound, free from defect and thoroughly verified and the glaze shall not
be depended upon for insulation.
Porcelain glaze shall be smooth, hard, of a uniform shade of brown and shall
completely cover all exposed parts of the insulators. Outdoor insulator fittings
shall remain unaffected by atmospheric conditions producing weathering, acids,
alkalis, dust and rapid changes in temperature that may be experienced under
working conditions.
Suspension and tension insulators shall comprise porcelain units with ball and
socket fittings.
Retaining pins or locking devices for insulating units shall be of phosphor

bronze or other approved material, and shall effectively prevent accidental
separation of the units.
Unless otherwise approved, the individual units of both the suspension and
tension insulator sets shall be identical and interchangeable.
(c) Number of discs
String insulators shall comprise of 3 nos. of 11kV disc insulator.
(d) Marking
Each insulator shall have marked on it the manufacturer's name or trade mark,
the year of manufacture and the manufacturer's reference mark. Tension and
suspension insulators shall also be marked with the guaranteed
electromechanical strength. Marks shall be legible and indelible.
(e) Post insulator

Post insulator shall be cylindrical type, solid core porcelain, provided in

accordance with following requirements:
- Rated voltage 36 kV
- Nominal voltage 33 kV
- Impulse withstand voltage 170 kV
- Color Brown
Test shall be divided into three groups in accordance with IEC 168.
(f) Standard particulars of insulator units
Insulator units shall comply with the following requirements. (IEC 305)
- Porcelain disc diameter 254mm
- Unit spacing 146mm
- Creepage distance 292mm
- Electro mechanical failing load 6,800kg
- Dry power frequency withstand voltage 70kV
- Wet power frequency withstand voltage 40kV
- Dry impulse withstand voltage 110kV
- Puncture voltage 110kV
Dimension and tolerances of ball and socket coupling shall comply with IEC
Publications 120 (1977), and the internal height of the socket shall also comply with the
requirements of IEC Publication 372-1.
16.3.2 Bus Conductor and fittings
(a) General
Bus bars and electrical connections in outdoor substations shall be in

accordance with BS, ASTM or equivalent national standards in respect of
current rating and material analysis.

Bus conductor to be supplied shall be aluminum tube and aluminum conductor

steel reinforced. Minimum size and material of each bus shall be as following
Bus Material Min.Size
- 33kV Main ACSR Dog
- 33kV Branch ACSR Dog

Al-Tube 1-1/4 inch
- Overhead ground wire GSW 55sqmm
In case of existing substation conductors and connectors to be used for

extension shall be as nearly as possible identical with the existing equipment.
Materials used for busbars and connections shall be stressed to not more than
two-fifths of their elastic limit. Provision shall be made for expansion and
contraction with variation in conductor temperature and busbars shall be
arranged so that they may be readily extended in length with a minimum of
disturbance to existing equipment.
Busbars shall be in continuous lengths between supports. Connectors shall be of

approved type, and if necessary type tested. Connection dependent upon site
welding techniques will not be permitted.
Unless otherwise approved, busbars and connections shall be so arranged and

supported that under no circumstances, including short circuit conditions, can
the clearances between live metal and earth of earthed metal work or between
other conductors be less than the specified in the drawings. The extension of bus
bar in the existing substation shall match with the existing one.
(b) Strain bus and fittings
The conductor shall be aluminum conductor steel reinforce (ACSR)
The conductor shall be constructed of hard-drawn aluminum and zinc-coated

steel-wires which have the mechanical and electrical properties in accordance
with the latest revisions of ASTM.
The direction of lay of the outer layer shall be right-hand. The direction of lay
shall be reversed in successive layers: contiguous layers shall in all cases have
opposite lay.
The external form and surface of the finished conductor shall be uniformly
cylindrical upon completion of manufacture and shall remain so when erected in
place on the line.
The surface of the conductor shall be free from points, sharp edges, abrasions or
other departures from smoothness or uniformity that would tend to increase

radio interference and corona loss. When the conductor is subjected to tensions
up to 50 percent of its rated ultimate strength, the conductor surface shall not
depart from its general cylindrical form, nor shall any of the strands move
relative to each other in such a way as to get squeezed out of place and disturb
the longitudinal smoothness of the conductor. Strands of a section of popped
cable shall not protrude more than 1/2 of their diameter of a strand. The
conductor shall be capable of withstanding the normal handling necessary for
manufacture and erection, such as, reeling, unreeling, and pulling through
stringing sheaves under sufficient tension to keep the conductor off the ground,
etc., without being deformed from a cylindrical form in such a way as to
increase radio interference and corona loss.
The make-up and lay of wires shall be such as to produce a conductor

essentially free from a tendency to untwist or spring apart when cut. The steel
wires shall be performed or post formed so that, when the conductor is cut and
the aluminum wires are stripped away from the core as required for splicing, the
steel wires can be readily regrouped and easily held in place with one hand to
allow a splicing sleeve to be slipped over the steel core wire at the cut end of the
conductor.
This forming of the core is required and shall be done in a manner which will
not in any way scratch, scrape, remove or otherwise damage the zinc coating of
the steel core wires, individually or collectively.
The conductor shall be free from excessive amounts of die grease, metal
particles and dirt. The Bidder shall describe in complete detail the method
which he proposes to use in normal production to clean the conductor. The
effectiveness the cleaning process shall be subject to verification.
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, approved means shall be provided to

prevent electro-chemical action and corrosion. Unless otherwise approved,
joints and surfaces of copper or copper alloy fittings shall be tinned.
Suspension and tension conductor clamps shall be approved types and shall be
as light as possible. Those for aluminum conductor shall preferably be
compression type. Suspension and tension clamps shall be designed to avoid
any possibility of deforming the stranded conductor and separating the
individual strands.
Tension conductor clamps shall not permit slipping of or damage to, or failure
of the complete conductor or any part thereof at a load less than 95 percent of
the ultimate strength of the conductor.
Clamps and fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanized. All
bolts and nuts shall be as specified and shall be locked in an approved manner.
(c) Tubular bus and fittings

Tubular bus shall be made of first melting aluminum alloy, cold rolled or hard
drawn and assembled using corona free fittings. Continuous lengths of bare
conductor shall be installed in bus to dampen aolian vibration.
The tubular bus conductor shall have adequate strength to withstand mechanical
forces due to short circuit currents and its temperature when carrying full load
current shall not exceed 75 deg. C. A safety factor of 2 for normal working
loads and 15 with short circuit currents shall be used.
The tubular bus shall include a small drain hole in any low section. Where
expansion joints are required they shall be of the thin leaf type. They are
required at all potheads and as required on busbars. Bus supports for main
tubular buses shall include on rigid fixed conductor clamp with slide fit on
adjacent supports.
All bus support clamps shall be cast of first melting aluminum alloy. Each
clamp shall be adjustable for alignment with insulator and furnished with four
galvanized steel mounting bolts.
- Bolted type clamps shall be furnished with first melting alloy bolts, nuts
and washers finished with anodic coating and lubricated. The clamps for
tubing shall have dimensions and section suitable for splicing two pieces
of tubing in the clamp.
- Flexible elements of expansion bus support clamps shall be laminated

aluminum strap, which has current capacity equivalent to the tube.
Terminal connectors for aluminum shall be of first melting cast aluminum alloy.
All terminal pads shall be furnished with stainless steel bolts, nuts and Belliville
washers.
The bolted type terminal connectors shall be a multigrip type terminal and
furnished with first melting aluminum alloy with bolts, nuts and washers
finished with anodic coating and lubricated.
Bolted type connectors listed below shall be furnished with first melting
aluminum alloy with bolts, nuts and washers finished with anodic coating and
lubricated.
- Angle-Connectors: All angle-connectors shall

be of streamlined, bolted type and made of first
melting cast aluminum alloy. Tap element sockets
shall be deep enough to allow for error in cut-off.
- Couplers: All couplers shall be bolted

type and made of first melting cast aluminum
alloy.
(d) Overhead ground wire

Overhead shield wore shall be galvanized steel wire, stranded with a cross
sectional area of 61.7sqmm and shall comply with BS 183.
Earth wires shall be greased as for conductors and the outer strands shall have a
right hand lay.
Each completed shield wire shall be bare and shall be composed of the specified
number of wires.
In case of existing substation, the tubular bus and its fittings to be used for
extension shall be as nearly as possibly identical with the existing one.
The nominal diameter of individual wires shall have a variation of not more
than plus or minus one and an-half (1.5) percent.
Joints or splices may be made in the individual wires prior to drawings to final
size or in the finished wire composing the strand. Such joints shall have
protection to corrosion equivalent to that of the finished wire itself and shall not
decrease the strength of the finished strand below the specified minimum
breaking strength. Joints in the individual wires in the finished strand shall be
separated by at least 15.2 meters.
All wires in the cable shall lay naturally in their true position in the completed
cable, shall tend to remain in position when the cable is cut at any point, and
shall permit re-stranding by hand after being forcibly raveled at the end of the
cable. The strand shall be free from imperfections and consistent with good
commercial practice with a carefully controlled finish completely free from any
dirt, loose metal particles, nicks, scratches, abrasions or deformities of any
nature.
Each item of material to be furnished by the contractor shall be given the wire
manufacturers routing factory tests.
16.4 Tests
16.4.1 The insulators shall be tested in accordance with IEC or ANSI Standards. Certified
copies of the tests shall be submitted for approval to the Employer/Employer's
Representative.
(a) Type tests
- Low frequency wet withstand test
- Critical-impulse flashover test
- Impulse withstand test
- Radio-influence voltage test
- Compression strength test

- Thermal shock test
(b) Quality conformance tests
- Visual and dimensional test
- Porosity test
- Galvanizing test
- Cantilever strength test
- Torsional strength test
- Tensile strength test
(c) Routine tests
- Flashover test
- Tension proof test
16.4.2 Bus materials
The following shop tests shall be performed for bus materials. All tests shall be made at
the manufacturers plant by and at the expense of the Contractor. Certified results of
test shall be submitted whether or not the inspection is waived. The
Employer/Employer's Representative may, at its option, waive part or the whole test.
(a) Aluminum tube
- General inspection
- Chemical composition of aluminum alloy
- Conductivity measurement of aluminum tube
- Dimension and weight measurement
- Certified report of aluminum alloy from the original manufacturer
(b) Bus support clamp and connector
- Dimension measurement
- Chemical composition of aluminum alloy

(c) Connectors for stranded conductor
- Measurement of dimension
- Compression test
(d) Miscellaneous hardware
- Measurement of dimension
- Tension test
- Galvanizing test
16.5 Packing and Marking
16.5.1 Insulator
(a) Packaging
The insulators shall be packed in strong wooden boxes with a waterproof lining.
These boxes shall provide adequate protection against salt spray, chemical
attack and damage that might be encountered in transportation and rough
handling during loading, transportation to job site, unloading to temporary
storage and ocean transportation.
(b) Marking
In addition to marks required for shipping purposes, each crate and pallet shall
be marked with Shippers identity and Employer's name and address and
quantity and type of contents. Also, the gross, tare and net weights in kilograms
shall be stenciled on each pallet.
16.5.2 Bus materials
(a) Packing
The conductor shall be furnished on non-returnable wooden reels, and shall be

properly protected to prevent displacement, chafing, distortion, damage from
corrosive atmosphere or other damage to the conductor, which might be
encountered in shipping, storage or handling. Each layer of conductor shall be

separated from the adjacent layer in such a manner as to prevent abrasion or

other damage during handling and shipping.
The non-returnable reels shall be made of a strong material suitably

strengthened for ocean transport and treated to withstand rotting or any type
damage due to ocean atmosphere. The reels shall be capable of withstanding all
stress due to braking and string operations. The Employer will accept the use of
returnable reels, but any additional costs of such reels will be the responsibility
of the Contractor.
(b) Marking
In addition to marks required for shipping purposes, each reel head shall be
stenciled to show serial number, type of conductor, length of conductor in
meters, the gross, tare, and net weights in kilograms. Each reel shall also be
plainly marked to indicate the direction in which is should be rolled to prevent
loosening of the conductor on the reel. Those reels from which test samples
were taken shall be marked Tested with the length of sample conductor
removed.
16.6 Guarantee
Any defects in materials or workmanship or other failure to meet requirements of these

specifications, which are disclosed prior to the Taking-Over by the Employer, be
corrected entirely (including removal and replacement) at the expenses of the
Contractor.
Any latent defects not disclosed before date of the Taking-Over but disclosed within
guarantee period, materials and/or supplies shall have been placed in use, shall be
corrected promptly by and at the expense of the Contractor.
16.7 Wall mounted Split-type Air-Conditioners
1. General
This specification covers the supply, delivery, field test and installation of Air-
Conditioners at Substations.
2. Equipment to be furnished
Split-type Air-Conditioners shall be furnished with all the accessories to complete the
scope of works as given in the price schedule.
3. Scope of Works
Supply, delivery and installation of the Air-Conditioners shall include but not limited to
that:
A. Civil works like breaking of wall and repairing wherever necessary.
B. Any support structures and leak proofing compounds required for proper
sealing.

C. Bidder shall provide operation maintenance instruction translated in Nepali font

in A4 size paper with good glass frame for each rating. These have to be hung
on the wall of the generator house.
4. Design Requirements
a) Type
- Split wall-mounted (Cooling/heating)
b) Minimum Cooling/heating Capacity for
1 Ton 12000 Btu/hr

1.5 Ton 18000 Btu/hr
2 Ton 24000 Btu/hr
c) Indoor noise level

< 40 db for 1 ton
< 46 db for 1.5 ton
< 51 db for 2 ton
d) Compressor
- Super silent, Power saving
- Hermetically sealed
- Rotary/reciprocating
e) Rated Voltage/Frequency
- 230 V, 50 HZ, Single Phase
Fan Speed
- Three Speed with air deflection System
Operation mode with remote control
- Heat/Cool/ Dry/Fan
f) Air Swing
- To be Present, Automatic
i) Air filter
- Anti fungal/cleanable
j) Refrigerant
R410A ( Non-CFC)
5. Manufacturers
The AC shall be from the following manufacturers
Mitsubishi
Diakin
Samsung
Or equivalent make / brand
6. Quality Certification: ISO 9001-2000 certified and CE certification.
7. Warranty: 12 months from the date of commissioning.

17.0 LAPTOP COMPUTERS
17.1. GENERAL
17.1.1 The computers must be manufactured by an internationally reputable

manufacturer. The required specifications are as stated below in the technical
particulars, Clause
17.2. Computers must be provided with necessary cables, accessories,
operation/users manuals, and so on.
17.1.2 The manufacturer of the Laptop must possess the ISO 9001:2000
QualityAssurance Certification.
17.2 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

Specification of Laptop Computers
Processor Intel i7 or better

Processor Speed 2.2 GHz (at least)
Chip Set Intel 945 GM Chipset or better
Installed RAM 3GB and expandable to 4 GB or higher
Cache 4 MB or higher on chip cache (L2 Cache)
System Bus 667-MHz or better
Hard Disk Drive 320 GB or Higher
Optical DVD +/- RW
Display 15.4" XGA TFT (at least) or Equivalent
Graphics 128 MB graphics in built
Mouse Touchpad, USB External Mouse
Key board Spill Resistant Standard Keyboard with at least 85 Key
Expansions slots Min. 1 (Type I or Type II PC Card)
I/O Ports (At least the 1 Mouse port, 1 Keyboard port, 1 x 15 Pin VGA ,2 USB ports (at least),
following) Integrated Memory Card Reader, Headphone, Microphone, AC Adapter
Internal Modem 56 kbps

Web Camera At least 1.3 Megapixel Integrated CMOS Camera
Network Integrated 10/100/1000 (Gigabit)
Wireless LAN 802-11 or better
Integrated Bluetooth Device
Operating System Pre installed Windows XP with Licensed CD Packs and drivers
Power Supply Input power supply 230 volt AC, 50 Hz
Chargeable Battery and Charger for backup up to 4 hrs.
Others Standard Carrying Case (Bag)
Cable and Jacks as required
Warranty 1 year including parts and services or better


( to be completed by the Bidder)
POWER TRANSFORMER
S. No Description Unit NEA requirement To be filled by Bidder
2 Year of manufacturing experience
3 Applicable Standard IEC
4 Type Outdoor, oil immersed,

core type
5 Winding/Phase Two/ 1 phase
6 Cooling ONAN
7 Rating
7.1 Rated MVA
7.1.1 ONAN MVA 10
7.1.2 ONAF MVA 13.3/16.6
7.2 Rated Voltage

7.2.1 Primary kV 33
7.2.2 Secondary kV 11
7.3 Maximum Voltage

7.3.1 Primary 36
8 Number of Phases Three
9 Rated Frequency Hz 50
10 Noise Level
On ONAN Rating db As per IEC
On ONAF Rating db
11 Tempreture Rise
Temperature rise above 45 deg C
11.1 ambient
In Oil by thermometer deg C 50
In winding by resistance deg C 55
Manufacturer for winding temperature
indicator AB Khilsrom, Sweden
Manufacturer for oli temperature indicator AB Khilsrom, Sweden

NEA
S. No Description Unit requirement To be filled by Bidder
Hottest spot temperature in winding limited
11.2 to
12 Connection
12.1 High Voltage Delta
12.2 Low Voltage Star
13 Vector Group Dynll
14 Taps
14.1 Type of Tap Changer OLTC
14.2 Tap Steps 1.25%
14.3 Tap Range +/- 10%
14.4 No of Tap 17
15 Cooling System
15.1 Number connected Nos
15.2 Numbers standby Nos
15.3 Rated Voltage Volts 110
15.4 Adjustable Control Gear
16 OLTC Gear
Maschinenfab
rik
Manufacturer Reinhausen
(MR)
Germany
16.1 Rating
16.1.1 Rated Voltage Volts 110
16.1.2 Rated Current A
16.1.3 Step Voltage Volts
16.1.4 Number of steps No 17
16.2 Controll Suitable For

Remote/Local Operation yes/no yes
Auto manual Operation yes/no yes
Parallel Operation yes/no yes
Master slave Operation yes/no yes
16.3 Rated Voltage of Drive Motor V 110
17 Guaranteed Losses
17.1 No load losses at rated voltage and
frequency on max MVA base
17.2 Load losses at rated current and at 75 deg C
on max MVA base
17.3 Cooler losses for full load operation on

max MVA base

To be
NEA filled by
18 Impedance volt at rated current and frequency at 75 deg C %

winding Temp on ONAN, MVA base As per IEC
18.1
Positive Sequence Impendence at name plate Normal Tap
18.2 Positive Sequence at maximum voltage tap
18.3 Positive Sequence at minimum voltage tap
18.4 Zero sequence at Name plate tap
19 Reactance at rated current and frequency at 75deg C on

maximum MVA base at a nameplate tap
20 Efficiency at 75deg C winding temperature

20.1 At 100% Load
20.2 At 75% Load
20.3 At 50% load
Load in Percentage of full load and Power Factor at which

21 maximum efficiency occurs
22 Regulation at full load and 75deg C

22.1 At Unity Power Factor
22.2 At 0.85 Power Factor Lagging
No load Current in percentage of rated current referred to HV

23 and 50 Hz
23.1 At 90% rated voltage A
24 Clearances
24.1 Minimum clearance in air HV/LV mm
24.2 Between phases mm
Between phases and ground mm
25 Insulation level
25.1 Power Frequency withstand voltage(1min rms)
25.1.1 Primary kV
25.1.2 Secondary kV

NEA
Description requirem To be filled
S. No Unit ent by Bidder
25.2 Impulse withstand voltage

25.2.1 Primary kV peak
25.2.2 Secondary kV peak
26 Details of Oil Preservation system

Conserva
26.1 Type
tor Type
26.2 If conservator type, urethane air cell provided yes/no yes
26.3 Volume of conservator
26.4 Volume of oil between the highest and lowest levels
27 Pressure relief device min pressure settings
28
Details of bushing HV/LV/Neutral Manufacturer/ Type
28.1 Voltage Class
28.2 Creep Distance mm
28.3 Weight of Bushing kg
28.4 Standard reference
28.5 Dry flash over voltage kV
28.6 Wet flash over voltage kV
28.7 Impulse withstand voltage kV
29 Insulating Oil
29.1 Approx volume of oil litrs
29.2 First filled of oil with 10% excess provided yes/no yes
30 Bushing Current transformer

30.1 Type and voltage class
30.2 Number of cores
HV Nos 1/phase
LV Nos 1/phase
30.3 Accuracy class and Burden
Accuracy PS
Burden VA 15
30.4 Max resistance of secondary winding ohm
31 OLTC control panel with AVR

make

NEA To be filled by
32 Approximate overall dimension
33 Approximate weight kg
33.1 Core and coil kg
33.2 Tank and fitting kg
33.3 Oil kg
33.4 Total weight kg

37 User's certificate submitted yes/no yes
38 Has exported to third country yes/no yes
Signed..
Address
Date


( 33/11 kV Sub-Station Construction Mateirals)
POWER TRANSFORMER
To be filled by
S. No Description Unit NEA requirement Bidder
Outdoor, oil
4 Type immersed, core
type
5 Winding/Phase Two/ 1 phase
6 Cooling ONAN
7 Rating
7.1 Rated MVA
7.1.1 ONAN MVA 6
7.1.2 ONAF MVA 8
7.2 Rated Voltage

7.2.1 Primary kV 33
7.3 Maximum Voltage

7.3.1 Primary 36
8 Number of Phases Three
9 Rated Frequency Hz 50
10 Noise Level
On ONAN Rating db As per IEC
On ONAF Rating db
11 Temperature Rise
Temperature rise above 45 deg C
11.1 ambient
In Oil by thermometer deg C 50
In winding by resistance deg C 55
Manufacturer for winding AB Khilsrom,
temperature indicator Sweden
Manufacturer for oil temperature AB Khilsrom,
indicator Sweden

S. No Description Unit NEA requirement

11.2 Hottest spot temperature in winding limited to
12 Connection
12.1 High Voltage Delta
12.2 Low Voltage Star
13 Vector Group Dynll
14 Taps
14.1 Type of Tap Changer OLTC
14.2 Tap Steps 1.25%
14.3 Tap Range +/- 10%
14.4 No of Tap 17
15 Cooling System
15.1 Number connected Nos
15.2 Numbers standby Nos
15.3 Rated Voltage Volts 110
15.4 Adjustable Control Gear
16 OLTC Gear
Maschinenfabrik
Manufacturer Reinhausen (MR)
Germany
16.1 Rating
16.1.1 Rated Voltage Volts 110
16.1.2 Rated Current A
16.1.3 Step Voltage Volts
16.1.4 Number of steps No 17
16.2 Control Suitable For

Remote/Local Operation yes/no yes
Auto manual Operation yes/no yes
Parallel Operation yes/no yes
Master slave Operation yes/no yes
16.3 Rated Voltage of Drive Motor V 110
17 Guaranteed Losses
17.1 No load losses at rated voltage and frequency
on max MVA base
17.2 Load losses at rated current and at 75 deg C
on max MVA base
17.3 Cooler losses for full load operation on max
MVA base

18 Impedance volt at rated current and frequency at 75 deg %

C winding Temp on ONAN, MVA base As per IEC
18.1 Positive Sequence Impendence at name plate Normal
Tap
18.2 Positive Sequence at maximum voltage tap
18.3 Positive Sequence at minimum voltage tap
18.4 Zero sequence at Name plate tap
19 Reactance at rated current and frequency at 75deg C on

maximum MVA base at a nameplate tap
20 Efficiency at 75deg C winding temperature

20.1 At 100% Load
20.2 At 75% Load
20.3 At 50% load
Load in Percentage of full load and Power Factor at

21 which maximum efficiency occurs
22 Regulation at full load and 75deg C

22.1 At Unity Power Factor
22.2 At 0.85 Power Factor Lagging
No load Current in percentage of rated current referred to

23 HV and 50 Hz
24 Clearances
24.1 Minimum clearance in air HV/LV mm
24.2 Between phases mm
Between phases and ground mm
25 Insulation level
25.1 Power Frequency withstand voltage(1min rms)
25.1.1 Primary kV
25.1.2 Secondary kV

Description
S. No Unit NEA requirement
25.2 Impulse withstand voltage

25.2.1 Primary kV peak
25.2.2 Secondary kV peak
26 Details of Oil Preservation system

26.1 Type Conservator Type
26.2 If conservator type, urethane air cell provided yes/no yes
26.3 Volume of conservator cu.m
26.4 Volume of oil between the higest and lowest levels
27 Pressure relief device min pressure settings
28
Detaills of bushing HV/LV/Neutral Manufacturer/ Type
28.1 Voltage Class
28.2 Creep Distance mm
28.3 Weight of Bushing kg
28.4 Standard reference
28.5 Dry flash over voltage kV
28.6 Wet flash over voltage kV
28.7 Impulse withstand voltage kV
29 Insulating Oil
29.1 Approx volume of oil litrs
29.2 First filled of oil with 10% excess provided yes/no yes
30 Bushing Current transformer

30.1 Type and voltage class
30.2 Number of cores
HV Nos 1/phase
LV Nos 1/phase
30.3 Acurrecy class and Burden
Accuracy PS
Burden VA 15
30.4 Max resistance of secondary winding ohm
31 OLTC control panel with AVR

make

32 Approximate overall dimension
33 Approximate weight kg
33.1 Core and coil kg
33.2 Tank and fitting kg
33.3 Oil kg
33.4 Total weight kg

37 User's certificate submitted yes/no yes
38 Has exported to third country yes/no yes
Signed..
Address
Date

33kV CIRCUIT BREAKER

NEA To be filled by

Model No.
4 Type VCB Out door
5 Poles Three pole
6 Pole breaking Three
7 Rated Voltage
7.1 Nominal kV 33
7.2 Maximum kV 36
8 Rated Current
8.1 Continuous at 45 degree ambient A 800
8.2 Rated intrrupting current KA 20
8.3 Momentory KA
9 Frquency Hz 50
10 Temperatur rise above 45 deg C ambient As per IEC
10.1 Contacts Deg C

10.2 Terminals Deg C
11 Rated short circuit breaking current
12 Rated short circuit making current

13.1 Peak kA
12.2 RMS symmetrical kA
13 Interrupting time at 100% capacity

13.1 Maximum opening time ms 60
13.2 Total interrupting time ms 60

NEA To be filled by
14 Closing time ms
15 Make time ms
16 Maximum current breaking capacity A
17 Insulation level
17.1 Impulse withstand voltage(peak) kv 170
17.2 Power frequency withstand voltage kV 70
18 Operating Mechanism
Spring
18.1 Type Loaded
18.2 Number of mechnism per beaker
18.3 Single/Three phase autorecloser not required
18.4 Operating voltage of closing and tripping coil V DC 110
18.5 Operating voltage range
Closing % of rated 85-110%
Tripping voltage 70-110%
18.6 Closing and tripping current A
18.7 Spring charging motor rating
Capacity kw
Rated voltage V 110 DC
18.8 Time required for the motor to charge the spring sec <30
completely
18.9 Space heater and auxialiary equipment
18.10 Push bottom for local operation yes/no yes
18.11 Selection switch for local and remote comtrol yes/no yes
19 Operating counter provided yes/no yes
20 Space heater provided for cubicle yes/no yes
21 Thickness of sheet steel of cubicle mm 2
6NO,6NC,6
22 Number of auxiliary contacts No MBB

NEA To be filled by
0-0.3sec-
23 Operating duty cycle CO-3min-
CO
Number of possible operation without

24 maintenance under
Rated short circuit breaking current No
Rated normal Current No
25 Porcelain insulator
25.1 Manufacturer
25.2 Creepage distance mm 900
26 Pad locking provision for local cubicle yes/no yes
27 Total weight of the cubicle kg
28 Mechanical dimension (LxwxH)
Signed..
Address
Date

DISCONNECTING SWITCH
NEA To be filled by

Model No.
3pole, single
4 Type throw,outdoor,c
enter rotating
5 frequency Hz 50
6 Rated voltage
Nominal kV 33
Maximum kV 36
7 Rated Current
7.1 Continuous at 45 deg C ambient A 800
7.2 Short time for 3 sec at max kV kA 20
7.3. Peak short time current kA
8 Temperature rise above 45 deg C ambient at

normal rated current
8.1 Contacts deg C
8.2 Current carrying parts deg C
Maximum current the switch can safely

9
interrupt
9.1 Bus/Line charginh current A
9.1 Potential transformer magnetizing current A
10 Clearance
10.1 Between live parts and ground mm
Between fixed contact and blade in open
10.2 position mm
11 Insulation level
11.1 Impluse withstand voltage(peak) kV
11.2 Power frequency withsatnd voltage (1min,rms) kV

NEA To be filled by
12 Main contacts
Material of fixed contact copper alloy
Coating of fixed contact copper alloy
Material of moving contacts copper alloy
Coating of moving contacts copper alloy
Material of the contacts of the earthing switch copper alloy
Coating of the contacts of the earthing switch copper alloy
13 Material of Terminals
13.1 Coating of terminals
manual
14 Operating mechanism
operation
15 Auxiliary Contacts
Converti
15.1 Type ble or convertible
fixed
15.2 Continuous current at 110 V DC A
15.3 Material copper
15.4 contacts silver plated yes/no yes
16 No of operation switch can withstand without No

deteriortion of contact
17 Type of interlock furnished Electrical and

mechanical
18 Are the disconnector and the earthing switch yes/no yes

mechanically interlocked to each other

19 Insulator
19.1 Manufacturer
19.2 Type
19.3 Ref Standard
19.4 No of units per stack
19.5 Power frequency withstand voltage
Dry kV
Wet kV
19.6 Impulse withstand voltage (1min)
19.7 Creepage distance in Air mm
19.8 Tensile strength
19.9 Cantilever strength
19.10 Compression strength
19.11 Torsion strength
20 Enclosure Protection IP-55w
manual gang
operated
22 Type of interlock furnished Manual
23 Weight of Isolator kg

Signed..
Address
Date

CURRENT TRANSFORMER
NEA

Model No.
one phase
4 Type outdoor, oil
immeresed
5 Number of phases Nos 1
6 Number of core in each CT Nos 1
7 Frequency Hz 50
8 Rated primary voltage

8.1 Nominal kV 33
8.2 Maximum kV 36
9 Temperature rise above 45deg C ambient deg C

at normal rated current
10 Insulation level
10.1 Impulse withstand voltage kV 170
Power frequency withstand voltage (1min
10.2 rms) kV 75
11 Creepage distance mm
12 Short time thermal rating kA 25
13 Current ratings A
14 Rated VA burden VA 50
5p20 for
protection and
15 Accuracy class
0.5 for
metering
16 Rated thermal VA burden VA
17 Over load factor % 200

NEA
18 Dimension cu mm
19 Weight kg

Signed..
Address
Date

POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
NEA

Model No.
4 Type outdoor, oil

immersed
5 Number of phases No 1
6 Frequency Hz 50
7 Rated primary voltage

7.1 Nominal kV 333
7.2 Maximum kV 363
8 Temperature rise above 45 deg C

ambient at normal rated current
with 1.1 times rated primary voltage
8.1 continuously deg C
with 1.5 times rated voltage for 30
8.2 seconds deg C
9 Insulation levels
Power frequency withstand voltage
9.2 (1min rms) kV 75
11 Open circuit intermediate voltage V
12 Ratings
12.1 Voltage ratio kV 333:0.113
12.2 Rated burden VA 100
12.3 Accuracy class 5p and 0.5
12.4 Over voltage factor
12.4.1 30 seconds 1.1
12.4.2 Continuous 1.5
12.5 Connection
12.6 Secondary fuse
Manufacturer
Amp. Ratings A
12.7 By pass device for protection provided yes/no yes
Knife switch and fuse on secondary
12.8 provided yes/no yes

NEA
13 No of secondary windings No 2
14 Dimension M
15 Weight kg

Signed..
Address
Date

LIGHTING ARRESTOR
NEA

Model No.
outdoor,
4 Type gapless, zinc
oxide
5 Voltage rating of LA kV 30
6 Nominal Discharge Current kA 10
7 Surge counter with insulating base furnished yes/no yes
Minimum power frequency spark over

8 voltage kV
9 Maximum 1/50 impulse spark over voltage kV
10 Maximum front wave spark over voltage kV
11 Maximum switch surge spark over voltage kV
12 Number of section per pole
13 Insulation level
Power frequency withstand voltage (1min
13.2 rms) kV 75
15 Earth terminal and accessories provided yes/no yes
16 Surge counter yes/no yes

Signed..
Address
Date

33kV CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL
NEA
1 Control and relay panel type
1.1 Manufacturer and Country of origin

1.2 Year of manufacturing experience Years
2 Control switches
2.2 Type
2.3 Current Rating A
2.4 Catalogue Furnished yes/no yes
3 Push Button
3.2 Type
3.3 Contact rating continuous Amp
Making current Amp
Breaking current Amp
3.4 Catalogue Furnished yes/no yes
4 Indicating Lamps
4.1 Manufacturer
4.2 Voltage ratings V
4.3 Wattage W
5 Indicating instruments
5.1 Ammeter digital
Manufacturer and Country of origin
Type
Current Range (300-200-100/5 Amp CT operated) A
Accuracy Class 0.5
Scale
Type of scale
Range of indication (300-200-100/1 Amp CT 0-100 0-200
operated) A 0-300
Lineal/ non linear
Overloaded range % 1.5
VA burden
Catalogue furnished yes/no yes
Transducer operated yes/no
6 Voltmeter
Type static

33kV CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL

NEA
Accuracy class 0.5

Scale
Range of indication kV 0-36
Linear/non linear
Overscale range % 1.1
VA burden
Transducer operated yes/no yes
7 Apparent power meter (kVA)

Type digital
Rated voltage kV 333:0.113
Rated current A 300-200-100/5
Current range (Transducer operated) mA
Accuracy class 0.5
Scale
Type of scale
Range of indication 0-10
Linear/non linear
VA burden
Current coil
Voltage coil
Transducer operated yes/no yes
NEA shall
8 KWH Meter provide
Type TOD (static)
Accuracy class 0.2
Import Export meter provided yes/no yes
Rated current A 300-200-100/1
VA burden
Current coil
Voltage coil
Impulse contact provided 1pulse
100kW yes/no yes
Reverse rotation locking mechanism
provided yes/no yes
9 Power factor meter

Type digital
Accuracy class 0.5

NEA
requirem To be filled by
S. No Description Unit ent Bidder
10 Annunciators
Type
Manufacturer's type designation
Number of inputs (annunciator/event)
Number of active points nos 24
Number of rows 4
Number of column 6
Type of mounting Flush
Replacement of individual inscription plates and
lamps from front panel possible yes/no yes
Sequence of operation as per specification yes/no yes
11 Protective Relays
11.1 Phase Over Current Relay
static
Non
Type
direction
al
Applicable standards IEC
Triple pole or single pole Single*3
Current setting range % of rated 20-200%
current
Operating time at 10 times current settings msec 3
Reset time ms
IDMT
(Standar
d
Characteristics inverse)
Instantaneous unit provided yes/no yes
% of rated 500-
Current setting range
current 2000%
Operating range
NO Contacts
Insulation test as per IEC yes/ no yes
Indication
Hand reset flags provided yes/no yes
Light emitting diode provided yes/no yes
Auxiliary DC supply V 110
Technical Literature submitted yes/no yes
Test Certificate submitted yes/no yes

To be filled by
S. No Description Unit NEA requirement Bidder
11.2 Earth fault relay

static/non
Type
directional
Triple pole or single pole Single
Continuous overload capacity xIn
current
operating time at 10 times current setting msec 3
IDMT (Standard
current
Operating range
NO Contacts
Indication
Test certificate submitted yes/no yes
11.3 Directional Over current Relay not required

Type static/ directional
Triple pole or single pole Single*3
current
operating time at 10 times current setting sec 3
Reset time ms
IDMT (Standard

NEA To be filled by

Current setting range 200-1600%
% of rated current
Operating range
Indication
Auxilliary DC supply V 110
11.4 Directional Earth Fault Relay

static/
Type
directional
Triple pole or single pole Single
Continuous overload capacity xIn
Current setting range % of rated current 10-80%
operating time at 10 times current
setting sec 3
IDMT
(Standard
Current setting range 200-1600%
% of rated current
Operating range
Indication

NEA
11.5 Differential Relay

Standard reference
Type
Voltage rating V 110
Type of Mounting Flush
Operating time setting ms <30
Sensitivity setting 20-50%xIn
Bias setting
CT ratio Compensating range
Burden for Current Circuit VA
DC Burden VA
Tripping A
Making Current A
Closing load (At 110V DC) A
Ambient Temperature Range Deg C

11.6 Auxiliary Tripping and Lockout Relay

Type
Operating Time ms <15
Does the lockout relay reset by the
manually operated or electrically
operated reset device
Is the cut off contact provided to
interrupt the operating coil yes/no yes
Contact rating at 125V DC A

NEA
11.7 Break Fail Lockout Relay, 86K

DC Voltage Rating V 110
Nos of electrically separate NO and NC
Contacts
11.8 Break Failure Lockout Relay BF

DC Voltage Rating V 110
Nos of electrically separate NO and NC
Contacts

12 Construction of Control and Relay Panel

Type Simplex
Applicable Standard
Control panel furnished as per
specification yes/no yes
Enclosure protection calss IP IP54
Thickness of sheet metal used
Front and rear portion mm >3
Side top and bottom cover mm >2
All instruments, meters, relays and control flush
switches flush or semi flush type
Ground Bus
Material copper
Size mm x mm
Internal Wiring
Type of Insulation
Voltage Grade of Wires V 600
Cross Section of Wires sq.mm 2.5 min
Current Circuit
Voltage and auxiliary circuit
Over all dimension of control board cu mm
Shipping data
mmxmmx
Size of large package mm
Weight of heaviest package kg
Address
Signed
..
As Representative
for Date
..

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
NEA
1 Construction of AC DB
Simplex/Dup
Type lex
Manufacturer's Type designation
Applicable Standard
Control Panel furnished as per specification yes/no yes
Enclosure Protection Class IP IP54
Thickness of sheet metal used mm >2
All instruments, meters, relays and control
switches flush or semi flush Flush
Bus
Material copper
Size mmxmm
Rating A 400A
Instruments/Equipments mounted
Voltmeter V 0-120V
Ammeter A 0-200A
Control switches
MCCB
Type DP
Manufacturer
Current rating A 400A
Internal wiring
Type of insulation
Voltage grade of wires V 600
Cross section of wires sq.mm
Current circuit
Voltage &auxiliary circuit
Number of feeders Nos
MCB used yes/no yes
Type SP/DP SP/DP
Ratings A
mmxmm
Overall Dimension xmm
Shipping data
Size of large package
Weight of the heaviest package kg
Delivery of equipment in months following

award of contract months
Technical literature/ drawings submitted yes/no yes
Signed..
Address
Date

CONTROL CABLES
1 Manufacturer and country of origin

2 Manufacturer's type designation
3 Type
5 Voltage ratings
Suitable for max. system voltage V 1000
Voltage grade of the cables V 600
Rated voltage between ech
conductor and screen V
Rated voltage between two
conductors V
6 Conductor material copper

7 Conductor
Nos & dia of each core in cable
Overall jacket of thickness
8 Insulating material Polyethylene
9 Overall jacket material PVC
10 Net weight of the cable kg/m
11 Standard drum length m
12 Continuous current at 45 deg C
in ground
in duct
13 Electrical parameters
Resistance ohm
Reactance ohm
14 Technical literature submitted yes/no yes

Delivery of equipment in months
16 following award of contract months
Signed..
Address
Date

LV POWER CABLES
NEA To be filled by

3 Type
5 Voltage ratings
Suitable for max. system voltage V 1000
Voltage grade of the cables V 600
Rated voltage between each conductor and screen V
Solidly
Type of system earthing
grounded

Nos & dia of wires of each conductor
Insulating material and thickness Polyethylene
Overall jacket material/thickness PVc
Overall cable diameter
7 Continuous current
in ground A
in duct A
Resistance ohm
Reactance ohm
9 net weight of the cable kg/m

Delivery of equipment in months following award of
12 contract months
Signed..
Address
Date

HV XLPE POWER CABLE

NEA To be filled by

3 Type
5 Voltage ratings
Suitable for max. system voltage kV 12
Rated voltage between each conductor and
screen kV 12
Type of system earthing Solidly grounded

Nos & dia of wires of each conductor
Insulating material and thickness XL Polyethylene
Overall jacket material/thickness PVC
Overall cable diameter
7 Continuous current mm
in ground A
in duct A
Resistance ohm
Reactance ohm
9 net weight of the cable kg/m

Delivery of equipment in months following award
12 of contract months
Signed..
Address
Date

GROUNDING SYSTEM
NEA To be filled by
1 Main ground grid conductor material copper

2 Main ground grid conductor size sq.mm
3 Depth of buried main ground conductor
4 Material of riser copper
Cross-section of riser conductor sq.mm 100
5 Type of joint above and below ground level
6 Ground electrode
copper clad
Material steel
Diameter mm 16
as per
Length m IEEE80
7 Fence grounding included
Cross section of conductor rise for fence
8 ground sq.mm
9 Fence separately grounded by electrode yes/no yes
Calculation for grounding grid length and
10 conductor size furnished yes/no yes
11 Earthing system designed for ohm <1
Signed..
Address
Date

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
NEA
A Strain bus and fittings

2 Nominal sectional area
3 Nos and Size of wires
Aluminium
Steel
4 Overall diameter mmxmmxmm
Steel core
Complete conductor
5 Continuous current at 45 deg C A
6 Ultimate tensile strength
7 Short circuit current 1 sec
8 Resistance ohm
9 Weight kg
B Fittings
2 Material
C Suspension and tension insulators
2 Manufacture's type designation
4 Size
Diameter mm 254
Height mm 146
5 No of units per string No 11
Combined electrical and mechanical failing
6 load kg 12000
7 Creep age distance per unit mm 292
8 Impulse withstand voltage kV 120
9 Dry power frequency withstand voltage kV 78
10 Wet power frequency withstand test kv 45
11 puncture voltage kV 120
D Post insulator
4 Rated system voltage kV 132
5 Maximum rated voltage kV 145
6 Unit size (Diameter) mm
7 Unit size (length) mm
8 Creep age distance mm >3300
9 Insulation level
Impulse withstand voltage kV 124
Power frequency withstand voltage (1 min rms) kv 42
10 Failing load (bending) kg
11 Failing load (torsion) kg-m

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

E ACSR Conductor

4 Unit size(dia x no of strands)
5 Overall cross sectional area
F Earth Wires

4 Unit size(dia x no of strands)
5 Overall cross sectional area
Signed..
Address
Date

Wall mounted split type AIR CONDITIONER

NEA
requireme To be filled by
S. No Description Unit nt Bidder
1 Manufacturer/Type
2 Standard Reference
3 Voltage ratings V 230
4 Frequency Hz 50
5 Power Consumption kw
6 Cooling capacity/Heating capacity BTU/hr
7 Compressor Type
Rotary/reciprocating
8 Fan speed steps 3
9 Air Swing yes/no yes
10 Air filter make/type
11 Refrigerant type R410A
12 mode of operation
Signed..
Address
Date

12kV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER

NEA To be filled by

3 Manufacturer's designation as per submitted catalogue

3 Phase ,
5 Type Indoor
6 Rated Voltage
6.1 Nominal kV 11
6.2 Maximum kV 12
7 Rated Current
7.1 Continuous at 45 degree ambient
incomer A 1200
outgoing A 630
Trunking chamber A 2000
Busbar A 2000
Busbar A 1200
7.2 Short time for 1 sec at max. kV kA 25
Momentary kV
8 Frequency Hz 50
9 Rated short circuit breaking current kA
10
10.1 Peak kA 63
10.2 RMS Symmetrical kA
11 Interrupting time at 100% capacity
11.1 Maximum Opening time ms
11.2 Total interrupting time ms 60
12 Closing time ms
13 Make time ms 120
14 Maximum capacitive current breaking capacity (rms) A

15 Insulation level
15.2 Power frequency withstand voltage kV 28
16 Vacuum chamber
Make time
Rating A
Spring
17.1 Type Operated
17.2 Operating voltage of closing and tripping coil V DC 110
17.3 Operating voltage range
Closing time % of rated 85-110%
Tripping voltage 70-110%
17.4 Closing and tripping current A
17.5 Spring charging motor rating
Capacity kW
Rated voltage V 400
Frequency Hz 50
Phase No 3 Phase

12kV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER

Time required by motor to charge the spring
17.6 completely sec
17.7 Push button for local/ remote control yes/no yes
17.8 Selection switch for local/remote control yes/no yes
18 Current transformer
Nos of core (incoming and outgoing) 3 and 2
Ratio/class/burden 600-1200/1A
and 300-600/1A
Metering 5P20,30VA
Protection 0.5,30VA
Differential PS,30VA
18.2 For outgoing
Nos of core 2
Ratio/class/burden 300-600/1A
Metering 5P10,30VA
Protection 0.5,30VA
19 Indicating Instruments
19.1 Ammeter
i Manufacturer and country of origin
ii Type digital
iii Current range (300-200-100/1 Amp CT operated)
iv Accuracy class 0.5
v Scale
Range of indication (300-200-100/1A CT
operated) A
Linear/Nonlinear
Overload range % 1.5
vi VA Burden VA 30
Is manufacturer ISO holder yes/no yes
19.2 Voltmeter
ii Type digital
iii Accuracy class 0.5
iv Scale
Range of indication kv 0-15
v VA Burden
19.3 Apparent Power meter
Type
Rated Current A 300-200-100/1
Accuracy class 0.5
Range of indication MVA 0-15 or 10
VA burden
Current coil
Voltage coil VA
19.4 KWh Meter
static 3-phase, 4
ii Type wire
iii Accuracy class 0.2/0.5


iv Rated voltage kV 113:0.113
v Rated Current A 300-200-100/1
vi VA burden
Current coil
Voltage coil VA
vii Reverse rotation locking mechanism provided yes/no yes
19.5 Annunciators
Manufacturer and country of origin
Type
Number of active points No 4
Type of mounting Flush
Replacement of individual inscription plates and
lamps from front panel possible yes/no yes
Sequence of operation as per specification yes/no yes
20 Protective Relay
20.1 Over current relay
iv Manufacturer and country of origin
static
ii Type Nondirectional
iii Manufacturer's type designation
iv Applicable standard
v No of poles three
% of rated
vi current setting range 20-200%
current
vii Operating time at 10 times current setting sec 3
viii Reset time ms
ix Characteristics IDMT (standard
inverse)
x Instantaneous unit provided yes/no yes
Current setting range % of rated
current
Operating range
NO Contacts
xi Insulation test according to IEC yes/no yes
xii Indication
xiii Auxilliary DC supply V 110
xiv Technical literature provided yes/no yes
20.2 Earth fault relay
Static/no
ii Type
directional
iii Applicable standard IEC
iv Continuous overload capacity xIn
v Current setting range % of In 10-80%
vi Operating time at 10 times current setting sec 3
vii Characteristics IDMT (standard
inverse)
viii Instantaneous unit provided yes/no yes
Current setting range % of In 200-1600%
Operating range
NO Contacts


ix Insulation test according to IEC yes/no yes
x Indication
xi Auxiliary DC supply V 110
xii Is Manufacturer ISO 9001 holder? yes/no yes
xiii Technical literature submitted yes/no yes
xiv Type test certificate submitted yes/no yes
20.3 Auxiliary Tripping and Lockout Relay
ii Type
iii Manufacturer's type designation
iv Applicable standard
v Operating time ms <15
vi Contact rating at 125V Dc A
21 Earthing switch
Type Integrated
rating
interlocking yes/no yes
22 Surge Arrestor
Type Zno
Rating kA 9kV,10kA
23 Space heater provided for cubicle yes/no yes/rating
0-0.3sec-co-
24 Operating duty cycle 3min-co
Number of possible operation without
25 maintenance under:
Rated short circuit braking current No 100
Rated normal current No 10000
26 Clearances
26.1 Phase to phase mm 127
26.2 Phase to earth mm 76.2
27 Padlocking provision for cubicle yes/no yes
28 Total weight of the circuit breaker kg
mmxmmxm
29 Mechanical Dimension (LXWXH) m
Delivery of equipment in months following award
30 of contract (Allowing time for approval of drawing)
Has manufacturer exported units yes/no yes
Technical literature submitted yes/no yes
Signed..
Address
Date

4Sec.VIdSPECIFICATIONOFCIVIL&BUILDINGWORKS
1. SITE WORKS
Work Included
Furnishing all materials equipment and labor and performing all operations required
for the clearing stripping, Filling and compacting of substation areas and constructing
access roads so indicated on the drawings, specified herein and as evidently necessary
to complete to work as given in the price schedule.
1.2 Clearing and Stripping
1.2.1 General
Clearing shall include cutting, levelling , removal and disposal with lead of 100m, as
specified of all trees, bushes down timber, debris, posts, fences, indicted structures
and other obstructions from the areas to be occupied by permanent works of the
contract and as indicated on the drawings specified herein and directed by the
Owner/Engineer. Areas so indicated shall be stripped of 20cm thick topsoil. Topsoil
approved by the Owner/Engineer shall be stockpiled for use in the finish grading and
seeding work. Stockpiled topsoil shall be free from trash, vegetation, or other debris.
1.2.2 Protection
The Contractor shall be responsible for prevention of damage to structures and other
objects, which are not included in the clearing work. No objects of any kind outside
the indicated limits of the work shall be removed or damaged. Existing utilities which
are not specifically include in the work shall be protected by the contractor. The
contractor shall be responsible for employment of safe methods of demolition and
clearing.
1.2.3 Payment
Payment for the contract item Clearing and stripping will made at the lump sum
price as bid therefore in the schedule which shall include full compensation for all
costs incurred in performing the clearing and stripping, including but not limited to
removal and disposal of bushes, splash, roots and debris and stripping, stockpiling and
disposal of topsoil or unsuitable earth material within lead of 100 meters.
1.3 Compacted Fill for Site Grading
1.3.1 The contractor shall provide and compact select borrow material within the limits of
the work to the lines, grades and elevations to be specified by the Owner/Engineer. In
general, the new substation sites and access roads will be elevated by approximately

one meter from the existing ground level. The contractor shall provide details of
filling for approval of the owner.
1.3.2 Common Fill
The contractor may use fill materials available from cut areas in the switchyard if
suitable and approved by the owner. This materials shall be well-graded bank-run
gravel, relatively free from clay, loan on vegetables matter and with no stones over 10
cm in maximum dimensions, or materials of equivalent strength and characteristics.
Representative samples from proposed borrow sources shall be submitted to the
Owner/Engineer for approval of the borrow source. Approval of borrow source shall
both mean automatic approval of Owner/Engineer. If Owner/Nepal Electricity
Authority rejects any material the Contractor shall remove it from site without any
extra cost to the Owner.
1.3.3 The Contractor shall, at his option, use areas approved by the Owner/Engineer for
production of select borrow or at his own expense, make arrangements for obtaining
select borrow at other sources with prior approval of the Owner/Nepal Electricity
Authority.
1.3.4 Unless otherwise specified y the Owner/Engineer, compacting shall be to the

following sensitizes at optimum moisture contents as determined by ASTMD-1557,
Method D.
a) Fill location and required density
1) Under building and yard foundation 95 percent
2) Sub-base for roadways 90 percent
3) Gravel roadways top 400mm 95 percent
4) All other locations 90 percent

b) It is Contractors responsibility to select his method for attaining the required compaction and
obtain approval of the Owner/Engineer for the proposed method. Should the method of
compaction prove unsatisfactory, it is the Contractors responsibility to take remedial measures
and obtain the approval of the Owner/Engineer for the changes made. For the compaction of fill,
2 tom vibrating roller is preferable.
c) The Owner/Engineer reserves the right to have compaction tests performed by

an independent laboratory, with all testing costs borne by the Contractor. Any
additional compaction or replacement of fill required to meet the specified
density, as evidence by the tests, shall be done by at the expense of the
Contractor.
d) Failure of the compacted fill to reach the required density as evidence by these
tests, is cause of rejection by the Owner of the work in the affected area(s).
Unless the Contractor can rework and compact the fill to the required density,
he shall remove the fill in the areas affected. Subsequently the Contractor shall
replace the removal fill with material which he can compact to the required
density.

e) Compaction shall be carried out in layer wise, each layer not exceeding 300 mm
loose thickness.
1.3.5 Measurement for payment for the contract item, Site Grading Shall be the number
of cubic meters of site grading, filled of bankrun gravel furnished and placed in
accordance with the Specifications, as shown on drawings, or as directed by the
Owner/Engineer. The measurement and the payment shall be for compacted volume.
1.3.6 Payment for the contract item :Site Grading will be made at the unit price for cubic
meter. Bid therefore in the price schedules which unit price shall include full
compensation for all costs incurred in furnishing all materials and all other operations
related to fill including but not limited to:
a) Obtaining materials to job site from source, to temporary stockpiles and/or

points or final disposition.
b) Transporting, materials to job site from source, to temporary stockpiles and/or

points or final disposition.
c) Leveling the top surface to the finish grade.
1.4 Crushes Stone Substation Yard Surfacing
1.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish, delivery, deposited and spread crushes stone on the
switchyard area. The crushes stone shall be crushes granite, gneiss or equal, 25mm
size and shall be hard, durable and seamless, spread and bladed dense but not
compacted. The Contractors shall spread the crushes stone on previously properly
prepared sub surfaces. The cover shall be 150mm thick.
1.4.2 Measurement for payment for contractor item. Crushes Stone for Substation Yard
surfacing, shall be at the number of square meters of crushes stone surface of crushed
stone furnished and placed in accordance with Specification, as shown on deducting
area cover by permanent structure and fixtures.
1.4.3 Payment for the contract item Crushed Stone for Substation Surfacing will be made
at the unit price per square meter therefore in the Schedule, which unit price shall
include full compensation for all costs incurred in furnishing all materials and all other
operation related to the fill including but not be limited to:
a) Obtaining materials from owner/Engineer approved source.
b) Transporting materials to job site from source, to temporary stockpiles and/or to

points of final disposition.
1.5 Site Drainage
1.5.1 The Contractor shall design and furnish all construction works for collection and
disposing storm water all around the switchyard site into the soak pit drain or nearby
channel.

1.5.2 Grading
Location and its direction of the elevations shall be as per approved drawings.
1.5.3 Drainage channel materials
a) All concrete drains must be built to tall
Excavating must give allowance to formwork which shall be refilled with

proper compaction.
b) Concrete pipes
Concrete pipes shall be Np-3 class or equivalent in required size. Closed pipes
shall be used at road crossing, the perforated type pipes shall be used for
switchyard area. 150 mm dia. Perforated pipe shall be made of asbestos cement.
250 mm and 200mm dia. Perforated pipe shall be made of R.C.C hume pipe Np-
2 class or equivalent. Those pipes shall be protected with screened gravel of
25mm-40mm size.
1.5.4 Construction
Excavating, trenching and backfilling for drainage channels shall be done after all
other underground utilized are installed but before road sub grade is prepared.
a) Trench Excavation
Trenches for pipe shall excavated to a sufficient depth and width to enable to
pipe and any specified joint bedding, hunching etc. to be accommodated.
b) Bedding and laying of pipes
Immediately following excavation of trenches, pipes shall be laid. Pipe shall be

laid so that each one is in contact with the bed throughout the length of its
barrel.
c) Jointing of pipes
Length of each pipes shall be commercially available joints to be constructed in

the fields shall be factory made collar jointed with jute packing and cement
sand mortar 1:3. And the joint location shall be covered by 30cm thick concrete
(1:2:4).
d) Backfilling
After 48 hours of pipe jointing, the trenches shall be backfilled with excavated
materials. IF excavated materials is not suitable then the contractor shall replace
it by select borrow. Backfilling shall be done in layer wise, each layer not
exceeding 15 cm.
1.5.5 Open channel type drainage
Excavation and backfilling for this type of drainage shall be done as specified herein.

The surface shall be made as smooth as possible with plaster work. Side and base shall
be constructed in stone masonry wall 360 mm thick and cement sand mortar to be
used shall be 1:5 ratio by volume.
1.5.6 Payment for the contract item Drainage will be made at lump sum bid price.
Therefore in the schedule the bid price shall include full compensation for all costs
incurred in furnishing all materials, equipment labor and other operations related to
the scope of work.
1.6 Laying of under ground cable
Contractor shall furnish all construction work for under grounding of 12 kV cables
from substation outgoing cable exit point to nearest take off poles.
This work shall include excavation, sand filling from the top and backfilling. All work
shall be done according to the standard practice.
Cost of 12 kV power cable and accessories: in the Price Schedule shall include the
cost of laying of cable with required materials as described above.
1.7 Cable Trenches
1.7.1 General
Concrete cable trenches of adequate size shall be designed and constructed in

accordance with the drawings and as directed by the Owner/Engineer. Trenches shall
be designed with floor drains to assure proper drainage and shall be equipped with
floor drains to assure proper drainage and shall be equipped with removable iron
covers. At road crossing R.C.C. Hume pipe -NP3 of sufficient size shall be provided.
The detailed design shall be approved by the Owner.
1.7.2 Payment
Payment for the contract item, cable trenches, will be made at the unit price per meter
bid. Therefore, in the schedule the unit price shall include full compensation for all
costs incurred in furnishing all materials, equipment and labour and all other
operations related to cable trench, design and construction, including but not be
limited to:
a) Performing detail designs and preparation of construction drawings
b) Supplying transporting all materials to job site.
c) Excavating and backfilling for the cable trenches.
d) Construction the cable trenches with floor drains, reinforced concrete wall, base
and removable cover.

1.8 Access Road

AsphaltsPayment
General
This specification covers all construction works for 4 meters wide drive-way road
within Owners premises.
Grading
Finish grade of roads and packing area shall be as directed by Owner.
PavementMaterials
Subbase
Sub-base shall be a non-plastic, sandy granular material with a C. B. R value greater
than 15. It shall be free of deleterious materials and subjected to the Owners
approval. Thickness of sub-base course shall be 30 cm compacted.
BaseCourse
Base shall be crushed aggregate with a CBR value greater than 80. It shall be free of
deleterious material and subjected to the Owners approval. Thickness of base course
shall be 15 cm compacted.
It shall conform to following gradation:.
Sieve Size Percentage Passing
1.5 /2 100
90-100
3/8 50-80
No. 4 35-55
No. 30 10-30
No. 200 2-9
WearingCourse
Wearing course shall be asphalt concrete mixture.
AsphaltConcreteMixture
Asphalt concrete shall be a mixture of mineral aggregate and paving asphalt mixed at
a central mixing plant. It s components shall be specified herein.

Paving asphalt shall be a stream refined asphalt produce from crude asphaltic
petroleum or mixture of refined liquid asphalt and refined solid asphalt. It shall be
homogeneous and free from water and residues of coal, coat tar or paraffin oil. It shall
have a penetration grade of 85-1000 when tested according to ASTM D-5.
Aggregate for asphalt concrete shall be a composition of coarse aggregate fine

aggregate. Both shall be clean and durable.
CompositionofGrading
The grading of the combined aggregates and the percentage of asphalt shall be as
follows:
Percentages shown are based on weight of dry aggregates.
Sieve Size Percentage Passing
Minimum Maximum.
100
95 100
3/8 72 88
No.4 46 60
No.8 28 42
No.30 15 27
No. 50 10 20
No.200 4 7
Asphalt content (%) 4.8 6.0
Payment
The unit price bid in the price schedule shall include the cost of design, all labor all
material, civil construction works, etc.
Payment for the contract item Asphalt Road will be made at the unit price per sq.
meter of finished blacktop surface bid therefore in the price schedule, which unit price
shall include fill compensations for all costs incurred in grading, furnishing all
material, equipment labor and all other operations including earthwork and
excavations.
1.9 Stone Masonry for Protection
The Contractor shall design and construct stone masonry wall to protect the different
level of switchyard, control building, road and other places as directed by the Owner.
The stone shall be placed with uncoursed close joints to the lines and grades as
designed. The rubble stone shall be placed with 1:3 cement mortars. After completion
of masonry wall, it shall be cured with water for more than 10 hours.

Weep-holes with poly vinyl chloride (PVC) pipes of 5 cm in diameter shall be made
in each 4 sq. m of slope surface of the masonry wall. The upper surface of the
masonry wall shall be finished smooth with concrete.
Payment: Measurement for payment of Stone Masonry Wall works shall be made
for the number of cubic meters measured as provided at the unit price specified in the
Price Schedule. The unit price shall include all labour tools and equipment materials
including furnishing, transporting and placing the materials, excavating, backfilling,
installation of PVC pipes and all other costs necessary for the performance and
completion of the works.
1.10 Switchyard and Boundary Fencing
A barbed fence shall be constructed around Owners premises as shown on the

drawings.
The work include under this item entails the complete furnishing and installation of
all galvanized wire fencing, posts, and appurtenances, complete and in finished
condition, including the furnishing of all labour, materials, plant, tools and equipment
required for the work.
The contractor shall erect the boundary fence strictly conforming to this specification.
Concrete work shall be in accordance with the details in the item of these
specifications concerning concrete work.
Payment
The unit price bid in the Price Schedule shall include the cost of all labor and all
materials.
Measurement for payment shall be made on the basis of running meter of actual
quantities performed and be made at the unit price bid therefore in the price schedule,
which shall include earth excavation, backfill and all other related works.
1.11 Entrance Gate
One entrance gate for main entrance to the Owners premises and another one for the
switchyard shall be erected. The iron gates shall be 4.5x1.5 (wxh) m. the Contractor
shall submit the design for the approval of Owner.
Excavation, backfilling, pilling (if necessary) for installation of gate posts are included
and the gate shall be painted according to the direction of the Owner. Measurement
for payment shall be made on the basis of actual quantities performed and made at the
unit price bid therein.
Payment shall be made on the basis of lump sum price and be made at the unit price
bid therefore in the Price Schedule.

2. CONCRETE FOUNDATION AND TRENCHES
Work Included
Furnishing all materials, equipment and labour and perform all operations required
for the design and construction of all the concrete foundations for equipment and
other structures, oil containment and cable trenches, as specified herein and as
evidently necessary to complete the work.
2.2 Foundation Design
2.2.1 General
The Contractor shall design all foundations specified on the bid drawings. The design
shall be based on assumed soil parameters. Upon completion of the detail soil test,
actual soil conditions shall be investigated and shown to be in compliance with the
assumed condition.
2.2.2 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit design calculations, detail drawings and reinforcement
steel schedules to the Owner/Engineer for review and comment before construction
commences, Review of the foundation design by the Owner/Engineer in no way
relieves the Contractor of his responsibility for an adequate foundation design, even
though this Specification sets forth the basis foundation design criteria. Upon receiving
the Owners /Engineer comments, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner/ Engineer
final drawings of all foundation details, including reinforcement steel schedules on
drawing sheet sizes for record file.
2.2.3 Design Load
The structure design loads are defined on the structure outline drawings and the loads
used to design the foundation shall be actual working loads applied to the foundations
by the equipment and structures. The foundations shall be designed to resist all vertical
and lateral forces, uplift forces and overturning moments with a minimum factor of
safety of 1.5.
2.2.4 Bearing Loads
The Contractor shall used an allowable soil bearing pressure of 1.0kg/cm2 for the
design of the foundation for the purpose of bidding, but this is only reference value.
After award of contract the Contractor shall carry out detail soil test and detail design
of foundation based on the soil test result. There may be variation in the volume of
work in final design compared to the bidding design, for which the Contractor will not
get any extra payment.
2.2.5 Uplift and Overturning Loads
The uplift and overturning resistance of concrete spread footing shall be assumed as
the weight of a volume of earth in the form of an inverted frustum of cone or pyramid.

The cone of pyramid height shall be 30cm less than the depth from finish grade to the
top of the concrete mat, the base area shall be the top area of the mat and the top area
shall be determined by the intersection of planes starting at the mat edges and sloping
outward at a 20 degree cone angle from the vertical and the horizontal plane 30 cm
below finish grade.
2.2.6 Unit weight for overturning resistance
The following unit weight shall be used for design:
a) Soil .. 12,000kg/m3
b) Concrete 16,00kg/m3
2.2.7 Payment
No separate or direct payment will be made to the Contractor for design works. All
costs incurred in connection therewith shall be included in the lump sum bid price for
the construction of various works.
2.3 Soil Test
2.3.1 Ground bearing tests
The contractor shall carry out soil tests to determine the ground bearing capacity by
means of a Standard Penetrations Test and Auger Boring and tests shall be performed
in accordance with the following Specifications.
a) The Contractor shall perform soil investigation work according to the approved
plan and details of tests. Report on test results including various data collected
during the investigation works and Contractors recommendations, on which the
design will be based, shall be approved Owner/Engineer.
b) Sub surface investigation for soil strength of foundation for structures and
equipment shall conform to the following requirements.
Number of boring shall be at least 2 borings at the locations specified below:
- One at take-off structure foundation
- One at transformers foundation
c) Thin-walled tube soil sampling in accordance with ASTM D-1587-63 T shall b

made at every meter for the first three meter of depth.
d) Standard penetration tests in accordance with ASTM-D-1586-64T shall be made

at every meter for the first three meter of depth and every two meters fort he
further depth after this-walled tube soil samples have been taken.
e) Every undisturbed sample collected from thin-walled tube shall be subject to the
following series of test.
- Natural moisture content

- Atterberg limits
- Sieve analysis
- Unit weight
- Specific gravity determination
- Unconfined compression tests.
f) Accurate log of all soil strata penetration resistance test unconfined compressive
strength, soil classification, ground water table and other tests result shall be
recorded in the reports submitted.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment, materials and personnel to
prepare conduct and report the tests.
2.3.2 Payment
Soil Testing will be made at the lump sum price bid. Therefore, in the schedule, the
price shall include compensation for all costs incurred in furnishing all materials and
labor and other operations related to soil testing.
2.4 Excavation and Backfill
2.4.1 The contractor shall excavate earth, rock, stumps and all the other materials
encountered as required for construction of the foundations, oil containments and
trenches and drainage pipes. The Contractor shall place all suitable excavated materials
in backfill or in graded embankment in the immediate area at structures. Materials
found to be unsuitable for foundation backfill or grading shall be wasted and disposed
of at Contractor own expense, and shall be backfilled with select borrowing material.
2.4.2 Excavation shall be maintained in a clean, safe and sound condition until completion of
the foundation construction and shall be dike to prevent flooding by surface runoff.
Suitable pumping equipment shall be provided and used to dewater excavation so that
all installation work and backfilling is performed in the dry state. Any previously
prepared foundation bearing surface that is softened by water runoff of otherwise
contaminated before placement of the structure foundation shall be excavated and
replaced at the Contractors expenses.
2.4.3 In those excavation where the base is unstable. Lies below groundwater level, or has
been over excavated, the Contractor shall furnished and place a layer of crushed stone,
or selected backfill, or borrow to stabilize the base for placement of foundation.
2.4.4 Backfill shall be place in not greater than 20cm lifts before compaction. Each lift shall
be thoroughly compacted before the following lift is placed, Pneumatic or equivalent
tempers shall be used on cohesive materials: vibratory compactors shall be used on
non-cohesive materials. Compaction shall achieve a density at least equal to that of the
surrounding undisturbed earth. Large stones or rock fragments may be used in the
backfill provided they do not interfere with proper compaction. Particles larger than 25

cm shall be placed not nearer than 0.5 m of the structure and at least 1.0m below
ground surface.
2.4.5 Rock particles larger than 10 cm shall not be in contact with the concrete.
2.4.6 Upon the completion of excavation a 10 cm thick layer of boulder or selected borrow
shall be provided at the base of each foundation.
2.4.7 Payment
No separate or direct payment will be made to the Contractor for excavation and
backfill. All costs incurred in connection therewith shall be included in the lump sum
bid prices for the construction of the various foundation types.
2.5 Foundation Construction
2.5.1 General requirement
All materials and labor required to remove and replace at his expense any materials
incorporated in the work that do not conform to these Specifications.
a) The Contractor will be required to remove and replace at his expenses any
materials incorporated in the work that do not conform to these Specifications.
b) The Contractors shall furnish without extra cost all materials the
Owner/Engineer may required for testing. The cost of the tests shall be borne by
the Contractor.
2.5.2 Measurement
Measurement for payment for the contract item. Concrete foundation, shall be on the
basis of the actual number of each type of foundation constructed by the Contractor.
2.5.3 Reference to standard specifications
Standard referred to in these specifications are as follows.
a) ASTM refers to the latest edition of publications of American Society for

Testing and Materials.
b) ACI refers to the latest edition of publications of American Concrete Institute.
2.5.4 Measurement Standard
Measurement standards referred to in these Specifications, gallons shall be understood

to be U.S gallons.
a) Gallons whenever used in these Specifications, gallons shall be understood to

be U.S gallons.
b) Bag- Wherever used in these Specifications, bag will be understood to mean 50

kg bags of Portland cement.

2.5.5 Concrete
The Contractor shall design and test concrete mixes which have a 28 days specified
compressive strength of 210kg/sq.cm.
a) At least on month prior to the placement of any concrete, the Contractor shall
test cylinders for each trial mix under both field-cured and laborated cured
conditions. The test cylinders shall be made and tested in accordance with the
applicable standards. Also for every new batch of cement purchased one set of
test cylinders shall be taken before two weeks of using that cement.
b) The concrete mixes are of such proportions as to produce a plastic and workable
mix which will not separate during placing and will finish sell without using
excessive quantities of mixing water.
c) After the test results are known for the test cylinders, the Contractor shall
submit test result to Owner/Engineer then Owner/Engineer will notify the
Contractor of the acceptable design mixes.
d) When placing concrete in hot weather, the recommendations of the American

Concrete Institutes publication Recommended, Practice for Hot Weather
Concreting(ACI 605) shall be followed in so far and the Owner/Engineer nay
direct. The use of set retarders will be at the Owner/Engineers discretion. For
concrete placed during extremely hot weather, the aggregate shall be collected
by frequent water spraying in such a manner as to utilize the cooling effect of
evaporation. Concrete with a temperature of 30 deg. C high before placement
will be rejected and shall be wasted at the Contractors expense.
2.5.6 Cement
In locations where conditions do not required high sulphate resistance, cement shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM C150 type 1.
a) In locations where, in the opinion of the Owner/Engineer, the conditions

required the use of high sulphate resistance cement, conforming to the
requirements of ASTM C150 type V shall be used without any extra cost to the
Owner.
b) The aggregates shall consist of clean, natural materials or, subject to the
approval of the Owner/Engineer, manufactured aggregate may be used.
c) Aggregates shall be separated into sand and coarse aggregate before being used.
No pit or crusher run materials will be permitted without prior approval of the
Owner/Engineer.
d) Natural fine aggregate or sand grading shall be within the following limits and
the fitness modules shall be between 2.5 and 2.8.02
Sieve Size Amount finer than each Laboratory
U.S. Std. Sieve, Weight Percent

3/8 (9.5mm) 100

# 4 (4.75mm) 95 to 100
# 8 (2.36mm) 80 to 10
# 16 (1.16mm) 50 to 85
# 30 (600micron) 25 to 60
# 50 (300 micron) 10 to 30
# 100 (100 micron) 2 to 10
c) Natural coarse aggregate grading shall be within the following limits, depending upon the
nominal size of the coarse aggregate.
U. S Standard Sieve Nominal 1-1/2 Nominal (19mm)
2 (50.8mm) 100
1-1/2 (25-38mm) 95-100
1 (25mm) 100
(19mm) 35-70 90-100
3/8 (9.5mm) 10-30 20-55
No. 4 (4.75mm) 0-5 0-10
2.5.7 Slump
All the concrete shall have a maximum slump of 102 mm and minimum slump of 75
mm at the time of placing. The water-cement ratio shall be determined by
consideration of the specified strength, the water reducing admixtures, the slump
required for proper placement, air entraining requirements, the available and maximum
allowable aggregate size and its specific gravity the fitness modulus of the fine
aggregate and its specific gravity and the amount of water carried on the aggregates.
The slumps and maximum sizes of aggregate as well as the computation of trail mixes
shall be as described in the American concrete Institute Recommended Practice of
Selecting Proportions for Concrete (ACI 613) The minimum amount of cement per
cubic meter of concrete using 8mm aggregate, shall be 6 bags (300kg) for a concrete
design strength of 210kg/sq. cm. But if 210 kg/cm2 strength of 28 days concrete can
not be achieved with this cement content the more cement shall be used for which the
Contractor will not get nay extra payment. The proportion of all materials in the
concrete shall be subjected to approval by the Owner/Engineer. The Contractor shall
provide all plant and equipment necessary to determine and control the actual
proportion of materials entering the batch.
a) In calculating the total water in any mix. The amount of water carried on the
aggregate shall be included, the water on the aggregate shall be determined
periodically by test and the amount of free water on the aggregate subtracted
from the water added to the mix. In all cases the amount of water to be used
shall be the minimum amount required to produce a plastic mixture of the
strength specified and of the required density, uniformity and workability. The

consistency of any mix shall be that required for the specific placing conditions
and methods of placements.
b) Water used in mixing and curing concrete shall not more than 1,000 parts per
million chlorides no more than 1,3000 parts per million sulfates, shall not have
a turbidity count greater than 2,000 parts per million and shall also be free of
objectionable quantities of oil and organic materials.
2.5.8 Storage of materials
Cement and aggregate shall be stored at the site of the work in such manner as to
payment deterioration or instruction of foreign matter. Special care shall be taken in
storing cement to keep it thoroughly dry at all times.
a) Cement that has become caked in storage in still usable only if, when pressed
between the thumb and fingers, it powders readily. Otherwise, its use will not be
permitted.
b) When reinforcing steel is delivered to the job in advance of the Contractors

requirements, the Contractor shall provide suitable protection in order to prevent
excessive rust developing on the reinforcing steel. It will be Contractors
responsibility to remove excessive rust.
c) Before starting the foundation construction all screened aggregates and sand
shall be collected and stockpiled near site. So that it is free from clay, dust and
other foreign materials.
2.5.9 Concrete mixing
Before any concrete mixing is begun all equipment for mixing, transporting and
placing the concrete shall be cleaned of all dirt and debris. All dirt and debris shall also
be removed from the places to be occupied by the concrete.
a) All mechanical equipment shall be checked before starting a concrete placement

to ascertain whether or not is in good operation condition and not shall be tuned-
up, repaired or replaces to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer.
b) When a foundation location is ready for concrete placement, the Contractor

shall inform Owner/Engineer at least 24 hrs. before concrete placing time so
that Owner/Engineer may inspect to assure that the excavation is free of water,
mud and debris : then the bottom surface of the excavation is a well levelled and
properly compacted crushes stone sub-base; that the reinforcing steel is properly
secured in place; and that the form-work is properly braced.
c) Rock surface shall be as flat as possible and projecting ridges shall be levelled
off before the concrete is placed or space between the ridges shall have been
filled with concrete to form a horizontal surface.
d) The Contractor shall ensure that all materials that are to be embedded in the
concrete have been placed before the concrete is places. The contractor shall be
responsible for the accurate location of all embedded materials. Any work in

accurately or improperly set shall be relocated and rest reset at the Contractors
expense.
e) All batching components of the concrete shall be accurately measured.

Measuring on a weight basis is preferred however measuring on a volume basis
will be allowed as long as careful controls are maintained. Weight
measurements shall be made using standards batching equipment for large
quantities and wheelbarrow scales for small quantities. Volume measurements
shall be made in batching boxes. The batching boxes shall be as large as is
practical.
f) The batch mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the manufacturer

and mixing shall be continued for at least one and one half (1-1/2) minutes after
all materials are in the mixes, unless the size of the batch is over 1.2 cu. M.
when additional mixing time shall be required as advised by the
Owner/Engineer. A mechanically operated batch mixer shall be used for
concrete mixing.
g) The retempering of concrete, which has partially hardened, that ism remixing
with or without additional cement, aggregate or water, will not be permitted.
h) Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit within
30 minutes by methods which will prevent the segregation or loss of the
materials. After 30 minutes of mixing the mixed concrete shall be rejected and
replaced by fresh concrete at contractors own expense.
i) Equipments for chuting, pumping and pneumatically conveying concrete shall

be of such size and design as to insured a practically continuous flow of
concrete at the delivery end without separation of the materials. The chutes shall
never be on a slope that is steeper than two vertical to three horizontal.
Conveying equipment shall not any aluminium parts that come in contact with
the concrete.
j) When the Concrete is to be placed on hard rock or other concrete, after the
existing surface has been properly cleaned and otherwise prepared the existing
surface is to be wetted until it is saturated. The first batch of concrete places
shall be as required. The grout shall be evenly spread on the water-saturated
surface and then normal concrete shall be deposited continuously and as rapidly
as practicable.
k) The concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times
plastic and flows readily into the spaces between the bars and so that each layer
properly mixes with its predecessor. Successive layers shall be places within 15
minutes of the proceeding layer.
l) When placing concrete with free drops over 2 meters, sufficient numbers of
hoppers and trunk must be provided of a size to allow for proper placing. The
trunk sections shall reach within 500mm of the bottom of the placement.
m) The concrete shall be consolidated during and after depositing by vibration, the
concrete shall be thoroughly worked around reinforcement and embedded items
and into corners of forms.

n) All concrete must be consolidated by means of internal vibration expect where

the Owner/Engineer has given written permission to use some other method of
consolidation. The type and make of vibrator must have a speed of at least 6000
vibrations per minute (VPM) when the machine is being supplied, furnish
efficient transformers, compressors, etc. of approved type to operate all
vibrators at the voltage, pressure etc. specified by the manufacture.
o) The Contractor shall always have at least two vibrators in operating condition at
the location of the concrete placement.
p) Vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete inside the forms.
2.5.10 The Contractors shall make at least one set of concrete compressive strength test
cylinders each day or for each 100 cubic meters of concrete, or as directed by the
Owner/Engineer. There shall be three cylinders to a set and the cylinders shall be made
in accordance with ASTM C31. Only one cylinder shall be made from any batch
containing less than cubic meters of concrete.
a) The Contractors shall delivery cylinders to a location designated by the

Owner/Engineer where they will be tested in accordance with ASTM C39. Two
of the cylinder will be tested at 28 days. If the 28-days test cylinder shall be
discarded. If the 28 days tests indicated a compressive strength of less than 210
kg/sq.cm. the remaining cylinder will be tested at 90 days. The cost of the tests
will be borne by the Contractor.
b) If the 90 days compressive strength indicates a compressive strength of less than

210kg/sq.cm. the Owner/Engineer will determine what remedial measures are
necessary and the Contractors shall perform the remedial measures at his own
expenses. The remedial measurements may include, but are not limited to, the
replacement of the entire foundation; The Contractor shall also pay for any
additional concrete tests including core drilling and the repairs or replacements
which may result from same, which the Owner/Engineer deems necessary
strength.
2.5.11 Concrete formwork
Forms shall be used, wherever necessary to confine the concrete for structures and
shape it to the required lines. OR to insure contamination of the concrete by materials
caving or sloughing from adjacent surfaces lest by excavation.
a) Forms shall be provided with tie rods and clamps to have sufficient strength to
withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the concrete
and shall be maintained rigidly in position. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to
prevent loss of mortar from the concrete. Moulding strips shall be places in the
corners of forms so as to produce chamfered edges on permanently exposed
concrete surfaces. All exposed surfaces shall be formed with plywood or steel
sheathing. Unexposed surfaces may be formed with any materials of adequate
strength and tightness to hold the plastic concrete in proper position and prevent
the loss of mortar.
b) If plywood or steel forms are not available, the Contractor may substitute wood
planking provided exposed surfaces are remove to remove ridges.

c) Before concrete is places, the surfaces of all forms shall be coated with a form
oil that effectively prevents sticking and will not stain the concrete surfaces. For
steel forms, form oil shall consist of refined mineral oil. For steel forms, form
oil consist or refined mineral oil. For steel forms, from oil shall consist of
refined mineral oil compound.
d) Forms shall be removed only after 48 hours of concreting or when the strength
of the concrete is such that form removal will not result in cracking, spalling, or
breaking of edges of surfaces, or other damage to the concrete. Any concrete
damages by forms shall be repaired immediately.
2.5.12 Concrete finishing and curing
a) The expose top surface of all concrete foundation piers shall be wood floated
and steel trowel and shall be slightly sloped to prevent the accumulation of
water.
b) Immediately after the removal of forms, the holes left by form tie rod fastener
shall be filled with mortar and all damaged or defective concrete shall be
repaired or removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer.
Improperly consolidated concrete shall be removed by chipping and the clipped
openings or recesses shall be of such depth and shape are required to insure that
the patching materials placed in the openings or recesses will be thoroughly
keyed and bonded to the concrete. Dry pack mortar shall be used for filling
relatively deep chipped recesses with small surface dimensions. Concrete will
be required for the replacement of defective concrete where surface dimension
of the shipped openings or recesses are relatively large. The depth of chipped
recesses for concrete patches shall extend at least 25 mm beyond the nearest
reinforcing steel.
c) To insure proper curing, all concrete shall be kept moist for a period of a least
ten (10) days. Burlap or equivalent materials or a curing compound shall be
applied over exposed concrete surfaces; the burlap shall be kept moist at all
times.
2.5.13 Membrane curing compound
Membrane curing compound shall be applied uniformly by spray, leaving no pinholes

or gaps, at a rate not to exceed 4.91 square meters per litre. The curing compound shall
be applied after finishing operations are completed and surface moisture has
disappeared. If forms are removed prior to 7 days placing the concrete, the uncovered
surfaces shall be coated with the curing compound as specified herein.
a) Foundations shall not be backfilled before they have been inspected by

Owner/Engineer to see that they are free from surface defects and voids, or that
the defects and voids have been properly repaired,
b) The foundations shall not be subjected to any loads in addition to those existing
at the time of placing of the foundation concrete until the curing period has
elapsed.
c)

2.5.14 Payment
No separate or direct payment will be made to the Contractor for concrete. All costs
incurred in connection therewith shall be included in the lump sum bid price for the
construction of the various foundation types and trenches.
2.5.15 Torsteel reinforcing bar
All torsteel reinforcing bar shall conform to the requirement of BS 1144 or equivalent
and shall fabricated in accordance with the Manual of Standard Practice of the
concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
a) Mill scale rust, oil and mud shall be removed from reinforcing steel by firm
rubbing with burlap or equivalent treatment before the reinforcing steel is
placed.
b) The minimum center-to-center distance between parallel bars shall be two and
one-half (2-1/2) times the diameter of the bars. In no case shall be clear spacing
between bars be less than 25 mm not less than one -one third (1-1/3) times the
nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate.
c) All reinforcing steel shall have a protective concrete cover of not less than:
1) 80mm - on the bottom of footing and on any surface of concrete

that will be exposed to salt water.
2) 50mm - concrete exposed to weather or ground
d) Reinforcing steel hall be accurately located and shall be secured in position by

the use of annealed iron, no less than No. 16 gauge and shall be supported in a
manner that will keep the reinforcement away from the exposed concrete
surfaces. Concrete blocks shall be used to support the reinforcing steel in the
foundation mat: broken stones or wooden blocks shall not be used to supporting
the reinforcing steel.
No separate or direct payment will be made to the Contractor for concrete

Reinforcement Steel. All costs incurred in connection therewith shall be included in
the lump sum bid price for the construction of the various foundation types.
2.5.16 Grouting
Grouting for seating structural steel members and equipment on foundations shall be
non-shrink (not-setting) Portland cement mortal grout or a suitable commercially
available grout, at the Contractors option. Grouting shall be done under pressure by
means of an expanding agent or by means of static head. Propositioning and missing of
grout shall conform to the following:
a) Mortal grout containing aluminum powder as an expansive agent mixture of 1

part cement and 2 parts sand, by weight, with a water cement ratio not
exceeding 0.55. The quantity of aluminum powder used shall be approximately
0.005 percent of the weight of cement, the actual quantity to be determined from
tests with materials to be used, and at the temperature and under the conditions

of a placement. Aluminium powder shall be blended with cement in proportions

of one part powder 10-50 parts cement, by weight and the blend shall be
sprinkled over the dry batch. After all ingredients are added, the batch shall be
missed 3 minutes. Grout, which has not been placed within 45 minutes, shall be
wasted.
b) In lieu of use of an expensive agent. Settlement shall be reduced by extending

the missing period or by delaying final mixture to minimize the interval between
time to placement and initial set and placement the under static header pressure.
The motor grout shall be mixture of one part cement and 2.5 parts sand, with a
water cement ratio of approximately 0.50. Slump shall be the minimum
necessary to enable placement.
No separate or direct payment will be made to the Contractor for Grouting. All costs
incurred in connection therewith shall be included in the lump sum bid price for the
construction of the various foundation types.
2.5.17 Payment
Payment for the contract item, Concrete foundation, will be made at the unit price per
foundation type bid in the Schedule, which unit price shall include full compensation
for all costs incurred in furnishing all materials, equipment and labor and all costs
incurred in furnishing all materials, equipment and labor and all other operations
related to concrete Foundation design and construction, including but not limited to:
a) Performing detail foundation design and preparation of construction drawings

including bar-bending schedule.
b) Supplying and transporting
c) Excavation, dewatering, providing 10cm thick soiling layer as under Article

2.4.6 of this section, providing 5cm thick (1:3:6) lean concrete layer and back
filling for the foundations.
d) Constructing the foundation including form work setting, reinforcement bar

cutting bending and fixing.
e) Grouting for base plates
f) Concrete testing

3. BUILDING WORKS
3.1 General
This specification is intended to cover the complete provision and erection of control
building and furnishing if the indoor facilities for the project include all design,
supervision, materials, equipment, labor and services necessary for or incidental to the
construction of control building.
3.2 Scope of work
3.2.1 The Contractor shall perform the design, construction works, furnishing and
delivering of the equipment, materials and all accessories for the control building as
listed below:
a) Excavation and Backfilling
b) Concrete Work
c) Flooring
d) Stone Masonry work
e) Plaster and Punning Work
f) Glass and Glazing
g) Doors and Windows with iron grills
h) Water Proofing
i) Painting
j) Plumbing, Drainage and Sanitary fitting
k) Cable Trench
l) Ventilation and Fan
m) Fire fighting
n) Ileat Insulation
3.2.2 All the works for the control building shall be subject to approval of Owner/Engineer.
Owner /Engineer shall have the right to required the Contractor to make any changes
on designs, construction works, materials and equipment to make the structures
conform to the specification without any additional cost.
3.2.3 The Contractor shall prepare the design drawings including all facilities based on the
attached conceptual drawings and submit the design drawings to Owner/Engineer for
approval.
3.2.4 Bearing Loads

The Contractor shall used an allowable soil bearing pressure of 1.0kg/cm2 for the
design of foundation for bidding purpose. But this is only reference value. After award
of contract, the Contract shall carry out details soil test and detail design of foundation
shall based on the soil test result. There may be variation in the volume of work in
final design compared to the bidding for which the contractor will not get any extra
payment.
3.2.5 The design live load for all floor slab not be less than 600/kg/m2 and 100kg/m2 for
roof slab.
3.3 Codes and standards
The latest editions of Codes, Specification and Standards listed below, but referred to
thereafter by basis designation only from a part of this Specification to the extent
indicated by the references thereof.
In the event of conflicts or discrepancies between this specification and the referenced
codes, Specification or Standards, the more stringent applicable requirement shall
govern.
a) American National Standard Institute (ANSI) Standards
b) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards
c) American Concrete Institute
d) Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
e) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications
f) Federal Specification
g) Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Publication
It is the intent of this specification to establish acceptable standards or quality and

performance. Minor deviations in details due to manufacturers standards shop
process will be considered for acceptance provided that, in the opinion of the
Owner/Engineer, the proposed substitutions are equal in quality and performance to
the specified materials. All deviations shall be called out in writing in the proposal and
shall be specially indicated on the shop drawings. The Contractor will not get any
extra payment for increase/decrease of work volume due to such deviations.
3.4 Excavation and Backfilling
The detail Specification for the excavation and backfilling work shall be as per Article
2.4 of Section VI.
3.5 Concrete Work
The detail Specification for the concrete work shall be as per Article 2.5 of Section
VI.

Concreting in control building shall be done in foundation, tie beams, floor slab, steps,
column, beam and roof slab as per approved drawings.
3.6 Flooring
3.6.1 Scope of Work
Perform all flooring work required as per drawings and as specified herein.
3.6.2 Reference
All work and materials shall be in accordance with American Standards, ASTM, or
equivalent.
3.6.3 Materials
a) Sand shall be coarse, clean sharp sand, free from clay, loan or other impurities.
Sand shall be uniformly graded from coarse to fine and shall conform ASTM or
equivalent.
b) Portland Cement
Portland cement shall be as per STM (150 TYPE) or equivalent. Only one brand
of cement shall be used in the work.
c) Gravel
Gravel shall be well graded hard, fresh and conform to ASTM or equivalent.
d) Water
Water shall be clean fresh and free from injurious amount of oils, acids, alkalis
and organic matter.
3.6.4 Construction
a) Preparation of earth
The earth is properly rammed and levelled by rammer, before gravel soiling
water is sprinkled during ramming
b) Gravel Soiling
Above the rammed earth well graded gravel is laid and coarse sand is spreaded
over the gravel bed. Water is sprinkled and compaction is done properly. The
top surface is properly levelled and compacted before concrete laying.
c) Concrete laying
Concrete work shall be one as specified under article 2.6 in Section VII.
The flooring shall consist of (for each square meter)

- Concrete mix: 300kg/m3 thickness 0.15m with 2% water proofing

compound.
- Steel bar 8kg
- Gravelled layer 0.1 thick
3.6.5 Tiles
Terrazzo tiles shall be installed in control room, 11kV switchgear room, toilet and
battery room. Terrazzo tiles shall be precast tiles with an average weight of 5.6 kg.
The tiles shall be 30 cm x 30 cm and wall base units of grade 1 according to American
Standard or equivalent.
High-density ceramic tiles shall be placed on the walls of battery room and bathroom
up to a height of 1.75 m from the floor.
3.7 Stone Masonry Work
3.7.1 Materials
a) Stone units shall be sound, free from defects that would impair its strength or
affects its service ability.
b) Cement shall be ordinary Portland as per ASTM C150 Type 1 or equivalent.
c) Sand shall be clean, fine, sharp granules, free from foreign or deleterious matter.
d) Water shall be clean and free from acid, alkalis, oil or organic matter.
The Contractor should submit samples or cement sand and lime for Owner/Engineers
approval.
3.7.2 Mortar Mixture
The type of mortar mixture for stone masonry shall be 1 part, P.C: 5 part sand
3.7.3 Stone masonry laying

a) Lay stone masonry in accurately spaced courses, level, plumb and true to line.
b) Soak stone units in clean water for one hour before laying. Units shall be
damped when laid.
c) Lay stone in running bond with joints approximately 10mm wide.
d) When stone masonry wall cross the recessed floor cable trenches provide and
install cast-in-situ concrete Lintels of sufficient size and strength to support and
carry masonry walls across the trench sprays.
e) Reinforced all masonry walls with cast-in-situ reinforced concrete formed flush
with the masonry surfaces for cement plaster-finish.
f) Provide concrete pilasters and horizontal tie for every 9 square meters of
masonry wall surface, plus at all corners and door jambs.

g) Size of wall
1) The entire peripheral wall shall be constructed in 360 mm thickness.
2) The entire partition wall shall be constructed in 240mm and 110mm
thickness. But the latter one shall be constructed at less than 3.0m span
only.
3.7.4 Curing
Spray masonry surfaces with water twice daily for a period 10 days, or until the
surface receives a plaster finish.
3.7.5 Protection
Where exposed to weather, protect top of masonry with water tied materials in such a
way that it will protect the completed work. Masonry wall shall set for 48 hours before
any load is applied on the completed work.
3.8 Plaster and Punning Work
Plaster
3.8.1.1 Materials
Shall conform to the respective Specifications and other requirements specified below:
a) Sand:
Sand shall be coarse, clean sharp sand, free from clay, loam or other impurities.
Sand shall be uniformly graded from coarse to fine.
b) Portland Cement
Portland cement shall be as per ASTM C 150 Type 1 or equivalent. Only one
brand of cement shall be used in the work.
c) Water shall be clean, fresh and free from injurious amount of oils, acids, alkalis
and organic matter.
3.8.1.2 Construction
a) Thickness of plaster
Thickness of plaster from the face of the plaster base to the finish plaster surface
shall be 2.0 cm.
b) Preparation of plastering
Concrete surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and free of paint, efflorescence,

oil, grease, acids, and other loose or foreign matter prior to application of base
coats.
No plaster work shall be applied on masonry work less than 2 weeks old.

c) Mixing of plaster
Plaster shall be mixed in mechanical mixers where hand mixing is approved for
small quantities. Caked or lamped materials shall not be used. Each batch shall
be proportioned by volume, accurately measured by manual or mechanical
devices, and thoroughly mixed with the minimum amount of water unit uniform
in colour and consistency. Retempering will not be permitted and plaster that
has begun to stiffen shall be discarded. Mortal 90 minutes after mixing shall be
rejected for the plastering work.
d) Proportions
These are differenced into 2 TYPES:
1) 1PC: 3 SAND
2) 1 PC: 4 Sand
Type (1) is to be used on all external walls, ceiling and floors.
Type (2) is to be used everywhere else.
All concrete works and inside and outside walls shall be plastered.
e) Plastering
Plaster shall be done in two coating, both shall be proportioned as mentioned in

(Article D) above but sand to be used in the finish coating shall be of the finest
grade.
The first coating shall be applied with a spatter-dash, which is to be done by

forcibly throwing the wet mix on the surface and making no attempt to level it.
The second coating will be applied after the first coating has hardened.
After this, a wet soaked sponge shall be rubbed on the finish surface.
3.9 Door and Window
3.9.1 The contractor shall furnished and install doors and windows. The Contractor shall
prepare and submit drawings of doors and windows to Owner/Engineer for approval,
prior to the execution of the erection work floor level.
Wooden doors and Windows
Timber shall be the Sal wood. The timber shall be of the best quantity well seasoned
and free from sap, knots, wraps, cracks and other defects. All wood work shall be
planes and neatly and truly finished to the exact dimensions. All joints shall be neat
and strong truly and accurately fitted and glued before being fitted together.
3.9.2 Carpentry
3.9.2.1 Materials

Lumber shall be subjected to Owners/Engineers approval
a) Sal wood
1) Sized and Pattern
Lumber shall be surfaced four sides, and worked according to patterns

as are indicated or specified on the drawings. Expose members for
transparent finish shall be attached for compatibility of grain and color
between adjoining members; for paint finish, is not required. The size
of frame of panel shall not be less than 40mm x 100mm and the size of
frame of shall not be less than 75mm x 120 mm unless mentioned
specifically otherwise.
2) Moisture Content
At the time of delivery, the moisture content shall not be exceed 15%
for material of 2.5 cm or less in thickness, and shall not exceed 19% for
material over 2.5 cm in thickness.
b) Teak Plywood
All interior plywood for transparent finish shall be of equal and uniform of color
and graining, such as for door panels. Hardwood plywood shall be of premium
grade. Plywood for paint finish matching for compatibility is not required
c) Veneers
Veneers on wood doors, panels and other exposed wood work shall be 4 mm
thick.
d) Fasteners
Only galvanized fasteners will be used.
e) Glue
Fully waterproof throughout, such as herein or equal.
f) Putty
Shall conform to American Standards or equivalent.
3.9.2.2 Construction
a) Fastening for exposed members
Other than two positioning nails per sub-assembly of plywood no exposed nails
shall be used. All exposed members are to glue using either pressure of electric
wood welder. All traces of access glue shall be removed. Top shall be fastened
to sub-or web frames with concealed clips, screws, glue blocks or similar bidden
fastenings. Exposed ends shall be lock mitered and glued to face plates.

b) Edge Treatment
Visible edge shall be banded with lumber edging, glued under [pressure with no
nails allowed. Species shall match the face veneers of plywood, but may be of
any species on particleboard.
c) Size of door
Unless and otherwise specified, the size of door panel shall not be less than 1.0
x 2.30m ( w x h).
3.9.2.3 Hardware
Hardwares such as hinges, cylinder locks, handles and door closers shall be stainless
steel of excellent quality. Samples of hardwares shall be submitted to
Owner/Engineer for approval. Cylinder locks and door closers shall be installed with
the doors and windows according to the instructions of Owner/Engineer. Master key
for all locks shall be provided.
3.10 Water Proofing
This section covers all the construction work for disposing the rain water from the
roof. To dispose rain water from roof there will be 10cm average thickness of 1:2:5
concrete for the slope of roof. A layer of tarflet shall be provided as vapour barrier
course between RCC slab and slop concrete. At top of slope concrete (After hear
insulation layer) the waterproofing layer shall be self-adhesive bitumen/polyethylene
(tarfelt) membrane of thickness about 1.5-2.0 mm capable of bridging any shrinkage
cracks in concrete.
The area to be applied must be dry and swept free from dust.
Prime all surfaces with primer and apply the membrane when the primer is tacky. All
lap joints must have an overlap of 75mm rolled firmly against each other. The
membrane has to turn up to the roof parapet, counter flashed by a metal sheet all in
accordance to drawings and manufactures instructions.
The type and made of the membrane must first be submitted for approval by the
Owner/Engineer.
a) A layer of 30mm round stone chipping of 2-5 mm size shall be provided with
bituminous bonding, to achieve water proofing.
b) 100mm dia. G.I rain water down spout pipe shall be installed at least 4 corners
of roof and it shall be connected to the manhole (40 x 40 x 60 cm) at bottom,
from each of the manhole 100 mm. of polyethylene pipe shall be used to
connect to the switchyard drainage line.
3.11 Heat Insulation
The section covers the treatment of heat insulation at roof.

Heat insulation layer shall be 33 mm thick expanded polystyrene sheets which shall be
installed above slop concrete layer with hot bitumen setting bed.
3.12 Plumbing, Drainage and Sanitary Fittings
3.12.1 General
The Contractors shall furnish, install and test the complete indoor Potable Water
service Water, Plumbing, Storm Drainage and Sanitary Sewer Systems. The pipe line
outside the Owners premises shall be the responsibility of the Owner.
All necessary incidentals such as sanitary fittings wash bowl water closet, equipment
supports, flushing system, excavation and backfill, the Contractor shall supply
disposal of surplus dirt and rubbish.
The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory functioning installations. All items of labor,
material or equipment not pacifically mentioned herein, but incidental to require for a
complete installation and proper operation of the above mentioned systems, shall be
included.
The Contractor shall furnish and install 1.0 cubic meter capacity PVC water tank on
roof and suitable pump to pump the water from an underground water storage tank
comprising of a similar 2 cu.m PVC tank to be installed underground by the
Contractor.
3.12.2 Standards
The work shall be carried out in accordance with Codes National Plumbing code. S.
U. Department of commerce, unless otherwise indicated.
3.12.3 Workmanship
The installation shall be made in neat, orderly and workmanship manner, conforming
in every way to the accepted standards of the best commercial practice.
3.12.4 Design Requirements
The plumbing and drainage of all the buildings shall be as per the National Standard
Plumbing code.
For the potable and service water supply to the building and over storage tank of 1
cubic m storage capacity will have to be provided by the Contractor. The tank will be
mounted on the roof. The water distribution inside the building will be taken from this
overhead tank.
The design of the plumbing system shall be developed by the Contractor. Floor drains,
drain form washbasin and drain from the equipment shall be run separately from
sanitary sewer and connected to the outdoor switchyard water drainage system.
Sanitary sewer drain from the building will be connected to the septic tank (1.0m x
2.5m x 1.5m) and out let from septic tank connected to the soak pit (1.0 m dia. And

3.0m deep). Overflow from the soak pit shall be connected to the switchyard drainage
system.
a) Septic tank shall be constructed in double compartment in 240 mm thick stone

masonry wall with 1:4 cement concrete 1:2:4 in 20mm thickness. The septic
tank shall be provided with removable RCC slab cover.
b) Soak pit shall be constructed in honey-combed stone wall of 240 mm thick with
1:4 cement sand mortar.
c) Sewage pipe shall be heavy quality cast iron and not less than 100 mm dia. In
size.
d) Drain pipe to connect drainage system form soak pit shall be used of 100mm
dia. Of polyethylene pipe of heavy quality.
e) The entire water supply pipe shall be heavy quality of galvanized steel pipe
required size.
3.13 Cable Trench
3.13.1 The details design of the cable trench shall be responsibility of the Contractor. All
designs and details shall be subjected to approval of the Owner/Engineer.
3.13.2 Type of Cable Trench
3.13.3 Type of cable trench
Cable trench shall be reinforced concrete trench with one or more layer of hot dip
galvanized light gauge shape steel tray. The cover of trench shall be min. 6mm thick
chequered plate with steel frame and shall be galvanized.
3.14 Paint
3.14.1 General
All surfaces shall be painted except the following:
a) Exterior
Roofing, paving, concrete, nonferrous metals, glass, pre finished items.
b) Interior:
Glass, ore-finished surface, nonferrous metals, stainless steel, attic surfaces.
3.14.2 Materials
A list of the painting materials and their color which are to apply the specified
surfaces shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer for approval.
3.14.3 Paint Application

The finished surface shall be free form runs, drops, ridges, waves, pales, brush marks,
and variations in color, texture and finish. The hiding shall be complete and coat shall
be so applied as to produce film of uniform thickness. Special attention shall be given
to insure that all surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, wells and rivets receive a
film thickness equivalent to that of adjacent painted surfaces.
Adjacent areas and installations shall be protected by the use of drops cloths or other
approved precautionary measures.
Metal or wood surface adjacent to surface to receive water-thinned paints shall be

primed and/or touched up prior to the application of water-thinned paints. The first
coat on plaster shall include such repeated touching up of suction spots or overall
applications of primer sealer as necessary to produce a uniform color and gloss. The
first coat on both faces of wood doors shall be applied at essentially the same time.
a) Coating Progress
Sufficient time shall elapse between successive coats to permit proper drying. This
period shall be modified as necessary to suit adverse weather conditions.
Oil base or olcoresinous solvent type paints shall be considered dry for recoating
when the paints feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of
the thumb, and the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or less of
adhesion of the undercoat.
Coating shall be as follows:
1) All interior and exterior plastered surfaces:
- First coat: 1 coat of Alkali Resistance Primer
- Second Coat: 2 coat of weather shield Exterior wall finish in water

[roof snow cem paint.
2) Gloss finish work:
- First Coat: 1 coat of Wood Primer
- Second coat: 2 coat of synthetic super gloss
3) Interior transparent finish wood:
- First Coat: 1 coat of Wood Primer
- Second coat: 2 coat of Teal oil.
4) Metal surface:
- First Coat: 1 coat of Metal Primer Chromate
- Second coat: 2 coats of Aluminum Paint
b) Storage, mining and thinning

At time of application, paint shall show no signs of hard setting, excessive skinning,
levering or other deterioration. Paint shall be thoroughly stirred, strained and kept at a
uniform consistency during applications.
Where necessary to suit conditions of surface, temperature weather, and method of

application, package pint may be thinned immediately prior to application in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions, but not excess of 0.5 liter of suitable
thinner per 4 liter. The use of thinner for any reason shall not relieve Contractor from
obtaining complete hiding.
Samples shall be clearly identified by designated name, specification number batch

number, project contract number, intended use, and quantity involved. At the
discretion of the Owner/Engineer samples may be tested before approval, or materials
may be approved for use based on the test reports furnished. In the later case the
samples will be retained by the Owner/Engineer for possible future testing should the
materials appear to be defective during or after application.
3.15 Glass and Glazing
a) Sheet glass to be used for door and windows shall be 6 mm thick, tinted glass
except as otherwise specified. IT shall be of the best quality, free of unevenness,
stain or bubbles, and material appears to be defective during or after application.
b) Glazing compounds shall be of suitable type approved for the application.
The use of no-skimming compounds, non-resilient type of performed sealers,

and performed impregnated type gasket will not be permitted. Metals sash putty
will not be permitted.
c) Channel glazing compound shall be equal in performance to, but not limited to
the following.
1) Non-drying, knife grade polybutene sealant.
2) One-part acrylic terpolymer sealant.
d) Shop painted items
Surfaces of fabricated and assembled items that are finish painted by the
manufacture or specified to finish painted under other sections of the
Specification are exempted from the following schedule requirements for
surface preparation and painting shop primed items shall receive surface
preparation and finish painting as required by the section.
e) Colors and tints, including shades of stain, shall match the respective color
specimens selected by the Owner/Engineer.
Stains shall conform in shade to manufactures standard color. Undercoat shall

vary slightly from the color of the next coat.
f) Surface preparation and pretreatment

Cleaning and pretreatment of surface prior to painting shall be accomplished in

accordance with the detailed requirements specified.
g) Cleaning
Clots and cotton waste that might constitute of fire hazard shall be placed in closed
metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day. Upon completion of the work,
staging, scaffolding and containers shall be removed from the site or destroyed in as
approved manner.
3.16 Ventilation and Fans
Rooms shall be provided with ceiling fans and suitable exhaust fans shall be installed
din the battery room and toilet.
3.17 Fire Fighting System
3.17.1 The Contractor shall supply and install all fire fighting system for control building and
switchyard.
3.17.2 The contractor shall supply two sets of portable type of 10 1b CO2 fire extinguishers
for control rooms/switchgear room and one (1) set of wheeled cart type shall be
provided with the fire extinguisher. The extinguisher shall be especially suitable to
rooms with electrical equipment.
3.18 Payment
The payment to the Control Building shall be made per unit basis as per the Price
Schedule.

5Sec.VI e. :-INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The whole of the Works supplied under the Contract shall be subject to inspections
and tests by the Employer or their Representatives during manufacture, erection
and after completion. The inspections and tests shall include, but not be limited to,
the requirements of this section of the Specifications.
The Contractor shall provide all costs, appliances, apparatus, supervision, labor
and services necessary to carry out all tests, unless specifically stated otherwise.
The Contractor shall furnish the detailed schedule of his commissioning plan at
least one month prior to the scheduled date. The schedule shall include the
commissioning procedures, testing sequences and details of special testing
equipment, tests and commissioning record formats, information about relevant
standards etc.
The scope of the commissioning program includes the site testing and putting
into successful operation of all the equipment supplied under the Contract, for
33kV, 11kV, AC & DC plants and all secondary voltages systems. Testing of
energy meters and certification of their accuracy shall also be included.
1.2 OBJECTIVES
The objectives of commissioning work, prior to the successful energization of

Plant at full voltage and connection to the system, are the following:
- Confirm the integrity (correctness) of installation.

- Confirm the integrity of insulation, connections and phasing.
- Ensure proof of equipment characteristics.
- Review workmanship.
- Confirm the correct implementation of the design.
- Check equipment ratings.
- Check settings and operation of protective relays.
- Check and measure resistivity of earthing grid and earthing system.
- Confirm the proper functioning of SCADA system.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE, INSPECTION AND TESTING
To assure that the supply and services under the scope of this Contract whether
manufactured or performed within the Contractors works or at his subcontractors
premises or at the Site or at any other place of work, are in accordance with the
Specifications, the Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance program to
control such activities at all points necessary. Such program shall be outlined by
the Contractor and shall be finally accepted by the Employer after discussions
before the award of the Contract. A quality assurance program of the Contractor
shall generally cover, but not be limited to the following:

(a) His organization structure for the management and implementation of the
proposed quality assurance program.
(b) Documentation control system.
(c) Qualification data for bidders key personnel.
(d) The procedure for purchases of materials, parts, components, and selection of
sub-contractors services including vendor analysis, source inspection,
incoming raw materials inspection, and verification of materials purchases.
(e) System for shop manufacturing including process controls and fabrication
and assembly controls.
(f) Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective actions.
(g) Control of calibration and testing of measuring and testing equipment.
(h) Inspection and test procedure for manufacture.
(i) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status.
(j) System for quality audits.
(k) System for authorizing release of manufactured products to the Employer.
(l) System for maintenance of records.
(m) System for handling storage and delivery.
(n) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control procedure adopting
for controlling the quality characteristics relevant to each item of supply.
The quality plan shall be mutually discussed and approved by the Employer after
incorporating necessary corrections by the Contractor as may be required.
- Quality Assurance Documents
The Contractor shall be required to submit all the Quality Assurance Documents as
stipulated in the Quality Plan at the time of Employers inspection of
material/equipment.
The Employer, through his duly authorized representatives, reserves the right to
carry out Quality Audit and Quality Surveillance of the systems and the
procedures of the Contractors and the subcontractors Quality Management and
Control Activities.
- Inspection, Testing and Inspection Certificates
The provisions of the clauses on Test and Inspection of the General Conditions of
Contract and Special Conditions of Contract shall be applicable to the supply
and erection portions of the Works. The Employer shall have the right to re-
inspect at his expenses, any material though it would have been previously
inspected and approved by him at the Contractors works before, and if, after
the same are inspected at Site following the latter, material is found defective,
then the Contractor shall bear the cost of this inspection and reinstatement
according to specification.

1.4 TESTS AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS
1.4.1 General
Where no specific test is specified, then the various items of materials and
equipment shall be tested in accordance with the relevant British, IEC, or
American Standards. Where no appropriate standard is available, tests shall be
carried out in accordance with the maker's standard practice, which shall be subject
to the Employers approval.
At least fourteen days prior notice, in writing or by tele-fax, shall be given to the
Employer of the readiness of the plant for test or inspection and every facility shall
be provided by the Contractor and sub-Contractor (s) to enable the Employer or
their Representative to carry out the inspections and witness the tests. This
includes progress, test rig and packing inspections also.
Inspection of equipment will not be carried out unless the Employer has approved
copies of the relevant sub-orders, drawings and test procedures. No equipment
shall be packed, prepared for shipment, or dismantled for the purpose of packing
for shipment, unless it has been satisfactorily inspected, or inspection has been
waived by the Employer.
Functional electrical and mechanical tests shall be carried out on the completed
plant after assembly in the Works. The extent and method of recording the results
shall be agreed by the Employer in sufficient time to enable the tests to be
satisfactorily witnessed or to make any changes to the proposed program of tests.
All instruments and apparatus used in the performance of the tests shall be subject
to the approval of the Employer and, if required by the Employer, shall be
calibrated to an agreed standard at a laboratory of national standing to be
nominated by the Contractor and approved by the Employer. The costs of carrying
out such calibration shall be borne by the Contractor in all cases.
The costs of making/performing any test shall be borne by the Contractor. This
shall apply to tests performed at the site or elsewhere.
After receiving the prior information about the completion of manufacturing at the
factory, the Employer will depute his personnel to the Contractors factory to
witness the fabrication, assembly and testing of any or all parts of major
equipment. The number of the Employer's personnel and equipment to be
witnessed will be as listed below. The duration of such visits shall be as per
inspection/testing requirements.
a.33/11kV Substation
- 12 kV Switchgear 1 person, 1 visit
-33 kV Circuit Breaker 2 person, 1 visit
-Power transformer 2 persons, 1 visit
-Control & Relay Panel 2 persons, 1 visit
-Battery and Battery Charger 2 persons, 1 visit
-Disconnecting Switch & LA 1 person, 1 visit
-Instrument transformers 2 persons, 1 visit

b.Transmission Line, Distribution Line, Distribution Transformer

-XLPE Power Cable 1 person, 1 visit
-ACSR Conductor 1 person, 1 visit
-ABC Cable/Cover Conductor 2 persons, 1 visit
-Hardware for ABC cable 1 person, 1 visit
-PSC pole 1 person, 1 visit
-Tubular pole 1 person, 1 visit
-Telescopic pole 1 person, 1 visit
-Insulator ,Hardware 1 person, 1 visit
-DO, LA, Fuselink 1 person, 1 visit
-MCCB with Box 1 person, 1 visit
-Chanel, Angle, stay set 1 person, 1 visit
-Distribution Transformer 2 Persons, 1 visit
1.4.2 Test Certificates
Within 30 days of the completion of any test, triplicate sets of all principal test
records, test certificates and performance curves shall be supplied to the Employer.
These test records, certificates and performance curves shall be supplied for all
tests, whether or not they have been witnessed by the Employer or his
representative. The information given on such test certificates and curves shall be
sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the certificate refers and
should also bear the Contract reference title. Specified requirements shall be
shown on each certificate for comparison with actual test results.
When all equipment has been tested, test certificates of all factory and site tests
shall be compiled by the Contractor into volumes and bound in an approved
form complete with index. Two copies of each volume shall be supplied to the
Consultant and five copies to the Employer.
1.4.3 Type Tests
Type tests are required to prove the general design of the equipment and the
Contractor may submit certificates of such design tests, which have been carried
out on identical equipment. Notwithstanding any provision in BS, IEC or ANSI
Standards, the Employer shall have the right to accept such certificates in lieu of
the specified type tests or to reject them.
The type tests prescribed shall be carried out at the Contractor's cost in all cases,
where either such certificates are not available or are rejected by the Employer.
1.5 RESPONSIBILITIES
To ensure that the test jurisdiction and transfer of responsibilities is regulated by

strict safety and handover procedures, the Contractor agrees the interface with
the Employer to establish and implement handover procedures consistent with
the terms of these Specifications.

The Employer shall retain full jurisdiction over all commissioning activities,
which may affect the operation of the existing system. In these circumstances
and when so requested, shall provide technical advices and assistances.
The Contractor shall be responsible for technical guidance and assistance in

establishing the scope and method of tests, witnessing of the testing, assessment
of results, and re-negotiation of the changes in test schedules which may be
necessary as a result of other circumstances, such as delays in the delivery,
possible equipment failures.
1.6 SAFETY PROCEDURES
The Contractor shall share the responsibility for safety procedures with the
Employer. The Contractor shall establish and implement a work permit and
tagging system and associated safety procedures (subject to the review of
Employer) for all equipment, systems and areas not covered by the Employers
safety procedures.
The Employer will assume responsibility for the establishment and

implementation of tagging, safety and work permit procedures for the protection
of personnel and equipment, as soon as equipment and systems are connected to
or are energizeable from the existing system.
1.7 TRAINING OF THE EMPLOYER'S STAFF
The Contractor shall plan for the Employers staffs participation, either
continuously or on a regularly recurring basis, in the commissioning work and:
Allow the Employers staffs to become familiar with the operating and
maintenance aspects of the new equipment supplied by him,
Maintain a continuing assessment with the Employer of the precautions required

in or possible consequences of, initial energization of equipment, Allow for the
above two necessary objectives in the preparation of schedules.
The Contractor shall station at site, at least, one technical expert for a minimum
of six months continuously after commissioning to rectify any problems, as well
as train the Employer's attending staffs. If required, the length of his stay shall
be extended as per requirement, which shall be at the Employer's discretion.
1.8 COMMISSIONING STAFF
The Contractor shall provide commissioning personnel including skilled and

unskilled labor as required. Submit a list with names, experience and proposed
duration of the stay of key personnel on site, consistent with the construction
schedule, along with the commissioning program.
Ensure that only staffs assigned to commissioning fulfils that duty for the
duration of the assignment.

Ensure that commissioning staffs have authorization, and the competence, to

undertake minor repairs or to make temporary redesigns and to reconnect
systems to meet the specified system performance to preclude delays in
energization and putting into commercial service of any part of the works.
1.9 TEST EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall ensure that all instruments, tools and other equipment
required for testing and commissioning are available on site, ensure that the test
equipment is of satisfactory quality and condition and, where necessary, is
calibrated by an approved authority or standard.
Make arrangements for the provision of power supplies for testing with
necessary vector configuration, voltage and current rating.
1.10 COMMISSIONING PROGRAM
Prepare a commissioning program for approval by the Employer and for

incorporation into the Project master construction program. Allocate adequate
time in this program to permit full commissioning of all components.
Carry out all testing during normal working hours as far as practicable. Tests,
which involve existing apparatus and system outages, may be carried out
outside normal working hours. Give the Employer sufficient notice to allow for
the necessary outage arrangements to be made in conformity with the testing
program.
Note that no tests listed in the agreed program will be waived except upon the
instructions or consent of the Employer in writing.
1.10.1 Test Procedures
The following basic tests, in addition to others, shall be carried out:
- Measurement of insulation resistance.

- AC withstand voltage test
1.10.2 Requirements for Field Tests
The field tests shall be carried out in presence of Employer under the following
conditions:
AC withstand test voltages for conductors and outdoor equipment shall be

normal operation voltage of the transmission line and, withstand voltage test
shall be carried out for ten (10) minutes by the normal voltage mentioned above.
The field tests shall be carried out by the Contractor after adjustment of all the
equipment have been completed.

Expandable and lead wires and other materials required for the field tests shall
be arranged by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing
all measuring instruments, test equipment and tools required for the tests.
Preparation of the test record sheets and test reports shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor and the results of the field tests shall be submitted by the
Contractor for Employers approval.
Measurement of insulation resistance of the equipment shall be performed by at

least 1000 V megger.
After completion of the measurement of insulation resistance mentioned above,

ac withstand voltage test shall be performed by the normal operation voltage of
the existing power system in accordance with the following procedure:
- 11 and 33 kV Main Circuit: The 11 kV and 33 kV circuit breakers and

disconnecting switches, except for circuit breakers receiving power for the test
from the existing power system through a transmission line, shall be closed,
succeeding, normal operation voltage shall be charged on the equipment and bus
conductors for ten (10) minutes for ac withstand voltage test. The indication
value of meters mounted on the board during the ac withstand voltage test shall
be recorded on the test record sheets prepared by the Contractor.
Submit test procedures, consisting of detailed test methods and samples of the
related test record forms, for all equipment to be tested, to the Employer for
approval along with the commissioning program. Strictly adhere to these
procedures for the commissioning tests.
1.10.3 Records
Maintain an up-to-date record of all commissioning activities on site.
Record the results of the tests clearly on forms and formats approved by the
Employer and with clear references to the equipment and items tested, so that
the record can be used as the basis for maintenance tests, in future. Submit the
required number of site test records to the Employer as soon as possible after
completion of the tests.
Record the details of the test equipment and instruments used in the test sheets,
in those cases where the instrument or equipment characteristics can have a
bearing on the test results.
1.10.4 As-Built Drawings
Keep an ongoing record of all changes on a master set of drawings. Produce and
supply a minimum of five complete sets of marked-up As Constructed/As-
Built drawings before leaving the Site. Correct and re-issue the original
drawings as soon as possible as per this specification.

1.10.5 Test Methods
Carry out all necessary tests for commissioning the substations. The following
clauses detail the tests which are considered to represent the minimum required
in addition to those specified under the appropriate IEC Publications, other
approved standards and the manufacturers instructions for each item of
equipment.
Strictly adhere to the methods of testing approved by the Employer.
A) Site and Commissioning Tests for Main and Auxiliary Equipment
General Checks:
Make a general check of all main and auxiliary equipment. Include a check of
the completeness, correctness and condition of ground connections, labeling,
arcing ring, paint surfaces, cables, wiring, pipe-work, valves, blanking plates
and all other auxiliary and ancillary items.
Check for oil and gas leaks and that insulators are clean and free from external
damage. Check that loose items, which are to be handed over to the Employer,
e.g., blanking plates, tools, spares, etc. are in order and are correctly stored or
handed over.
Power Transformers
Make all tests as per commissioning tests called for in the Manufacturers
instructions manual.
Record and submit to Employer in a hardcover binder, all test data obtained.
Circuit Breaker Tests
For the SF6 circuit breakers, test the gas system to prove the gas density, its
dryness and its di-electric strength. Measure the gas leakage rate.
Check and set pressure switches settings when required. Also test mechanical
operating systems.
Carry out contact resistance tests. In the case of multi-interrupter circuit

breakers, perform resistance tests at each interrupter or pair of interrupters as
well as through the series of interrupters on each pole.
Test local and remote trip/close operation and perform circuit breaker and
auxiliary contact timing tests on all circuit breakers.
Control/ Relay Panels, energy meters and Switchboards

Carry out general testing and inspection, as referred to above. The Contractor
shall also carry following tests: a) Carrier signal testing b) protective relay
testing c) Instrument transformers testing c) Phase correcting testing.
Functionally test and perform the timing tests on circuit breakers and AC and
DC circuits, associated with stand-by auxiliary supplies and stand-by generating
sets, particularly where automatic operation is defined.
Carry out insulation measurement tests of secondary circuits with a 1000 V DC

megger before and after high voltage testing.
Check shutters, interlocking, earth procedures and the inter-changeability of

components.
Carry out a high voltage 50 Hz dielectric test on each bus at 75% of the
specified value for the equivalent factory test.
Disconnecting Switch and Earth Switches
Test all disconnecting switch and earth switches operationally to confirm

contact pressures, contact resistance, simultaneous-operation of all phases and
the ease of operation.
Check the local and remote indications and the operation of auxiliary contacts.
Check the earthing mat at the operating positions and check the availability of
connecting points for maintenance earthing arrangements.
Test the earth switches and maintenance earthing devices to confirm the
opening and closing sequences and check the ground mat connections,
indications and manual locking devices.
Lightning Arresters
Inspect and verify the condition and satisfactory mounting of the arresters and
their earth connections, electrodes and operation counters. Note the counter
readings.
Busbars and Connections
Test flexible busbars and connections to ensure that the correct tensions, sags
and clearances will be maintained over the range of environmental conditions
and loads without stress to other equipment. If dynamometers are used to check
the sags and tensions, check them before and after use.
Check rigid busbars and connections to ensure that the busbars will not cause
overloading of the supporting insulators under load conditions and under the
range of climatic variations applicable to the Site. Ensure that expansion and
contraction of the equipment is fully accommodated by flexible connections.
Test conductivity on selected connections and joints.

Perform high voltage DC tests on all HV cables and isolated phase busbars at
75% of the specified value for the equivalent factory test. Carry out with at least
1000 V DC megger the insulation measurement test, before and after high
voltage tests.
Batteries and Battery Charging Equipment
Test the insulation to earth of the complete DC system. Test the batteries and
chargers to confirm the charger ratings, adjustment, alarm systems and battery
capacity for the specified length of time at maximum expected loading. Record
the specific gravity and cell voltages of the batteries during the initial charge
and when fully charged and maintain proper regular records until the battery is
taken over by the Employer.
Interlocking: Check all interlocking arrangements, both electrical and

mechanical.
B) Earthing System
Carry out the tests and measurements in accordance with IEEE Standard 80.
Test the effectiveness of the bonding and earthing and make conductivity tests
on selected joints on the main earthing system and at the connections to
equipment and structures. Check the precautions taken to avoid corrosion attack
on the earthing system.
Measure the resistance of the earthing system to the remote earth indicating
method and equipment used. Separate test probes of minimum 300 to 600
meters length to effectively test the earthing system. Perform earthing resistance
measurements with the transmission line earth wires disconnected from the
grounding grid.
C) Area Lighting
Check all lighting circuits including the operation of relevant photoelectric cells
and remote/local commands. Measure the lighting levels throughout the
substation on horizontal surface 800 mm above ground level and on all vertical
surfaces of transformers, marshaling kiosks, etc. Measure the lighting levels in
the area surrounding the substation up to 20 m from the fence.
D) Particular Constraints and Special Tests
The Contractor shall be prepared to cooperate with any special tests requested
by the Employer.

6 Sec.VI f:-.Drawings

D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS
D SPECIFICAT
TIONS

4017 Volume II

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

4017 Volume II

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

4017 Volume II

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY

(An Undertaking of Government of Nepal)

SASEC Power System Expansion Project

( Scope of Works, Specifications, Standards and Drawing)

Distribution System Augmentation and Expansion Project

Table of contents ( Line & Distribution Transformer Construction Materials)

Sec.VI A :- Standard Specification

Table of contents ( 33/11 kV Sub-Station Construction Materials)

1Sec.VIa:-.Scope of Works and General Technical Specifications

2 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3

Sec. VI A : STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Clause Number Subject

3. Survey and Staking

12. Tree Cutting and Trimming

13. Interruptions to Existing Service

3 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3

3. Survey and Staking

4.2 Documentation shall be prepared using the following mediums:

a) Mylar material, with a minimum thickness of 0.127 millimetres, shall be

b) Standard drafting vellum shall be used to produce small area plottings,

d)Any damage caused by imprudent placement of equipment and materials by the

5.3 Contractor Storage Facility

6 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3

b) Any items of material and equipment contained in degradable packaging shall be

c) Transformers, disconnecting switches, reels of ABC Cable, reels of Cover

d) Packaged items of material and equipment shall not be uncrated, or have

7 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3

8 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3

12. Tree Cutting and Trimming

13. Interruptions to Existing Service

13.2 If it is possible to maintain service to a section of line by constructing temporary facilities

10 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3

SECTION VI -B: CONSTRUCTION UNI

( Line & Distribution Transformer Construction Materials)

1. Structure Data Sheet (SDS)

11 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3

STRUCTURE DATA SHEET (SDS)

Abbreviations used in the preparation of SDS shall be defined as follows,

Sl. No. Nomenclatures Meaning

12 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3

13 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3

DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNIT 11-1

11 kV SUPPORTS, INSULATORS AND HARDWARE

1. Construction Standards : Section VI-D Clause 2

14 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3

DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNIT 11-2

11 kV CONDUCTOR & ACCESSORIES

1. Construction Standards : Section VI-D Clause 3, 4 & 5

120 sq. mm XLPE Covered Conductor

1. Construction Standards : Section VI-D Clause 3, 4 & 5

4. Size of A.C.S.R Conductor

11-2.1 100 sq. mm ACSR "Dog" conductor

15 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3

DEFINITION OF 11 kV LOAD BREAK SWITCH

16 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3

DEFINITION OF 11 kV XLPE CABLE LAYING

1. Construction Standards : Section VI-D Clause 8

17 Bidding Document for ICB - PMD DSAEP-071/72 02, Lot3